ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZAAABACADAEAFAGAHAIAJAKALAMANAOAPAQARASATAUAVAWAXAYAZBABBBCBDBEBFBGBHBIBJBKBLBMBNBOBPBQBRBSBTBY
1
Print books for SDG books - Use the code
SDG24BKS to get 70% off the listed prices. Special discount only for Springer Nature business partners and valid from June 1 - July 31, 2024
2
qtysubject_clusterrecommendedisbnauthoreditor1_lastnameauthoreditorsauthoreditors_affiliationtitlesubtitlebibliographic_information
addi_bibliographic_info
edition_numbercopyright_yearprice_statusprice_eursale_price_eurprice_eur_brsale_price_eur_brprice_gbpsale_price_gbpprice_usdsale_price_usdcover_typeadditional_softcoverseries_titlevolume_numbersubject_collectionproduct_categorymediumspringer_referencelanguage1nr_of_arabic_pagesbic_code1bic_code2imprintpublisher_namekey_book_for_librariessales_highlightdelivery_statuspub_date_actualpub_date_actual_sec_locpub_date_planned_first_releasepub_date_planned_sec_locdistribution_information
translation_method
lasteditioncopyright_year_former_edsisbn_predecessor_editiontable_of_contents_shortback_cover_copyinfo_textusp_editorialabout_the_authorpublication_classdiscount_group_nydiscount_group_sdcebook_package_codeebook_packageebook_info_no_e_rightsopen_accesseansnt_discipline1snt_discipline2snt_discipline3snt_discipline4snt_discipline5snt_discipline6weightcontains_esmsignifier_multimediamore_media_appisbn_successor_edition
3
Behavioral Science and Psychologyx978-3-030-15223-9DriskoJames W. Drisko; Melissa D. GradyJames W. Drisko, Smith College, Northampton, MA, USA; Melissa D. Grady, Catholic University of America, Washington, DC, , USAEvidence-Based Practice in Clinical Social WorkXXVII, 348 p. 4 illus., 1 illus. in color.22019final109.9933.00117.6935.3199.9930.00119.9936.00Hard cover0Essential Clinical Social Work SeriesBehavioral Science and PsychologyGraduate/advanced undergraduate textbookBook0English348MMJTJKSNSpringerSpringer International Publishing0Available2019-06-272019-06-142019-07-232019-07-231,978-1-4614-3469-6,978-1-4614-6484-6,978-1-4614-3471-9,978-1-4614-3470-2I. What is Evidence-Based Practice and How It Influences Clinical Practice- Introduction and Overview.- Three Perspectives on Evidence-Based Practice.- The Steps of EBP in Clinical Practice: An Overview.- Step 1 of EBP: Assessment in Clinical Social Work and Identifying Practice Information Needs.- Step 2 of EBP: Locating Practice Research.- Step 3 of EBP - Part 1: Evaluating Research Designs.- Step 3 of EBP - Part 2: Evaluating Research Methods.- Step 3 of EBP - Part 3: Meta-Analysis and Systematic Reviews: Aggregated Research Results.- Step 4 of EBP: Collaboratively Discussing Treatment Options with the Client.- Steps 5 and 6 of EBP: Finalizing the Treatment Plan and Practice Evaluation.- II. Case Examples of Evidence-Based Practice.- Sam: An Older, Gay Man Who Appears Depressed.- Ray: A Man Fearful of Panic Attacks.- Sally: A 12-Year-Old Who May Have Disinhibited Social Engagement Disorder.- Newman and Loretta: Parents of Arthur, A Man Who Has Schizophrenia.- Jin: A 16-Year-Old Korean-American Male with Drinking Issues.- Jennifer: A Young Homeless Woman Who Has Borderline Personality Disorder.- Bethany: A Young Woman Recalling her Traumatic History.- Gabrielle: A Young Woman in Pain who is Opioid Dependent.- III. EBP in Clinical Social Work Education and Ongoing Issues.- Evidence-Based Practice: Teaching and Supervision.- Continuing Issues Regarding EBP in Practice.- Conclusion: The Evidence for Evidence Based Practice.- Glossary.- Appendix A: An Outline for a Biopsychosocial Assessment and Intervention Plan.- Appendix B: A Bullet Point Summary of the Merits and the Limitations of EBP.The second edition of Evidence-Based Practice in Clinical Social Work continues to bridge the gap between social work research and clinical practice, presenting EBP as both an effective approach to social work and a broader social movement. Building on the models and insights outlined in the first edition, this new edition provides updated research and additional case studies addressing relevant issues such as trauma treatment and opioid dependence.
Drawing on their multidisciplinary experience as practitioners, researchers, and educators, the authors guide readers through the steps of the EBP decision-making process in assessment, treatment planning, and evaluation. The book places special emphasis on balancing clinical expertise, research results, and client needs, and analyzes both the strengths and limitations of the EBP model in order to give readers a more complete idea of how the method will shape their own practice.In addition, this practice-building reference:
Introduces core principles of EBP and details its processes in social work
Features guidelines for engaging clients in EBP and transmitting research findings
Offers a range of case examples demonstrating EBP with diverse clients
Addresses education and supervision issues and related controversies
Includes an expanded glossary and valuable resources for use in evidence-based practice
Evidence-Based Practice in Clinical Social Work is a practical resource for clinical social work professionals and educators that broadens the field and expands the healing possibilities for the profession.		The second edition of Evidence-Based Practice in Clinical Social Work continues to bridge the gap between social work research and clinical practice, presenting EBP as both an effective approach to social work and a broader social movement. Building on the models and insights outlined in the first edition, this new edition provides updated research and additional case studies addressing relevant issues such as trauma treatment and opioid dependence.Drawing on their multidisciplinary experience as practitioners, researchers, and educators, the authors guide readers through the steps of the EBP decision-making process in assessment, treatment planning, and evaluation. The book places special emphasis on balancing clinical expertise, research results, and client needs, and analyzes both the strengths and limitations of the EBP model in order to give readers a more complete idea of how the method will shape their own practice.In addition, this practice-building reference:
Introduces core principles of EBP and details its processes in social work
Features guidelines for engaging clients in EBP and transmitting research findings
Offers a range of case examples demonstrating EBP with diverse clients
Addresses education and supervision issues and related controversies
Includes an expanded glossary and valuable resources for use in evidence-based practice
Evidence-Based Practice in Clinical Social Work is a practical resource for clinical social work professionals and educators that broadens the field and expands the healing possibilities for the profession.		Expands on previous research used to develop practice guidelinesExplores practical and ethical challenges of EBPProvides updated case studies to illustrate applications and examine relevant contemporary social issuesJames Drisko is Professor at Smith College School for Social Work in Northampton, Massachusetts. His recent work focuses on evidence-based practice, the common factors model, clinical work with children and families including reactive attachment disorder and its treatment, psychotherapy evaluation and qualitative research methods. Drisko received his bachelor’s degree in psychology from Amherst College, his M.S.W. from Smith College School for Social Work and his Ph.D. from Boston College Graduate School of Social Work. Drisko was elected to the National Academies of Practice in Clinical Social Work in 2008 and was named an as inaugural Fellow of the Society for Social Work and Research in 2014.<div>
</div><div>Melissa Grady is Associate Professor at the National Catholic School of Social Service in Washington, DC. Dr. Melissa D. Grady received her M.S.W. and Ph.D. from Smith College School of Social Work. Her clinical experience includes both work in the publicmental health sector and private sector. Her clinical experience includes clients who have experienced trauma, depression, anxiety, anger management as well as other mental health issues. In addition, Dr. Grady has worked with parents who are separating and divorcing and struggle with co-parenting. In addition, she has practiced, writes about and conducts research and trainings on sex offenders and evidence-based treatment practices. She is formerly a faculty member at the University of North Carolina at Chapel Hill’s School of Social Work and is now currently on the faculty of Catholic University’s National School of Social Service where she teaches in the areas of mental health, clinical practice, clinical theory and research methods.</div>		StudentsProfessional Books (2)Standard (0)EBOP41168Behavioral Science and Psychology009783030152239Counseling PsychologySocial WorkPsychotherapySocial Policy729100
4
Behavioral Science and Psychologyx978-3-030-15226-0DriskoJames W. Drisko; Melissa D. GradyJames W. Drisko, Smith College, Northampton, MA, USA; Melissa D. Grady, Catholic University of America, Washington, DC, , USAEvidence-Based Practice in Clinical Social WorkXXVII, 348 p. 4 illus., 1 illus. in color.22019final64.9919.5069.5420.8654.9916.5069.9921.00Soft cover1Essential Clinical Social Work SeriesBehavioral Science and PsychologyGraduate/advanced undergraduate textbookBook0English348MMJTJKSNSpringerSpringer International Publishing0Available2020-08-142019-06-142020-06-272020-06-271,978-1-4614-3469-6,978-1-4614-6484-6,978-1-4614-3471-9,978-1-4614-3470-2I. What is Evidence-Based Practice and How It Influences Clinical Practice- Introduction and Overview.- Three Perspectives on Evidence-Based Practice.- The Steps of EBP in Clinical Practice: An Overview.- Step 1 of EBP: Assessment in Clinical Social Work and Identifying Practice Information Needs.- Step 2 of EBP: Locating Practice Research.- Step 3 of EBP - Part 1: Evaluating Research Designs.- Step 3 of EBP - Part 2: Evaluating Research Methods.- Step 3 of EBP - Part 3: Meta-Analysis and Systematic Reviews: Aggregated Research Results.- Step 4 of EBP: Collaboratively Discussing Treatment Options with the Client.- Steps 5 and 6 of EBP: Finalizing the Treatment Plan and Practice Evaluation.- II. Case Examples of Evidence-Based Practice.- Sam: An Older, Gay Man Who Appears Depressed.- Ray: A Man Fearful of Panic Attacks.- Sally: A 12-Year-Old Who May Have Disinhibited Social Engagement Disorder.- Newman and Loretta: Parents of Arthur, A Man Who Has Schizophrenia.- Jin: A 16-Year-Old Korean-American Male with Drinking Issues.- Jennifer: A Young Homeless Woman Who Has Borderline Personality Disorder.- Bethany: A Young Woman Recalling her Traumatic History.- Gabrielle: A Young Woman in Pain who is Opioid Dependent.- III. EBP in Clinical Social Work Education and Ongoing Issues.- Evidence-Based Practice: Teaching and Supervision.- Continuing Issues Regarding EBP in Practice.- Conclusion: The Evidence for Evidence Based Practice.- Glossary.- Appendix A: An Outline for a Biopsychosocial Assessment and Intervention Plan.- Appendix B: A Bullet Point Summary of the Merits and the Limitations of EBP.The second edition of Evidence-Based Practice in Clinical Social Work continues to bridge the gap between social work research and clinical practice, presenting EBP as both an effective approach to social work and a broader social movement. Building on the models and insights outlined in the first edition, this new edition provides updated research and additional case studies addressing relevant issues such as trauma treatment and opioid dependence.
Drawing on their multidisciplinary experience as practitioners, researchers, and educators, the authors guide readers through the steps of the EBP decision-making process in assessment, treatment planning, and evaluation. The book places special emphasis on balancing clinical expertise, research results, and client needs, and analyzes both the strengths and limitations of the EBP model in order to give readers a more complete idea of how the method will shape their own practice.In addition, this practice-building reference:
Introduces core principles of EBP and details its processes in social work
Features guidelines for engaging clients in EBP and transmitting research findings
Offers a range of case examples demonstrating EBP with diverse clients
Addresses education and supervision issues and related controversies
Includes an expanded glossary and valuable resources for use in evidence-based practice
Evidence-Based Practice in Clinical Social Work is a practical resource for clinical social work professionals and educators that broadens the field and expands the healing possibilities for the profession.		The second edition of Evidence-Based Practice in Clinical Social Work continues to bridge the gap between social work research and clinical practice, presenting EBP as both an effective approach to social work and a broader social movement. Building on the models and insights outlined in the first edition, this new edition provides updated research and additional case studies addressing relevant issues such as trauma treatment and opioid dependence.Drawing on their multidisciplinary experience as practitioners, researchers, and educators, the authors guide readers through the steps of the EBP decision-making process in assessment, treatment planning, and evaluation. The book places special emphasis on balancing clinical expertise, research results, and client needs, and analyzes both the strengths and limitations of the EBP model in order to give readers a more complete idea of how the method will shape their own practice.In addition, this practice-building reference:
Introduces core principles of EBP and details its processes in social work
Features guidelines for engaging clients in EBP and transmitting research findings
Offers a range of case examples demonstrating EBP with diverse clients
Addresses education and supervision issues and related controversies
Includes an expanded glossary and valuable resources for use in evidence-based practice
Evidence-Based Practice in Clinical Social Work is a practical resource for clinical social work professionals and educators that broadens the field and expands the healing possibilities for the profession.		Expands on previous research used to develop practice guidelinesExplores practical and ethical challenges of EBPProvides updated case studies to illustrate applications and examine relevant contemporary social issuesJames Drisko is Professor at Smith College School for Social Work in Northampton, Massachusetts. His recent work focuses on evidence-based practice, the common factors model, clinical work with children and families including reactive attachment disorder and its treatment, psychotherapy evaluation and qualitative research methods. Drisko received his bachelor’s degree in psychology from Amherst College, his M.S.W. from Smith College School for Social Work and his Ph.D. from Boston College Graduate School of Social Work. Drisko was elected to the National Academies of Practice in Clinical Social Work in 2008 and was named an as inaugural Fellow of the Society for Social Work and Research in 2014.<div>
</div><div>Melissa Grady is Associate Professor at the National Catholic School of Social Service in Washington, DC. Dr. Melissa D. Grady received her M.S.W. and Ph.D. from Smith College School of Social Work. Her clinical experience includes both work in the publicmental health sector and private sector. Her clinical experience includes clients who have experienced trauma, depression, anxiety, anger management as well as other mental health issues. In addition, Dr. Grady has worked with parents who are separating and divorcing and struggle with co-parenting. In addition, she has practiced, writes about and conducts research and trainings on sex offenders and evidence-based treatment practices. She is formerly a faculty member at the University of North Carolina at Chapel Hill’s School of Social Work and is now currently on the faculty of Catholic University’s National School of Social Service where she teaches in the areas of mental health, clinical practice, clinical theory and research methods.</div>		StudentsProfessional Books (2)Standard (0)EBOP41168Behavioral Science and Psychology009783030152260Counseling PsychologySocial WorkPsychotherapySocial Policy575100
5
Behavioral Science and Psychologyx978-1-4939-1282-7GoodmanRachael D. Goodman; Paul C. GorskiRachael D. Goodman, George Mason University, Fairfax, VA, USA; Paul C. Gorski, George Mason University, Fairfax, VA, USADecolonizing “Multicultural” Counseling through Social JusticeXIV, 174 p. 2 illus.12015final159.9948.00171.1951.36139.9942.00179.9954.00Hard cover0International and Cultural PsychologyBehavioral Science and PsychologyContributed volumeBook0English174JMHMMJTSpringerSpringer New York0Available2014-11-042014-11-142014-11-302014-11-301Introduction: Toward a Decolonized Multicultural Counseling and Psychology.- The Application of Critical Consciousness and Intersectionality as Tools for Decolonizing Racial/Ethnic Identity Development Models in the Fields of Counseling and Psychology.- Queering Multicultural Competence in Counseling.- Colonialism and Multicultural Counseling Competence Research: A Liberatory Analysis.- A Liberatory Approach to Trauma Counseling: Decolonizing Our Trauma-Informed Practices.- Decolonizing Psychological Practice in the Context of Poverty.- Story Sciencing and Analyzing the Silent Narrative Between Words: Counseling Research from an Indigenous Perspective.- Decolonizing Alterity Models Within School Counseling Practice.- Decolonizing Multicultural Counseling and Psychology: Addressing Race Through Intersectionality.- (De)colonizing Culture in Community Psychology: Reflections from Critical Social Science.- Decolonizing Traditional Pedagogies and Practices in Counseling and Psychology Education: A Move Towards Social Justice and Action.Multicultural counseling and psychology evolved as a response to the Eurocentrism prevalent in the Western healing professions and has been used to challenge the Eurocentric, patriarchal, and heteronormative constructs commonly embedded in counseling and psychology.  Ironically, some of the practices and paradigms commonly associated with “multiculturalism” reinforce the very hegemonic practices and paradigms that multicultural counseling and psychology approaches were created to correct. In Decolonizing 'Multicultural' Counseling through Social Justice, counseling and psychology scholars and practitioners examine this paradox through a social justice lens by questioning and challenging the infrastructure of dominance in society, as well as by challenging ourselves as practitioners, scholars, and activists to rethink our commitments. The authors analyze the ways well-meaning clinicians might marginalize clients and contribute to structural inequities despite multicultural or cross-cultural training, and offer new frameworks and skills to replace the essentializing and stereotyping practices that are widespread in the field. By addressing the power imbalances embedded in key areas of multicultural theory and practice, contributors present innovative methods for revising research paradigms, professional education, and hands-on practice to reflect a commitment to equity and social justice. Together, the chapters in this book model transformative practice in the clinic, the schools, the community, and the discipline. Among the topics covered:  Rethinking racial identity development models.Queering multicultural competence in counseling.Developing a liberatory approach to trauma counseling.Decolonizing psychological practice in the context of poverty.Utilizing indigenous paradigms in counseling research.Addressing racism through intersectionality.A mind-opening text for multicultural counseling and psychology courses as well as other foundational courses in counseling and psychology education, Decolonizing 'Multicultural' Counseling through Social Justice challenges us to let go of simplistic approaches, however well-intended, and to embrace a more transformative approach to counseling and psychology practice and scholarship.Multicultural counseling and psychology evolved as a response to the Eurocentrism prevalent in the Western healing professions and has been used to challenge the Eurocentric, patriarchal, and heteronormative constructs commonly embedded in counseling and psychology.  Ironically, some of the practices and paradigms commonly associated with “multiculturalism” reinforce the very hegemonic practices and paradigms that multicultural counseling and psychology approaches were created to correct. In Decolonizing 'Multicultural' Counseling through Social Justice, counseling and psychology scholars and practitioners examine this paradox through a social justice lens by questioning and challenging the infrastructure of dominance in society, as well as by challenging ourselves as practitioners, scholars, and activists to rethink our commitments. The authors analyze the ways well-meaning clinicians might marginalize clients and contribute to structural inequities despite multicultural or cross-cultural training, and offer new frameworks and skills to replace the essentializing and stereotyping practices that are widespread in the field. By addressing the power imbalances embedded in key areas of multicultural theory and practice, contributors present innovative methods for revising research paradigms, professional education, and hands-on practice to reflect a commitment to equity and social justice. Together, the chapters in this book model transformative practice in the clinic, the schools, the community, and the discipline. Among the topics covered:  Rethinking racial identity development models.Queering multicultural competence in counseling.Developing a liberatory approach to trauma counseling.Decolonizing psychological practice in the context of poverty.Utilizing indigenous paradigms in counseling research.Addressing racism through intersectionality.A mind-opening text for multicultural counseling and psychology courses as well as other foundational courses in counseling and psychology education, Decolonizing 'Multicultural' Counseling through Social Justice challenges us to let go of simplistic approaches, however well-intended, and to embrace a more transformative approach to counseling and psychology practice and scholarship.Provides social justice framework for clinical practiceAnalyzes comparative practices and programsEach chapter built around a specific case exampleIncludes supplementary material: sn.pub/extrasDr. Rachael D. Goodman is an Assistant Professor in the Counseling and Development Program at George Mason University. Dr. Goodman's interests focus on social justice issues in counseling, with an emphasis on trauma counseling, including historical/transgenerational trauma, systemic oppression/marginalization, immigrants and refugees, and disaster response/community outreach. Her research and clinical work has included outreach and trauma counseling among marginalized populations, particularly in communities that have experienced oppression or natural/human-made disaster. Currently, Dr. Goodman is conducting research using a community-based participatory research (CBPR) model, focused on the experiences of immigrant and refugee children and families, including transgenerational trauma and resilience.Paul C. Gorski is an Associate Professor of Integrative Studies at George Mason University, where he teachers courses on social justice, human rights, and animal rights. He isa Research Fellow in the Center for the Advance of Well-Being and on the board of directors of the International Association for Intercultural Education. His recent books include Reaching and Teaching Students in Poverty: Strategies for Erasing the Opportunity Gap, The Big Lies of School Reform (with Kristien Zenkov), The Poverty and Education Reader (with Julie Landsman), and Case Studies on Diversity and Social Justice Education (with Seema Pothini). He lives in Falls Church, Virginia, with his cats Unity and Buster.ProfessionalsProfessional Books (2)Standard (0)EBOP11640Behavioral Science009781493912827Cross-Cultural PsychologyCounseling PsychologyCommunity Psychology4085100
6
Behavioral Science and Psychologyx978-1-4939-3585-7GoodmanRachael D. Goodman; Paul C. GorskiRachael D. Goodman, George Mason University, Fairfax, VA, USA; Paul C. Gorski, George Mason University, Fairfax, VA, USADecolonizing “Multicultural” Counseling through Social JusticeXIV, 174 p. 2 illus.12015final99.9930.00106.9932.1089.9927.00109.9933.00Soft cover1International and Cultural PsychologyBehavioral Science and PsychologyContributed volumeBook0English174JMHMMJTSpringerSpringer New York0Available2016-01-132016-01-312016-01-311Introduction: Toward a Decolonized Multicultural Counseling and Psychology.- The Application of Critical Consciousness and Intersectionality as Tools for Decolonizing Racial/Ethnic Identity Development Models in the Fields of Counseling and Psychology.- Queering Multicultural Competence in Counseling.- Colonialism and Multicultural Counseling Competence Research: A Liberatory Analysis.- A Liberatory Approach to Trauma Counseling: Decolonizing Our Trauma-Informed Practices.- Decolonizing Psychological Practice in the Context of Poverty.- Story Sciencing and Analyzing the Silent Narrative Between Words: Counseling Research from an Indigenous Perspective.- Decolonizing Alterity Models Within School Counseling Practice.- Decolonizing Multicultural Counseling and Psychology: Addressing Race Through Intersectionality.- (De)colonizing Culture in Community Psychology: Reflections from Critical Social Science.- Decolonizing Traditional Pedagogies and Practices in Counseling and Psychology Education: A Move Towards Social Justice and Action.Multicultural counseling and psychology evolved as a response to the Eurocentrism prevalent in the Western healing professions and has been used to challenge the Eurocentric, patriarchal, and heteronormative constructs commonly embedded in counseling and psychology.  Ironically, some of the practices and paradigms commonly associated with “multiculturalism” reinforce the very hegemonic practices and paradigms that multicultural counseling and psychology approaches were created to correct. In Decolonizing 'Multicultural' Counseling through Social Justice, counseling and psychology scholars and practitioners examine this paradox through a social justice lens by questioning and challenging the infrastructure of dominance in society, as well as by challenging ourselves as practitioners, scholars, and activists to rethink our commitments. The authors analyze the ways well-meaning clinicians might marginalize clients and contribute to structural inequities despite multicultural or cross-cultural training, and offer new frameworks and skills to replace the essentializing and stereotyping practices that are widespread in the field. By addressing the power imbalances embedded in key areas of multicultural theory and practice, contributors present innovative methods for revising research paradigms, professional education, and hands-on practice to reflect a commitment to equity and social justice. Together, the chapters in this book model transformative practice in the clinic, the schools, the community, and the discipline. Among the topics covered:  Rethinking racial identity development models.Queering multicultural competence in counseling.Developing a liberatory approach to trauma counseling.Decolonizing psychological practice in the context of poverty.Utilizing indigenous paradigms in counseling research.Addressing racism through intersectionality.A mind-opening text for multicultural counseling and psychology courses as well as other foundational courses in counseling and psychology education, Decolonizing 'Multicultural' Counseling through Social Justice challenges us to let go of simplistic approaches, however well-intended, and to embrace a more transformative approach to counseling and psychology practice and scholarship.Multicultural counseling and psychology evolved as a response to the Eurocentrism prevalent in the Western healing professions and has been used to challenge the Eurocentric, patriarchal, and heteronormative constructs commonly embedded in counseling and psychology.  Ironically, some of the practices and paradigms commonly associated with “multiculturalism” reinforce the very hegemonic practices and paradigms that multicultural counseling and psychology approaches were created to correct. In Decolonizing 'Multicultural' Counseling through Social Justice, counseling and psychology scholars and practitioners examine this paradox through a social justice lens by questioning and challenging the infrastructure of dominance in society, as well as by challenging ourselves as practitioners, scholars, and activists to rethink our commitments. The authors analyze the ways well-meaning clinicians might marginalize clients and contribute to structural inequities despite multicultural or cross-cultural training, and offer new frameworks and skills to replace the essentializing and stereotyping practices that are widespread in the field. By addressing the power imbalances embedded in key areas of multicultural theory and practice, contributors present innovative methods for revising research paradigms, professional education, and hands-on practice to reflect a commitment to equity and social justice. Together, the chapters in this book model transformative practice in the clinic, the schools, the community, and the discipline. Among the topics covered:  Rethinking racial identity development models.Queering multicultural competence in counseling.Developing a liberatory approach to trauma counseling.Decolonizing psychological practice in the context of poverty.Utilizing indigenous paradigms in counseling research.Addressing racism through intersectionality.A mind-opening text for multicultural counseling and psychology courses as well as other foundational courses in counseling and psychology education, Decolonizing 'Multicultural' Counseling through Social Justice challenges us to let go of simplistic approaches, however well-intended, and to embrace a more transformative approach to counseling and psychology practice and scholarship.Provides social justice framework for clinical practiceAnalyzes comparative practices and programsEach chapter built around a specific case exampleIncludes supplementary material: sn.pub/extrasDr. Rachael D. Goodman is an Assistant Professor in the Counseling and Development Program at George Mason University. Dr. Goodman's interests focus on social justice issues in counseling, with an emphasis on trauma counseling, including historical/transgenerational trauma, systemic oppression/marginalization, immigrants and refugees, and disaster response/community outreach. Her research and clinical work has included outreach and trauma counseling among marginalized populations, particularly in communities that have experienced oppression or natural/human-made disaster. Currently, Dr. Goodman is conducting research using a community-based participatory research (CBPR) model, focused on the experiences of immigrant and refugee children and families, including transgenerational trauma and resilience.Paul C. Gorski is an Associate Professor of Integrative Studies at George Mason University, where he teachers courses on social justice, human rights, and animal rights. He isa Research Fellow in the Center for the Advance of Well-Being and on the board of directors of the International Association for Intercultural Education. His recent books include Reaching and Teaching Students in Poverty: Strategies for Erasing the Opportunity Gap, The Big Lies of School Reform (with Kristien Zenkov), The Poverty and Education Reader (with Julie Landsman), and Case Studies on Diversity and Social Justice Education (with Seema Pothini). He lives in Falls Church, Virginia, with his cats Unity and Buster.ProfessionalsProfessional Books (2)Standard (0)EBOP11640Behavioral Science009781493935857Cross-Cultural PsychologyCounseling PsychologyCommunity Psychology2934100
7
Behavioral Science and Psychologyx978-981-19-3174-1HudginsKate Hudgins; Steven William DurostKate Hudgins, Therapeutic Spiral International, Charlottesville, VA, USA; Steven William Durost, C.R.E.A.T.E! Center for Expressive Arts, Therapy, and Education!, Manchester, NH, USAExperiential Therapy from Trauma to Post-traumatic GrowthTherapeutic Spiral Model PsychodramaXXXIII, 344 p. 48 illus., 43 illus. in color.12022final99.9930.00106.9932.1089.9927.00109.9933.00Hard cover0Psychodrama in Counselling, Coaching and EducationVolumeBehavioral Science and PsychologyMonographBook0English344MMJTMMJSpringerSpringer Nature Singapore0Available2022-09-082022-09-082022-09-252022-09-251Preface- Acknowledgments.- Chapter 1. The History and Evolution of TSM Psychodrama.- Chapter 2. The Experience of Trauma on the Self: Trauma Bubbles, Spiral Images & the Autonomous Healing Center.- Chapter 3. The Trauma Survivor’s Internal Role Atom: TSM’s Clinical Map for Safety.- Chapter 4. The Roles of the TSM Action Healing Team.- Chapter 5. The Six TSM Safety Structures.- Chapter 6. Clinical Contracts and Types of TSM Dramas.- Chapter 7. Clinically Modified TSM Doubles: The Body and Containing Doubles.- Chapter 8. The Experience of Simultaneous Protagonists in TSM Psychodrama.- Chapter 9. The Conscious Use of Spontaneity in TSM Trained Auxiliaries.- Chapter 10. Enacting the Victim and Perpetrator Roles with Controlled Regression.- Chapter 11. A TSM Prescriptive Role Drama: Strengths and Containment.- Chapter 12. A TSM Trauma Drama: The Structure of the TSM Trauma Triangle.- Chapter 13. A TSM Post-traumatic Growth Drama: The Sleeping Awakening Child and theAppropriate Authority.- Chapter 14. Zoom is the TSM Brain in Action: Expanding Online.- Chapter 15. Sociometric Diagrams of Projective Identification in TSM Groups—invited chapter by Ina Hogenboom, MSc, TEP, Psychodrama Training and Coaching, the Netherlands.- Chapter 16. Celebrating TSM Psychodrama through the Art of Integration- References- Appendices.Therapeutic Spiral Model (TSM) psychodrama is an innovative three stage system of clinically modified psychodrama to treat trauma safely and effectively. This book presents the theoretical evolution of the Therapeutic Spiral Model from a Western model of early trauma-informed therapy to the worldwide system of experiential change that it is today. This book demonstrates the anchor of classical psychodrama theory and methods modified by clinical observations and awareness of current theories about trauma and how it effects the brain, See the evolution from 1992 to its present structures. It provides an accessible practice manual of using TSM psychodrama to promote trauma recovery in many cultures, countries, languages and settings. It presents a unique clinical map for intra-psychic experiential trauma therapy connecting classical psychodrama to TSM psychodrama. It demonstrates psychological concepts like projective identification and information from neurobiology for trauma repair in individual and group settings with action methods. The book shows easy-to-understand visual images such as trauma bubbles, therapeutic spirals and the autonomous healing center to help communicate internal states of spontaneity. The authors draw on their own rich experiences teaching TSM psychodrama in the global community and share stories of people’s recovery around the world. The audience for this publication includes trainers, practitioners, psychotherapists, trauma workers, and researchers working in a broad array of disciplines and human services.Therapeutic Spiral Model (TSM) psychodrama is an innovative three stage system of clinically modified psychodrama to treat trauma safely and effectively. This book presents the theoretical evolution of the Therapeutic Spiral Model from a Western model of early trauma-informed therapy to the worldwide system of experiential change that it is today. This book demonstrates the anchor of classical psychodrama theory and methods modified by clinical observations and awareness of current theories about trauma and how it effects the brain, See the evolution from 1992 to its present structures. It provides an accessible practice manual of using TSM psychodrama to promote trauma recovery in many cultures, countries, languages and settings. It presents a unique clinical map for intra-psychic experiential trauma therapy connecting classical psychodrama to TSM psychodrama. It demonstrates psychological concepts like projective identification and information from neurobiology for trauma repair in individual and group settings with action methods. The book shows easy-to-understand visual images such as trauma bubbles, therapeutic spirals and the autonomous healing center to help communicate internal states of spontaneity. The authors draw on their own rich experiences teaching TSM psychodrama in the global community and share stories of people’s recovery around the world. The audience for this publication includes trainers, practitioners, psychotherapists, trauma workers, and researchers working in a broad array of disciplines and human services.Presents a unique theoretical integration of experiential psychotherapyDemonstrates an accessible and learnable practice manual for experiential trauma-informed careCovers examples from real life experiences in over 50 countriesKate Hudgins, PhD, TEP is American Trainer, Educator and Practitioner of Psychodrama, Sociometry and Group Psychotherapy with a Ph.D., in Clinical Psychology. She is the creator of the Therapeutic Spiral Model, a safe and effective clinical system of experiential psychotherapy of modified psychodrama for trauma. She has won the Innovator and Scholar Awards from the American Society of Group Psychotherapy and is an internationally known expert and author on trauma and action methods. She is Visiting Professor at Hua Qiao University in Xiamen, China. Steven Durost, PhD, LCMHC, REAT, CP runs the premiere expressive arts therapy and clinical mental health counseling center in Manchester, NH, USA, named C.R.E.A.T.E! Center for Expressive Arts, Therapy and Education! He has a PhD in Expressive Therapies from Lesley University where he is also Adjunct Faculty. Steven is a worldwide trainer in the Therapeutic Spiral Model and received the Zerka T. Moreno Award for distinguished work in psychodrama, sociometry and group psychotherapy by the American Society of Group Psychotherapy and Psychodrama, as well as numerous other awards for innovation, leadership and social justice.ProfessionalsProfessional Books (2)Standard (0)EBOP41168Behavioral Science and Psychology009789811931741PsychotherapyClinical Psychology735000
8
Behavioral Science and Psychologyx978-981-19-3177-2HudginsKate Hudgins; Steven William DurostKate Hudgins, Therapeutic Spiral International, Charlottesville, VA, USA; Steven William Durost, C.R.E.A.T.E! Center for Expressive Arts, Therapy, and Education!, Manchester, NH, USAExperiential Therapy from Trauma to Post-traumatic GrowthTherapeutic Spiral Model PsychodramaXXXIII, 344 p. 48 illus., 43 illus. in color.12022final99.9930.00106.9932.1089.9927.00109.9933.00Soft cover1Psychodrama in Counselling, Coaching and EducationVolumeBehavioral Science and PsychologyMonographBook0English344MMJTMMJSpringerSpringer Nature Singapore0Available2023-09-092022-09-082023-09-082023-09-081Preface- Acknowledgments.- Chapter 1. The History and Evolution of TSM Psychodrama.- Chapter 2. The Experience of Trauma on the Self: Trauma Bubbles, Spiral Images & the Autonomous Healing Center.- Chapter 3. The Trauma Survivor’s Internal Role Atom: TSM’s Clinical Map for Safety.- Chapter 4. The Roles of the TSM Action Healing Team.- Chapter 5. The Six TSM Safety Structures.- Chapter 6. Clinical Contracts and Types of TSM Dramas.- Chapter 7. Clinically Modified TSM Doubles: The Body and Containing Doubles.- Chapter 8. The Experience of Simultaneous Protagonists in TSM Psychodrama.- Chapter 9. The Conscious Use of Spontaneity in TSM Trained Auxiliaries.- Chapter 10. Enacting the Victim and Perpetrator Roles with Controlled Regression.- Chapter 11. A TSM Prescriptive Role Drama: Strengths and Containment.- Chapter 12. A TSM Trauma Drama: The Structure of the TSM Trauma Triangle.- Chapter 13. A TSM Post-traumatic Growth Drama: The Sleeping Awakening Child and theAppropriate Authority.- Chapter 14. Zoom is the TSM Brain in Action: Expanding Online.- Chapter 15. Sociometric Diagrams of Projective Identification in TSM Groups—invited chapter by Ina Hogenboom, MSc, TEP, Psychodrama Training and Coaching, the Netherlands.- Chapter 16. Celebrating TSM Psychodrama through the Art of Integration- References- Appendices.Therapeutic Spiral Model (TSM) psychodrama is an innovative three stage system of clinically modified psychodrama to treat trauma safely and effectively. This book presents the theoretical evolution of the Therapeutic Spiral Model from a Western model of early trauma-informed therapy to the worldwide system of experiential change that it is today. This book demonstrates the anchor of classical psychodrama theory and methods modified by clinical observations and awareness of current theories about trauma and how it effects the brain, See the evolution from 1992 to its present structures. It provides an accessible practice manual of using TSM psychodrama to promote trauma recovery in many cultures, countries, languages and settings. It presents a unique clinical map for intra-psychic experiential trauma therapy connecting classical psychodrama to TSM psychodrama. It demonstrates psychological concepts like projective identification and information from neurobiology for trauma repair in individual and group settings with action methods. The book shows easy-to-understand visual images such as trauma bubbles, therapeutic spirals and the autonomous healing center to help communicate internal states of spontaneity. The authors draw on their own rich experiences teaching TSM psychodrama in the global community and share stories of people’s recovery around the world. The audience for this publication includes trainers, practitioners, psychotherapists, trauma workers, and researchers working in a broad array of disciplines and human services.Therapeutic Spiral Model (TSM) psychodrama is an innovative three stage system of clinically modified psychodrama to treat trauma safely and effectively. This book presents the theoretical evolution of the Therapeutic Spiral Model from a Western model of early trauma-informed therapy to the worldwide system of experiential change that it is today. This book demonstrates the anchor of classical psychodrama theory and methods modified by clinical observations and awareness of current theories about trauma and how it effects the brain, See the evolution from 1992 to its present structures. It provides an accessible practice manual of using TSM psychodrama to promote trauma recovery in many cultures, countries, languages and settings. It presents a unique clinical map for intra-psychic experiential trauma therapy connecting classical psychodrama to TSM psychodrama. It demonstrates psychological concepts like projective identification and information from neurobiology for trauma repair in individual and group settings with action methods. The book shows easy-to-understand visual images such as trauma bubbles, therapeutic spirals and the autonomous healing center to help communicate internal states of spontaneity. The authors draw on their own rich experiences teaching TSM psychodrama in the global community and share stories of people’s recovery around the world. The audience for this publication includes trainers, practitioners, psychotherapists, trauma workers, and researchers working in a broad array of disciplines and human services.Presents a unique theoretical integration of experiential psychotherapyDemonstrates an accessible and learnable practice manual for experiential trauma-informed careCovers examples from real life experiences in over 50 countriesKate Hudgins, PhD, TEP is American Trainer, Educator and Practitioner of Psychodrama, Sociometry and Group Psychotherapy with a Ph.D., in Clinical Psychology. She is the creator of the Therapeutic Spiral Model, a safe and effective clinical system of experiential psychotherapy of modified psychodrama for trauma. She has won the Innovator and Scholar Awards from the American Society of Group Psychotherapy and is an internationally known expert and author on trauma and action methods. She is Visiting Professor at Hua Qiao University in Xiamen, China. Steven Durost, PhD, LCMHC, REAT, CP runs the premiere expressive arts therapy and clinical mental health counseling center in Manchester, NH, USA, named C.R.E.A.T.E! Center for Expressive Arts, Therapy and Education! He has a PhD in Expressive Therapies from Lesley University where he is also Adjunct Faculty. Steven is a worldwide trainer in the Therapeutic Spiral Model and received the Zerka T. Moreno Award for distinguished work in psychodrama, sociometry and group psychotherapy by the American Society of Group Psychotherapy and Psychodrama, as well as numerous other awards for innovation, leadership and social justice.ProfessionalsProfessional Books (2)Standard (0)EBOP41168Behavioral Science and Psychology009789811931772PsychotherapyClinical Psychology581000
9
Behavioral Science and Psychologyx978-3-030-98506-6LeafJustin B. Leaf; Joseph H. Cihon; Julia L. Ferguson; Peter F. GerhardtJustin B. Leaf, Autism Partnership Foundation, Seal Beach, CA, USA; Joseph H. Cihon, Autism Partnership Foundation, Seal Beach, CA, USA; Julia L. Ferguson, Autism Partnership Foundation, Seal Beach, CA, USA; Peter F. Gerhardt, The EPIC Programs, Paramus, NJ, USAHandbook of Quality of Life for Individuals with Autism Spectrum DisorderXI, 483 p. 12 illus., 9 illus. in color.12022final349.99105.00374.49112.35299.9990.00379.99114.00Hard cover0Autism and Child Psychopathology SeriesBehavioral Science and PsychologyHandbookBook0English483JMCMMHSpringerSpringer International Publishing1Available2022-06-032022-06-022023-04-082023-04-081Chapter 1. Introduction to Quality of Life for Individuals with Autism.- Part 1. General Issues in Quality of Life for Individuals with Autism.- Chapter 2. Psychiatric Comorbidity in Individuals with Autism.- Chapter 3. The Court System and Individuals with Autism.- Chapter 4. Family Relationships and Individuals with Autism.- Part 2. Transitions and Community Settings and Quality of Life for Individuals with Autism.- Chapter 5. Transition Out of High School for Individuals with Autism.- Chapter 6. Health Care Transitions for Individuals with Autism.- Chapter 7. Postsecondary Education for Individuals with Autism.- Chapter 8. Group Homes for Individuals with Autism.- Chapter 9. Community Settings and Individuals with Autism.- Part 3. Meaningful Interventions, Goals, and Curriculum for Individuals with Autism.- Chapter 10. Cultural Competence and Individuals with Autism.- Chapter 11. Applied Behavior Analysis and Individuals with Autism.- Chapter 12. The Role of EIBI as It Relates to Adults with Autism.- Chapter 13. Pharmacological Interventions for Individuals with Autism.- Chapter 14. Meaningful Curriculum and Functional Intervention for Individuals with Autism.- Chapter 15. Ethical Considerations and Dignity for Individuals with Autism.- Chapter 16. Functional Analysis and Problematic Behavior in Individuals with Autism.- Chapter 17. Leisure and Adaptive Behavior for Individuals with Autism.- Chapter 18. Social Behavior and Individuals with Autism.- Chapter 19. Friendships and Individuals with Autism.- Chapter 20. Dating and Sexuality Among Individuals with Autism.- Chapter 21. Employment and Vocational Skills for Individuals with Autism.- Part 4. Outcomes and Perspectives on Quality of Life for Individuals with Autism.- Chapter 22. Outcomes for Adults with ASD.- Chapter 23. Parental Perspectives on Caring for Adult Children with Autism.- Chapter 24. Adults with Autism: Perspectives on Quality of Life.- Part 5. Future Directions in Research and Practice on Qualityof Life for Individuals with Autism.- Chapter 25. Future Directions in Research on Quality of Life for Individuals with Autism.- Chapter 26. Future Directions in Clinical Practice on Quality Life for Individuals with Autism.This handbook offers a comprehensive examination of wide-ranging issues relevant to adults diagnosed with autism spectrum disorder. Coverage includes a detailed review of such issues as psychiatric comorbidity, family relationships, education, living in different settings (e.g., group homes, community), meaningful and effective interventions, functional goals (e.g., social, language, vocational, and adaptive behaviors), and curriculum. In addition the book provides unique perspectives of parents as well as individuals diagnosed with autism spectrum disorder who have reached adulthood.Key areas of coverage include:Transitioning adults diagnosed with autism spectrum disorder from educational settings to vocational settings. Strategies that can help create independence for adults diagnosed with autism spectrum disorder. Effective approaches to address issues relating to sexuality for adults diagnosed with autism spectrum disorder. The effectiveness of early intensive behavioral intervention to help adults diagnosed with autism spectrum disorder. Handbook of Quality of Life for Individuals with Autism Spectrum Disorder is an essential reference for researchers, professors, and graduate students as well as clinicians, therapists, and related professionals in clinical child and school psychology, social work, behavioral therapy and related disciplines, including clinical medicine, clinical nursing, counseling, speech and language pathology, and special education.

This handbook offers a comprehensive examination of wide-ranging issues relevant to adults diagnosed with autism spectrum disorder. Coverage includes a detailed review of such issues as psychiatric comorbidity, family relationships, education, living in different settings (e.g., group homes, community), meaningful and effective interventions, functional goals (e.g., social, language, vocational, and adaptive behaviors), and curriculum. In addition the book provides unique perspectives of parents as well as individuals diagnosed with autism spectrum disorder who have reached adulthood.Key areas of coverage include:

Transitioning adults diagnosed with autism spectrum disorder from educational settings to vocational settings. Strategies that can help create independence for adults diagnosed with autism spectrum disorder. Effective approaches to address issues relating to sexuality for adults diagnosed with autism spectrum disorder. The effectiveness of early intensive behavioral intervention to help adults diagnosed with autism spectrum disorder. Handbook of Quality of Life for Individuals with Autism Spectrum Disorder is an essential reference for researchers, professors, and graduate students as well as clinicians, therapists, and related professionals in clinical child and school psychology, social work, behavioral therapy and related disciplines, including clinical medicine, clinical nursing, counseling, speech and language pathology, and special education.		Addresses comorbidity, therapeutic interventions, and functional goals (e.g., social, language, adaptive behaviors)Discusses family relationships, education, and living settings (e.g., group homes)Offers unique perspectives of parents as well as adults diagnosed with ASDJustin B. Leaf, Ph.D., is the Co-director of Research for the Autism Partnership Foundation and a Professor at Endicott College. Dr. Leaf received his doctorate degree in behavioral psychology from the Department of Applied Behavioral Science at the University of Kansas. He worked directly under the mentorship of Dr. James Sherman and Dr. Jan Sheldon. Currently, Dr. Leaf leads the research team at Autism Partnership Foundation, which conducts research projects both nationally and internationally. His research interests include examining methods to improve social behaviors for children and adolescents with autism and develop friendships, comparing different teaching methodologies, evaluating parameters of reinforcement, and evaluating long-term outcomes for individuals diagnosed with autism. Dr. Leaf has more than 100 publications in peer-reviewed journals or book chapters and has presented at both national and international professional conferences and invited events. Heserves on the editorial board for the Journal of Autism and Developmental Disorders and Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis and has been a guest reviewer for several additional prominent behavior analytic and autism journals.

Joseph H. Cihon, Ph.D., BCBA-D, is the Co-Director of Research for the Autism Partnership Foundation. Dr. Cihon received his bachelor’s degree in special education from Fontbonne University; master’s degree in behavior analysis at the University of North Texas under the mentorship of Dr. Shahla Ala'i-Rosales, Dr. Jesus Rosales-Ruiz, and Dr. Manish Vaidya; and his doctoral degree at Endicott College under the mentorship of Dr. Mary Jane Weiss. He has more than 15 years of experience working with children, adolescents, and adults diagnosed with autism spectrum disorder and other developmental disabilities in home, school, and community settings. His research interests include evaluating approach-based interventions, shaping, increasing favorable interactions among children, their families, and interventionists, developing contingencies to promote generalization and maintenance, and improving mealtimes for selective eaters. Dr. Cihon has published and served as a reviewer for several prominent journals and presented research at national and international conferences.

Julia L. Ferguson, M.S., BCBA, is the Research and Assessment Coordinator for the Autism Partnership Foundation. Ms. Ferguson received her bachelor’s degree in applied behavior analysis and her master’s degree in behavior analysis from the University of North Texas under the mentorship of Dr. Shahla Ala’i. She is currently pursuing her doctoral degree in applied behavior analysis at Endicott College under the mentorship of Dr. Mary Jane Weiss. Ms. Ferguson has more than eight years of experience working with children diagnosed with autism spectrum disorder in home, school, community, and clinical settings. Her research interests include evaluating social skills interventions for individuals diagnosed with ASD, staff training, evaluating best practice interventions, and comparing different teaching methodologies for individuals diagnosed with ASD. Ms. Ferguson has published many articles in peer-reviewed journals and authored book chapters as well as presented at national and international conferences.

Peter F. Gerhardt, Ed.D., is the Executive Director of the EPIC School in Paramus, NJ. Dr. Gerhardt has nearly 40 years of experience utilizing the principles of Applied Behavior Analysis in support of adolescents and adults with autism spectrum disorders in educational, employment, residential and community-based settings. He is the author or co-author on a number of articles and book chapters on the needs of adolescents and adults with ASD and has presented nationally a		ScienceProfessional Books (2)Science (SC)EBOP41168Behavioral Science and Psychology009783030985066Developmental PsychologyChild and Adolescence PsychologyClinical Social WorkPublic HealthDevelopmental Disabilities1128100
10
Behavioral Science and Psychologyx978-3-030-98509-7LeafJustin B. Leaf; Joseph H. Cihon; Julia L. Ferguson; Peter F. GerhardtJustin B. Leaf, Autism Partnership Foundation, Seal Beach, CA, USA; Joseph H. Cihon, Autism Partnership Foundation, Seal Beach, CA, USA; Julia L. Ferguson, Autism Partnership Foundation, Seal Beach, CA, USA; Peter F. Gerhardt, The EPIC Programs, Paramus, NJ, USAHandbook of Quality of Life for Individuals with Autism Spectrum DisorderXI, 483 p. 12 illus., 9 illus. in color.12022final349.99105.00374.49112.35299.9990.00379.99114.00Soft cover1Autism and Child Psychopathology SeriesBehavioral Science and PsychologyHandbookBook0English483JMCMMHSpringerSpringer International Publishing1Available2023-06-042022-06-022023-06-032023-06-031Chapter 1. Introduction to Quality of Life for Individuals with Autism.- Part 1. General Issues in Quality of Life for Individuals with Autism.- Chapter 2. Psychiatric Comorbidity in Individuals with Autism.- Chapter 3. The Court System and Individuals with Autism.- Chapter 4. Family Relationships and Individuals with Autism.- Part 2. Transitions and Community Settings and Quality of Life for Individuals with Autism.- Chapter 5. Transition Out of High School for Individuals with Autism.- Chapter 6. Health Care Transitions for Individuals with Autism.- Chapter 7. Postsecondary Education for Individuals with Autism.- Chapter 8. Group Homes for Individuals with Autism.- Chapter 9. Community Settings and Individuals with Autism.- Part 3. Meaningful Interventions, Goals, and Curriculum for Individuals with Autism.- Chapter 10. Cultural Competence and Individuals with Autism.- Chapter 11. Applied Behavior Analysis and Individuals with Autism.- Chapter 12. The Role of EIBI as It Relates to Adults with Autism.- Chapter 13. Pharmacological Interventions for Individuals with Autism.- Chapter 14. Meaningful Curriculum and Functional Intervention for Individuals with Autism.- Chapter 15. Ethical Considerations and Dignity for Individuals with Autism.- Chapter 16. Functional Analysis and Problematic Behavior in Individuals with Autism.- Chapter 17. Leisure and Adaptive Behavior for Individuals with Autism.- Chapter 18. Social Behavior and Individuals with Autism.- Chapter 19. Friendships and Individuals with Autism.- Chapter 20. Dating and Sexuality Among Individuals with Autism.- Chapter 21. Employment and Vocational Skills for Individuals with Autism.- Part 4. Outcomes and Perspectives on Quality of Life for Individuals with Autism.- Chapter 22. Outcomes for Adults with ASD.- Chapter 23. Parental Perspectives on Caring for Adult Children with Autism.- Chapter 24. Adults with Autism: Perspectives on Quality of Life.- Part 5. Future Directions in Research and Practice on Qualityof Life for Individuals with Autism.- Chapter 25. Future Directions in Research on Quality of Life for Individuals with Autism.- Chapter 26. Future Directions in Clinical Practice on Quality Life for Individuals with Autism.This handbook offers a comprehensive examination of wide-ranging issues relevant to adults diagnosed with autism spectrum disorder. Coverage includes a detailed review of such issues as psychiatric comorbidity, family relationships, education, living in different settings (e.g., group homes, community), meaningful and effective interventions, functional goals (e.g., social, language, vocational, and adaptive behaviors), and curriculum. In addition the book provides unique perspectives of parents as well as individuals diagnosed with autism spectrum disorder who have reached adulthood.Key areas of coverage include:Transitioning adults diagnosed with autism spectrum disorder from educational settings to vocational settings. Strategies that can help create independence for adults diagnosed with autism spectrum disorder. Effective approaches to address issues relating to sexuality for adults diagnosed with autism spectrum disorder. The effectiveness of early intensive behavioral intervention to help adults diagnosed with autism spectrum disorder. Handbook of Quality of Life for Individuals with Autism Spectrum Disorder is an essential reference for researchers, professors, and graduate students as well as clinicians, therapists, and related professionals in clinical child and school psychology, social work, behavioral therapy and related disciplines, including clinical medicine, clinical nursing, counseling, speech and language pathology, and special education.

This handbook offers a comprehensive examination of wide-ranging issues relevant to adults diagnosed with autism spectrum disorder. Coverage includes a detailed review of such issues as psychiatric comorbidity, family relationships, education, living in different settings (e.g., group homes, community), meaningful and effective interventions, functional goals (e.g., social, language, vocational, and adaptive behaviors), and curriculum. In addition the book provides unique perspectives of parents as well as individuals diagnosed with autism spectrum disorder who have reached adulthood.Key areas of coverage include:

Transitioning adults diagnosed with autism spectrum disorder from educational settings to vocational settings. Strategies that can help create independence for adults diagnosed with autism spectrum disorder. Effective approaches to address issues relating to sexuality for adults diagnosed with autism spectrum disorder. The effectiveness of early intensive behavioral intervention to help adults diagnosed with autism spectrum disorder. Handbook of Quality of Life for Individuals with Autism Spectrum Disorder is an essential reference for researchers, professors, and graduate students as well as clinicians, therapists, and related professionals in clinical child and school psychology, social work, behavioral therapy and related disciplines, including clinical medicine, clinical nursing, counseling, speech and language pathology, and special education.		Addresses comorbidity, therapeutic interventions, and functional goals (e.g., social, language, adaptive behaviors)Discusses family relationships, education, and living settings (e.g., group homes)Offers unique perspectives of parents as well as adults diagnosed with ASDJustin B. Leaf, Ph.D., is the Co-director of Research for the Autism Partnership Foundation and a Professor at Endicott College. Dr. Leaf received his doctorate degree in behavioral psychology from the Department of Applied Behavioral Science at the University of Kansas. He worked directly under the mentorship of Dr. James Sherman and Dr. Jan Sheldon. Currently, Dr. Leaf leads the research team at Autism Partnership Foundation, which conducts research projects both nationally and internationally. His research interests include examining methods to improve social behaviors for children and adolescents with autism and develop friendships, comparing different teaching methodologies, evaluating parameters of reinforcement, and evaluating long-term outcomes for individuals diagnosed with autism. Dr. Leaf has more than 100 publications in peer-reviewed journals or book chapters and has presented at both national and international professional conferences and invited events. Heserves on the editorial board for the Journal of Autism and Developmental Disorders and Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis and has been a guest reviewer for several additional prominent behavior analytic and autism journals.

Joseph H. Cihon, Ph.D., BCBA-D, is the Co-Director of Research for the Autism Partnership Foundation. Dr. Cihon received his bachelor’s degree in special education from Fontbonne University; master’s degree in behavior analysis at the University of North Texas under the mentorship of Dr. Shahla Ala'i-Rosales, Dr. Jesus Rosales-Ruiz, and Dr. Manish Vaidya; and his doctoral degree at Endicott College under the mentorship of Dr. Mary Jane Weiss. He has more than 15 years of experience working with children, adolescents, and adults diagnosed with autism spectrum disorder and other developmental disabilities in home, school, and community settings. His research interests include evaluating approach-based interventions, shaping, increasing favorable interactions among children, their families, and interventionists, developing contingencies to promote generalization and maintenance, and improving mealtimes for selective eaters. Dr. Cihon has published and served as a reviewer for several prominent journals and presented research at national and international conferences.

Julia L. Ferguson, M.S., BCBA, is the Research and Assessment Coordinator for the Autism Partnership Foundation. Ms. Ferguson received her bachelor’s degree in applied behavior analysis and her master’s degree in behavior analysis from the University of North Texas under the mentorship of Dr. Shahla Ala’i. She is currently pursuing her doctoral degree in applied behavior analysis at Endicott College under the mentorship of Dr. Mary Jane Weiss. Ms. Ferguson has more than eight years of experience working with children diagnosed with autism spectrum disorder in home, school, community, and clinical settings. Her research interests include evaluating social skills interventions for individuals diagnosed with ASD, staff training, evaluating best practice interventions, and comparing different teaching methodologies for individuals diagnosed with ASD. Ms. Ferguson has published many articles in peer-reviewed journals and authored book chapters as well as presented at national and international conferences.

Peter F. Gerhardt, Ed.D., is the Executive Director of the EPIC School in Paramus, NJ. Dr. Gerhardt has nearly 40 years of experience utilizing the principles of Applied Behavior Analysis in support of adolescents and adults with autism spectrum disorders in educational, employment, residential and community-based settings. He is the author or co-author on a number of articles and book chapters on the needs of adolescents and adults with ASD and has presented nationally a		ScienceProfessional Books (2)Science (SC)EBOP41168Behavioral Science and Psychology009783030985097Developmental PsychologyChild and Adolescence PsychologyClinical Social WorkPublic HealthDevelopmental Disabilities942100
11
Behavioral Science and Psychologyx978-3-031-14566-7LefflerJarrod M. Leffler; Elisabeth A. FrazierJarrod M. Leffler, Children’s Hospital of Richmond and Virginia Treatment Center for Children, Richmond, VA, USA; Elisabeth A. Frazier, Bradley Hospital/Brown University, Providence, RI, USAHandbook of Evidence-Based Day Treatment Programs for Children and AdolescentsXXII, 481 p. 20 illus., 16 illus. in color.12022final299.9990.00320.9996.30249.9975.00329.9999.00Hard cover0Issues in Clinical Child PsychologyBehavioral Science and PsychologyHandbookBook0English481JMCMMHSpringerSpringer International Publishing1WorldwideAvailable2022-12-092022-12-082022-12-262022-12-261Chapter 1. Introduction and Overview of Day Treatment Programs.- Chapter 2. The History and Purpose of Day Treatment Programs .- Chapter 3. Program Development and Administration in Day Treatment Settings.- Chapter 4. Implementation and Training.- Chapter 5. Assessment and Evaluation of Outcomes in Youth Day Treatment Programs.- Chapter 6. Perspectives on General Partial Hospital Programs for Children.- Chapter 7. Child and Adolescent Integrated Mood Program.- Chapter 8. The UCLA Achievement, Behavior, Cognition (ABC) program.- Chapter 9. Center for Autism and Developmental Disabilities Partial Hospitalization Program .- Chapter 10. Dialectical Behavior Therapy.- Chapter 11. Obsessive Compulsive and Related Disorders.- Chapter 12. Family-Based Interdisciplinary Care for Children & Families with Comorbid Medical & Psychiatric Conditions: The Hasbro Children’s Partial Hospital Program.- Chapter 13. Development and Implementation of an Intensive Outpatient Program for Suicidal Youth.- Chapter 14. Seattle Children’s Hospital’s Obsessive Compulsive Disorder Intensive Outpatient Program.- Chapter 15. Evidenced Based Programming for LGBTQ Young Adults: An Intensive Outpatient Model.- Chapter 16. Adolescent Dialectical Behavior Therapy Intensive Outpatient Programs.- Chapter 17. Co-occurring Disorders.- Chapter 18. Pediatric Pain Programs: a Day Treatment Model at Boston Children’s Hospital.- Chapter 19. Transitioning to Adult Services: Young Adult Partial Hospitalization and Intensive Outpatient Programs.- Chapter 20. Integrating Day Treatment in the School Setting.- Chapter 21. Wilderness Therapy.- Chapter 22. Family Engagement and Coaching in 5-Day Intensive Treatment Program for Youth with Anxiety Disorders and OCD.- Chapter 23. Telehealth Adaptations in Day Treatment Programs.- Chapter 24. Inpatient Psychiatric Hospitalization.- Chapter 25. The Youth Crisis Stabilization Unit: An Alternative Psychiatric Treatment Model .- Chapter 26. Strategies to Navigate Day-Treatment Services and Follow-up Plans: a Guide for Families and Providers.
This book examines the intermediate level of mental health services with a focus on partial hospitalization program (PHP) and intensive outpatient program (IOP) models of care for youth. It reviews the history of PHPs and IOPs and highlights their current care models, demonstrating the increase in the development and implementation of evidence-based treatment (EBT) practices. The book explores issues relating to program development, implementation, and considerations for sustainability. It provides interventions designed to enhance the well-being of youth who are experiencing a range of mental health concerns as well as strategies to engage and involve their families. In addition, the book offers feasible strategies for measuring outcomes and applying these results to meaningful clinical evaluations in PHP and IOP settings. It describes the process of accessing and using these intermediate services as well as additional treatment resources that may be necessary in the continuum of mental health care for youth.Key areas of coverage include:The history and purpose of mental health care and the role of day treatment programs for youth.Working with program administration and other stakeholders, identifying a patient population, and engaging community and referral sources.The importance of family involvement, coordination of care, and simultaneously addressing the transactional relationship between physical and mental health.Transitioning youth from pediatric mental health services into the adult mental health system.Working with a diverse patient population in intermediate treatment programs.Providing practical information for families and practitioners navigating the pediatric mental health continuum of care.The Handbook of Evidence-Based Day Treatment Programs for Children and Adolescents is a must-have resource for researchers, professors, and graduate students as well as clinicians, therapists, course instructors, and other professionals in child and adolescent psychiatry, clinical child and school psychology, social work, counseling, public health, family studies, developmental psychology, pediatrics, and all related disciplines.This book examines the intermediate level of mental health services with a focus on partial hospitalization program (PHP) and intensive outpatient program (IOP) models of care for youth. It reviews the history of PHPs and IOPs and highlights their current care models, demonstrating the increase in the development and implementation of evidence-based treatment (EBT) practices. The book explores issues relating to program development, implementation, and considerations for sustainability. It provides interventions designed to enhance the well-being of youth who are experiencing a range of mental health concerns as well as strategies to engage and involve their families. In addition, the book offers feasible strategies for measuring outcomes and applying these results to meaningful clinical evaluations in PHP and IOP settings. It describes the process of accessing and using these intermediate services as well as additional treatment resources that may be necessary in the continuum of mental health care for youth.

Key areas of coverage include:

The history and purpose of mental health care and the role of day treatment programs for youth.Working with program administration and other stakeholders, identifying a patient population, and engaging community and referral sources.The importance of family involvement, coordination of care, and simultaneously addressing the transactional relationship between physical and mental health.Transitioning youth from pediatric mental health services into the adult mental health system.Working with a diverse patient population in intermediate treatment programs.Providing practical information for families and practitioners navigating the pediatric mental health continuum of care.











The Handbook of Evidence-Based Day Treatment Programs for Children and Adolescents is a must-have resource for researchers, professors, and graduate students as well as clinicians, therapists, course instructors, and other professionals in child and adolescent psychiatry, clinical child and school psychology, social work, counseling, public health, family studies, developmental psychology, pediatrics, and all related disciplines.		Explores PHP and IOP development, implementation, and considerations for sustainabilityDescribes interventions to enhance mental health and well-being of youth as well as their familiesDetails how to access and use intensive psychiatric and other mental health care services for youthJarrod M. Leffler, Ph.D., ABPP, is an Associate Professor and Chair of the Division of Child and Adolescent Psychology in the Department of Psychiatry at Virginia Commonwealth University (VCU), Children’s Hospital of Richmond, and the Virginia Treatment Center for Children. He provides oversight of outpatient, inpatient, and pediatric psychology programming and provides clinical service and supervision in these settings. Before joining VCU Dr. Leffler was an Assistant Professor at Mayo Clinic where he was the co-director of the pediatric mood clinic and inpatient psychiatry consulting psychology. He developed and directed the Child and Adolescent Integrated Mood Program (CAIMP), a two-week family-based PHP for youth with mood disorders, and the Pediatric Transition Program (PTP) a DBT focused IOP . Dr. Leffler began developing day treatment programs in 2000, and since that time has developed PHPs and IOPs for youth ages 5-18. He providesclinical supervision to psychology graduate students, interns and fellows as well as psychiatry residents and fellows and staff members. Dr. Leffler has published clinical research on PHP, IOP, and inpatient psychiatric hospitalization models of care; treatment models for youth and caregivers, including the Multifamily Psychoeducation Psychotherapy (MF-PEP), CAIMP, and individual-based treatment for youth with mood disorders. He has also published research on training staff on implementing EBTs. Dr. Leffler has served two terms as the President of the American Board of Clinical Child and Adolescent Psychology. He co-founded and co-chairs the Acute, Intensive, and Residential Service (AIRS) Special Interest Group of the Society of Clinical Child and Adolescent Psychology (Division 53) of the American Psychological Association.

Elisabeth A. Frazier, Ph.D., is a Clinical Associate Professor of Psychiatry and Human Behavior at the Alpert Medical School of Brown University and an Attending Psychologist at the Emma Pendleton Bradley Hospital. She has provided direct clinical care and supervision of psychology and psychiatry trainees across various levels of care including inpatient, partial hospitalization, intensive outpatient, outpatient, and juvenile detention settings. Dr. Frazier currently works in the Adolescent Partial Hospitalization Program at Bradley Hospital, a family-based, short-term, intensive program treating adolescents with a wide range of psychiatric presenting problems. She is a lead psychologist in Bradley REACH, an innovative fully virtual partial hospitalization program (PHP) through Bradley Hospital, which brings PHP level of care to youth and families across multiple states in the United States. Dr. Frazier has published clinical research including adaptation and implementation of empirically based treatment in the inpatient psychiatry setting, clinical outcomes in adolescent PHP treatment, and intervention research in teens with mood, disruptive behavior, and substance use disorders in intensive outpatient and community outpatient settings. She has also served as the Practice Committee Co-Chair in the Acute, Intensive, and Residential Service (AIRS) Special Interest Group of the Society of Clinical Child and Adolescent Psychology (Division 53) of the American Psychological Association.
ScienceProfessional Books (2)Science (SC)EBOP41168Behavioral Science and Psychology009783031145667Developmental PsychologyChild and Adolescence PsychologyClinical Social WorkPublic Health1136000
12
Behavioral Science and Psychologyx978-3-031-14569-8LefflerJarrod M. Leffler; Elisabeth A. FrazierJarrod M. Leffler, Children’s Hospital of Richmond and Virginia Treatment Center for Children, Richmond, VA, USA; Elisabeth A. Frazier, Bradley Hospital/Brown University, Providence, RI, USAHandbook of Evidence-Based Day Treatment Programs for Children and AdolescentsXXII, 481 p. 20 illus., 16 illus. in color.12022final299.9990.00320.9996.30249.9975.00329.9999.00Soft cover1Issues in Clinical Child PsychologyBehavioral Science and PsychologyHandbookBook0English481JMCMMHSpringerSpringer International Publishing1WorldwideAvailable2023-12-092022-12-082023-12-092023-12-091Chapter 1. Introduction and Overview of Day Treatment Programs.- Chapter 2. The History and Purpose of Day Treatment Programs .- Chapter 3. Program Development and Administration in Day Treatment Settings.- Chapter 4. Implementation and Training.- Chapter 5. Assessment and Evaluation of Outcomes in Youth Day Treatment Programs.- Chapter 6. Perspectives on General Partial Hospital Programs for Children.- Chapter 7. Child and Adolescent Integrated Mood Program.- Chapter 8. The UCLA Achievement, Behavior, Cognition (ABC) program.- Chapter 9. Center for Autism and Developmental Disabilities Partial Hospitalization Program .- Chapter 10. Dialectical Behavior Therapy.- Chapter 11. Obsessive Compulsive and Related Disorders.- Chapter 12. Family-Based Interdisciplinary Care for Children & Families with Comorbid Medical & Psychiatric Conditions: The Hasbro Children’s Partial Hospital Program.- Chapter 13. Development and Implementation of an Intensive Outpatient Program for Suicidal Youth.- Chapter 14. Seattle Children’s Hospital’s Obsessive Compulsive Disorder Intensive Outpatient Program.- Chapter 15. Evidenced Based Programming for LGBTQ Young Adults: An Intensive Outpatient Model.- Chapter 16. Adolescent Dialectical Behavior Therapy Intensive Outpatient Programs.- Chapter 17. Co-occurring Disorders.- Chapter 18. Pediatric Pain Programs: a Day Treatment Model at Boston Children’s Hospital.- Chapter 19. Transitioning to Adult Services: Young Adult Partial Hospitalization and Intensive Outpatient Programs.- Chapter 20. Integrating Day Treatment in the School Setting.- Chapter 21. Wilderness Therapy.- Chapter 22. Family Engagement and Coaching in 5-Day Intensive Treatment Program for Youth with Anxiety Disorders and OCD.- Chapter 23. Telehealth Adaptations in Day Treatment Programs.- Chapter 24. Inpatient Psychiatric Hospitalization.- Chapter 25. The Youth Crisis Stabilization Unit: An Alternative Psychiatric Treatment Model .- Chapter 26. Strategies to Navigate Day-Treatment Services and Follow-up Plans: a Guide for Families and Providers.
This book examines the intermediate level of mental health services with a focus on partial hospitalization program (PHP) and intensive outpatient program (IOP) models of care for youth. It reviews the history of PHPs and IOPs and highlights their current care models, demonstrating the increase in the development and implementation of evidence-based treatment (EBT) practices. The book explores issues relating to program development, implementation, and considerations for sustainability. It provides interventions designed to enhance the well-being of youth who are experiencing a range of mental health concerns as well as strategies to engage and involve their families. In addition, the book offers feasible strategies for measuring outcomes and applying these results to meaningful clinical evaluations in PHP and IOP settings. It describes the process of accessing and using these intermediate services as well as additional treatment resources that may be necessary in the continuum of mental health care for youth.Key areas of coverage include:The history and purpose of mental health care and the role of day treatment programs for youth.Working with program administration and other stakeholders, identifying a patient population, and engaging community and referral sources.The importance of family involvement, coordination of care, and simultaneously addressing the transactional relationship between physical and mental health.Transitioning youth from pediatric mental health services into the adult mental health system.Working with a diverse patient population in intermediate treatment programs.Providing practical information for families and practitioners navigating the pediatric mental health continuum of care.The Handbook of Evidence-Based Day Treatment Programs for Children and Adolescents is a must-have resource for researchers, professors, and graduate students as well as clinicians, therapists, course instructors, and other professionals in child and adolescent psychiatry, clinical child and school psychology, social work, counseling, public health, family studies, developmental psychology, pediatrics, and all related disciplines.This book examines the intermediate level of mental health services with a focus on partial hospitalization program (PHP) and intensive outpatient program (IOP) models of care for youth. It reviews the history of PHPs and IOPs and highlights their current care models, demonstrating the increase in the development and implementation of evidence-based treatment (EBT) practices. The book explores issues relating to program development, implementation, and considerations for sustainability. It provides interventions designed to enhance the well-being of youth who are experiencing a range of mental health concerns as well as strategies to engage and involve their families. In addition, the book offers feasible strategies for measuring outcomes and applying these results to meaningful clinical evaluations in PHP and IOP settings. It describes the process of accessing and using these intermediate services as well as additional treatment resources that may be necessary in the continuum of mental health care for youth.

Key areas of coverage include:

The history and purpose of mental health care and the role of day treatment programs for youth.Working with program administration and other stakeholders, identifying a patient population, and engaging community and referral sources.The importance of family involvement, coordination of care, and simultaneously addressing the transactional relationship between physical and mental health.Transitioning youth from pediatric mental health services into the adult mental health system.Working with a diverse patient population in intermediate treatment programs.Providing practical information for families and practitioners navigating the pediatric mental health continuum of care.











The Handbook of Evidence-Based Day Treatment Programs for Children and Adolescents is a must-have resource for researchers, professors, and graduate students as well as clinicians, therapists, course instructors, and other professionals in child and adolescent psychiatry, clinical child and school psychology, social work, counseling, public health, family studies, developmental psychology, pediatrics, and all related disciplines.		Explores PHP and IOP development, implementation, and considerations for sustainabilityDescribes interventions to enhance mental health and well-being of youth as well as their familiesDetails how to access and use intensive psychiatric and other mental health care services for youthJarrod M. Leffler, Ph.D., ABPP, is an Associate Professor and Chair of the Division of Child and Adolescent Psychology in the Department of Psychiatry at Virginia Commonwealth University (VCU), Children’s Hospital of Richmond, and the Virginia Treatment Center for Children. He provides oversight of outpatient, inpatient, and pediatric psychology programming and provides clinical service and supervision in these settings. Before joining VCU Dr. Leffler was an Assistant Professor at Mayo Clinic where he was the co-director of the pediatric mood clinic and inpatient psychiatry consulting psychology. He developed and directed the Child and Adolescent Integrated Mood Program (CAIMP), a two-week family-based PHP for youth with mood disorders, and the Pediatric Transition Program (PTP) a DBT focused IOP . Dr. Leffler began developing day treatment programs in 2000, and since that time has developed PHPs and IOPs for youth ages 5-18. He providesclinical supervision to psychology graduate students, interns and fellows as well as psychiatry residents and fellows and staff members. Dr. Leffler has published clinical research on PHP, IOP, and inpatient psychiatric hospitalization models of care; treatment models for youth and caregivers, including the Multifamily Psychoeducation Psychotherapy (MF-PEP), CAIMP, and individual-based treatment for youth with mood disorders. He has also published research on training staff on implementing EBTs. Dr. Leffler has served two terms as the President of the American Board of Clinical Child and Adolescent Psychology. He co-founded and co-chairs the Acute, Intensive, and Residential Service (AIRS) Special Interest Group of the Society of Clinical Child and Adolescent Psychology (Division 53) of the American Psychological Association.

Elisabeth A. Frazier, Ph.D., is a Clinical Associate Professor of Psychiatry and Human Behavior at the Alpert Medical School of Brown University and an Attending Psychologist at the Emma Pendleton Bradley Hospital. She has provided direct clinical care and supervision of psychology and psychiatry trainees across various levels of care including inpatient, partial hospitalization, intensive outpatient, outpatient, and juvenile detention settings. Dr. Frazier currently works in the Adolescent Partial Hospitalization Program at Bradley Hospital, a family-based, short-term, intensive program treating adolescents with a wide range of psychiatric presenting problems. She is a lead psychologist in Bradley REACH, an innovative fully virtual partial hospitalization program (PHP) through Bradley Hospital, which brings PHP level of care to youth and families across multiple states in the United States. Dr. Frazier has published clinical research including adaptation and implementation of empirically based treatment in the inpatient psychiatry setting, clinical outcomes in adolescent PHP treatment, and intervention research in teens with mood, disruptive behavior, and substance use disorders in intensive outpatient and community outpatient settings. She has also served as the Practice Committee Co-Chair in the Acute, Intensive, and Residential Service (AIRS) Special Interest Group of the Society of Clinical Child and Adolescent Psychology (Division 53) of the American Psychological Association.
ScienceProfessional Books (2)Science (SC)EBOP41168Behavioral Science and Psychology009783031145698Developmental PsychologyChild and Adolescence PsychologyClinical Social WorkPublic Health950000
13
Behavioral Science and Psychologyx978-3-319-72777-6MacMillanThalia MacMillan; Amanda Sisselman-BorgiaThalia MacMillan, Community and Human Services, New York, NY, USA; Amanda Sisselman-Borgia, Lehman College, Bronx, NY, USANew Directions in Treatment, Education, and Outreach for Mental Health and AddictionX, 323 p. 10 illus., 6 illus. in color.12018final109.9933.00117.6935.3199.9930.00119.9936.00Hard cover0Advances in Mental Health and AddictionBehavioral Science and PsychologyProfessional bookBook0English323MBNH9JKSNSpringerSpringer International Publishing0Available2018-03-012018-02-212018-03-122018-03-121Diagnosis.- Evolution of addiction terminology.- Addiction and self-injury.- Comorbid trauma and addiction.- The relationship between attachment and addiction.- The portrait of addiction.- Practice.- Origins of clinical practice.- Preventing substance abuse and addiction.- Clinical and personal biases in treatment: impact on treatment and how to handle it.- Spirituality, resilience, and addiction.- The Three-legged Stool Model for Spiritual Interventions in the Treatment of Substance Use Disorders.- Models of integrated treatment.- Addiction in the community: the role of emergency services.- Comprehensive assessment of mental health, addiction, and physical health.- A case study of innovative practice.- The role of advocacy in the treatment process.- Education.- Creating programs for professional development and academic programs.- Developing a SBIRT curriculum in advanced practice.- Teaching students the importance of developing the therapeutic relationship.- Integrating previous knowledge and experience into the educational program.- Concluding remarks.This practice-enhancing volume assembles the latest innovative thinking on working with clients who have both mental health diagnoses and substance use disorders. Diagnosis is a central focus of the coverage, untangling the often-knotty considerations surrounding dual diagnosis and the complex issues surrounding treatment even in frequently seen combinations (e.g., depression/alcohol abuse). The section on practice emphasizes meeting patients where they are and making use of their community, cultural, and spiritual contexts in crafting interventions. And the book’s ambitious chapters on professional development describe training programs with the potential to produce the next generation of responsive, knowledgeable, and flexible therapists. Among the topics covered: · Comprehensive assessment of substance abuse and addiction risk in adolescents. · The relationship betweenattachment and addiction. · Addiction in the community: the role of emergency services. · Substance use during and after major crisis and disaster: a practitioner’s guide. · Practice, advocacy, and outreach: perspectives on addiction services. · Teaching the importance of developing the therapeutic relationship. New Directions in Treatment, Education, and Outreach for Mental Health and Addiction equips health and clinical psychologists, social workers, and addiction counselors and educators with a well-rounded understanding of a growing population, and a wealth of perspectives on effective new interventions.This practice-enhancing volume assembles the latest innovative thinking on working with clients who have both mental health diagnoses and substance use disorders. Diagnosis is a central focus of the coverage, untangling the often-knotty considerations surrounding dual diagnosis and the complex issues surrounding treatment even in frequently seen combinations (e.g., depression/alcohol abuse). The section on practice emphasizes meeting patients where they are and making use of their community, cultural, and spiritual contexts in crafting interventions. And the book’s ambitious chapters on professional development describe training programs with the potential to produce the next generation of responsive, knowledgeable, and flexible therapists.Among the topics covered:· Comprehensive assessment of substance abuse and addiction risk in adolescents.· The relationship between attachment and addiction.· Addiction in the community: the role of emergency services.· Substance use during and after major crisis and disaster: a practitioner’s guide.· Practice, advocacy, and outreach: perspectives on addiction services.· Teaching the importance of developing the therapeutic relationship.New Directions in Treatment, Education, and Outreach for Mental Health and Addiction equips health and clinical psychologists, social workers, and addiction counselors and educators with a well-rounded understanding of a growing population, and a wealth of perspectives on effective new interventions.Highlights intersection of diagnosis, treatment, and educationUpdates innovations within these three unique yet intersecting areasInformation can be generalized to a multitude of populationsThalia MacMillan is an assistant professor and mentor of community and human services in the Center for Distance Learning (CDL) at SUNY Empire State College. She received her Ph.D. in social work from Fordham University, specializing in policy and research. Prior to coming to SUNY, Thalia worked simultaneously in the professional and academic sectors. For the past 18 years she has worked in the fields of evaluation, research, and practice. Thalia has taught social research methods, program evaluation, social policy, addictions, mental health, disabilities, assessment and diagnosis, and statistical methods. She regularly develops and teaches in multiple modalities, including blended, online, face to face, and immersive cloud learning courses. In addition to volunteering research services to multiple local organizations, Thalia is a volunteer EMT in her community. All of these experiences in the various sectors have heightened her interests in the addictionsfield. <div>Dr. Sisselman-Borgia is an Assistant Professor at Lehman College in the Department of Social Work, part of the City University of New York. Dr. Sisselman-Borgia has experience teaching across the social work curriculum and recently taught classes entitled, Family Violence and Trauma and Urban Homelessness for undergraduate and graduate social work students. She regularly teaches Advanced Practice in the Urban Environment for MSW students in their final year of study. Dr. Sisselman-Borgia studies the impact of discrimination on homeless youth and adults, trauma and at-risk youth and families, and the intersection between spirituality, religion, and domestic violence/family trauma. Dr. Sisselman-Borgia’s clinical practice has focused mainly on at-risk youth and working with women and children who have experienced trauma. </div>ProfessionalsProfessional Books (2)Standard (0)EBOP41168Behavioral Science and Psychology009783319727776Health PsychologySocial Work and Community DevelopmentCounseling Psychology6269000
14
Behavioral Science and Psychologyx978-3-030-10266-1MacMillanThalia MacMillan; Amanda Sisselman-BorgiaThalia MacMillan, Community and Human Services, New York, NY, USA; Amanda Sisselman-Borgia, Lehman College, Bronx, NY, USANew Directions in Treatment, Education, and Outreach for Mental Health and AddictionX, 323 p. 10 illus., 6 illus. in color.12018final79.9924.0085.5925.6869.9921.0089.9927.00Soft cover1Advances in Mental Health and AddictionBehavioral Science and PsychologyProfessional bookBook (Paperback Initiative)0English323MBNH9JKSNSpringerSpringer International Publishing0Available2018-12-282018-12-282019-03-012019-03-291Diagnosis.- Evolution of addiction terminology.- Addiction and self-injury.- Comorbid trauma and addiction.- The relationship between attachment and addiction.- The portrait of addiction.- Practice.- Origins of clinical practice.- Preventing substance abuse and addiction.- Clinical and personal biases in treatment: impact on treatment and how to handle it.- Spirituality, resilience, and addiction.- The Three-legged Stool Model for Spiritual Interventions in the Treatment of Substance Use Disorders.- Models of integrated treatment.- Addiction in the community: the role of emergency services.- Comprehensive assessment of mental health, addiction, and physical health.- A case study of innovative practice.- The role of advocacy in the treatment process.- Education.- Creating programs for professional development and academic programs.- Developing a SBIRT curriculum in advanced practice.- Teaching students the importance of developing the therapeutic relationship.- Integrating previous knowledge and experience into the educational program.- Concluding remarks.This practice-enhancing volume assembles the latest innovative thinking on working with clients who have both mental health diagnoses and substance use disorders. Diagnosis is a central focus of the coverage, untangling the often-knotty considerations surrounding dual diagnosis and the complex issues surrounding treatment even in frequently seen combinations (e.g., depression/alcohol abuse). The section on practice emphasizes meeting patients where they are and making use of their community, cultural, and spiritual contexts in crafting interventions. And the book’s ambitious chapters on professional development describe training programs with the potential to produce the next generation of responsive, knowledgeable, and flexible therapists. Among the topics covered: · Comprehensive assessment of substance abuse and addiction risk in adolescents. · The relationship betweenattachment and addiction. · Addiction in the community: the role of emergency services. · Substance use during and after major crisis and disaster: a practitioner’s guide. · Practice, advocacy, and outreach: perspectives on addiction services. · Teaching the importance of developing the therapeutic relationship. New Directions in Treatment, Education, and Outreach for Mental Health and Addiction equips health and clinical psychologists, social workers, and addiction counselors and educators with a well-rounded understanding of a growing population, and a wealth of perspectives on effective new interventions.This practice-enhancing volume assembles the latest innovative thinking on working with clients who have both mental health diagnoses and substance use disorders. Diagnosis is a central focus of the coverage, untangling the often-knotty considerations surrounding dual diagnosis and the complex issues surrounding treatment even in frequently seen combinations (e.g., depression/alcohol abuse). The section on practice emphasizes meeting patients where they are and making use of their community, cultural, and spiritual contexts in crafting interventions. And the book’s ambitious chapters on professional development describe training programs with the potential to produce the next generation of responsive, knowledgeable, and flexible therapists.Among the topics covered:· Comprehensive assessment of substance abuse and addiction risk in adolescents.· The relationship between attachment and addiction.· Addiction in the community: the role of emergency services.· Substance use during and after major crisis and disaster: a practitioner’s guide.· Practice, advocacy, and outreach: perspectives on addiction services.· Teaching the importance of developing the therapeutic relationship.New Directions in Treatment, Education, and Outreach for Mental Health and Addiction equips health and clinical psychologists, social workers, and addiction counselors and educators with a well-rounded understanding of a growing population, and a wealth of perspectives on effective new interventions.Highlights intersection of diagnosis, treatment, and educationUpdates innovations within these three unique yet intersecting areasInformation can be generalized to a multitude of populationsThalia MacMillan is an assistant professor and mentor of community and human services in the Center for Distance Learning (CDL) at SUNY Empire State College. She received her Ph.D. in social work from Fordham University, specializing in policy and research. Prior to coming to SUNY, Thalia worked simultaneously in the professional and academic sectors. For the past 18 years she has worked in the fields of evaluation, research, and practice. Thalia has taught social research methods, program evaluation, social policy, addictions, mental health, disabilities, assessment and diagnosis, and statistical methods. She regularly develops and teaches in multiple modalities, including blended, online, face to face, and immersive cloud learning courses. In addition to volunteering research services to multiple local organizations, Thalia is a volunteer EMT in her community. All of these experiences in the various sectors have heightened her interests in the addictionsfield. <div>Dr. Sisselman-Borgia is an Assistant Professor at Lehman College in the Department of Social Work, part of the City University of New York. Dr. Sisselman-Borgia has experience teaching across the social work curriculum and recently taught classes entitled, Family Violence and Trauma and Urban Homelessness for undergraduate and graduate social work students. She regularly teaches Advanced Practice in the Urban Environment for MSW students in their final year of study. Dr. Sisselman-Borgia studies the impact of discrimination on homeless youth and adults, trauma and at-risk youth and families, and the intersection between spirituality, religion, and domestic violence/family trauma. Dr. Sisselman-Borgia’s clinical practice has focused mainly on at-risk youth and working with women and children who have experienced trauma. </div>ProfessionalsProfessional Books (2)Standard (0)EBOP41168Behavioral Science and Psychology009783030102661Health PsychologySocial Work and Community DevelopmentCounseling Psychology516000
15
Behavioral Science and Psychologyx978-3-031-06119-6McPhersonPamela McPhersonPamela McPherson, Louisiana State University Health Sciences Center, Shreveport, LA, USAHandbook of Treatment Planning for Children with Autism and Other Neurodevelopmental DisordersXVIII, 501 p. 26 illus., 5 illus. in color.12022final199.9960.00213.9964.20179.9954.00219.9966.00Hard cover0Autism and Child Psychopathology SeriesBehavioral Science and PsychologyHandbookBook0English501JMCMJWSpringerSpringer International Publishing1Available2022-10-262022-10-262022-11-122022-11-121Section 1. Overview of Treatment Planning.- Chapter 1. The Elements of Treatment Planning.- Chapter 2. The Medical Home Model.- Chapter 3. Treatment Planning Across Settings.- Section 2. Treatment Planning: Team Member Perspectives.- Chapter 4. The Family Perspective.- Chapter 5. The Patient Perspective.- Chapter 6. The Regulatory Perspective.- Section 3. Treatment Planning: Professional Perspectives.- Chapter 7. Allergy/Pulmonary.- Chapter 8. Cardiology.- Chapter 9. Dental.- Chapter 10. Dietitian.- Chapter 11. Endocrinology.- Chapter 12. Gastroenterology.- Chapter 13. Genetics.- Chapter 14. Hospitalist.- Chapter 15. Neonatology.- Chapter 16. Neurology.- Chapter 17. Otolaryngology.- Chapter 18. Physical Therapy.- Chapter 19. Psychiatry.- Chapter 20. Psychology.- Chapter 21. Occupational Therapy.- Chapter 22. Sleep Medicine.- Chapter 23. Speech and Language Therapy.- Chapter 24. Urology.- Chapter 25. The Transition to Adult Services. <div>
</div>		This handbook addresses treatment planning for children with autism spectrum disorder (ASD) and other neurodevelopmental disabilities (NDDs) using a medical home perspective. It examines the medical home model, which has been promoted as the standard of care by the American Academy of Pediatrics since 2002, emphasizing collaboration between patients, families, and providers to optimize care. The handbook addresses treatment planning, including the coordination of the care provided by multiple specialists with a clear, shared vision for maximizing each child’s potential.Key areas of coverage include:Elements of treatment planning, history of the medical home model, documentation, and strategies to facilitate communication.Goals of treatment from the perspectives of the family, person served, care providers, and fiscal and regulatory bodies.Role of each specialist, highlighting the most common conditions experienced by children with ASD and other NDD with expectations for assessment and treatment.Detailed recommendations for making referrals and assisting the child and family in preparing for appointments.The Handbook of Treatment Planning for Children with Autism Spectrum Disorder and Other Neurodevelopmental Disabilities is a must-have resource for researchers, professors, and graduate students as well as clinicians, therapists, and other professionals across such interrelated disciplines as clinical child, school, and developmental psychology, child and adolescent psychiatry, social work, rehabilitation medicine/therapy, pediatrics, and special education.This handbook addresses treatment planning for children with autism spectrum disorder (ASD) and other neurodevelopmental disabilities (NDDs) using a medical home perspective. It examines the medical home model, which has been promoted as the standard of care by the American Academy of Pediatrics since 2002, emphasizing collaboration between patients, families, and providers to optimize care. The handbook addresses treatment planning, including the coordination of the care provided by multiple specialists with a clear, shared vision for maximizing each child’s potential.Key areas of coverage include:· Elements of treatment planning, history of the medical home model, documentation, and strategies to facilitate communication.· Goals of treatment from the perspectives of the family, person served, care providers, and fiscal and regulatory bodies.· Role of each specialist, highlighting the most common conditions experienced by children with ASD and other NDDwith expectations for assessment and treatment.· Detailed recommendations for making referrals and assisting the child and family in preparing for appointments.The Handbook of Treatment Planning for Children with Autism Spectrum Disorder and Other Neurodevelopmental Disabilities is a must-have resource for researchers, professors, and graduate students as well as clinicians, therapists, and other professionals across such interrelated disciplines as clinical child, school, and developmental psychology, child and adolescent psychiatry, social work, rehabilitation medicine/therapy, pediatrics, and special education.Elements of treatment planning, history of the medical home modelGoals of treatment from the perspectives of the family, person servedRole of each specialist, highlighting the most common conditions experienced by childrenPamela McPherson, M.D., associate professor of psychiatry at Louisiana State University Medical Center in Shreveport, is triple boarded in adult, child and adolescent, and forensic psychiatry. Dr. McPherson has more than thirty years of experience treating children and adolescents in community mental health systems. She supervises residents and fellows at LSUHSC-Shreveport. She consults nationally and internationally on forensic matters, including acting as a mental health subject matter expert for the Department of Homeland Security.ScienceProfessional Books (2)Science (SC)EBOP41168Behavioral Science and Psychology009783031061196School PsychologyPediatricsBiotechnology1282000
16
Behavioral Science and Psychologyx978-3-031-06122-6McPhersonPamela McPhersonPamela McPherson, Louisiana State University Health Sciences Center, Shreveport, LA, USAHandbook of Treatment Planning for Children with Autism and Other Neurodevelopmental DisordersXVIII, 501 p. 26 illus., 5 illus. in color.12022final199.9960.00213.9964.20179.9954.00219.9966.00Soft cover1Autism and Child Psychopathology SeriesBehavioral Science and PsychologyHandbookBook0English501JMCMJWSpringerSpringer International Publishing1Available2023-10-262022-10-262023-10-262023-10-261Section 1. Overview of Treatment Planning.- Chapter 1. The Elements of Treatment Planning.- Chapter 2. The Medical Home Model.- Chapter 3. Treatment Planning Across Settings.- Section 2. Treatment Planning: Team Member Perspectives.- Chapter 4. The Family Perspective.- Chapter 5. The Patient Perspective.- Chapter 6. The Regulatory Perspective.- Section 3. Treatment Planning: Professional Perspectives.- Chapter 7. Allergy/Pulmonary.- Chapter 8. Cardiology.- Chapter 9. Dental.- Chapter 10. Dietitian.- Chapter 11. Endocrinology.- Chapter 12. Gastroenterology.- Chapter 13. Genetics.- Chapter 14. Hospitalist.- Chapter 15. Neonatology.- Chapter 16. Neurology.- Chapter 17. Otolaryngology.- Chapter 18. Physical Therapy.- Chapter 19. Psychiatry.- Chapter 20. Psychology.- Chapter 21. Occupational Therapy.- Chapter 22. Sleep Medicine.- Chapter 23. Speech and Language Therapy.- Chapter 24. Urology.- Chapter 25. The Transition to Adult Services. <div>
</div>		This handbook addresses treatment planning for children with autism spectrum disorder (ASD) and other neurodevelopmental disabilities (NDDs) using a medical home perspective. It examines the medical home model, which has been promoted as the standard of care by the American Academy of Pediatrics since 2002, emphasizing collaboration between patients, families, and providers to optimize care. The handbook addresses treatment planning, including the coordination of the care provided by multiple specialists with a clear, shared vision for maximizing each child’s potential.Key areas of coverage include:Elements of treatment planning, history of the medical home model, documentation, and strategies to facilitate communication.Goals of treatment from the perspectives of the family, person served, care providers, and fiscal and regulatory bodies.Role of each specialist, highlighting the most common conditions experienced by children with ASD and other NDD with expectations for assessment and treatment.Detailed recommendations for making referrals and assisting the child and family in preparing for appointments.The Handbook of Treatment Planning for Children with Autism Spectrum Disorder and Other Neurodevelopmental Disabilities is a must-have resource for researchers, professors, and graduate students as well as clinicians, therapists, and other professionals across such interrelated disciplines as clinical child, school, and developmental psychology, child and adolescent psychiatry, social work, rehabilitation medicine/therapy, pediatrics, and special education.This handbook addresses treatment planning for children with autism spectrum disorder (ASD) and other neurodevelopmental disabilities (NDDs) using a medical home perspective. It examines the medical home model, which has been promoted as the standard of care by the American Academy of Pediatrics since 2002, emphasizing collaboration between patients, families, and providers to optimize care. The handbook addresses treatment planning, including the coordination of the care provided by multiple specialists with a clear, shared vision for maximizing each child’s potential.Key areas of coverage include:· Elements of treatment planning, history of the medical home model, documentation, and strategies to facilitate communication.· Goals of treatment from the perspectives of the family, person served, care providers, and fiscal and regulatory bodies.· Role of each specialist, highlighting the most common conditions experienced by children with ASD and other NDDwith expectations for assessment and treatment.· Detailed recommendations for making referrals and assisting the child and family in preparing for appointments.The Handbook of Treatment Planning for Children with Autism Spectrum Disorder and Other Neurodevelopmental Disabilities is a must-have resource for researchers, professors, and graduate students as well as clinicians, therapists, and other professionals across such interrelated disciplines as clinical child, school, and developmental psychology, child and adolescent psychiatry, social work, rehabilitation medicine/therapy, pediatrics, and special education.Elements of treatment planning, history of the medical home modelGoals of treatment from the perspectives of the family, person servedRole of each specialist, highlighting the most common conditions experienced by childrenPamela McPherson, M.D., associate professor of psychiatry at Louisiana State University Medical Center in Shreveport, is triple boarded in adult, child and adolescent, and forensic psychiatry. Dr. McPherson has more than thirty years of experience treating children and adolescents in community mental health systems. She supervises residents and fellows at LSUHSC-Shreveport. She consults nationally and internationally on forensic matters, including acting as a mental health subject matter expert for the Department of Homeland Security.ScienceProfessional Books (2)Science (SC)EBOP41168Behavioral Science and Psychology009783031061226School PsychologyPediatricsBiotechnology979000
17
Behavioral Science and Psychologyx978-3-030-44225-5SteeleRic G. Steele; Michael C. RobertsRic G. Steele, University of Kansas, Lawrence, KS, USA; Michael C. Roberts, University of Kansas, Lawrence, KS, USAHandbook of Evidence-Based Therapies for Children and AdolescentsBridging Science and PracticeXV, 394 p. 8 illus., 1 illus. in color.22020final279.9984.00299.5989.88249.9975.00299.9990.00Hard cover0Issues in Clinical Child PsychologyBehavioral Science and PsychologyHandbookBook0English394JMCJKSNSpringerSpringer International Publishing1Available2020-09-272020-09-282020-10-142020-10-141,978-1-4419-4469-6,978-0-387-52024-7,978-0-387-73690-7,978-0-387-73691-4Section I: Foundations of Evidence-based Therapies.- Chapter 1. Evidence-based therapies for children and adolescents: Where are we, and how did we get here?.- Chapter 2. Methodological issues in the evaluation of therapies.- Chapter 3. Evidence-based assessment and measurement-based care.- Chapter 4. Evidence-based case conceptualization/Evidence-based clinical decision making.- Section II: Evidence-based therapies for specific disorders or conditions.- Anxiety and Related Disorders.- Chapter 5. Evidence-based, Non-pharmacological interventions for pediatric anxiety disorders.- Chapter 6. Evidence-based treatment of pediatric Obsessive-Compulsive Disorder.- Chapter 7. Evidence-based interventions for posttraumatic stress disorder in youth.- Mood Disorders and Related Problems.- Chapter 8. Evidence-based interventions for depressive disorders in childhood.- Chapter 9. Evidence-based psychosocial treatments of depression in adolescents.- Chapter 10. Evidence-based interventions for Bipolar Spectrum Disorders in youths.- Disruptive Behavior Disorders and Neurodevelopmental Problems.- Chapter 11. Evidence-based treatments for Attention-Deficit/Hyperactivity Disorder (ADHD).- Chapter 12. Evidence-based therapies for Autism Spectrum Disorders.- Chapter 13. Evidence-based interventions for Oppositional Behavior and other conduct problems in young children.- Chapter 14.Treating conduct problems, aggression, and antisocial behavior in children and adolescents.- Chapter 15. Components of evidence-based interventions for bullying and peer victimization.- Physical Health-related Disorders.- Chapter 16. Evidence-based interventions for sleep problems and disorders.- Chapter 17. Acute and chronic pain management in children.- Chapter 18. Evidence-based therapies for enuresis and encopresis.- Chapter 19. Evidence-based interventions for eating disorders in children and adolescents.- Chapter 20. Evidence-based treatment of pediatric overweight and obesity.- Chapter 21. Evidence-based treatments for adolescent substance use disorders.- Section III: Implementation issues.- Chapter 22. Dissemination of evidence-based treatments for children and families in practice settings.- Chapter 23. Client, therapist, and treatment characteristics in evidence-based therapies for children and adolescents.- Chapter 24. Incorporating cultural competence into clinical care of children and adolescents.- Chapter 25. Expanding the reach of evidence-based psychotherapy through remote technologies.- Chapter 26. Evidence-based therapies for children and adolescents: Where are we going?. <div>
</div>
The second edition of the handbook examines advances in therapeutic approaches for behavioral, developmental, and emotional problems in children. It describes therapies that have evolved in response to improvements in diagnostic systems, methodological approaches, and new evidence regarding treatment efficacy and effectiveness. The volume provides a comprehensive review of what works, for whom, and under what circumstances. New and updated chapters in this second edition address the empirical basis of a range of treatment approaches for common internalizing, externalizing, developmental, and medically related disorders and conditions. In addition, chapters highlight therapeutic principles underlying treatment success and identifies specific interventions and resources to facilitate translation of the best available evidence into clinical practice. Finally, the handbook concludes with future recommendations and next steps for evidence-based therapies.
The handbook features evidence-based therapies for:Obsessive-compulsive disorder.Posttraumatic stress disorder for youths.Depressive disorders in childhood and adolescence.Attention-Deficit/Hyperactivity Disorder. Autism spectrum disorders.Aggression and antisocial behavior.Chronic pain management.Enuresis and encopresis.Pediatric obesity.Adolescent substance abuse disorders.Eating disorders in children and adolescents.
The second edition of the Handbook of Evidence-based Therapies for Children and Adolescents provides an invaluable resource for researchers, graduate students, clinicians and therapists and professionals in clinical child and school psychology, social work, child and adolescent psychiatry, developmental psychology and related disciplines.		The second edition of the handbook examines advances in therapeutic approaches for behavioral, developmental, and emotional problems in children. It describes therapies that have evolved in response to improvements in diagnostic systems, methodological approaches, and new evidence regarding treatment efficacy and effectiveness. The volume provides a comprehensive review of what works, for whom, and under what circumstances. New and updated chapters in this second edition address the empirical basis of a range of treatment approaches for common internalizing, externalizing, developmental, and medically related disorders and conditions. In addition, chapters highlight therapeutic principles underlying treatment success and identifies specific interventions and resources to facilitate translation of the best available evidence into clinical practice. Finally, the handbook concludes with future recommendations and next steps for evidence-based therapies.The handbook features evidence-based therapies for:
Obsessive-compulsive disorder.Posttraumatic stress disorder for youths.Depressive disorders in childhood and adolescence.Attention-Deficit/Hyperactivity Disorder. Autism spectrum disorders.Aggression and antisocial behavior.Chronic pain management.Enuresis and encopresis.Pediatric obesity.Adolescent substance abuse disorders.Eating disorders in children and adolescents.

The second edition of the Handbook of Evidence-based Therapies for Children and Adolescents provides an invaluable resource for researchers, graduate students, clinicians and therapists and professionals in clinical child and school psychology, social work, child and adolescent psychiatry, developmental psychology and related disciplines.

Examines current approaches for treating behavioral, developmental, and emotional problems in children and adolescentsDiscusses advances in diagnostic systems, methodologies, treatment efficacy and effectivenessDescribes approaches to treat child internalizing, externalizing, developmental, and medically related disordersAdvances the evidence base for case conceptualization and measurement-based care with childrenRic G. Steele, Ph.D., ABPP, is Professor and Director of the Clinical Child Psychology Program at the University of Kansas, with academic appointments in the Departments of Applied Behavioral Science and Psychology. Dr. Steele has published more than 120 journal articles and book chapters and has coedited several handbooks related to health and mental health services for children and youth, including the Handbook of Childhood and Adolescent Obesity, Handbook of Mental Health Services for Children, Adolescents, and Families, and the Handbook of Pediatric Psychology. He serves as an editorial board member for the Journal of Clinical Child and Adolescent Psychology, Professional Psychology: Research and Practice, and Clinical Child and Family Psychology Review. His research examines the evaluation and promotion of health-related quality of life across a continuum of health risk categories. Steele is a past-president of the American Board ofClinical Child and Adolescent Psychology and is a Fellow of the American Psychological Association.

Michael C. Roberts, Ph.D., ABPP, is Professor Emeritus, and founding director of the Clinical Child Psychology Program at the University of Kansas, with appointments in the Departments of Applied Behavioral Science and Psychology. Dr. Roberts has published more than 200 journal articles and book chapters revolving around the application of psychology to understanding and influencing children’s physical and mental health. He has authored or co-edited more than 20 books, including Handbook of Pediatric Psychology (now in its 5th edition); Handbook of Clinical Child Psychology; Specialty Competencies in Clinical Child and Adolescent Psychology; Handbook of Mental Health Services for Children, Adolescents, and Families; Prevention of Problems in Childhood; and Helping Children Cope with Disasters and Terrorism and Clinical Practice of Pediatric Psychology: Cases and Service Delivery. He served as editor of Journal of Pediatric Psychology; Children’s Services: Social Policy, Research, and Practice; Children’s Health Care; Professional Psychology: Research and Practice; most recently, Training and Education in Professional Psychology, and Associate Editor for Journal of Consulting and Clinical Psychology, American Psychologist, and others.
ScienceProfessional Books (2)Science (SC)EBOP41168Behavioral Science and Psychology009783030442255School PsychologySocial WorkChild and Adolescence Psychology969100
18
Behavioral Science and Psychologyx978-3-030-44228-6SteeleRic G. Steele; Michael C. RobertsRic G. Steele, University of Kansas, Lawrence, KS, USA; Michael C. Roberts, University of Kansas, Lawrence, KS, USAHandbook of Evidence-Based Therapies for Children and AdolescentsBridging Science and PracticeXV, 394 p. 8 illus., 1 illus. in color.22020final279.9984.00299.5989.88249.9975.00299.9990.00Soft cover1Issues in Clinical Child PsychologyBehavioral Science and PsychologyHandbookBook0English394JMCJKSNSpringerSpringer International Publishing1Available2021-09-272020-09-272021-09-272021-09-271,978-1-4419-4469-6,978-0-387-52024-7,978-0-387-73690-7,978-0-387-73691-4Section I: Foundations of Evidence-based Therapies.- Chapter 1. Evidence-based therapies for children and adolescents: Where are we, and how did we get here?.- Chapter 2. Methodological issues in the evaluation of therapies.- Chapter 3. Evidence-based assessment and measurement-based care.- Chapter 4. Evidence-based case conceptualization/Evidence-based clinical decision making.- Section II: Evidence-based therapies for specific disorders or conditions.- Anxiety and Related Disorders.- Chapter 5. Evidence-based, Non-pharmacological interventions for pediatric anxiety disorders.- Chapter 6. Evidence-based treatment of pediatric Obsessive-Compulsive Disorder.- Chapter 7. Evidence-based interventions for posttraumatic stress disorder in youth.- Mood Disorders and Related Problems.- Chapter 8. Evidence-based interventions for depressive disorders in childhood.- Chapter 9. Evidence-based psychosocial treatments of depression in adolescents.- Chapter 10. Evidence-based interventions for Bipolar Spectrum Disorders in youths.- Disruptive Behavior Disorders and Neurodevelopmental Problems.- Chapter 11. Evidence-based treatments for Attention-Deficit/Hyperactivity Disorder (ADHD).- Chapter 12. Evidence-based therapies for Autism Spectrum Disorders.- Chapter 13. Evidence-based interventions for Oppositional Behavior and other conduct problems in young children.- Chapter 14.Treating conduct problems, aggression, and antisocial behavior in children and adolescents.- Chapter 15. Components of evidence-based interventions for bullying and peer victimization.- Physical Health-related Disorders.- Chapter 16. Evidence-based interventions for sleep problems and disorders.- Chapter 17. Acute and chronic pain management in children.- Chapter 18. Evidence-based therapies for enuresis and encopresis.- Chapter 19. Evidence-based interventions for eating disorders in children and adolescents.- Chapter 20. Evidence-based treatment of pediatric overweight and obesity.- Chapter 21. Evidence-based treatments for adolescent substance use disorders.- Section III: Implementation issues.- Chapter 22. Dissemination of evidence-based treatments for children and families in practice settings.- Chapter 23. Client, therapist, and treatment characteristics in evidence-based therapies for children and adolescents.- Chapter 24. Incorporating cultural competence into clinical care of children and adolescents.- Chapter 25. Expanding the reach of evidence-based psychotherapy through remote technologies.- Chapter 26. Evidence-based therapies for children and adolescents: Where are we going?. <div>
</div>
The second edition of the handbook examines advances in therapeutic approaches for behavioral, developmental, and emotional problems in children. It describes therapies that have evolved in response to improvements in diagnostic systems, methodological approaches, and new evidence regarding treatment efficacy and effectiveness. The volume provides a comprehensive review of what works, for whom, and under what circumstances. New and updated chapters in this second edition address the empirical basis of a range of treatment approaches for common internalizing, externalizing, developmental, and medically related disorders and conditions. In addition, chapters highlight therapeutic principles underlying treatment success and identifies specific interventions and resources to facilitate translation of the best available evidence into clinical practice. Finally, the handbook concludes with future recommendations and next steps for evidence-based therapies.
The handbook features evidence-based therapies for:Obsessive-compulsive disorder.Posttraumatic stress disorder for youths.Depressive disorders in childhood and adolescence.Attention-Deficit/Hyperactivity Disorder. Autism spectrum disorders.Aggression and antisocial behavior.Chronic pain management.Enuresis and encopresis.Pediatric obesity.Adolescent substance abuse disorders.Eating disorders in children and adolescents.
The second edition of the Handbook of Evidence-based Therapies for Children and Adolescents provides an invaluable resource for researchers, graduate students, clinicians and therapists and professionals in clinical child and school psychology, social work, child and adolescent psychiatry, developmental psychology and related disciplines.		The second edition of the handbook examines advances in therapeutic approaches for behavioral, developmental, and emotional problems in children. It describes therapies that have evolved in response to improvements in diagnostic systems, methodological approaches, and new evidence regarding treatment efficacy and effectiveness. The volume provides a comprehensive review of what works, for whom, and under what circumstances. New and updated chapters in this second edition address the empirical basis of a range of treatment approaches for common internalizing, externalizing, developmental, and medically related disorders and conditions. In addition, chapters highlight therapeutic principles underlying treatment success and identifies specific interventions and resources to facilitate translation of the best available evidence into clinical practice. Finally, the handbook concludes with future recommendations and next steps for evidence-based therapies.The handbook features evidence-based therapies for:
Obsessive-compulsive disorder.Posttraumatic stress disorder for youths.Depressive disorders in childhood and adolescence.Attention-Deficit/Hyperactivity Disorder. Autism spectrum disorders.Aggression and antisocial behavior.Chronic pain management.Enuresis and encopresis.Pediatric obesity.Adolescent substance abuse disorders.Eating disorders in children and adolescents.

The second edition of the Handbook of Evidence-based Therapies for Children and Adolescents provides an invaluable resource for researchers, graduate students, clinicians and therapists and professionals in clinical child and school psychology, social work, child and adolescent psychiatry, developmental psychology and related disciplines.

Examines current approaches for treating behavioral, developmental, and emotional problems in children and adolescentsDiscusses advances in diagnostic systems, methodologies, treatment efficacy and effectivenessDescribes approaches to treat child internalizing, externalizing, developmental, and medically related disordersAdvances the evidence base for case conceptualization and measurement-based care with childrenRic G. Steele, Ph.D., ABPP, is Professor and Director of the Clinical Child Psychology Program at the University of Kansas, with academic appointments in the Departments of Applied Behavioral Science and Psychology. Dr. Steele has published more than 120 journal articles and book chapters and has coedited several handbooks related to health and mental health services for children and youth, including the Handbook of Childhood and Adolescent Obesity, Handbook of Mental Health Services for Children, Adolescents, and Families, and the Handbook of Pediatric Psychology. He serves as an editorial board member for the Journal of Clinical Child and Adolescent Psychology, Professional Psychology: Research and Practice, and Clinical Child and Family Psychology Review. His research examines the evaluation and promotion of health-related quality of life across a continuum of health risk categories. Steele is a past-president of the American Board ofClinical Child and Adolescent Psychology and is a Fellow of the American Psychological Association.

Michael C. Roberts, Ph.D., ABPP, is Professor Emeritus, and founding director of the Clinical Child Psychology Program at the University of Kansas, with appointments in the Departments of Applied Behavioral Science and Psychology. Dr. Roberts has published more than 200 journal articles and book chapters revolving around the application of psychology to understanding and influencing children’s physical and mental health. He has authored or co-edited more than 20 books, including Handbook of Pediatric Psychology (now in its 5th edition); Handbook of Clinical Child Psychology; Specialty Competencies in Clinical Child and Adolescent Psychology; Handbook of Mental Health Services for Children, Adolescents, and Families; Prevention of Problems in Childhood; and Helping Children Cope with Disasters and Terrorism and Clinical Practice of Pediatric Psychology: Cases and Service Delivery. He served as editor of Journal of Pediatric Psychology; Children’s Services: Social Policy, Research, and Practice; Children’s Health Care; Professional Psychology: Research and Practice; most recently, Training and Education in Professional Psychology, and Associate Editor for Journal of Consulting and Clinical Psychology, American Psychologist, and others.
ScienceProfessional Books (2)Science (SC)EBOP41168Behavioral Science and Psychology009783030442286School PsychologySocial WorkChild and Adolescence Psychology780100
19
Behavioral Science and Psychologyx978-3-031-04385-7SturmeyPeter SturmeyPeter Sturmey, Queens College City University of New York, Flushing, NY, USAViolence and AggressionIntegrating Theory, Research, and PracticeXXIV, 520 p.12022final99.9930.00106.9932.1089.9927.00109.9933.00Hard cover0Advances in Preventing and Treating Violence and AggressionBehavioral Science and PsychologyMonographBook0English520JMKMBNSpringerSpringer International Publishing0Available2022-08-242022-08-242022-09-102022-09-101Part I: Introductory Concepts of Violence and Aggression.- Chapter 1. Definitions of Violence and Aggression.- Chapter 2. Epidemiology of Violence and Aggression.- Part II: Causes of Violence and Aggression.- Chapter 3. Biological Causes of Violence and Aggression.- Chapter 4. Social Causes of Violence and Aggression: Cultural Evolution.- Chapter 5. Social Causes of Violence and Aggression: Individual Learning.- Part III: Prevention and Treatment of Violence and Aggression.- Chapter 6. Cultural Interventions for Violence and Aggression.- Chapter 7. Psychotherapies.- Chapter 8. Individual Biological Interventions.- Chapter 9. Special Populations.This book provides a concise-yet-comprehensive overview of the broad-ranging topics in the field of violence and aggression. It uses a functional approach that acknowledges the evolutionary, cultural, and operant nature of violence and aggression. The book defines the nature of different forms of violence and aggression; examines epidemiology and risk factors; describes biological, cultural and individual causes; and discusses individual and societal prevention and treatment.Key areas of coverage include:Epidemiology of violence and aggression.
Biological and social causes of violence and aggression.
Cultural interventions, psychotherapies, and individual biological interventions.
The effects of violence and aggression in special populations.
Violence and Aggression: Integrating Theory, Research, and Practice is a must-have resource for researchers, academics, and upper-level undergraduate andgraduate students in forensic psychology, public health, criminology/criminal justice, developmental psychology, psychotherapy/counseling, psychiatry, social work, educational policy and politics, health psychology, nursing, and behavioral therapy/rehabilitation.		This book provides a concise-yet-comprehensive overview of the broad-ranging topics in the field of violence and aggression. It uses a functional approach that acknowledges the evolutionary, cultural, and operant nature of violence and aggression. The book defines the nature of different forms of violence and aggression; examines epidemiology and risk factors; describes biological, cultural and individual causes; and discusses individual and societal prevention and treatment. Key areas of coverage include:

Epidemiology of violence and aggression.
Biological and social causes of violence and aggression.
Cultural interventions, psychotherapies, and individual biological interventions.
The effects of violence and aggression in special populations.






Violence and Aggression: Integrating Theory, Research, and Practice is a must-have resource for researchers, academics, and upper-level undergraduateand graduate students in forensic psychology, public health, criminology/criminal justice, developmental psychology, psychotherapy/counseling, psychiatry, social work, educational policy and politics, health psychology, nursing, and behavioral therapy/rehabilitation.		Addresses the evolutionary, cultural, and operant nature of violence and aggression using a functional frameworkDefines the nature of different forms of violence and aggressionExamines epidemiology and risk factors and describes biological, cultural, and individual causesPeter Sturmey, Ph.D., is professor of psychology at Queens College and The Graduate Center, City University of New York. He has published more than 200 papers, 50 chapters, and 20 authored and edited books on developmental disabilities, behavior analysis, clinical psychology and evidence-based practice.ScienceProfessional Books (2)Science (SC)EBOP41168Behavioral Science and Psychology009783031043857Forensic PsychologyPublic HealthBiotechnology975000
20
Behavioral Science and Psychologyx978-3-031-04388-8SturmeyPeter SturmeyPeter Sturmey, Queens College City University of New York, Flushing, NY, USAViolence and AggressionIntegrating Theory, Research, and PracticeXXIV, 520 p.12022final99.9930.00106.9932.1089.9927.00109.9933.00Soft cover1Advances in Preventing and Treating Violence and AggressionBehavioral Science and PsychologyMonographBook0English520JMKMBNSpringerSpringer International Publishing0Available2023-08-252022-08-242023-08-242023-08-241Part I: Introductory Concepts of Violence and Aggression.- Chapter 1. Definitions of Violence and Aggression.- Chapter 2. Epidemiology of Violence and Aggression.- Part II: Causes of Violence and Aggression.- Chapter 3. Biological Causes of Violence and Aggression.- Chapter 4. Social Causes of Violence and Aggression: Cultural Evolution.- Chapter 5. Social Causes of Violence and Aggression: Individual Learning.- Part III: Prevention and Treatment of Violence and Aggression.- Chapter 6. Cultural Interventions for Violence and Aggression.- Chapter 7. Psychotherapies.- Chapter 8. Individual Biological Interventions.- Chapter 9. Special Populations.This book provides a concise-yet-comprehensive overview of the broad-ranging topics in the field of violence and aggression. It uses a functional approach that acknowledges the evolutionary, cultural, and operant nature of violence and aggression. The book defines the nature of different forms of violence and aggression; examines epidemiology and risk factors; describes biological, cultural and individual causes; and discusses individual and societal prevention and treatment.Key areas of coverage include:Epidemiology of violence and aggression.
Biological and social causes of violence and aggression.
Cultural interventions, psychotherapies, and individual biological interventions.
The effects of violence and aggression in special populations.
Violence and Aggression: Integrating Theory, Research, and Practice is a must-have resource for researchers, academics, and upper-level undergraduate andgraduate students in forensic psychology, public health, criminology/criminal justice, developmental psychology, psychotherapy/counseling, psychiatry, social work, educational policy and politics, health psychology, nursing, and behavioral therapy/rehabilitation.		This book provides a concise-yet-comprehensive overview of the broad-ranging topics in the field of violence and aggression. It uses a functional approach that acknowledges the evolutionary, cultural, and operant nature of violence and aggression. The book defines the nature of different forms of violence and aggression; examines epidemiology and risk factors; describes biological, cultural and individual causes; and discusses individual and societal prevention and treatment. Key areas of coverage include:

Epidemiology of violence and aggression.
Biological and social causes of violence and aggression.
Cultural interventions, psychotherapies, and individual biological interventions.
The effects of violence and aggression in special populations.






Violence and Aggression: Integrating Theory, Research, and Practice is a must-have resource for researchers, academics, and upper-level undergraduateand graduate students in forensic psychology, public health, criminology/criminal justice, developmental psychology, psychotherapy/counseling, psychiatry, social work, educational policy and politics, health psychology, nursing, and behavioral therapy/rehabilitation.		Addresses the evolutionary, cultural, and operant nature of violence and aggression using a functional frameworkDefines the nature of different forms of violence and aggressionExamines epidemiology and risk factors and describes biological, cultural, and individual causesPeter Sturmey, Ph.D., is professor of psychology at Queens College and The Graduate Center, City University of New York. He has published more than 200 papers, 50 chapters, and 20 authored and edited books on developmental disabilities, behavior analysis, clinical psychology and evidence-based practice.ScienceProfessional Books (2)Science (SC)EBOP41168Behavioral Science and Psychology009783031043888Forensic PsychologyPublic HealthBiotechnology825000
21
Behavioral Science and Psychologyx978-3-030-27870-0van den HoutJef J.J. van den Hout; Orin C. DavisJef J.J. van den Hout, Flow Concepts, Tilburg, The Netherlands; Orin C. Davis, Quality of Life Laboratory, New York, NY, USATeam FlowThe psychology of optimal collaborationXVII, 116 p. 14 illus., 1 illus. in color.12019final64.9919.5069.5420.8654.9916.5069.9921.00Soft cover0SpringerBriefs in Well-Being and Quality of Life ResearchBehavioral Science and PsychologyBrief/PivotBook0English116JMANKJSpringerSpringer International Publishing0Available2019-10-012019-09-182019-10-052019-10-051<div>1. An introduction in flow theory.- 2. The individual task flow experience in the context of work teams.- 3. Impediments for task flow experiences.- 4. Team flow theory – A multilevel perspective.- 5. Exemplifying team flow experiences.- 6. Roadmap to a climate where team flow is more likely to occur.- 7. The possibilities of Team Flow Monitor- Research and Practice.- 8. Intervention protocol to spark team flow.- 9. Future research.</div>This book presents a series of studies that conceptualize, test, and monitor team flow experiences in professional organizations to perform autonomously and successfully. It analyses the processes by which team flow emerges by exemplifying case studies, and introduces a protocol to spark team flow in professional organizations.Presents case studies that conceptualize, test, and monitor team flow experiencesIntroduces a protocol for sparking team flow in professional organizationsContains a foreword by Mihály Csíkszentmihályi, the founder of Flow TheoryJef J.J. van den Hout (1978) is obsessed with the psychology of flow. Thanks to this obsession, he succeeded in completing his Ph.D. research on the theoretical concept of team flow in December 2016. Mathieu Weggeman was his advisor, and Mihály Csíkszentmihályi, the founder of flow theory, was his opponent in the promotion committee. Currently, Jef is helping members of professional teams to achieve team flow and organizing events on the topic of flow with designers, entrepreneurs, artists, and musicians. He is also an associate researcher at Eindhoven University of Technology, investigating team collaborations, and a guest lecturer for executive master’s degree programs at Aarhus University, Denmark (Positive Psychology) and the Erasmus University of Rotterdam, the Netherlands (EHERO – Erasmus Happiness Economics Research Organization). Jef has previously studied psychology at Tilburg University and Architectural Design Management Systems at Eindhoven University of Technology. Orin Davis was granted the first doctorate in Positive Psychology and is a self-actualization engineer who helps people to do and be their best. His consulting focuses on hiring strategies and employee engagement; his coaching work centers on careers (personal branding, career trajectories, and personal/professional development); and his research chiefly addresses flow, creativity, hypnosis, and mentoring. In addition to being the principal investigator of the Quality of Life Laboratory, he is a start-up advisor who helps early-stage companies enhance their value propositions, pitches, culture, and human capital. Dr. Davis also serves as an adjunct professor of business, psychology, entrepreneurship, and creativity. He gives workshops, writes, and lectures avidly on human capital, creativity and innovation, and positive psychology.ScienceProfessional Books (2)Science (SC)EBOP41168Behavioral Science and Psychology009783030278700Positive PsychologyBusiness and ManagementQuality of Life ResearchWork and Organizational Psychology454000
22
Behavioral Science and Psychologyx978-94-017-9666-8WhiteMathew A. White; A. Simon MurrayMathew A. White, St Peter's College, St Peters, SA, Australia; A. Simon Murray, St Peter's College, St Peters, SA, AustraliaEvidence-Based Approaches in Positive EducationImplementing a Strategic Framework for Well-being in SchoolsXXXIII, 181 p. 27 illus.12015final169.9951.00181.8954.57149.9945.00199.9960.00Hard cover0Positive EducationBehavioral Science and PsychologyContributed volumeBook0English181JMANJNCSpringerSpringer Netherlands0Available2015-05-202015-05-092015-05-312015-05-311Foreword; Martin Seligman.- Preface.- Chapter 1. Building a Positive Institution; Mathew White and Simon Murray.- Chapter 2. A Comparison between Theological Christian Approaches to Wisdom and Peterson and Seligman's Classification of Character Strengths and Virtues; Theodore McCall, Lea Waters and Mathew White.- Chapter 3. Leading Whole-School Change; Lea Waters, Mathew White and Simon Murray.- Chapter 4. Measuring Whole School Well-Being in Students and Staff; Margaret Kern, Alejandro Adler, Lea Waters and Mathew White.- Chapter 5. Positive School Psychology; Zoë Alford and Mathew White.- Chapter 6. Strengths-Based Approach in the Classroom and Staffroom; Mathew White and Lea Waters.- Chapter 7. Character Education: A Role for Literature in Cultivating Character Strengths in Adolescence; Emily FitzSimons.- Chapter 8. Student Leadership and PERMA; John Vrodos, Tom McNeil with Mathew White.- Chapter 9. Future Directions in Well-Being; Mathew White and Simon Murray.Based on action research and implementation at one of the world’s great schools, this book provides a much-needed exploration of how to implement positive education at a whole school level. Evidence-Based Approaches in Positive Education summarises the integration of a whole-school mental health and well-being strategy, positive psychology programs and pastoral care models from 3 – 18 years of age. Positive education is the teaching of scientifically validated programs from positive psychology and character education that have an impact on student and staff well-being. It is an approach that focuses on teaching, building and embedding social and emotional learning throughout a student’s experience. St Peter’s College - Adelaide is the only institution in the world to integrate Martin Seligman’s well-being theory throughout all aspects of both its strategic intent and positive education programs. The School’s vision is to be a world-class school where all boys flourish. Its mission is to provide an exceptional education that brings out the very best in every boy. This is done within an intellectually and spiritually rich environment that nurtures international-mindedness, intercultural understanding, respect and a commitment to social justice. This book captures the developments of the St Peter’s College journey. It focuses on the integration of well-being across seven strategic goals: Academics; Well-being; Student Life; Entrepreneurship; Innovation and Partnerships; People, Culture and Change; Sustainability and Environment; Community Engagement, Advancement, and Philanthropy. A uniquely Australian school, the impact of a St Peter’s College education is to build great men: who believe safety, service and integrity and fundamental parts of their lives; who are active members of communities that are socially and culturally diverse; who engage in political, ethical, and environmental challenges as good citizens. Since 1847, St Peter’s College alumni have hadglobal and life-changing impact in all fields of human endeavour. The School’s alumni include three Nobel Laureates, 42 Rhodes Scholars, Olympians and Archbishops, artists and scientists, educators and journalists, actors and politicians, philanthropists and physicians, CEOs, diplomats and soldiers, explorers, painters and poets. This book shares evidence-based practices and makes a substantial contribution to the rapidly developing field of positive psychology and its application in schools.Based on action research and implementation at one of the world’s great schools, this book provides a much-needed exploration of how to implement positive education at a whole school level. Evidence-Based Approaches in Positive Education summarises the integration of a whole-school mental health and well-being strategy, positive psychology programs and pastoral care models from 3 – 18 years of age. Positive education is the teaching of scientifically validated programs from positive psychology and character education that have an impact on student and staff well-being. It is an approach that focuses on teaching, building and embedding social and emotional learning throughout a student’s experience. St Peter’s College - Adelaide is the only institution in the world to integrate Martin Seligman’s well-being theory throughout all aspects of both its strategic intent and positive education programs. The School’s vision is to be a world-class school where all boys flourish. Its mission is to provide an exceptional education that brings out the very best in every boy. This is done within an intellectually and spiritually rich environment that nurtures international-mindedness, intercultural understanding, respect and a commitment to social justice. This book captures the developments of the St Peter’s College journey. It focuses on the integration of well-being across seven strategic goals: Academics; Well-being; Student Life; Entrepreneurship; Innovation and Partnerships; People, Culture and Change; Sustainability and Environment; Community Engagement, Advancement, and Philanthropy. A uniquely Australian school, the impact of a St Peter’s College education is to build great men: who believe safety, service and integrity and fundamental parts of their lives; who are active members of communities that are socially and culturally diverse; who engage in political, ethical, and environmental challenges as good citizens. Since 1847, St Peter’s College alumni have hadglobal and life-changing impact in all fields of human endeavour. The School’s alumni include three Nobel Laureates, 42 Rhodes Scholars, Olympians and Archbishops, artists and scientists, educators and journalists, actors and politicians, philanthropists and physicians, CEOs, diplomats and soldiers, explorers, painters and poets. This book shares evidence-based practices and makes a substantial contribution to the rapidly developing field of positive psychology and its application in schools.Includes a foreword by Martin E.P. SeligmanFills a gap in the current literature on evidence-based approaches in positive educationOffers examples of best practices using positive psychology to lead organizational development and growthPresents classroom applications from the Early Years to Year 12Provides a model for leading positive psychology and change in educational settingsIncludes supplementary material: sn.pub/extrasMathew A. White Ph.D., is Director of Wellbeing & Positive Education at St Peter’s College, Adelaide, Australia. Mathew serves on the Senior Leadership Team of St Peter’s College, Adelaide. He graduated PhD from the University of Adelaide and completed residential studies at The Principals’ Center Harvard Graduate School of Education. Mathew is Senior Fellow in the Melbourne Graduate School of Education - The University of Melbourne and Affiliate in Cambridge University’s Wellbeing Institute. His work focuses on leadership, cultural change, and wellbeing. He has lectured at the Universities of Oxford, Melbourne, Pennsylvania and Bath. His publications appear in Journal of Positive Psychology, International Journal of Wellbeing, Psychology and International Journal of Appreciative Inquiry. Mathew has presented to the Governor’s Leadership Foundation, South Australian Government’s Executive Services Leadership Program and the Positive Education Summit & Round Table on Wellbeing at No. 10 Downing Street. He has counselled Catholic education, government systems, independent and Lutheran schools on applications of wellbeing. Mathew represented St Peter’s College as lead partner in Dr Seligman’s appointment as Thinker in Residence - Department of the Premier and Cabinet for the Government of South Australia. He is a member of the Wellbeing and Resilience Centre Education Committee – South Australian Health and Medical Research Institute, Academic Advisory Board – Positive Psychology Centre – University of Melbourne, Course Advisory Group – TAFE-SA, and Academic Committee – St Mark’s College, Adelaide.A. Simon Murray is the 14th Headmaster of St Peter’s College, Adelaide – one of Australia’s oldest independent schools, with over 1385 students and 220 staff. He has had 30 years of leadership experience in education. Prior to his appointment to St Peter’s College, Simon was Headmaster of Canberra Grammar School andBunbury Cathedral Grammar School. Simon was elected Chair of Association of Heads of Independent School of Australia from 2009 – 2011, representing over 390 member schools. He is a past Board member of the Independent Schools Council of Australia. He was appointed a Fellow of the Australian College of Educators in 2008 for his leadership in the independent school sector. Simon is a Fellow of the Australian Institute of Management. Simon has presented at national and international conferences on wellbeing, leadership, cultural change, and future directions in education. He was the St Peter’s College representative for Dr. Seligman’s role as Adelaide’s Thinker in Residence – Department of the Premier and Cabinet. Simon was one of thirty leaders in education invited to participate in a Positive Education Summit on Wellbeing at 10 Downing Street. He is the foundation Chairman and a board member of the Positive Education Schools Association (PESA), a board member of the International Positive Education Network (IPEN), a council member of Adelaide’s largest residential university college, St Mark’s College, and an appointed member of the diocesan council in the Anglican Diocese.ScienceProfessional Books (2)Science (SC)EBOP11640Behavioral Science009789401796668Positive PsychologyEducational PsychologyQuality of Life ResearchSchool Psychology4498100
23
Behavioral Science and Psychologyx978-94-024-0108-0WhiteMathew A. White; A. Simon MurrayMathew A. White, St Peter's College, St Peters, SA, Australia; A. Simon Murray, St Peter's College, St Peters, SA, AustraliaEvidence-Based Approaches in Positive EducationImplementing a Strategic Framework for Well-being in SchoolsXXXIII, 181 p. 27 illus.12015final169.9951.00181.8954.57149.9945.00199.9960.00Soft cover1Positive EducationBehavioral Science and PsychologyContributed volumeBook (Paperback Initiative)0English181JMANJNCSpringerSpringer Netherlands0Available2016-10-232016-10-232016-10-282016-11-251Foreword; Martin Seligman.- Preface.- Chapter 1. Building a Positive Institution; Mathew White and Simon Murray.- Chapter 2. A Comparison between Theological Christian Approaches to Wisdom and Peterson and Seligman's Classification of Character Strengths and Virtues; Theodore McCall, Lea Waters and Mathew White.- Chapter 3. Leading Whole-School Change; Lea Waters, Mathew White and Simon Murray.- Chapter 4. Measuring Whole School Well-Being in Students and Staff; Margaret Kern, Alejandro Adler, Lea Waters and Mathew White.- Chapter 5. Positive School Psychology; Zoë Alford and Mathew White.- Chapter 6. Strengths-Based Approach in the Classroom and Staffroom; Mathew White and Lea Waters.- Chapter 7. Character Education: A Role for Literature in Cultivating Character Strengths in Adolescence; Emily FitzSimons.- Chapter 8. Student Leadership and PERMA; John Vrodos, Tom McNeil with Mathew White.- Chapter 9. Future Directions in Well-Being; Mathew White and Simon Murray.Based on action research and implementation at one of the world’s great schools, this book provides a much-needed exploration of how to implement positive education at a whole school level. Evidence-Based Approaches in Positive Education summarises the integration of a whole-school mental health and well-being strategy, positive psychology programs and pastoral care models from 3 – 18 years of age. Positive education is the teaching of scientifically validated programs from positive psychology and character education that have an impact on student and staff well-being. It is an approach that focuses on teaching, building and embedding social and emotional learning throughout a student’s experience. St Peter’s College - Adelaide is the only institution in the world to integrate Martin Seligman’s well-being theory throughout all aspects of both its strategic intent and positive education programs. The School’s vision is to be a world-class school where all boys flourish. Its mission is to provide an exceptional education that brings out the very best in every boy. This is done within an intellectually and spiritually rich environment that nurtures international-mindedness, intercultural understanding, respect and a commitment to social justice. This book captures the developments of the St Peter’s College journey. It focuses on the integration of well-being across seven strategic goals: Academics; Well-being; Student Life; Entrepreneurship; Innovation and Partnerships; People, Culture and Change; Sustainability and Environment; Community Engagement, Advancement, and Philanthropy. A uniquely Australian school, the impact of a St Peter’s College education is to build great men: who believe safety, service and integrity and fundamental parts of their lives; who are active members of communities that are socially and culturally diverse; who engage in political, ethical, and environmental challenges as good citizens. Since 1847, St Peter’s College alumni have hadglobal and life-changing impact in all fields of human endeavour. The School’s alumni include three Nobel Laureates, 42 Rhodes Scholars, Olympians and Archbishops, artists and scientists, educators and journalists, actors and politicians, philanthropists and physicians, CEOs, diplomats and soldiers, explorers, painters and poets. This book shares evidence-based practices and makes a substantial contribution to the rapidly developing field of positive psychology and its application in schools.Based on action research and implementation at one of the world’s great schools, this book provides a much-needed exploration of how to implement positive education at a whole school level. Evidence-Based Approaches in Positive Education summarises the integration of a whole-school mental health and well-being strategy, positive psychology programs and pastoral care models from 3 – 18 years of age. Positive education is the teaching of scientifically validated programs from positive psychology and character education that have an impact on student and staff well-being. It is an approach that focuses on teaching, building and embedding social and emotional learning throughout a student’s experience. St Peter’s College - Adelaide is the only institution in the world to integrate Martin Seligman’s well-being theory throughout all aspects of both its strategic intent and positive education programs. The School’s vision is to be a world-class school where all boys flourish. Its mission is to provide an exceptional education that brings out the very best in every boy. This is done within an intellectually and spiritually rich environment that nurtures international-mindedness, intercultural understanding, respect and a commitment to social justice. This book captures the developments of the St Peter’s College journey. It focuses on the integration of well-being across seven strategic goals: Academics; Well-being; Student Life; Entrepreneurship; Innovation and Partnerships; People, Culture and Change; Sustainability and Environment; Community Engagement, Advancement, and Philanthropy. A uniquely Australian school, the impact of a St Peter’s College education is to build great men: who believe safety, service and integrity and fundamental parts of their lives; who are active members of communities that are socially and culturally diverse; who engage in political, ethical, and environmental challenges as good citizens. Since 1847, St Peter’s College alumni have hadglobal and life-changing impact in all fields of human endeavour. The School’s alumni include three Nobel Laureates, 42 Rhodes Scholars, Olympians and Archbishops, artists and scientists, educators and journalists, actors and politicians, philanthropists and physicians, CEOs, diplomats and soldiers, explorers, painters and poets. This book shares evidence-based practices and makes a substantial contribution to the rapidly developing field of positive psychology and its application in schools.Includes a foreword by Martin E.P. SeligmanFills a gap in the current literature on evidence-based approaches in positive educationOffers examples of best practices using positive psychology to lead organizational development and growthPresents classroom applications from the Early Years to Year 12Provides a model for leading positive psychology and change in educational settingsIncludes supplementary material: sn.pub/extrasMathew A. White Ph.D., is Director of Wellbeing & Positive Education at St Peter’s College, Adelaide, Australia. Mathew serves on the Senior Leadership Team of St Peter’s College, Adelaide. He graduated PhD from the University of Adelaide and completed residential studies at The Principals’ Center Harvard Graduate School of Education. Mathew is Senior Fellow in the Melbourne Graduate School of Education - The University of Melbourne and Affiliate in Cambridge University’s Wellbeing Institute. His work focuses on leadership, cultural change, and wellbeing. He has lectured at the Universities of Oxford, Melbourne, Pennsylvania and Bath. His publications appear in Journal of Positive Psychology, International Journal of Wellbeing, Psychology and International Journal of Appreciative Inquiry. Mathew has presented to the Governor’s Leadership Foundation, South Australian Government’s Executive Services Leadership Program and the Positive Education Summit & Round Table on Wellbeing at No. 10 Downing Street. He has counselled Catholic education, government systems, independent and Lutheran schools on applications of wellbeing. Mathew represented St Peter’s College as lead partner in Dr Seligman’s appointment as Thinker in Residence - Department of the Premier and Cabinet for the Government of South Australia. He is a member of the Wellbeing and Resilience Centre Education Committee – South Australian Health and Medical Research Institute, Academic Advisory Board – Positive Psychology Centre – University of Melbourne, Course Advisory Group – TAFE-SA, and Academic Committee – St Mark’s College, Adelaide.A. Simon Murray is the 14th Headmaster of St Peter’s College, Adelaide – one of Australia’s oldest independent schools, with over 1385 students and 220 staff. He has had 30 years of leadership experience in education. Prior to his appointment to St Peter’s College, Simon was Headmaster of Canberra Grammar School andBunbury Cathedral Grammar School. Simon was elected Chair of Association of Heads of Independent School of Australia from 2009 – 2011, representing over 390 member schools. He is a past Board member of the Independent Schools Council of Australia. He was appointed a Fellow of the Australian College of Educators in 2008 for his leadership in the independent school sector. Simon is a Fellow of the Australian Institute of Management. Simon has presented at national and international conferences on wellbeing, leadership, cultural change, and future directions in education. He was the St Peter’s College representative for Dr. Seligman’s role as Adelaide’s Thinker in Residence – Department of the Premier and Cabinet. Simon was one of thirty leaders in education invited to participate in a Positive Education Summit on Wellbeing at 10 Downing Street. He is the foundation Chairman and a board member of the Positive Education Schools Association (PESA), a board member of the International Positive Education Network (IPEN), a council member of Adelaide’s largest residential university college, St Mark’s College, and an appointed member of the diocesan council in the Anglican Diocese.ScienceProfessional Books (2)Science (SC)EBOP11640Behavioral Science009789402401080Positive PsychologyEducational PsychologyQuality of Life ResearchSchool Psychology3343100
24
Behavioral Science and Psychology978-3-031-10995-9AllanJulie Allan; Valerie HarwoodJulie Allan, University of Birmingham, Birmingham, UK; Valerie Harwood, The University of Sydney, Camperdown, Sydney, NSW, AustraliaOn the Self: Discourses of Mental Health and EducationXIII, 325 p. 4 illus., 3 illus. in color.12022final99.9930.00106.9932.1089.9927.00109.9933.00Hard cover0The Language of Mental HealthBehavioral Science and PsychologyMonographBook0English325JMSCBPalgrave MacmillanSpringer International Publishing0Available2022-09-252022-09-252023-01-302023-01-301Chapter 1. Introduction: the psy-self.-Part one: Tell me my self.- Chapter 2. Making strange the history of psychological discourses of the self in education.- Chapter 3. Schooling the (achieving) self.- Chapter 4. Mental disorder in school and the damaged self.- Chapter 5. Wellbeing and happiness.- Part two: Counter-narratives of the self.- Chapter 6. The pleasure(s) of the self.- Chapter 7. The capable self.- Chapter 8. Re-presenting the self.- Chapter 9. Politicising the self.- Chapter 10. Performing the self: counter-narratives in everyday life.

This book examines the emergence of psychologised discourses of the self in education and considers their effects on children and young people, on relationships both in and out of school and on educational practices. It undertakes a Foucauldian genealogy of the discourses of the self in education in order to scrutinise the ‘focal points of experience’ for children and young people. Part One of the book offers a critical analysis of the discourses of the self that operate within interventions of self esteem, self concept, self efficacy and self regulation and their incursions into education. Part Two provides counter-narratives of the self, drawn principally from the arts and politics and providing alternative, and potentially radical, ways of when and how the self might speak. It also articulates how teachers may support children and young people in giving voice to these counter-narratives as they move through school.

Julie Allan is Professor of Equity and Inclusion at the University of Birmingham, UK where she was formerly Head of the School of Education. Julie’s research focuses on inclusion, disability studies and children’s rights and encompasses both empirical and theoretical work. She has been an expert adviser on policy, practice and research to governments, NGOs and Council of Europe. Julie and Valerie co-edited, together with Clara Jørgensen, The Routledge World Yearbook in Education 2020: Schooling, governance and inequalities.

Valerie Harwood is a Professor of Sociology and Anthropology of Education, Sydney School of Education and Social Work, The University of Sydney. Valerie’s research is centred on a social and cultural analysis of participation in educational futures. This work involves learning about collaborative approaches and in-depth fieldwork on educational justice with young people, families and communities. Valerie and Julie are the authors of Psychopathology at School:Theorising Mental Disorder in Education (2014, Routledge) and Medicus Interruptus in the Behaviour of Disadvantaged Children in Scotland, in the British Journal of Sociology of Education.

This book examines the emergence of psychologised discourses of the self in education and considers their effects on children and young people, on relationships both in and out of school and on educational practices. It undertakes a Foucauldian genealogy of the discourses of the self in education in order to scrutinise the ‘focal points of experience’ for children and young people. Part One of the book offers a critical analysis of the discourses of the self that operate within interventions of self esteem, self concept, self efficacy and self regulation and their incursions into education. Part Two provides counter-narratives of the self, drawn principally from the arts and politics and providing alternative, and potentially radical, ways of when and how the self might speak. It also articulates how teachers may support children and young people in giving voice to these counter-narratives as they move through school.


Offers a critical analysis of current discourses of selfConsiders the effect of these discourses on young people both in school and outsideUncovers new counter-narratives and how they can be expressed by children and teachersJulie Allan is Professor of Equity and Inclusion at the University of Birmingham, UK where she was formerly Head of the School of Education. Julie’s research focuses on inclusion, disability studies and children’s rights and encompasses both empirical and theoretical work. She has been an expert adviser on policy, practice and research to governments, NGOs and Council of Europe. Julie and Valerie co-edited, together with Clara Jørgensen, The Routledge World Yearbook in Education 2020: Schooling, governance and inequalities.Valerie Harwood is a Professor of Sociology and Anthropology of Education, Sydney School of Education and Social Work, The University of Sydney. Valerie’s research is centred on a social and cultural analysis of participation in educational futures. This work involves learning about collaborative approaches and in-depth fieldwork on educational justice with young people, families and communities. Valerie and Julie are the authors of Psychopathology at School: Theorising Mental Disorder in Education (2014, Routledge) and Medicus Interruptus in the Behaviour of Disadvantaged Children in Scotland, in the British Journal of Sociology of Education.SciencePalgrave Standard US (P5)Palgrave Monograph (P6)EBOP41168Behavioral Science and Psychology009783031109959Personality and Differential PsychologyPsycholinguistics and Cognitive LingusiticsEducational PsychologyCounseling PsychologyChild and Adolescence Psychology570000
25
Behavioral Science and Psychology978-3-031-10998-0AllanJulie Allan; Valerie HarwoodJulie Allan, University of Birmingham, Birmingham, UK; Valerie Harwood, The University of Sydney, Camperdown, Sydney, NSW, AustraliaOn the Self: Discourses of Mental Health and EducationXIII, 325 p. 4 illus., 3 illus. in color.12022final99.9930.00106.9932.1089.9927.00109.9933.00Soft cover1The Language of Mental HealthBehavioral Science and PsychologyMonographBook0English325JMSCBPalgrave MacmillanSpringer International Publishing0Available2023-09-262022-09-252023-09-252023-09-251Chapter 1. Introduction: the psy-self.-Part one: Tell me my self.- Chapter 2. Making strange the history of psychological discourses of the self in education.- Chapter 3. Schooling the (achieving) self.- Chapter 4. Mental disorder in school and the damaged self.- Chapter 5. Wellbeing and happiness.- Part two: Counter-narratives of the self.- Chapter 6. The pleasure(s) of the self.- Chapter 7. The capable self.- Chapter 8. Re-presenting the self.- Chapter 9. Politicising the self.- Chapter 10. Performing the self: counter-narratives in everyday life.

This book examines the emergence of psychologised discourses of the self in education and considers their effects on children and young people, on relationships both in and out of school and on educational practices. It undertakes a Foucauldian genealogy of the discourses of the self in education in order to scrutinise the ‘focal points of experience’ for children and young people. Part One of the book offers a critical analysis of the discourses of the self that operate within interventions of self esteem, self concept, self efficacy and self regulation and their incursions into education. Part Two provides counter-narratives of the self, drawn principally from the arts and politics and providing alternative, and potentially radical, ways of when and how the self might speak. It also articulates how teachers may support children and young people in giving voice to these counter-narratives as they move through school.

Julie Allan is Professor of Equity and Inclusion at the University of Birmingham, UK where she was formerly Head of the School of Education. Julie’s research focuses on inclusion, disability studies and children’s rights and encompasses both empirical and theoretical work. She has been an expert adviser on policy, practice and research to governments, NGOs and Council of Europe. Julie and Valerie co-edited, together with Clara Jørgensen, The Routledge World Yearbook in Education 2020: Schooling, governance and inequalities.

Valerie Harwood is a Professor of Sociology and Anthropology of Education, Sydney School of Education and Social Work, The University of Sydney. Valerie’s research is centred on a social and cultural analysis of participation in educational futures. This work involves learning about collaborative approaches and in-depth fieldwork on educational justice with young people, families and communities. Valerie and Julie are the authors of Psychopathology at School:Theorising Mental Disorder in Education (2014, Routledge) and Medicus Interruptus in the Behaviour of Disadvantaged Children in Scotland, in the British Journal of Sociology of Education.

This book examines the emergence of psychologised discourses of the self in education and considers their effects on children and young people, on relationships both in and out of school and on educational practices. It undertakes a Foucauldian genealogy of the discourses of the self in education in order to scrutinise the ‘focal points of experience’ for children and young people. Part One of the book offers a critical analysis of the discourses of the self that operate within interventions of self esteem, self concept, self efficacy and self regulation and their incursions into education. Part Two provides counter-narratives of the self, drawn principally from the arts and politics and providing alternative, and potentially radical, ways of when and how the self might speak. It also articulates how teachers may support children and young people in giving voice to these counter-narratives as they move through school.


Offers a critical analysis of current discourses of selfConsiders the effect of these discourses on young people both in school and outsideUncovers new counter-narratives and how they can be expressed by children and teachersJulie Allan is Professor of Equity and Inclusion at the University of Birmingham, UK where she was formerly Head of the School of Education. Julie’s research focuses on inclusion, disability studies and children’s rights and encompasses both empirical and theoretical work. She has been an expert adviser on policy, practice and research to governments, NGOs and Council of Europe. Julie and Valerie co-edited, together with Clara Jørgensen, The Routledge World Yearbook in Education 2020: Schooling, governance and inequalities.Valerie Harwood is a Professor of Sociology and Anthropology of Education, Sydney School of Education and Social Work, The University of Sydney. Valerie’s research is centred on a social and cultural analysis of participation in educational futures. This work involves learning about collaborative approaches and in-depth fieldwork on educational justice with young people, families and communities. Valerie and Julie are the authors of Psychopathology at School: Theorising Mental Disorder in Education (2014, Routledge) and Medicus Interruptus in the Behaviour of Disadvantaged Children in Scotland, in the British Journal of Sociology of Education.SciencePalgrave Standard US (P5)Palgrave Monograph (P6)EBOP41168Behavioral Science and Psychology009783031109980Personality and Differential PsychologyPsycholinguistics and Cognitive LingusiticsEducational PsychologyCounseling PsychologyChild and Adolescence Psychology447000
26
Behavioral Science and Psychology978-3-030-00089-9ArthurNancy ArthurNancy Arthur, University of Calgary, Calgary, AB, CanadaCounselling in Cultural ContextsIdentities and Social JusticeXII, 413 p. 6 illus.12018final169.9951.00181.8954.57149.9945.00199.9960.00Hard cover0International and Cultural PsychologyBehavioral Science and PsychologyContributed volumeBook0English413JMHSpringerSpringer International Publishing0Available2019-01-222019-01-112018-12-312018-12-311Part I: Foundational Concepts for Counselling in Cultural Contexts.- Infusing Culture and Social justice in Ethical Practices With All Clients.- Culture-Infused Counselling: Context, Identities, and Social Justice.- Part II: Culture-Infused Counselling: Case Studies of Contexts, Identities, and Social Justice.- Go Back to Your Trailer: Essential Social Class Awareness for Counsellors.- Fragmented Faith and the Rediscovery of God: A Feminist Perspective.- Culturally Responsive and Socially Just Engagement: An Emergent and Ongoing Process in Counselling Women.- The Weight of the World in her Hands.- Stephen’s Story: A Culture-Infused Perspective of Life-Making in Therapeutic Work With Transgender Clients.-Therapy as Ceremony: Decolonizing & Indigenizing Our Practice.- Intersections of Gender and Refugee Experience: Through Azra’s Eyes.- Using a Feminist-Multicultural Lens when Counselling Adolescent Females:Intersecting Cultural Identities and Multiple Social Locations.- The Relevance of Spirituality to Cultural Identity Reconstruction for African Caribbean Immigrant Women.- Intersectionality and International Student Identities in Transition.- Indigenizing and Decolonizing Therapeutic Responses to Trauma-related Dissociation.- Thinking Outside the Box: Integrating Culture, Identity, Academia, and Career/Life Planning with Aboriginal Women.- Prelude to the International Year of Mercy: Socially Just Counselling for Refugees.- Refugee-Serving Multicultural Therapy Practicum: An Example of a Culture-Infused, Service-Based Training Program.- Culture-Infused Counselling: Moving Forward with Applied Activism and AdvocacyThis accessible practice-building reference establishes a clear social justice lens for providing culturally-responsive and ethical multicultural counseling for all clients. Rooted in the principles of Culture-Infused Counseling, the book’s practical framework spotlights the evolving therapeutic relationship and diverse approaches to working with clients’ personal and relational challenges, including at the community and system levels. Case studies illustrate interventions with clients across various identities from race, gender, and class to immigration status, sexuality, spirituality, and body size, emphasizing the importance of viewing client’s presenting concerns within the contexts of their lives. Chapters also model counselor self-awareness so readers can assess their strengths, identify their hidden assumptions, and evolve past basic cultural sensitivity to actively infusing social justice as an ethical stance in professional practice.

Included in the chapters:



· Culture-infused counseling, emphasizing context, identities, and social justice

· Decolonizing and indigenous approaches

· Social class awareness

· Intersectionality of identities

· Clients’ spiritual and religious beliefs

· Weight bias as a social justice issue

· Culturally responsive and socially just engagement in counselling women

· Life-making in therapeutic work with transgender clients

· Socially-just counseling for refugees

· Multi-level systems approaches to interventions



While Counseling in Cultural Contexts is geared toward a student/training audience, practicing professionals will also find the case study format of the book to be informative and stimulating.		This accessible practice-building reference establishes a clear social justice lens for providing culturally-responsive and ethical multicultural counseling for all clients. Rooted in the principles of Culture-Infused Counseling, the book’s practical framework spotlights the evolving therapeutic relationship and diverse approaches to working with clients’ personal and relational challenges, including at the community and system levels. Case studies illustrate interventions with clients across various identities from race, gender, and class to immigration status, sexuality, spirituality, and body size, emphasizing the importance of viewing client’s presenting concerns within the contexts of their lives. Chapters also model counselor self-awareness so readers can assess their strengths, identify their hidden assumptions, and evolve past basic cultural sensitivity to actively infusing social justice as an ethical stance in professional practice.



Included inthe chapters:



· Culture-infused counseling, emphasizing context, identities, and social justice

· Decolonizing and indigenous approaches

· Social class awareness

· Intersectionality of identities

· Clients’ spiritual and religious beliefs

· Weight bias as a social justice issue

· Culturally responsive and socially just engagement in counselling women

· Life-making in therapeutic work with transgender clients

· Socially-just counseling for refugees

· Multi-level systems approaches to interventions



While Counseling in Cultural Contexts is geared toward a student/training audience, practicing professionals will also find the case study format of the book to be informative and stimulating.		Contributions by experienced practitionersUses a social justice perspectiveTakes a practice-advocate-scientist approachFocuses on the application of theory and researchDr. Nancy Arthur is a Professor and former Canada Research Chair, Werklund School of Education, University of Calgary, Calgary, Alberta, Canada. Dr. Arthur has written extensively in the field of multicultural counselling and co-developed the model of Culture-Infused Counselling, also adapted for use in career counselling. Dr. Arthur is a registered psychologist and elected Fellow of the Canadian Psychological Association and currently serves as Vice-President of the International Association for Educational and Vocational Guidance. Dr. Arthur’s research interests focus on professional education for diversity and social justice, and international learning and employment transitions.ScienceProfessional Books (2)Science (SC)EBOP41168Behavioral Science and Psychology009783030000899Cross-Cultural Psychology805000
27
Behavioral Science and Psychology978-3-031-26882-3BakerMonty T. Baker; Alyssa R. Ojeda; Hannah Pressley; Jessica Blalock; Riki Ann Martinez; Brian A. Moore; Vincent B. Van HasseltMonty T. Baker, Nova Southeastern University, Fort Lauderdale, FL, USA; Alyssa R. Ojeda, Nova Southeastern University, Fort Lauderdale, FL, USA; Hannah Pressley, Nova Southeastern University, Fort Lauderdale, FL, USA; Jessica Blalock, Nova Southeastern University, Fort Lauderdale, FL, USA; Riki Ann Martinez, Nova Southeastern University, Fort Lauderdale, FL, USA; Brian A. Moore, Kennesaw State University, Kennesaw, GA, USA; Vincent B. Van Hasselt, Nova Southeastern University, Fort Lauderdale, FL, USAViolence in the MilitaryXIV, 89 p.12023final49.9915.0053.4916.0544.9913.5054.9916.50Soft cover0SpringerBriefs in Behavioral CriminologyBehavioral Science and PsychologyBrief/PivotBook0English89JMKMMJSpringerSpringer Nature Switzerland0Available2023-03-312023-03-302023-04-172023-04-1711. Introduction to Violence in the Military.- 2. Suicide and Self-Harm in the Military.- 3. Military Sexual Violence: Sexual Assault, Sexual Harassment, and Sexual Hazing.- 4. Intimate Partner and Domestic Violence Among Military Populations.- 5. Violent Criminal Behavior in the Military.- 6. Clinical Implications, Limitations, Future Directions, and Conclusions.This brief highlights issues relating to military service members’ expression of violence outside of the military due to the constant readiness for or the exposure to organized violence. It investigates how service members are affected by these experiences, considering both the exacerbation of aggressive traits and the impact it has on mental health.The chapters address the following types of non-combat related violence:Suicide and Self-Harm in the MilitaryMilitary Sexual Violence: Sexual Assault, Sexual Harassment, and Sexual HazingIntimate Partner and Domestic Violence Among Military PopulationsViolent Criminal Behavior in the MilitaryThe volume also reviews the contributing factors to the perpetration of violence, including personality traits (i.e., aggression), the military life cycle, interpersonal dynamics, and mental health. It ultimately poses future directions to mitigate risk factors for non-combat related violence. This brief is ideal for military leaders, military psychologists, and mental health providers of service members and veterans.This brief highlights issues relating to military service members’ expression of violence outside of the military due to the constant readiness for or the exposure to organized violence. It investigates how service members are affected by these experiences, considering both the exacerbation of aggressive traits and the impact it has on mental health.

The chapters address the following types of non-combat related violence:Suicide and Self-Harm in the MilitaryMilitary Sexual Violence: Sexual Assault, Sexual Harassment, and Sexual HazingIntimate Partner and Domestic Violence Among Military PopulationsViolent Criminal Behavior in the Military

The volume also reviews the contributing factors to the perpetration of violence, including personality traits (i.e., aggression), the military life cycle, interpersonal dynamics, and mental health. It ultimately poses future directions to mitigate risk factors for non-combat related violence. This brief is ideal for military leaders, military psychologists, and mental health providers of service members and veterans.		A comprehensive resource examining non-combat violent behavior in the militaryAddresses contributory factors to non-combat related violencePresents calls to action and clinical implications for mental health providers and military professionalsMonty T. Baker, Ph.D. (Lieutenant Colonel, USAF, Ret.), received his Ph.D. in 2002 in Clinical Psychology at Nova Southeastern University. He completed his Clinical Psychology Residency at the Malcolm Grow Medical Center Andrews AFB, Maryland. Dr. Baker served over 30 years in the Military as an Operational and Clinical Psychologist with numerous combat deployments in support of OIF/OEF. He has also served as Military Primary Investigator on several grant funded research studies and has over 160 academic presentations and publications. Dr. Baker is currently a POTFF Psychologist for U.S. Army Special Forces Underwater Operations Unit (SFUWO), Senior Advisor to the Military Psychology Group (MPG) at Nova Southeastern University, and Adjunct Professor at University of Texas-Health Science Center at San Antonio.

Alyssa R. Ojeda, M.S., is a fourth-year clinical psychology doctoral student at Nova Southeastern University and recipient of the two-year U.S. Army Health Professions Scholarship Program. She is the program coordinator of the Military Psychology Group within the First Responder Research and Training Team, led by Dr. Vincent Van Hasselt. Her research and clinical interests include resilience, posttraumatic growth, and the integration of physical activity for mental health prevention and intervention.

Hannah Pressley, MA, MS, is a fourth-year clinical psychology doctorate student at Nova Southeastern University. Prior to attending Nova, she earned a master's degree in forensic and legal psychology at Marymount University. At present, she is active in the First Responder Research and Training Team throughout completing various projects, led by Dr. Vincent Van Hasselt. Hannah's primary research and clinical interests include health functioning of K9 handlers, neuropsychological evaluation and testing, and the clinical impact of military sexual trauma.

Jessica Blalock, M.S. is a fourth-year doctoral student in clinical psychology with a focus on first responders and forensic populations. She is an active member of the First Responder Research and Training Team and pioneered the largest survey of a national sample of first responders assessing occupational stress and mental well-being.

Riki Ann Martinez, MA, is a fourth-year clinical psychology doctoral student at Nova Southeastern University. She is currently the program coordinator of the Psychological Services for the Emotionally Distressed (PSED) clinic and works as a teacher's assistant for the Forensic Psychology Master's Program. Her clinical experiences consist of providing individual psychotherapy for individuals with serious mental illness and forensic populations. She also has significant experience conducting forensic evaluations for the court and working as a psychology trainee in a correctional facility. Her research interests include forensic assessment and criminal behavior and incarceration of military members.

Brian A. Moore, Ph.D. is an Assistant Professor of Psychology and the Director of the Center for the Advancement of Military and Emergency Services (AMES) Research at Kennesaw State University. Dr. Moore served 13 years in the Army and has extensively published on topics related to military and military-relevant populations.

Vincent B. Van Hasselt, PhD, is a professor of psychology and director of the Family Violence Program at Nova Southeastern University. He is also editor of Aggression and Violent Behavior: A Review Journal and Journal of Family Violence. Dr. Van Hasselt has served as lecturer and consultant to the FBI’s Behavioral Science, Crisis Negotiation, and Law Enforcement Communication Units, and is part of the bureau’s Crisis Prevention and Intervention Program. His clinical and research interests are in the areas of crisis and hostage negotiations, polic		ScienceProfessional Books (2)Science (SC)EBOP41168Behavioral Science and Psychology009783031268823Forensic PsychologyMilitary PsychologyMental HealthCriminal BehaviorTrauma Psychology174000
28
Behavioral Science and Psychology978-3-030-04821-1CiofaloNuria CiofaloNuria Ciofalo, West Hills, CA, USAIndigenous Psychologies in an Era of DecolonizationXV, 242 p. 50 illus., 49 illus. in color.12019final179.9954.00192.5957.78159.9948.00199.9960.00Hard cover0International and Cultural PsychologyBehavioral Science and PsychologyContributed volumeBook0English242JMHSpringerSpringer International Publishing0Available2019-02-052019-01-262019-02-122019-02-121Indigenous Psychologies: A Contestation for Epistemic Justice.- The Ecological Context and the Methods of Inquiry and Praxes.- Once Upon a River and Ghosts: Jan Kachik Kisin Yoko Ja`.- Uk’Ay K’ax (El Canto De La Selva—Song of the Rainforest).- Environmental Impact Assessment of Deforestation in three Communities of the Lacandon Rainforest.- Jootik Ta Lum Kinal (Mayan Tzeltal)— To’on Yejer Ru’um (Mayan Lacandon)
Nosotros y la Tierra (Spanish)—We and the Earth.- Oral History, Legends, Myths, Poetry, and Images.- Conclusions: Making the Road by Walking ‘de Otra Manera’ (in a Different Way).		This groundbreaking volume explores the capacity of Indigenous psychologies to counter the effects of longstanding colonization on traditional cultures and habitats. It chronicles the editor’s extensive research in the Lacandon Rainforest in southern Mexico, illustrating respectful methodologies and authentic friendship—a decolonized approach by a committed scholar—and the concerted efforts of community members to preserve their history and heritage. Descriptions of collaborations among children, parents, students, and elders demonstrate the continued passing on of indigenous knowledge, culture, art, and spirituality. This richly layered narrative models cultural resilience and resistance in their transformative power to replace environmental and cultural degradation with co-existence and partnership.Included in the coverage:• Indigenous psychologies: a contestation for epistemic justice. • The ecological context and the methods of inquiry and praxes.• Environmental impact assessment of deforestation in three communities of the Lacandon Rainforest.• Public policy development for community and ecological wellbeing. • Oral history, legends, myths, poetry, and images. With stirring examples to inspire future practices and policies, Indigenous Psychologies in an Era of Decolonization will take its place as a bedrock text for indigenous psychology and community psychology researchers. It speaks needed truths as the world comes to grips with pressing issues of environmental preservation, restorative justice for marginalized peoples, and the waging of peace over conflict.This groundbreaking volume explores the capacity of Indigenous psychologies to counter the effects of longstanding colonization on traditional cultures and habitats. It chronicles the editor’s extensive research in the Lacandon Rainforest in southern Mexico, illustrating respectful methodologies and authentic friendship—a decolonized approach by a committed scholar—and the concerted efforts of community members to preserve their history and heritage. Descriptions of collaborations among children, parents, students, and elders demonstrate the continued passing on of indigenous knowledge, culture, art, and spirituality. This richly layered narrative models cultural resilience and resistance in their transformative power to replace environmental and cultural degradation with co-existence and partnership.Included in the coverage:• Indigenous psychologies: a contestation for epistemic justice. • The ecological context and the methods of inquiry and praxes.• Environmental impact assessment of deforestation in three communities of the Lacandon Rainforest.• Public policy development for community and ecological wellbeing. • Oral history, legends, myths, poetry, and images. With stirring examples to inspire future practices and policies, Indigenous Psychologies in an Era of Decolonization will take its place as a bedrock text for indigenous psychology and community psychology researchers. It speaks needed truths as the world comes to grips with pressing issues of environmental preservation, restorative justice for marginalized peoples, and the waging of peace over conflict.<div>
</div>		Co- constructs decolonial approaches to knowledge and praxis generationPresents Indigenous worldviews narrated by Indigenous co-authorsProposes a revolutionary academia that rejects the colonial differenceNuria Ciofalo is co-Chair and Professor of the Community Psychology, Liberation Psychology, and Ecopsychology specialization at Pacifica Graduate Institute. Born in Mexico, she gained her B.A. and first M.A. in Clinical and Social Psychology in Germany where she specialized in psychoanalytic theories. Her M.A. in Urban and Regional Planning and Ph.D. in Community Psychology at the University of Hawaii immersed her in the Native Hawaiian sovereignty movement and healing practices. She has worked with Indigenous communities in Hawaii, Northern, Central, and Southern Mexico for more than 30 years. She teaches Indigenous psychologies centering Indigenous wisdom, cosmologies, and healing practices in academic curricula.ScienceProfessional Books (2)Science (SC)EBOP41168Behavioral Science and Psychology009783030048211Cross-Cultural Psychology559000
29
Behavioral Science and Psychology978-3-031-00664-7DanielsKevin Daniels; Olga Tregaskis; Rachel Nayani; David WatsonKevin Daniels, University of East Anglia, Norwich, UK; Olga Tregaskis, University of East Anglia, Norwich; Rachel Nayani, University of East Anglia, Norwich, UK; David Watson, University of East Anglia, Norwich, UKAchieving Sustainable Workplace WellbeingXII, 164 p. 2 illus.12022final99.9930.00106.9932.1089.9927.00109.9933.00Hard cover0Aligning Perspectives on Health, Safety and Well-BeingBehavioral Science and PsychologyMonographBook0English164KJMV2JSpringerSpringer International Publishing0Available2022-07-082022-07-072022-07-252022-07-251Part 1: Conceptual background.- Introduction.- Conceptual models of implementation.- Part 2. Research on implementation.- Context – discrete – tangible changes, intended and emergent mechanisms.- Context – competing logics.- Context – delivery – governance, signals and evaluation.- Studies of implementation: How organisations make things work - learning, adaptation and continuation.- Putting the workplace back into workplace wellbeing.- Part 3. Looking forward.- Intentions, emergence and authenticity.- Conclusions and extensions.In this groundbreaking interdisciplinary work, the authors focus on organizational analysis to understand workplace wellbeing, deviating from previous research that mostly looks at the individual worker or intervention. In addressing the question of why workplace health and wellbeing practices initiatives fall short of delivering sustained improvements in worker wellbeing, this book moves beyond localized explanations of the failure of specific interventions. Instead, it creates theoretical frameworks that explain how wellbeing at work can be improved and sustained. The authors use evidence from systematic and comprehensive surveys of the literature as well as new empirical research, and present an explanatory framework of the processes through which organizations change to implement and accommodate workplace health and wellbeing practices. Learning, adaptation and continuation explain successful implementation of workplace health and wellbeing practices, while Gestalting, fracturing and grafting explain how organizations resolve or negotiate conflict between health and wellbeing practices and existing organizational procedures, systems and practices. In addition, the authors reflect on the implications for research of reframing the unit of analysis as the organization and how studies on workplace wellbeing practices can provide a conceptual platform for thinking about the way organizations can create social value in a broader sense.This book, authored by experts in their field, is a great resource for academics and professionals of organizational studies and of worker wellbeing across the social sciences, behavioural sciences, business and management courses, wellbeing research, and labour studies.In this groundbreaking interdisciplinary work, the authors focus on organizational analysis to understand workplace wellbeing, deviating from previous research that mostly looks at the individual worker or intervention. In addressing the question of why workplace health and wellbeing practices initiatives fall short of delivering sustained improvements in worker wellbeing, this book moves beyond localized explanations of the failure of specific interventions. Instead, it creates theoretical frameworks that explain how wellbeing at work can be improved and sustained. The authors use evidence from systematic and comprehensive surveys of the literature as well as new empirical research, and present an explanatory framework of the processes through which organizations change to implement and accommodate workplace health and wellbeing practices. Learning, adaptation and continuation explain successful implementation of workplace health and wellbeing practices, while Gestalting, fracturing and grafting explain how organizations resolve or negotiate conflict between health and wellbeing practices and existing organizational procedures, systems and practices. In addition, the authors reflect on the implications for research of reframing the unit of analysis as the organization and how studies on workplace wellbeing practices can provide a conceptual platform for thinking about the way organizations can create social value in a broader sense.

This book, authored by experts in their field, is a great resource for academics and professionals of organizational studies and of worker wellbeing across the social sciences, behavioural sciences, business and management courses, wellbeing research, and labour studies.
Provides a comprehensive, dynamic and multilevel explanation of how workplace wellbeing is created and sustainedBrings a unique interdisciplinary perspective to understanding organizational practice.Opens up new avenues of research for understanding how organizations can protect and promote worker wellbeingKevin Daniels is Professor of Organizational Behaviour in the Employment Systems Group, Norwich Business School, University of East Anglia. He has been researching workplace wellbeing, health and safety for over 30 years and is currently co-editor of Springer’s Handbook Series in Occupational Health Sciences and an associate editor of the British Journal of Management. He was previously editor of the European Journal of Work and Organizational Psychology and held associate editor roles at the Journal of Occupational and Organizational Psychology and Human Relations. He has published over 140 peer-reviewed scientific journal articles, book chapters and scientific reports. Since 2015, he has led a multidisciplinary program of research focused on how organisations manage workplace wellbeing that has been funded by the successive grants from the UK Economic and Social Research Council and has involved 30 staff and PhD students.Olga Tregaskis is Professor of International Human Resource Management at the University of East Anglia, Head of Norwich Business School and one of the senior social scientists working with the UK’s national What Works Centre for Wellbeing and Centre for Climate Change and Social Transformation. A graduate of both the University of Ulster and Cranfield School of Management, Olga’s research interests centre on human resource management, management in multinational organisations and implementation of change management. She has held an associate editor role at the FT50 ranked academic journal Human Relations, and is editorial board member of a number of prestigious academic journals. She is a member of the REF2021 sub-panel for Business & Management which is the UK’s system for assessing the quality of research in UK higher education institutions. She has published over 100 peer-reviewed journal articles, research reports, book chapters and practice tools.

Rachel Nayani is Associate Professor in Organisational Behaviour and Human Resource Management at the University of East Anglia. Rachel teaches the practices and principles of Organisation Development. Her research primarily involves understanding organisational process and practices for sustainable change and social value including wellbeing alongside enhanced productivity at work and climate goals. Rachel has undertaken research for the UK national What Works Centre for Wellbeing, the Institution of Occupational Safety and Health and the Economic Social Research Council. She has authored several book chapters on wellbeing and remote working, has published in journals such as Work and Stress and is a member of the editorial board of the European Journal of Work and Organizational Psychology.

David Watson is Associate Professor in Organizational Behaviour at Norwich Business School, University of East Anglia. He is an interdisciplinary research who has carried out research on wellbeing in a number of contexts including education, community organizations and the workplace. He is interested in how organizations’ intentions to achieve wellbeing materialise in practice and factors associated with this. Through funded research David has carried out a number of evidence reviews exploring relationships between work, learning and wellbeing and in-depth qualitative fieldwork. He is the author of several book chapters and peer reviewed journal articles in journals, such as the European Journal of Work and Organizational Psychology; Ergonomics; and Organization.		ScienceProfessional Books (2)Science (SC)EBOP41168Behavioral Science and Psychology009783031006647Employee Health and WellbeingSociology of Organizations and OccupationsHuman Resource ManagementOccupational HealthWork and Organizational Psychology436000
30
Behavioral Science and Psychology978-3-031-00791-0DanielsKevin Daniels; Olga Tregaskis; Rachel Nayani; David WatsonKevin Daniels, University of East Anglia, Norwich, UK; Olga Tregaskis, University of East Anglia, Norwich; Rachel Nayani, University of East Anglia, Norwich, UK; David Watson, University of East Anglia, Norwich, UKAchieving Sustainable Workplace WellbeingXII, 164 p. 2 illus.12022final99.9930.00106.9932.1089.9927.00109.9933.00Soft cover1Aligning Perspectives on Health, Safety and Well-BeingBehavioral Science and PsychologyMonographBook0English164KJMV2JSpringerSpringer International Publishing0Available2023-07-092022-07-072023-07-082023-07-081Part 1: Conceptual background.- Introduction.- Conceptual models of implementation.- Part 2. Research on implementation.- Context – discrete – tangible changes, intended and emergent mechanisms.- Context – competing logics.- Context – delivery – governance, signals and evaluation.- Studies of implementation: How organisations make things work - learning, adaptation and continuation.- Putting the workplace back into workplace wellbeing.- Part 3. Looking forward.- Intentions, emergence and authenticity.- Conclusions and extensions.In this groundbreaking interdisciplinary work, the authors focus on organizational analysis to understand workplace wellbeing, deviating from previous research that mostly looks at the individual worker or intervention. In addressing the question of why workplace health and wellbeing practices initiatives fall short of delivering sustained improvements in worker wellbeing, this book moves beyond localized explanations of the failure of specific interventions. Instead, it creates theoretical frameworks that explain how wellbeing at work can be improved and sustained. The authors use evidence from systematic and comprehensive surveys of the literature as well as new empirical research, and present an explanatory framework of the processes through which organizations change to implement and accommodate workplace health and wellbeing practices. Learning, adaptation and continuation explain successful implementation of workplace health and wellbeing practices, while Gestalting, fracturing and grafting explain how organizations resolve or negotiate conflict between health and wellbeing practices and existing organizational procedures, systems and practices. In addition, the authors reflect on the implications for research of reframing the unit of analysis as the organization and how studies on workplace wellbeing practices can provide a conceptual platform for thinking about the way organizations can create social value in a broader sense.This book, authored by experts in their field, is a great resource for academics and professionals of organizational studies and of worker wellbeing across the social sciences, behavioural sciences, business and management courses, wellbeing research, and labour studies.In this groundbreaking interdisciplinary work, the authors focus on organizational analysis to understand workplace wellbeing, deviating from previous research that mostly looks at the individual worker or intervention. In addressing the question of why workplace health and wellbeing practices initiatives fall short of delivering sustained improvements in worker wellbeing, this book moves beyond localized explanations of the failure of specific interventions. Instead, it creates theoretical frameworks that explain how wellbeing at work can be improved and sustained. The authors use evidence from systematic and comprehensive surveys of the literature as well as new empirical research, and present an explanatory framework of the processes through which organizations change to implement and accommodate workplace health and wellbeing practices. Learning, adaptation and continuation explain successful implementation of workplace health and wellbeing practices, while Gestalting, fracturing and grafting explain how organizations resolve or negotiate conflict between health and wellbeing practices and existing organizational procedures, systems and practices. In addition, the authors reflect on the implications for research of reframing the unit of analysis as the organization and how studies on workplace wellbeing practices can provide a conceptual platform for thinking about the way organizations can create social value in a broader sense.

This book, authored by experts in their field, is a great resource for academics and professionals of organizational studies and of worker wellbeing across the social sciences, behavioural sciences, business and management courses, wellbeing research, and labour studies.
Provides a comprehensive, dynamic and multilevel explanation of how workplace wellbeing is created and sustainedBrings a unique interdisciplinary perspective to understanding organizational practice.Opens up new avenues of research for understanding how organizations can protect and promote worker wellbeingKevin Daniels is Professor of Organizational Behaviour in the Employment Systems Group, Norwich Business School, University of East Anglia. He has been researching workplace wellbeing, health and safety for over 30 years and is currently co-editor of Springer’s Handbook Series in Occupational Health Sciences and an associate editor of the British Journal of Management. He was previously editor of the European Journal of Work and Organizational Psychology and held associate editor roles at the Journal of Occupational and Organizational Psychology and Human Relations. He has published over 140 peer-reviewed scientific journal articles, book chapters and scientific reports. Since 2015, he has led a multidisciplinary program of research focused on how organisations manage workplace wellbeing that has been funded by the successive grants from the UK Economic and Social Research Council and has involved 30 staff and PhD students.Olga Tregaskis is Professor of International Human Resource Management at the University of East Anglia, Head of Norwich Business School and one of the senior social scientists working with the UK’s national What Works Centre for Wellbeing and Centre for Climate Change and Social Transformation. A graduate of both the University of Ulster and Cranfield School of Management, Olga’s research interests centre on human resource management, management in multinational organisations and implementation of change management. She has held an associate editor role at the FT50 ranked academic journal Human Relations, and is editorial board member of a number of prestigious academic journals. She is a member of the REF2021 sub-panel for Business & Management which is the UK’s system for assessing the quality of research in UK higher education institutions. She has published over 100 peer-reviewed journal articles, research reports, book chapters and practice tools.

Rachel Nayani is Associate Professor in Organisational Behaviour and Human Resource Management at the University of East Anglia. Rachel teaches the practices and principles of Organisation Development. Her research primarily involves understanding organisational process and practices for sustainable change and social value including wellbeing alongside enhanced productivity at work and climate goals. Rachel has undertaken research for the UK national What Works Centre for Wellbeing, the Institution of Occupational Safety and Health and the Economic Social Research Council. She has authored several book chapters on wellbeing and remote working, has published in journals such as Work and Stress and is a member of the editorial board of the European Journal of Work and Organizational Psychology.

David Watson is Associate Professor in Organizational Behaviour at Norwich Business School, University of East Anglia. He is an interdisciplinary research who has carried out research on wellbeing in a number of contexts including education, community organizations and the workplace. He is interested in how organizations’ intentions to achieve wellbeing materialise in practice and factors associated with this. Through funded research David has carried out a number of evidence reviews exploring relationships between work, learning and wellbeing and in-depth qualitative fieldwork. He is the author of several book chapters and peer reviewed journal articles in journals, such as the European Journal of Work and Organizational Psychology; Ergonomics; and Organization.		ScienceProfessional Books (2)Science (SC)EBOP41168Behavioral Science and Psychology009783031007910Employee Health and WellbeingSociology of Organizations and OccupationsHuman Resource ManagementOccupational HealthWork and Organizational Psychology279000
31
Behavioral Science and Psychology978-3-030-26603-5Díaz-LovingRolando Díaz-LovingRolando Díaz-Loving, National Autonomous University of Mexico, Mexico City, MexicoEthnopsychologyPieces from the Mexican Research GalleryXIII, 186 p. 11 illus., 2 illus. in color.12019final109.9933.00117.6935.3199.9930.00119.9936.00Hard cover0Latin American VoicesBehavioral Science and PsychologyMonographBook0English186JMSJMHSpringerSpringer International Publishing0Available2019-10-172019-10-092019-11-052019-11-051<div>Chapter 1: Culture, eco-systems and behavior.- Chapter 2: Ethnopsychology: inserting socio-cultural components into a bio-psychological discipline.- Chapter 3: Self-construal and identity.- Chapter 4: Gender and masculinity- femininity.- Chapter 5: Personality.- Chapter 6: Close Relationships.- Chapter 7: Family.- Chapter 8: Past, present and future of Mexican Ethnopsychology. </div>This book presents an overview of Mexican ethnopsychology, an original theoretical and methodological approach that seeks to complement the mainstream psychological science – based on universal principles, processes and constructs – with scientific methods to study the idiosyncratic features and behaviors typical of specific cultural groups. It proposes a historic-bio-psycho-socio-cultural theoretical model to describe research findings of social, psychological, collective and individual phenomena.Psychology is at a crossroads of years of research with stress on internal validity and little attention to contextual and cultural variables. It becomes fundamental to continue on the internal validity track but at the same time incorporate external validity issues. The growth of indigenous movements and data allows for a profound evaluation of the extents to which apparent universal phenomena are truly universal, and to what extent they are idiosyncratic manifestations of the cultures where the mainstream research is conducted.Mexican ethnopsychologists have been following this path for decades, since the pioneer work of Rogelio Díaz-Guerrero, but until now little has been published in English about this innovative theoretical approach. Ethnopsychology – Pieces from the Mexican Research Gallery fills this gap by presenting the international community an overview of Mexican ethnopsychology and thus providing a useful tool to behavioral, social and health scientists interested in understanding how culture shapes both collective and individual behaviors.This book presents an overview of Mexican ethnopsychology, an original theoretical and methodological approach that seeks to complement the mainstream psychological science – based on universal principles, processes and constructs – with scientific methods to study the idiosyncratic features and behaviors typical of specific cultural groups. It proposes a historic-bio-psycho-socio-cultural theoretical model to describe research findings of social, psychological, collective and individual phenomena.

Psychology is at a crossroads of years of research with stress on internal validity and little attention to contextual and cultural variables. It becomes fundamental to continue on the internal validity track but at the same time incorporate external validity issues. The growth of indigenous movements and data allows for a profound evaluation of the extents to which apparent universal phenomena are truly universal, and to what extent they are idiosyncratic manifestations of the cultures where the mainstream research is conducted.

Mexican ethnopsychologists have been following this path for decades, since the pioneer work of Rogelio Díaz-Guerrero, but until now little has been published in English about this innovative theoretical approach. Ethnopsychology – Pieces from the Mexican Research Gallery fills this gap by presenting the international community an overview of Mexican ethnopsychology and thus providing a useful tool to behavioral, social and health scientists interested in understanding how culture shapes both collective and individual behaviors.		Proposes a historic-bio-psycho-socio-cultural theoretical model to describe research findings of social, psychological, collective and individual phenomenaDescribes scientific methods to evaluate the extent to which apparent universal phenomena are truly universal or idiosyncratic manifestations of specific culturesPresents an original contribution from Latin America to the study of social and cultural psychologyRolando Díaz-Loving is full professor in the School of Psychology at the National Autonomous University of Mexico (UNAM), where he is also the director of the Unity of Psychosocial Research. One of the most prominent psychologists in Mexico, Dr. Díaz-Loving has a PhD in social psychology from the University of Texas in Austin, is a founding member of the Mexican Association of Social Psychology and is a past president of the Interamerican Society of Psychology.

ScienceProfessional Books (2)Science (SC)EBOP41168Behavioral Science and Psychology009783030266035Personality and Differential PsychologyCross-Cultural PsychologySociocultural AnthropologySocial Psychology471000
32
Behavioral Science and Psychology978-3-030-26606-6Díaz-LovingRolando Díaz-LovingRolando Díaz-Loving, National Autonomous University of Mexico, Mexico City, MexicoEthnopsychologyPieces from the Mexican Research GalleryXIII, 186 p. 11 illus., 2 illus. in color.12019final79.9924.0085.5925.6869.9921.0089.9927.00Soft cover1Latin American VoicesBehavioral Science and PsychologyMonographBook0English186JMSJMHSpringerSpringer International Publishing0Available2020-10-172019-10-092020-10-172020-10-171<div>Chapter 1: Culture, eco-systems and behavior.- Chapter 2: Ethnopsychology: inserting socio-cultural components into a bio-psychological discipline.- Chapter 3: Self-construal and identity.- Chapter 4: Gender and masculinity- femininity.- Chapter 5: Personality.- Chapter 6: Close Relationships.- Chapter 7: Family.- Chapter 8: Past, present and future of Mexican Ethnopsychology. </div>This book presents an overview of Mexican ethnopsychology, an original theoretical and methodological approach that seeks to complement the mainstream psychological science – based on universal principles, processes and constructs – with scientific methods to study the idiosyncratic features and behaviors typical of specific cultural groups. It proposes a historic-bio-psycho-socio-cultural theoretical model to describe research findings of social, psychological, collective and individual phenomena.Psychology is at a crossroads of years of research with stress on internal validity and little attention to contextual and cultural variables. It becomes fundamental to continue on the internal validity track but at the same time incorporate external validity issues. The growth of indigenous movements and data allows for a profound evaluation of the extents to which apparent universal phenomena are truly universal, and to what extent they are idiosyncratic manifestations of the cultures where the mainstream research is conducted.Mexican ethnopsychologists have been following this path for decades, since the pioneer work of Rogelio Díaz-Guerrero, but until now little has been published in English about this innovative theoretical approach. Ethnopsychology – Pieces from the Mexican Research Gallery fills this gap by presenting the international community an overview of Mexican ethnopsychology and thus providing a useful tool to behavioral, social and health scientists interested in understanding how culture shapes both collective and individual behaviors.This book presents an overview of Mexican ethnopsychology, an original theoretical and methodological approach that seeks to complement the mainstream psychological science – based on universal principles, processes and constructs – with scientific methods to study the idiosyncratic features and behaviors typical of specific cultural groups. It proposes a historic-bio-psycho-socio-cultural theoretical model to describe research findings of social, psychological, collective and individual phenomena.

Psychology is at a crossroads of years of research with stress on internal validity and little attention to contextual and cultural variables. It becomes fundamental to continue on the internal validity track but at the same time incorporate external validity issues. The growth of indigenous movements and data allows for a profound evaluation of the extents to which apparent universal phenomena are truly universal, and to what extent they are idiosyncratic manifestations of the cultures where the mainstream research is conducted.

Mexican ethnopsychologists have been following this path for decades, since the pioneer work of Rogelio Díaz-Guerrero, but until now little has been published in English about this innovative theoretical approach. Ethnopsychology – Pieces from the Mexican Research Gallery fills this gap by presenting the international community an overview of Mexican ethnopsychology and thus providing a useful tool to behavioral, social and health scientists interested in understanding how culture shapes both collective and individual behaviors.		Proposes a historic-bio-psycho-socio-cultural theoretical model to describe research findings of social, psychological, collective and individual phenomenaDescribes scientific methods to evaluate the extent to which apparent universal phenomena are truly universal or idiosyncratic manifestations of specific culturesPresents an original contribution from Latin America to the study of social and cultural psychologyRolando Díaz-Loving is full professor in the School of Psychology at the National Autonomous University of Mexico (UNAM), where he is also the director of the Unity of Psychosocial Research. One of the most prominent psychologists in Mexico, Dr. Díaz-Loving has a PhD in social psychology from the University of Texas in Austin, is a founding member of the Mexican Association of Social Psychology and is a past president of the Interamerican Society of Psychology.

ScienceProfessional Books (2)Science (SC)EBOP41168Behavioral Science and Psychology009783030266066Personality and Differential PsychologyCross-Cultural PsychologySociocultural AnthropologySocial Psychology314000
33
Behavioral Science and Psychology978-3-030-70261-8DimitrovaRadosveta Dimitrova; Nora WiiumRadosveta Dimitrova, Stockholm University, Stockholm, Sweden; Nora Wiium, University of Bergen, Bergen, NorwayHandbook of Positive Youth DevelopmentAdvancing Research, Policy, and Practice in Global ContextsXLIV, 659 p. 37 illus., 4 illus. in color.12021final329.9999.00353.09105.93279.9984.00379.99114.00Hard cover0Springer Series on Child and Family StudiesBehavioral Science and PsychologyHandbookBook0English659JMCTCBSpringerSpringer International Publishing1Available2021-10-232021-10-232021-11-092021-11-091Part I: Positive Youth Development in Global Contexts.- 1. Handbook of Positive Youth Development: Advancing the Next Generation of Research, Policy and Practice in Global Contexts.- 2. The 7Cs and Developmental Assets Models of Positive Youth Development in India, Indonesia and Pakistan.- 3. The 7Cs of Positive Youth Development in Colombia and Peru: A Promising Model for Reduction of Risky Behaviors among Youth and Emerging Adults.- 4. Promoting Mindfulness through the 7Cs of Positive Youth Development in Malaysia.- 5. The Five Cs Model of Positive Youth Development and the PATHS Project in Mainland China.- 6. Positive Youth Development and Environmental Concerns among Youth and Emerging Adults in Ghana.- 7. Positive Youth Development and the Big Five Personality Traits in Youth from Belize.- 8. Healthy Lifestyle Behaviors and the 5Cs of Positive Youth Development in Mexico.- 9. The Relationship between Emerging Adults and their Parents as PYD Promotive Factor in Brazil.- 10. Developmental Assets, Academic Achievement and Risky Behaviors among Albanians in Albania, Kosovo, Macedonia and Serbia.- 11. Developmental Assets and Identity among Emerging Adults in Turkey.- 12. Social Support among Slovene Minority and Italian Majority Youth in Italy: Links with Positive Identity, Social Competence and Academic Achievement.- 13. Positive Youth Development and Subjective Happiness: Examining the Mediating Role of Gratitude and Optimism in Spanish Emerging Adults.- 14. Positive Youth Development and Resilience among Youth in Iceland: The Importance of Social Context and Self-Esteem for Life Satisfaction.- 15. Parental Support, Peer Support and School Connectedness as Foundations for Student Engagement and Academic Achievement in Australian Youth.- 16. The 5Cs of Positive Youth Development in New Zealand: Relations with Hopeful Expectations for the Future and Life Satisfaction among Emerging Adults.- 17. Country and Gender Differences in Developmental Assets among Youth andEmerging Adults in Ghana and Norway.- 18. Positive Youth Development in Bulgaria, Italy, Norway and Romania: Testing the Factorial Structure and Measurement Invariance of the 5Cs.- Part II: Positive Youth Development Applications and Interventions.- 19. International Collaboration in the Study of Positive Youth Development.- 20. Positive Youth Development in Jamaica: Latent Growth of Self-Efficacy and Youth Assets.- 21. Leadership Development of Zulu Male Youth in a South African Township.- 22. Social Emotional Learning Program from a Positive Youth Development Perspective in Slovenia.- 23. The Trajectories of Positive Youth Development in Lithuania: Evidence from Community and Intervention Settings.- 24. Positive Youth Development through Student Engagement: Associations with Well-Being.- 25. Capitalizing on Classroom Climate to Promote Positive Development.- 26. Youth Participation in the Dream School Program in Norway: An Application of a Logic Model of the Six Cs of Positive YouthDevelopment.- 27. The Cultural Adaptation of Interventions to Promote Positive Development: The Preschool Edition of PATHS® in Sweden.- 28. Another Way Out: A Positive Youth Development Approach to the Study of Violent Radicalization in Québec, Canada.- 29. Engaging Marginalized Youth in Positive Development: The Changing Lives Program.- 30. Family Processes and Competence in a Positive Youth Development Context: Perspectives for African American Youth.- 31. Teaching Mothers and Fathers about How Children Develop: Parenting Knowledge and Practices.- 32. Promoting Positive Youth Development through Healthy Middle School Environments.- 33. Promoting Positive Youth Development through Scouting.- 34. Social Change and the Dynamic Family Transmission of Youth Vocational Competence.- 35. Positive Youth Development in the Digital Age: Expanding PYD to Include Digital Settings.- 36. From PreventioThis handbook examines positive youth development (PYD) in youth and emerging adults from an international perspective. It focuses on large and underrepresented cultural groups across six continents within a strengths-based conception of adolescence that considers all youth as having assets. The volume explores the ways in which developmental assets, when effectively harnessed, empower youth to transition into a productive and resourceful adulthood. The book focuses on PYD across vast geographical regions, including Europe, Asia, Africa, Middle East, Australia, New Zealand, North America, and Latin America as well as on strengths and resources for optimal well-being. The handbook addresses the positive development of young people across various cultural contexts to advance research, policy, and practice and inform interventions that foster continued thriving and reduce the chances of compromised youth development. It presents theoretical perspectives and supporting empirical findings to promote a more comprehensive understanding of PYD from an integrated, multidisciplinary, and multinational perspective.The Handbook of Positive Youth Development in a Global Context is an essential resource for researchers, professors, and graduate students as well as clinicians, therapists, and other professionals in developmental, clinical child, and school psychology, public health and prevention science, family studies, cross-cultural psychology, child and adolescent psychiatry, social work, educational policy and politics, anthropology, sociology, social psychology and all interrelated disciplines.This handbook examines positive youth development (PYD) in youth and emerging adults from an international perspective. It focuses on large and underrepresented cultural groups across six continents within a strengths-based conception of adolescence that considers all youth as having assets. The volume explores the ways in which developmental assets, when effectively harnessed, empower youth to transition into a productive and resourceful adulthood. The book focuses on PYD across vast geographical regions, including Europe, Asia, Africa, Middle East, Australia, New Zealand, North America, and Latin America as well as on strengths and resources for optimal well-being. The handbook addresses the positive development of young people across various cultural contexts to advance research, policy, and practice and inform interventions that foster continued thriving and reduce the chances of compromised youth development. It presents theoretical perspectives and supporting empirical findings to promote a more comprehensive understanding of PYD from an integrated, multidisciplinary, and multinational perspective.Winner of the 2022 Ursula Gielen Global Psychology Book Award, American Psychological Association, APAWinner of the 2022 Social Policy Book Publication Award, the Society for Research on Adolescence, SRAExplores ways in which assets, when effectively harnessed, empower youth to transition into a productive and resourceful adulthoodRadosveta Dimitrova holds a PhD in Developmental Psychology (University of Trieste, Italy received the best dissertation award of the Italian Association of Psychology) and a PhD in Cross-Cultural Psychology (Tilburg University, the Netherlands received the best dissertation award of the Society for Research in Child Development (SRCD). She is the recipient of the 2016 Scientist Award of the International Society for the Study of Behavioral Development (ISSBD) for distinguished theoretical contribution and programmatic research to the study of behavioral development and dissemination of developmental science. Her main research interests regard positive development, acculturation, migration, identity, indigenous and vulnerable ethnic minority communities, and adaptation of measures for use in different cultures. She has research and teaching experience in leading universities in the United States, the Netherlands, Japan, New Zealand, Italy, Norway, Sweden and international collaborations and projects in Europe, Asia, Africa, Australia, New Zealand, North and South America. She has widely published in developmental science, cross-cultural and international psychology, human development, emerging adulthood, child and family studies and assessment fields by also serving governing councils of major organizations and editorial boards of leading journals in these fields.

Nora Wiium is an Associate Professor of Developmental Psychology at the Faculty of Psychology, University of Bergen, Norway where she obtained her PhD in Health Promotion. Her teaching and research activities regard developmental psychology, health behaviors and youth development. Since 2014 she leads an international project on Positive Youth Development (PYD) representing collaborations from over 30 countries across Africa, Asia, Australia, Europe, the Middle East, North and South America and expertise from diverse scientific fields including health psychology, developmental psychology, human development, intervention and implementation science. She has co-edited a special issue on PYD across cultures in Child & Youth Care Forum and has served as a reviewer or guest editor for several journals, including Frontiers in Psychology and International Journal of Public Health.		ScienceProfessional Books (2)Science (SC)EBOP41168Behavioral Science and Psychology009783030702618Developmental PsychologyBiotechnologyPublic Health1503100
34
Behavioral Science and Psychology978-3-030-70264-9DimitrovaRadosveta Dimitrova; Nora WiiumRadosveta Dimitrova, Stockholm University, Stockholm, Sweden; Nora Wiium, University of Bergen, Bergen, NorwayHandbook of Positive Youth DevelopmentAdvancing Research, Policy, and Practice in Global ContextsXLIV, 659 p. 37 illus., 4 illus. in color.12021final329.9999.00353.09105.93279.9984.00379.99114.00Soft cover1Springer Series on Child and Family StudiesBehavioral Science and PsychologyHandbookBook0English659JMCTCBSpringerSpringer International Publishing1Available2022-10-242021-10-232022-10-232022-10-231Part I: Positive Youth Development in Global Contexts.- 1. Handbook of Positive Youth Development: Advancing the Next Generation of Research, Policy and Practice in Global Contexts.- 2. The 7Cs and Developmental Assets Models of Positive Youth Development in India, Indonesia and Pakistan.- 3. The 7Cs of Positive Youth Development in Colombia and Peru: A Promising Model for Reduction of Risky Behaviors among Youth and Emerging Adults.- 4. Promoting Mindfulness through the 7Cs of Positive Youth Development in Malaysia.- 5. The Five Cs Model of Positive Youth Development and the PATHS Project in Mainland China.- 6. Positive Youth Development and Environmental Concerns among Youth and Emerging Adults in Ghana.- 7. Positive Youth Development and the Big Five Personality Traits in Youth from Belize.- 8. Healthy Lifestyle Behaviors and the 5Cs of Positive Youth Development in Mexico.- 9. The Relationship between Emerging Adults and their Parents as PYD Promotive Factor in Brazil.- 10. Developmental Assets, Academic Achievement and Risky Behaviors among Albanians in Albania, Kosovo, Macedonia and Serbia.- 11. Developmental Assets and Identity among Emerging Adults in Turkey.- 12. Social Support among Slovene Minority and Italian Majority Youth in Italy: Links with Positive Identity, Social Competence and Academic Achievement.- 13. Positive Youth Development and Subjective Happiness: Examining the Mediating Role of Gratitude and Optimism in Spanish Emerging Adults.- 14. Positive Youth Development and Resilience among Youth in Iceland: The Importance of Social Context and Self-Esteem for Life Satisfaction.- 15. Parental Support, Peer Support and School Connectedness as Foundations for Student Engagement and Academic Achievement in Australian Youth.- 16. The 5Cs of Positive Youth Development in New Zealand: Relations with Hopeful Expectations for the Future and Life Satisfaction among Emerging Adults.- 17. Country and Gender Differences in Developmental Assets among Youth andEmerging Adults in Ghana and Norway.- 18. Positive Youth Development in Bulgaria, Italy, Norway and Romania: Testing the Factorial Structure and Measurement Invariance of the 5Cs.- Part II: Positive Youth Development Applications and Interventions.- 19. International Collaboration in the Study of Positive Youth Development.- 20. Positive Youth Development in Jamaica: Latent Growth of Self-Efficacy and Youth Assets.- 21. Leadership Development of Zulu Male Youth in a South African Township.- 22. Social Emotional Learning Program from a Positive Youth Development Perspective in Slovenia.- 23. The Trajectories of Positive Youth Development in Lithuania: Evidence from Community and Intervention Settings.- 24. Positive Youth Development through Student Engagement: Associations with Well-Being.- 25. Capitalizing on Classroom Climate to Promote Positive Development.- 26. Youth Participation in the Dream School Program in Norway: An Application of a Logic Model of the Six Cs of Positive YouthDevelopment.- 27. The Cultural Adaptation of Interventions to Promote Positive Development: The Preschool Edition of PATHS® in Sweden.- 28. Another Way Out: A Positive Youth Development Approach to the Study of Violent Radicalization in Québec, Canada.- 29. Engaging Marginalized Youth in Positive Development: The Changing Lives Program.- 30. Family Processes and Competence in a Positive Youth Development Context: Perspectives for African American Youth.- 31. Teaching Mothers and Fathers about How Children Develop: Parenting Knowledge and Practices.- 32. Promoting Positive Youth Development through Healthy Middle School Environments.- 33. Promoting Positive Youth Development through Scouting.- 34. Social Change and the Dynamic Family Transmission of Youth Vocational Competence.- 35. Positive Youth Development in the Digital Age: Expanding PYD to Include Digital Settings.- 36. From PreventioThis handbook examines positive youth development (PYD) in youth and emerging adults from an international perspective. It focuses on large and underrepresented cultural groups across six continents within a strengths-based conception of adolescence that considers all youth as having assets. The volume explores the ways in which developmental assets, when effectively harnessed, empower youth to transition into a productive and resourceful adulthood. The book focuses on PYD across vast geographical regions, including Europe, Asia, Africa, Middle East, Australia, New Zealand, North America, and Latin America as well as on strengths and resources for optimal well-being. The handbook addresses the positive development of young people across various cultural contexts to advance research, policy, and practice and inform interventions that foster continued thriving and reduce the chances of compromised youth development. It presents theoretical perspectives and supporting empirical findings to promote a more comprehensive understanding of PYD from an integrated, multidisciplinary, and multinational perspective.The Handbook of Positive Youth Development in a Global Context is an essential resource for researchers, professors, and graduate students as well as clinicians, therapists, and other professionals in developmental, clinical child, and school psychology, public health and prevention science, family studies, cross-cultural psychology, child and adolescent psychiatry, social work, educational policy and politics, anthropology, sociology, social psychology and all interrelated disciplines.This handbook examines positive youth development (PYD) in youth and emerging adults from an international perspective. It focuses on large and underrepresented cultural groups across six continents within a strengths-based conception of adolescence that considers all youth as having assets. The volume explores the ways in which developmental assets, when effectively harnessed, empower youth to transition into a productive and resourceful adulthood. The book focuses on PYD across vast geographical regions, including Europe, Asia, Africa, Middle East, Australia, New Zealand, North America, and Latin America as well as on strengths and resources for optimal well-being. The handbook addresses the positive development of young people across various cultural contexts to advance research, policy, and practice and inform interventions that foster continued thriving and reduce the chances of compromised youth development. It presents theoretical perspectives and supporting empirical findings to promote a more comprehensive understanding of PYD from an integrated, multidisciplinary, and multinational perspective.Winner of the 2022 Ursula Gielen Global Psychology Book Award, American Psychological Association, APAWinner of the 2022 Social Policy Book Publication Award, the Society for Research on Adolescence, SRAExplores ways in which assets, when effectively harnessed, empower youth to transition into a productive and resourceful adulthoodRadosveta Dimitrova holds a PhD in Developmental Psychology (University of Trieste, Italy received the best dissertation award of the Italian Association of Psychology) and a PhD in Cross-Cultural Psychology (Tilburg University, the Netherlands received the best dissertation award of the Society for Research in Child Development (SRCD). She is the recipient of the 2016 Scientist Award of the International Society for the Study of Behavioral Development (ISSBD) for distinguished theoretical contribution and programmatic research to the study of behavioral development and dissemination of developmental science. Her main research interests regard positive development, acculturation, migration, identity, indigenous and vulnerable ethnic minority communities, and adaptation of measures for use in different cultures. She has research and teaching experience in leading universities in the United States, the Netherlands, Japan, New Zealand, Italy, Norway, Sweden and international collaborations and projects in Europe, Asia, Africa, Australia, New Zealand, North and South America. She has widely published in developmental science, cross-cultural and international psychology, human development, emerging adulthood, child and family studies and assessment fields by also serving governing councils of major organizations and editorial boards of leading journals in these fields.

Nora Wiium is an Associate Professor of Developmental Psychology at the Faculty of Psychology, University of Bergen, Norway where she obtained her PhD in Health Promotion. Her teaching and research activities regard developmental psychology, health behaviors and youth development. Since 2014 she leads an international project on Positive Youth Development (PYD) representing collaborations from over 30 countries across Africa, Asia, Australia, Europe, the Middle East, North and South America and expertise from diverse scientific fields including health psychology, developmental psychology, human development, intervention and implementation science. She has co-edited a special issue on PYD across cultures in Child & Youth Care Forum and has served as a reviewer or guest editor for several journals, including Frontiers in Psychology and International Journal of Public Health.		ScienceProfessional Books (2)Science (SC)EBOP41168Behavioral Science and Psychology009783030702649Developmental PsychologyBiotechnologyPublic Health1318100
35
Behavioral Science and Psychology978-3-031-04963-7EhrenreichJohn EhrenreichJohn Ehrenreich, Sherman, CT, USAThe Making of a PandemicSocial, Political, and Psychological Perspectives on Covid-19XI, 150 p.12022final54.9916.5058.8417.6549.9915.0059.9918.00Soft cover0SpringerBriefs in PsychologyBehavioral Science and PsychologyBrief/PivotBook0English150MMJMBNH9SpringerSpringer International Publishing0Available2022-05-312022-05-302022-06-172022-06-171Chapter 1. INTRODUCTION.- Chapter 2. The Revenge of the Microbes.- Chapter 3. From Outbreak to Pandemic.- Chapter 4. Two Peas in a Pod: Pandemic and Global Warming.- Chapter 5. The Great Tradeoff: Public Health vs. the Economy.- Chapter 6. The Cost of Inequality.- Chapter 7. The Crooked Timber of Humanity.- Chapter 8. The Fourth Horseman.
The Making of a Pandemic provides a systematic account of how societal and psychological forces shaped the Covid-19 pandemic. The first part focuses on how biological and societal factors interact to create a pandemic. The second part explores how characteristics of the American economy, the American approach to public health, and domestic and international inequality combined to prolong the pandemic, hamper mitigation efforts, and arouse opposition to cooperation with public health measures. The third part examines the psychological processes that led to resistance to efforts to mitigate the pandemic and linked the resistance to right-wing ideologies. The book concludes by looking at the limits of the technical and medical reforms others have proposed to protect us from repetitions of the Covid-19 disaster and by calling for a “deep confrontation” with the societal and psychological factors that created and shaped the pandemic.Comprehensive framework for understanding how sociological, political, and psychological factors interacted with biomedical factors to produce the Covid-19 disaster Essential reader for understanding how to prevent future pandemics Explores the sources of the widespread resistance to cooperating with mitigation efforts
<div>The Making of a Pandemic provides a systematic account of how societal and psychological forces shaped the Covid-19 pandemic. The first part focuses on how biological and societal factors interact to create a pandemic. The second part explores how characteristics of the American economy, the American approach to public health, and domestic and international inequality combined to prolong the pandemic, hamper mitigation efforts, and arouse opposition to cooperation with public health measures. The third part examines the psychological processes that led to resistance to efforts to mitigate the pandemic and linked the resistance to right-wing ideologies. The book concludes by looking at the limits of the technical and medical reforms others have proposed to protect us from repetitions of the Covid-19 disaster and by calling for a “deep confrontation” with the societal and psychological factors that created and shaped the pandemic.


</div>		John Ehrenreich has doctorates in biology and psychology. He is Professor Emeritus at SUNY-Old Westbury, where he taught for many years. He has written widely on issues at the intersection of biology, psychology, sociology, and social policy. His previous books include The American Health Empire: Power, Profits, and Politics (with Barbara Ehrenreich and the staff of Health-PAC), The Cultural Crisis of Modern Medicine (edited), The Altruistic Imagination: A History of Social Work and Social Policy in the United States, and Third Wave Capitalism: How Money, Power, and the Pursuit of Self Interest Have Imperiled the American Dream.
ScienceProfessional Books (2)Science (SC)EBOP41168Behavioral Science and Psychology009783031049637Clinical PsychologyHealth PsychologyHealth Care261000
36
Behavioral Science and Psychology978-981-19-1831-5FleuryHeloisa Junqueira Fleury; Marlene Magnabosco Marra; Oriana Holsbach HadlerHeloisa Junqueira Fleury, Instituto Sedes Sapientiae, São Paulo, Brazil; Marlene Magnabosco Marra, University of Brasília, Brasília, Brazil; Oriana Holsbach Hadler, Federal University of Rio Grande do Sul, Porto Alegre, BrazilPsychodrama in BrazilContemporary Applications in Mental Health, Education, and CommunitiesXIX, 305 p. 8 illus., 1 illus. in color.12022final139.9942.00149.7944.94119.9936.00159.9948.00Hard cover0Psychodrama in Counselling, Coaching and EducationVolumeBehavioral Science and PsychologyContributed volumeBook0English305JMHJNCSpringerSpringer Nature Singapore0Available2022-05-132022-05-132022-05-302022-05-301Part 1: Foundations of Brazilian Psychodrama.- Chapter 1: Fundamentals of Brazilian psychodrama, a network of ideas, concepts and practices.-Chapter 2: Theoretical foundations of socionomy.- Chapter 3: Brazilian Spontaneous Theater: scenes that spring from resonances.- Chapter 4: Public Psychodrama: more than a century valuing groups.- Part 2: Clinical Psychodrama.- Chapter 5: Relationship Psychotherapy: a minimalist psychodrama.- Chapter 6: Individual psychodrama with symbolic images and auxiliary objects.- Chapter 7: Psychodramatic Psychotherapy Group and its modalities in Brazil.- Chapter 8: Psychodrama with children in Brazil.- Chapter 9: Who am I? Psychodrama and its possibilities for the recognition of the self of adolescents.- Chapter 10: Psychodrama and Family Therapy: methodological interface.- Part 3: Sociotherapy - psychosocial practices and vulnerable populations.- Chapter 11: Psychodrama and sexuality.- Chapter 12: Psychodramatic resources in psychosocial interventions against sexual violence: victims and offenders.- Chapter 13: Applications of Psychodrama in Brazilian Justice System Protective Measures.- Chapter 14: Psychodrama with the elderly.- Part 4: Psychodrama in education, politics, and society.- Chapter 15: Psychodrama in politics.- Chapter 16: The use of Psychodrama as a pedagogical strategy for the implementation of Public Policies in Health and Education.- Chapter 17: Organizational Psychodrama Andréa Claudia de Souza, Potenciar Consultores Associados.- Chapter 18: On the recognition of ignorance: popular education and the encounter of psychodrama with indigenous people- Chapter 19: Psychodrama from the perspective of a palmarin clinic.- Chapter 20: Brazilian Public Sociodrama without Homophobia: the fearful stage.-Chapter 21: Training in Psychodrama: Democratic Project under Construction.<div>
</div>		This book approaches contemporary psychodrama from many contexts and population application from different regions of Brazil. It presents the diversity of local culture, the originality with which psychodramatic philosophy emerges in the Brazilian scenario. It introduces the theoretical-methodological procedures that reaffirm Psychodrama as a scientific instrument of social action. The chapters cover the philosophical and theoretical foundations and the new socio-psycho-educational methodologies applied in clinical practices, sociotherapy, politics and society. It is a helpful resource for professionals and academics interested in the development of innovative applications of Psychodrama.This book approaches contemporary psychodrama from many contexts and population application from different regions of Brazil. It presents the diversity of local culture, the originality with which psychodramatic philosophy emerges in the Brazilian scenario. It introduces the theoretical-methodological procedures that reaffirm psychodrama as a scientific instrument of social action. The chapters cover the philosophical and theoretical foundations and the new socio-psycho-educational methodologies applied in clinical practices, sociotherapy, politics and society. It is a helpful resource for professionals and academics interested in the development of innovative applications of Psychodrama.The first book to cover contemporary Brazilian psychodramaThe only book approaching Brazilian creativity to deal with problems in society, groups, families, and individualsBrings together a group of top scholars on the much debated issue of different psychodrama practice tendencies in BrazilHeloisa Fleury, MA, is a clinical psychologist in private practice in São Paulo, Brazil; Master’s degree in science at University of Sao Paulo; Treasurer of the International Association for Group Psychotherapy and Group Processes (IAGP); Editor-in-chief of the Revista Brasileira de Psicodrama; a former President of the Brazilian Federation of Psychodrama (Febrap); Book organizer and author of chapters and publications in Brazilian and international scientific journals. Marlene Magnabosco Marra, PhD in Clinical Psychology and Culture from the University of Brasilia. Attended Sandwich Doctoral Programme at University of Tel-Aviv, Israel. Post-graduation in psychodrama, family and couples therapy and in the narrative approach and collaborative dialogue therapy. Associated researcher at University of Brasilia (UnB). Author and editor of books, chapters, and publications in Brazilian and international scientific journals.


Oriana Holsbach Hadler, PhD in Social and Institutional Psychology, is a Professor at the Psychology Institute of Federal University of Rio Grande do Sul (UFRGS). Psychologist graduated from Catholic University of Pelotas (UCPel) and postgraduate at Goldsmiths College - University of London, England. Psychodramatist by IDH-RS. Collaborative researcher of the 'Comparative and International Criminal Justice' research group from University of Westminster. Mother of Hiram (2 years old).
ScienceProfessional Books (2)Science (SC)EBOP41168Behavioral Science and Psychology009789811918315Cross-Cultural PsychologyEducational PsychologyCreativity and Arts Education658000
37
Behavioral Science and Psychology978-981-19-1834-6FleuryHeloisa Junqueira Fleury; Marlene Magnabosco Marra; Oriana Holsbach HadlerHeloisa Junqueira Fleury, Instituto Sedes Sapientiae, São Paulo, Brazil; Marlene Magnabosco Marra, University of Brasília, Brasília, Brazil; Oriana Holsbach Hadler, Federal University of Rio Grande do Sul, Porto Alegre, BrazilPsychodrama in BrazilContemporary Applications in Mental Health, Education, and CommunitiesXIX, 305 p. 8 illus., 1 illus. in color.12022final139.9942.00149.7944.94119.9936.00159.9948.00Soft cover1Psychodrama in Counselling, Coaching and EducationVolumeBehavioral Science and PsychologyContributed volumeBook0English305JMHJNCSpringerSpringer Nature Singapore0Available2023-05-142022-05-132023-05-132023-05-131Part 1: Foundations of Brazilian Psychodrama.- Chapter 1: Fundamentals of Brazilian psychodrama, a network of ideas, concepts and practices.-Chapter 2: Theoretical foundations of socionomy.- Chapter 3: Brazilian Spontaneous Theater: scenes that spring from resonances.- Chapter 4: Public Psychodrama: more than a century valuing groups.- Part 2: Clinical Psychodrama.- Chapter 5: Relationship Psychotherapy: a minimalist psychodrama.- Chapter 6: Individual psychodrama with symbolic images and auxiliary objects.- Chapter 7: Psychodramatic Psychotherapy Group and its modalities in Brazil.- Chapter 8: Psychodrama with children in Brazil.- Chapter 9: Who am I? Psychodrama and its possibilities for the recognition of the self of adolescents.- Chapter 10: Psychodrama and Family Therapy: methodological interface.- Part 3: Sociotherapy - psychosocial practices and vulnerable populations.- Chapter 11: Psychodrama and sexuality.- Chapter 12: Psychodramatic resources in psychosocial interventions against sexual violence: victims and offenders.- Chapter 13: Applications of Psychodrama in Brazilian Justice System Protective Measures.- Chapter 14: Psychodrama with the elderly.- Part 4: Psychodrama in education, politics, and society.- Chapter 15: Psychodrama in politics.- Chapter 16: The use of Psychodrama as a pedagogical strategy for the implementation of Public Policies in Health and Education.- Chapter 17: Organizational Psychodrama Andréa Claudia de Souza, Potenciar Consultores Associados.- Chapter 18: On the recognition of ignorance: popular education and the encounter of psychodrama with indigenous people- Chapter 19: Psychodrama from the perspective of a palmarin clinic.- Chapter 20: Brazilian Public Sociodrama without Homophobia: the fearful stage.-Chapter 21: Training in Psychodrama: Democratic Project under Construction.<div>
</div>		This book approaches contemporary psychodrama from many contexts and population application from different regions of Brazil. It presents the diversity of local culture, the originality with which psychodramatic philosophy emerges in the Brazilian scenario. It introduces the theoretical-methodological procedures that reaffirm Psychodrama as a scientific instrument of social action. The chapters cover the philosophical and theoretical foundations and the new socio-psycho-educational methodologies applied in clinical practices, sociotherapy, politics and society. It is a helpful resource for professionals and academics interested in the development of innovative applications of Psychodrama.This book approaches contemporary psychodrama from many contexts and population application from different regions of Brazil. It presents the diversity of local culture, the originality with which psychodramatic philosophy emerges in the Brazilian scenario. It introduces the theoretical-methodological procedures that reaffirm psychodrama as a scientific instrument of social action. The chapters cover the philosophical and theoretical foundations and the new socio-psycho-educational methodologies applied in clinical practices, sociotherapy, politics and society. It is a helpful resource for professionals and academics interested in the development of innovative applications of Psychodrama.The first book to cover contemporary Brazilian psychodramaThe only book approaching Brazilian creativity to deal with problems in society, groups, families, and individualsBrings together a group of top scholars on the much debated issue of different psychodrama practice tendencies in BrazilHeloisa Fleury, MA, is a clinical psychologist in private practice in São Paulo, Brazil; Master’s degree in science at University of Sao Paulo; Treasurer of the International Association for Group Psychotherapy and Group Processes (IAGP); Editor-in-chief of the Revista Brasileira de Psicodrama; a former President of the Brazilian Federation of Psychodrama (Febrap); Book organizer and author of chapters and publications in Brazilian and international scientific journals. Marlene Magnabosco Marra, PhD in Clinical Psychology and Culture from the University of Brasilia. Attended Sandwich Doctoral Programme at University of Tel-Aviv, Israel. Post-graduation in psychodrama, family and couples therapy and in the narrative approach and collaborative dialogue therapy. Associated researcher at University of Brasilia (UnB). Author and editor of books, chapters, and publications in Brazilian and international scientific journals.


Oriana Holsbach Hadler, PhD in Social and Institutional Psychology, is a Professor at the Psychology Institute of Federal University of Rio Grande do Sul (UFRGS). Psychologist graduated from Catholic University of Pelotas (UCPel) and postgraduate at Goldsmiths College - University of London, England. Psychodramatist by IDH-RS. Collaborative researcher of the 'Comparative and International Criminal Justice' research group from University of Westminster. Mother of Hiram (2 years old).
ScienceProfessional Books (2)Science (SC)EBOP41168Behavioral Science and Psychology009789811918346Cross-Cultural PsychologyEducational PsychologyCreativity and Arts Education504000
38
Behavioral Science and Psychology978-3-031-13774-7GageNicholas Gage; Luke J. Rapa; Denise K. Whitford; Antonis KatsiyannisNicholas Gage, WestEd, San Francisco, CA, USA; Luke J. Rapa, Clemson University, Clemson, SC; Denise K. Whitford, Purdue University West Lafayette, West Lafayette, IN; Antonis Katsiyannis, Clemson University, Clemson, SCDisproportionality and Social Justice in EducationXVII, 296 p. 9 illus., 1 illus. in color.12022final149.9945.00160.4948.15129.9939.00169.9951.00Hard cover0Springer Series on Child and Family StudiesBehavioral Science and PsychologyContributed volumeBook0English296JMCJNSpringerSpringer International Publishing0WorldwideAvailable2022-10-262022-10-262022-11-122022-11-121Part I. Foundations: Understanding Disproportionality in Historical, Legal, Theoretical, and Methodological Terms.- Chapter 1. Ever Since Little Rock: The History of Disciplinary Disparities in America’s Schools.- Chapter 2. Civil Rights and the Birth of Special Education.- Chapter 3. Theoretical Perspectives Guiding the Study of Disproportionality in Education.- Chapter 4. Methodological Issues and Debates in the Study of Disproportionality in Education.- Part II. Understanding Disproportionality through Contemporary Data.- Chapter 5. Disciplinary Exclusions.- Chapter 6. Bullying Victimization and Perpetration.- Chapter 7. Seclusion and Restraint .- Chapter 8. Corporal Punishment .- Chapter 9. School-based Law Enforcement Referrals and Arrests.- Chapter 10. Academic Achievement.- Part III. Addressing Disproportionality: The Current Moment and Beyond.- Chapter 11. A Movement Toward Equity and Social Justice: Grounded in Theory, Realized in Practice.- Chapter 12. Reshaping Disproportionality Educational Research to Advance Social Justice.- Chapter 13. Reshaping Educational Policy to Advance Social Justice.- Chapter 14. Designing Educational Interventions to Advance Social Justice.This book examines disproportionality in education, focusing on issues of social justice for diverse and marginalized students. It addresses disproportionality as an indicator of biased practices and uses social justice as the frame for conceptualizing disproportionality historically and as a means to improve educational practice. Chapters explore the historical issue of disproportionality in education; outcomes experienced by racially and ethnically diverse students and students with disabilities, including discipline, bullying, and academic achievement; and ways in which social justice can inform policy and practice to make a positive impact reducing disproportionality in education.Key areas of coverage include:Methodological and statistical concerns in disproportionality research in education.Reviews research and data on disproportionality in education (e.g., disciplinary exclusion, bullying, seclusion and restraint, corporal punishment, school-based arrests, and academic achievement).Social justice as a theoretical and legal driver for change in policy and practice.Educational assessment and intervention practices designed to address disproportionality in education.Disproportionality and Social Justice in Education is a must-have resource for researchers, professors, and graduate students as well as clinicians, practitioners, and policymakers across such disciplines as clinical child and school psychology, educational psychology and teaching and teacher education, social work and counselling, pediatrics and school nursing, educational policy and politics, public health, and all interrelated disciplines.<div>
</div>		This book examines disproportionality in education, focusing on issues of social justice for diverse and marginalized students. It addresses disproportionality as an indicator of biased practices and uses social justice as the frame for conceptualizing disproportionality historically and as a means to improve educational practice. Chapters explore the historical issue of disproportionality in education; outcomes experienced by racially and ethnically diverse students and students with disabilities, including discipline, bullying, and academic achievement; and ways in which social justice can inform policy and practice to make a positive impact reducing disproportionality in education.

Key areas of coverage include:Methodological and statistical concerns in disproportionality research in education.Reviews research and data on disproportionality in education (e.g., disciplinary exclusion, bullying, seclusion and restraint, corporal punishment, school-based arrests, and academic achievement).Social justice as a theoretical and legal driver for change in policy and practice.Educational assessment and intervention practices designed to address disproportionality in education. Disproportionality and Social Justice in Education is a must-have resource for researchers, professors, and graduate students as well as clinicians, practitioners, and policymakers across such disciplines as clinical child and school psychology, educational psychology and teaching and teacher education, social work and counselling, pediatrics and school nursing, educational policy and politics, public health, and all interrelated disciplines.
Focuses on issues of social justice for diverse and marginalized studentsExamines the historical, theoretical, and legal foundations of disproportionality in educationAddresses social justice as a theoretical and legal driver for change in policy and practiceNicholas A Gage, Ph.D., is a Senior Researcher in Special Education at WestEd focused on advancing rigorous research and evaluation in learner variability and special education. Dr. Gage’s research interests are centered on the identification of policies and practices at the national, state, local, and classroom levels to support the academic, social, and behavioral needs of students with disabilities. This work is grounded in a multitiered systems of support (MTSS) framework, with a particular emphasis on positive behavior interventions and supports (PBIS). His expertise is in supporting researchers, schools, districts, and states in leveraging their data resources to best identify and develop effective and efficient systems of support for students’ academic and behavioral needs.

Luke J. Rapa, Ph.D., is an Assistant Professor of Adolescent Development in the department of Education and Human Development at Clemson University. Broadly, Dr. Rapa studies how contextual, sociocultural, and sociopolitical factors shape key developmental and psychological processes and promote or constrain adolescent's development and academic success. Dr. Rapa has particular interest in the development of youth navigating adversity, marginalization, and inequitable societal conditions. Much of his research examines how adolescents critically analyze societal inequities and develop the motivation and agency to redress such inequities or develop 'critical consciousness'; and how youth navigate structural constraints or marginalizing systems (e.g., institutional racism, discrimination, stereotypes in school) to achieve academic success and well-being.

Denise K. Whitford, Ph.D., is an Associate Professor of Special Education at Purdue University, specializing in discriminatory discipline. She is particularly involved in examining the impact on student achievement, postacademic outcomes, and emotional well-being, in addition to determining methods for decreasing disproportionality in K-12 settings, including through the use of culturally responsive practices and cultural competency training for educators.

Antonis Katsiyannis, Ed.D., an Alumni Distinguished Professor at Clemson University, specializes in legal and policy issues in special education. His research interests include legal and policy issues in special education, delinquency, and school violence and discipline. He has served as the president of the Council for Exceptional Children (CEC) and he is the recipient of the 2018 Frederick J. Weintraub Outstanding CEC Leadership Award, the 2018 MSLBD Leadership Award, and the 2017 CCBD Leadership Award.


ScienceProfessional Books (2)Science (SC)EBOP41168Behavioral Science and Psychology009783031137747School PsychologyInclusive EducationDevelopmental PsychologyEducation PolicyTeaching and Teacher EducationClinical Social Work641000
39
Behavioral Science and Psychology978-3-031-13777-8GageNicholas Gage; Luke J. Rapa; Denise K. Whitford; Antonis KatsiyannisNicholas Gage, WestEd, San Francisco, CA, USA; Luke J. Rapa, Clemson University, Clemson, SC; Denise K. Whitford, Purdue University West Lafayette, West Lafayette, IN; Antonis Katsiyannis, Clemson University, Clemson, SCDisproportionality and Social Justice in EducationXVII, 296 p. 9 illus., 1 illus. in color.12022final149.9945.00160.4948.15129.9939.00169.9951.00Soft cover1Springer Series on Child and Family StudiesBehavioral Science and PsychologyContributed volumeBook0English296JMCJNSpringerSpringer International Publishing0WorldwideAvailable2023-10-272022-10-262023-10-262023-10-261Part I. Foundations: Understanding Disproportionality in Historical, Legal, Theoretical, and Methodological Terms.- Chapter 1. Ever Since Little Rock: The History of Disciplinary Disparities in America’s Schools.- Chapter 2. Civil Rights and the Birth of Special Education.- Chapter 3. Theoretical Perspectives Guiding the Study of Disproportionality in Education.- Chapter 4. Methodological Issues and Debates in the Study of Disproportionality in Education.- Part II. Understanding Disproportionality through Contemporary Data.- Chapter 5. Disciplinary Exclusions.- Chapter 6. Bullying Victimization and Perpetration.- Chapter 7. Seclusion and Restraint .- Chapter 8. Corporal Punishment .- Chapter 9. School-based Law Enforcement Referrals and Arrests.- Chapter 10. Academic Achievement.- Part III. Addressing Disproportionality: The Current Moment and Beyond.- Chapter 11. A Movement Toward Equity and Social Justice: Grounded in Theory, Realized in Practice.- Chapter 12. Reshaping Disproportionality Educational Research to Advance Social Justice.- Chapter 13. Reshaping Educational Policy to Advance Social Justice.- Chapter 14. Designing Educational Interventions to Advance Social Justice.This book examines disproportionality in education, focusing on issues of social justice for diverse and marginalized students. It addresses disproportionality as an indicator of biased practices and uses social justice as the frame for conceptualizing disproportionality historically and as a means to improve educational practice. Chapters explore the historical issue of disproportionality in education; outcomes experienced by racially and ethnically diverse students and students with disabilities, including discipline, bullying, and academic achievement; and ways in which social justice can inform policy and practice to make a positive impact reducing disproportionality in education.Key areas of coverage include:Methodological and statistical concerns in disproportionality research in education.Reviews research and data on disproportionality in education (e.g., disciplinary exclusion, bullying, seclusion and restraint, corporal punishment, school-based arrests, and academic achievement).Social justice as a theoretical and legal driver for change in policy and practice.Educational assessment and intervention practices designed to address disproportionality in education.Disproportionality and Social Justice in Education is a must-have resource for researchers, professors, and graduate students as well as clinicians, practitioners, and policymakers across such disciplines as clinical child and school psychology, educational psychology and teaching and teacher education, social work and counselling, pediatrics and school nursing, educational policy and politics, public health, and all interrelated disciplines.<div>
</div>		This book examines disproportionality in education, focusing on issues of social justice for diverse and marginalized students. It addresses disproportionality as an indicator of biased practices and uses social justice as the frame for conceptualizing disproportionality historically and as a means to improve educational practice. Chapters explore the historical issue of disproportionality in education; outcomes experienced by racially and ethnically diverse students and students with disabilities, including discipline, bullying, and academic achievement; and ways in which social justice can inform policy and practice to make a positive impact reducing disproportionality in education.

Key areas of coverage include:Methodological and statistical concerns in disproportionality research in education.Reviews research and data on disproportionality in education (e.g., disciplinary exclusion, bullying, seclusion and restraint, corporal punishment, school-based arrests, and academic achievement).Social justice as a theoretical and legal driver for change in policy and practice.Educational assessment and intervention practices designed to address disproportionality in education. Disproportionality and Social Justice in Education is a must-have resource for researchers, professors, and graduate students as well as clinicians, practitioners, and policymakers across such disciplines as clinical child and school psychology, educational psychology and teaching and teacher education, social work and counselling, pediatrics and school nursing, educational policy and politics, public health, and all interrelated disciplines.
Focuses on issues of social justice for diverse and marginalized studentsExamines the historical, theoretical, and legal foundations of disproportionality in educationAddresses social justice as a theoretical and legal driver for change in policy and practiceNicholas A Gage, Ph.D., is a Senior Researcher in Special Education at WestEd focused on advancing rigorous research and evaluation in learner variability and special education. Dr. Gage’s research interests are centered on the identification of policies and practices at the national, state, local, and classroom levels to support the academic, social, and behavioral needs of students with disabilities. This work is grounded in a multitiered systems of support (MTSS) framework, with a particular emphasis on positive behavior interventions and supports (PBIS). His expertise is in supporting researchers, schools, districts, and states in leveraging their data resources to best identify and develop effective and efficient systems of support for students’ academic and behavioral needs.

Luke J. Rapa, Ph.D., is an Assistant Professor of Adolescent Development in the department of Education and Human Development at Clemson University. Broadly, Dr. Rapa studies how contextual, sociocultural, and sociopolitical factors shape key developmental and psychological processes and promote or constrain adolescent's development and academic success. Dr. Rapa has particular interest in the development of youth navigating adversity, marginalization, and inequitable societal conditions. Much of his research examines how adolescents critically analyze societal inequities and develop the motivation and agency to redress such inequities or develop 'critical consciousness'; and how youth navigate structural constraints or marginalizing systems (e.g., institutional racism, discrimination, stereotypes in school) to achieve academic success and well-being.

Denise K. Whitford, Ph.D., is an Associate Professor of Special Education at Purdue University, specializing in discriminatory discipline. She is particularly involved in examining the impact on student achievement, postacademic outcomes, and emotional well-being, in addition to determining methods for decreasing disproportionality in K-12 settings, including through the use of culturally responsive practices and cultural competency training for educators.

Antonis Katsiyannis, Ed.D., an Alumni Distinguished Professor at Clemson University, specializes in legal and policy issues in special education. His research interests include legal and policy issues in special education, delinquency, and school violence and discipline. He has served as the president of the Council for Exceptional Children (CEC) and he is the recipient of the 2018 Frederick J. Weintraub Outstanding CEC Leadership Award, the 2018 MSLBD Leadership Award, and the 2017 CCBD Leadership Award.


ScienceProfessional Books (2)Science (SC)EBOP41168Behavioral Science and Psychology009783031137778School PsychologyInclusive EducationDevelopmental PsychologyEducation PolicyTeaching and Teacher EducationClinical Social Work486000
40
Behavioral Science and Psychology978-3-031-12036-7GlumbićNenad Glumbić; Mirjana Đorđević; Branislav BrojčinNenad Glumbić, University of Belgrade, Belgrade, Serbia; Mirjana Đorđević, University of Belgrade, Belgrade, Serbia; Branislav Brojčin, University of Belgrade, Belgrade, SerbiaDigital Inclusion of Individuals with Autism Spectrum DisorderXV, 234 p. 38 illus., 34 illus. in color.12022final99.9930.00106.9932.1089.9927.00109.9933.00Hard cover0Autism and Child Psychopathology SeriesBehavioral Science and PsychologyMonographBook0English234JMCMMHSpringerSpringer International Publishing0WorldwideAvailable2022-09-032022-09-032022-09-202022-09-201Chapter 1. Digital Participation and Disability Digital Divide.- Chapter 2. Co-Creating Digital Devices with Individuals with Autism.- Chapter 3. Autism and Digital Learning Environment.- Chapter 4. Leisure Activities and Individuals with Autism.- Chapter 5. Community Living and Individuals with Autism.- Chapter 6. Daily Living Skills and Individuals with Autism.- Chapter 7. Employment and Individuals with Autism.- Chapter 8. Computer-Based Interventions and Individuals with Autism.- Chapter 9. Health and Well-Being and Individuals with Autism.- Chapter 10. Risks Related to the Use of Digital Technologies and Individuals with Autism.- Chapter 11. Digital Technology, Self-advocacy, and Individuals with Autism.This book examines opportunities and obstacles in achieving the digital inclusion of individuals with autism spectrum disorder (ASD). It addresses basic requirements of the digital society and the concepts of digital inclusion (and exclusion), digital participation, and the disability digital divide as well as support for individuals with autism in co-creating digital devices. The book discusses the application of digital technologies across different contexts, including education, leisure activities, community life, daily living skills, and employment of individuals with autism.Featured areas of coverage include:Computer-based interventions for speech development, social communication, executive functions, and other skills in children with autism.Digital health intervention for persons with ASD.Risks for persons with ASD on the Internet (e.g., excessive use, addictive behavior, and cyberbullying).Digital technology use in simulating job interviews, and teaching work skills.Digital technology use in self-advocacy activities of individuals with autism.Digital Inclusion of Individuals with Autism Spectrum Disorder is an essential reference for researchers, professors, graduate students, clinicians and related therapists and professionals in clinical child and school psychology, social work, behavioral therapy/rehabilitation, pediatrics, physical therapy, occupational therapy, speech and language therapy, neurology, special education, child and adolescent psychiatry, and developmental psychology.This book examines opportunities and obstacles in achieving the digital inclusion of individuals with autism spectrum disorder (ASD). It addresses basic requirements of the digital society and the concepts of digital inclusion (and exclusion), digital participation, and the disability digital divide as well as support for individuals with autism in co-creating digital devices. The book discusses the application of digital technologies across different contexts, including education, leisure activities, community life, daily living skills, and employment of individuals with autism.Featured areas of coverage include:Computer-based interventions for speech development, social communication, executive functions, and other skills in children with autism.Digital health intervention for persons with ASD.Risks for persons with ASD on the Internet (e.g., excessive use, addictive behavior, and cyberbullying).Digital technology use in simulating job interviews, and teaching work skills.Digital technology use in self-advocacy activities of individuals with autism. Digital Inclusion of Individuals with Autism Spectrum Disorder is an essential reference for researchers, professors, graduate students, clinicians and related therapists and professionals in clinical child and school psychology, social work, behavioral therapy/rehabilitation, pediatrics, physical therapy, occupational therapy, speech and language therapy, neurology, special education, child and adolescent psychiatry, and developmental psychology.Addresses benefits of digital health interventions for persons with autismExplores digital technology use across contextsDiscusses digital technology use in self-advocacy activities for individuals with autismNenad Glumbić, Ph.D., is a special education teacher and full professor at the University of Belgrade – The Faculty of Special Education and Rehabilitation. He earned a doctoral degree in 2000 defending the first doctorate in the field of autism in Serbia. His primary research interests include autism spectrum disorder and intellectual disability. Professor Glumbić is a counselor within online counseling services for autism, UNICEF consultant, and principal investigator in many research projects. He is the author of more than 300 papers and 5 books.Mirjana Đorđević, Ph.D., is a special education teacher and assistant professor at the University of Belgrade – Faculty of Special Education and Rehabilitation. From 2008, she has been the author of approximately 100 publications. Her primary research interests include individuals with autism and intellectual disabilities. She participated in the development of digital applications intended to improve the daily functioning of persons with autism and was a UNICEF consultant for the development of early intervention programs in Serbia.


Branislav Brojčin, Ph.D., is a special education teacher and full professor at the University of Belgrade – Faculty of Special Education and Rehabilitation. His primary research interests include the inclusive education as well as the communication and social skills of people with intellectual disabilities. As a member of government teams, he participated in the development of inclusive policies in Serbia. He is the author and co-author of several books related to the inclusive education as well as the treatment of people with developmental disabilities.		ScienceProfessional Books (2)Science (SC)EBOP41168Behavioral Science and Psychology009783031120367Developmental PsychologyChild and Adolescence PsychologyDevelopmental DisabilitiesSchool PsychologyOccupational TherapySpeech and Language Therapy547000
41
Behavioral Science and Psychology978-3-031-12039-8GlumbićNenad Glumbić; Mirjana Đorđević; Branislav BrojčinNenad Glumbić, University of Belgrade, Belgrade, Serbia; Mirjana Đorđević, University of Belgrade, Belgrade, Serbia; Branislav Brojčin, University of Belgrade, Belgrade, SerbiaDigital Inclusion of Individuals with Autism Spectrum DisorderXV, 234 p. 38 illus., 34 illus. in color.12022final99.9930.00106.9932.1089.9927.00109.9933.00Soft cover1Autism and Child Psychopathology SeriesBehavioral Science and PsychologyMonographBook0English234JMCMMHSpringerSpringer International Publishing0WorldwideAvailable2023-09-042022-09-032023-09-032023-09-031Chapter 1. Digital Participation and Disability Digital Divide.- Chapter 2. Co-Creating Digital Devices with Individuals with Autism.- Chapter 3. Autism and Digital Learning Environment.- Chapter 4. Leisure Activities and Individuals with Autism.- Chapter 5. Community Living and Individuals with Autism.- Chapter 6. Daily Living Skills and Individuals with Autism.- Chapter 7. Employment and Individuals with Autism.- Chapter 8. Computer-Based Interventions and Individuals with Autism.- Chapter 9. Health and Well-Being and Individuals with Autism.- Chapter 10. Risks Related to the Use of Digital Technologies and Individuals with Autism.- Chapter 11. Digital Technology, Self-advocacy, and Individuals with Autism.This book examines opportunities and obstacles in achieving the digital inclusion of individuals with autism spectrum disorder (ASD). It addresses basic requirements of the digital society and the concepts of digital inclusion (and exclusion), digital participation, and the disability digital divide as well as support for individuals with autism in co-creating digital devices. The book discusses the application of digital technologies across different contexts, including education, leisure activities, community life, daily living skills, and employment of individuals with autism.Featured areas of coverage include:Computer-based interventions for speech development, social communication, executive functions, and other skills in children with autism.Digital health intervention for persons with ASD.Risks for persons with ASD on the Internet (e.g., excessive use, addictive behavior, and cyberbullying).Digital technology use in simulating job interviews, and teaching work skills.Digital technology use in self-advocacy activities of individuals with autism.Digital Inclusion of Individuals with Autism Spectrum Disorder is an essential reference for researchers, professors, graduate students, clinicians and related therapists and professionals in clinical child and school psychology, social work, behavioral therapy/rehabilitation, pediatrics, physical therapy, occupational therapy, speech and language therapy, neurology, special education, child and adolescent psychiatry, and developmental psychology.This book examines opportunities and obstacles in achieving the digital inclusion of individuals with autism spectrum disorder (ASD). It addresses basic requirements of the digital society and the concepts of digital inclusion (and exclusion), digital participation, and the disability digital divide as well as support for individuals with autism in co-creating digital devices. The book discusses the application of digital technologies across different contexts, including education, leisure activities, community life, daily living skills, and employment of individuals with autism.Featured areas of coverage include:Computer-based interventions for speech development, social communication, executive functions, and other skills in children with autism.Digital health intervention for persons with ASD.Risks for persons with ASD on the Internet (e.g., excessive use, addictive behavior, and cyberbullying).Digital technology use in simulating job interviews, and teaching work skills.Digital technology use in self-advocacy activities of individuals with autism. Digital Inclusion of Individuals with Autism Spectrum Disorder is an essential reference for researchers, professors, graduate students, clinicians and related therapists and professionals in clinical child and school psychology, social work, behavioral therapy/rehabilitation, pediatrics, physical therapy, occupational therapy, speech and language therapy, neurology, special education, child and adolescent psychiatry, and developmental psychology.Addresses benefits of digital health interventions for persons with autismExplores digital technology use across contextsDiscusses digital technology use in self-advocacy activities for individuals with autismNenad Glumbić, Ph.D., is a special education teacher and full professor at the University of Belgrade – The Faculty of Special Education and Rehabilitation. He earned a doctoral degree in 2000 defending the first doctorate in the field of autism in Serbia. His primary research interests include autism spectrum disorder and intellectual disability. Professor Glumbić is a counselor within online counseling services for autism, UNICEF consultant, and principal investigator in many research projects. He is the author of more than 300 papers and 5 books.Mirjana Đorđević, Ph.D., is a special education teacher and assistant professor at the University of Belgrade – Faculty of Special Education and Rehabilitation. From 2008, she has been the author of approximately 100 publications. Her primary research interests include individuals with autism and intellectual disabilities. She participated in the development of digital applications intended to improve the daily functioning of persons with autism and was a UNICEF consultant for the development of early intervention programs in Serbia.


Branislav Brojčin, Ph.D., is a special education teacher and full professor at the University of Belgrade – Faculty of Special Education and Rehabilitation. His primary research interests include the inclusive education as well as the communication and social skills of people with intellectual disabilities. As a member of government teams, he participated in the development of inclusive policies in Serbia. He is the author and co-author of several books related to the inclusive education as well as the treatment of people with developmental disabilities.		ScienceProfessional Books (2)Science (SC)EBOP41168Behavioral Science and Psychology009783031120398Developmental PsychologyChild and Adolescence PsychologyDevelopmental DisabilitiesSchool PsychologyOccupational TherapySpeech and Language Therapy391000
42
Behavioral Science and Psychology978-3-030-33176-4GrayshieldLisa Grayshield; Ramon Del CastilloLisa Grayshield, Washoe Tribe of Nevada and California, Carson City, NV, USA; Ramon Del Castillo, Metropolitan State University of Denver, Denver, CO, USAIndigenous Ways of Knowing in CounselingTheory, Research, and PracticeXIX, 230 p. 12 illus.12020final159.9948.00171.1951.36139.9942.00179.9954.00Hard cover0International and Cultural PsychologyBehavioral Science and PsychologyContributed volumeBook0English230JMHJMRSpringerSpringer International Publishing0Available2020-06-232020-06-232020-07-122020-07-121Author Narratives.- Indigenous Epistemology.- IWOK Theory in Counseling and Psychology.- Reclaiming Indigenous Heritage: A Mestiza Consciousness Lens.- Indigenous Healers in the Borderlands.- Seventh Generation Indigenous Research Agenda.- From Training to Practice: The Experiences of Native American Psychologists Who Have Maintained Their Indigenous Knowledge–Dissertation Research Study.- Holding and Creating Space to Facilitate Healing and Well Being in Counseling and Psychological Practice­–A Research Study.- Elders Wisdom in Healing Historical and Intergenerational Trauma–A Qualitative Research Study.- IWOK in the Counseling Center.- Indigenous Counseling Minor Degree Program.- Ethical and Legal Considerations When Working With Native Faculty, Students and Clients.- Prescription Drug Use and/or Natural and Organic Remedies​.Indigenous Counseling is based in universal principals/truths that promote a way to think about how to live in the world and with one another that extends beyond the scope of Western European thought. Individual health and wellness is intricately interwoven into the relationships that we establish on multiple levels in our lives, those that we establish with ourselves, with others, and with the external environments with which we live. From an Indigenous perspective, health and wellness in our individual lives, families, community and world, is the result of ancient knowledge that produces action in a way that is beneficial to all beings on the planet for generations to come. The current social and political record of our country now clearly reveals the result of a paradigm that has outlived its time. No longer can we ignore the core values of our fields of study; we must take a deeper look into the academic endeavors that inform the way we pass our cultures’ values on to successive generations. While it has taken Western Science decades to catch up to Indigenous/Native Science, we now have ample scientific evidence to support claims of interconnectedness on multiple levels of individual and collective health.Defines Indigenous Epistemology from a broad perspective in order to provide a philosophical stance for academic scholarship relating to counseling theory, research and practiceAddresses modes of counseling and therapy that are theoretically consonant with Native traditionsDescribes healing traditions that continue to live in South America, Mexico and other Latin American countriesDr. Lisa Grayshield is a member of the Washoe Tribe of Nevada and California. She is a Mother, a Grandmother, a tribal community member, and an associate professor of counseling psychology at New Mexico State University. She has an extensive record of scholarly activity that reflects her passion in promotion of Indigenous Ways of Knowing (IWOK) as a viable and practical theoretical construct for the research, teaching and practice in the helping professions. Dr. Grayshield, along with her students have developed IWOK coursework including, Indigenous Counseling Research Theory and Practice; Healing Trauma: Including Historical and Intergenerational Trauma, and; Indigenous Research Methods. She is currently focused on the creation of an Indigenous Healing Sanctuary where her students can learn about plants and experience ceremony.<div>
</div><div>Dr. Ramon Del Castillo is Professor and Chair of the Chicana/o Studies Department, Metropolitan State University of Denver, Denver,CO, USA.</div>		ScienceProfessional Books (2)Science (SC)EBOP41168Behavioral Science and Psychology009783030331764Cross-Cultural PsychologyCognitive Psychology547100
43
Behavioral Science and Psychology978-3-030-11740-5HoggettPaul HoggettPaul Hoggett, University of the West of England (UWE), Bristol, UKClimate PsychologyOn Indifference to DisasterXV, 270 p. 5 illus., 3 illus. in color.12019final29.999.0032.099.6324.997.5032.999.90Soft cover0Studies in the PsychosocialBehavioral Science and PsychologyGeneral interestBook0English270JMJMHPalgrave MacmillanSpringer International Publishing0WorldwideAvailable2019-06-122019-06-012019-06-152019-06-151Chapter 1: Introduction; Paul Hoggett.- Part I: Mostly Methods.- Chapter 2: New Methods for Investigating New Dangers; Renee Lertzman.- Chapter 3: Children & Climate Change: Exploring Children’s Feelings about Climate Change using Free Association Narrative Interview Methodology; Caroline Hickman.- Chapter 4: An Integrative Methodology for Investigating Lived Experience and the Psychosocial Factors Influencing Environmental Cognition and Behaviour; Nadine Andrews.- Chapter 5: Emotional Work as a Necessity: A Psychosocial Analysis of Low-Carbon Energy Collaboration Stories; Rosie Robison.- Chapter 6: Climate Change, Social Dreaming and Art: Thinking the Unthinkable; Julian Manley & Wendy Hollway.- Chapter 7: Researching Climate Engagement: Collaborative Conversations and Consciousness Change; Sally Gillespie.- Part II: Mostly Findings.- Chapter 8: Emotions, Reflexivity and the Long Haul: What we do About how we Feel About Climate Change; Jo Hamilton.- Chapter 9: Leading with Nature in Mind; Rembrandt Zegers.- Chapter 10: Attitudes to Climate Change in some English Local Authorities: Varying Sense of Agency in Denial and Hope; Gill Westcott.- Chapter 11:We Have to Talk About….Climate Change; Robert Tollemache.- Chapter 12: Engaging with Climate Change: Comparing the Cultures of Science and Activism; Ro Randall & Paul Hoggett.- Chapter 13: Conclusion; Paul Hoggett.<div>This book investigates the psycho-social phenomenon which is society’s failure to respond to climate change. It analyses the non-rational dimensions of our collective paralysis in the face of worsening climate change and environmental destruction, exploring the emotional, ethical, social, organizational and cultural dynamics to blame for this global lack of action. </div><div>
</div><div>The book features eleven research projects from four different countries and is divided in two parts, the first highlighting novel methodologies, the second presenting new findings. Contributors to the first part show how a ‘deep listening’ approach to research can reveal the anxieties, tensions, contradictions, frames and narratives that contribute to people’s experiences, and the many ways climate change and other environmental risks are imagined through metaphor, imagery and dreams. Using detailed interview extracts drawn from politicians, scientists and activists as well as ordinary people, the second part of the book examines the many different ways in which we both avoid and square up to this gathering disaster, and the many faces of alarm, outrage, denial and indifference this involves.</div><div>
</div><div>Paul Hoggett is Emeritus Professor of Social Policy at the University of West England, UK. Paul is the co-founder of the Climate Psychology Alliance, is a psychoanalytic psychotherapist and has worked as a group relations consultant over many years.</div><div>
</div>		This book investigates the psycho-social phenomenon which is society’s failure to respond to climate change. It analyses the non-rational dimensions of our collective paralysis in the face of worsening climate change and environmental destruction, exploring the emotional, ethical, social, organizational and cultural dynamics to blame for this global lack of action. The book features eleven research projects from four different countries and is divided in two parts, the first highlighting novel methodologies, the second presenting new findings. Contributors to the first part show how a ‘deep listening’ approach to research can reveal the anxieties, tensions, contradictions, frames and narratives that contribute to people’s experiences, and the many ways climate change and other environmental risks are imagined through metaphor, imagery and dreams. Using detailed interview extracts drawn from politicians, scientists and activists as well as ordinary people, thesecond part of the book examines the many different ways in which we both avoid and square up to this gathering disaster, and the many faces of alarm, outrage, denial and indifference this involves.Explores practical implications for one of the most burning cultural and political issues of our timeQuestions how to best understand peoples' responses to climate changeArgues that climate change requires a dedicated and specialist research methodologyContends that mainstream psychological focus on behaviour, attitudes and individual actions is not the way forward in climate change studiesPaul Hoggett is Emeritus Professor of Social Policy at the University of West England, UK. Paul is the co-founder of the Climate Psychology Alliance, is a psychoanalytic psychotherapist and has worked as a group relations consultant over many years.TradePalgrave Trade US (P1)Palgrave Trade (P1)EBOP41168Behavioral Science and Psychology009783030117405Behavioral Sciences and PsychologyCommunity PsychologySocial PsychologyEnvironmental SciencesClimate Sciences454000
44
Behavioral Science and Psychology978-3-031-31712-5JohnsonAndy J. Johnson; April VindingAndy J. Johnson, Bethel University, Saint Paul, MN, USA; April Vinding, Bethel University, Saint Paul, MN, USASubverting Resistance to Social Justice and Diversity EducationConstructive Approaches with Undergraduate StudentsXIII, 86 p. 1 illus.12023final39.9912.0042.7912.8434.9910.5044.9913.50Soft cover0SpringerBriefs in Social WorkBehavioral Science and PsychologyBrief/PivotBook0English86JPJKSNSpringerSpringer Nature Switzerland0WorldwideAvailable2023-05-282023-05-282023-06-142023-06-141Chapter 1. Understanding Resistance to Social Justice and Diversity Education.- Chapter 2. Embrace Preparing: Theoretical and Practical Foundations for Motivating Students to Address Social Justice for Persons from Diverse Social Locations.- Chapter 3. Embrace Collaboration: Developing Community Partnerships Through the Relational Partnership Development Model (RPDM).- Chapter 4. Embrace Multiple Perspectives: Balancing Interests of Community Partners, Students, and Instructors in Developing Creative Solutions.- Chapter 5. Embrace Process: Classroom Practices for Nonviolent Formation.- Chapter 6. Embrace Complexity: Anticipating and Neutralizing Student Resistance in Undergraduate Education for Transgender and Gender Identity Justice.This compact book is constructed using psychological theory and research to empower university faculty to facilitate student engagement and address student resistance to diversity and social justice education more effectively. <div>
</div><div>University faculty teaching diversity and social justice have traditionally encountered various forms of student resistance. Recent cultural trends of political opposition to teaching critical race theory and other forms of increased polarization and scapegoating with decreased levels of social tolerance have exacerbated challenges in promoting student engagement in diversity and social justice education in universities and colleges. </div><div>
</div>In contrast to traditional models that tend to be confrontational in addressing student biases, the new Moving Towards Social Justice (MTSJ), Relational Partnership Development Model (RPDM) and process theoretical models seek to build on appropriate pre-existing strengths, interests,values, and the developmental readiness of students who might otherwise oppose learning about the contexts, lives, and predicaments of marginalized persons living in various intersections of gender, race, ethnicity, national origin, immigration status, sexual orientation, gender identity and ability/disability status. Emphasis is placed on the development of professional and life skills, such as wisdom and intercultural competence, which provide incentives and remove barriers to learning about social justice and diversity. Project-based learning approaches grounded in a developmental framework to foster the thriving and well-being of diverse students, collaborative partners in the community, and diverse persons served by the community partners are emphasized. The role of empirical assessment, feedback, and program refinement over time is also delineated within the models.<div>
</div><div>Subverting Resistance to Social Justice and Diversity Education: Constructive Approaches with Undergraduate Students is an indispensable and timely resource for university and college instructors who teach courses or have significant portions of a class that involve education around social justice, diversity, and intersectionality issues, such as cross-cultural psychology, multicultural psychology, social work, sociology, intercultural communication, and counseling or clinical practice with individuals or families from diverse social locations. University officers of diversity, faculty development providers, and other administrators interested in empowering university faculty to increase student engagement in social justice and diversity education also would find the book a useful reference.</div>		Builds on strengths, interests and developmental readiness of students who might oppose learning about diverse personsEmphasizes helping students develop professional and life skills that promote learning about social justice & diversityFocuses on power-sharing, collaboration, curiosity & discovery in sorting through complexities of social justice issuesAndy J. Johnson, PhD, Associate Professor of Psychological Sciences Emeritus, taught a variety of courses in the Department of Psychology at Bethel University in Saint Paul, Minnesota. His research interests center on the intersection of religion, ethnicity, national origin, immigration status, sexual orientation, gender identity, and ability/disability with interpersonal violence. A volume he edited, Religion and Men's Violence Against Women; a volume he co-edited with Ruth Nelson and Emily Lund, Religion, Disability, and Interpersonal Violence; and a volume he co-edited with Emily Lund and Claire Burgess, Violence Against LGBTQ+ Persons, are published by Springer.

Andy is a Past Board Member for the National Partnership to End Interpersonal Violence (NPEIV), where he served as Co-Chair of Action Team 2: Training and Mentoring. He is currently a member of American Psychological Association (APA) Division 44: Society for the Psychology of Sexual Orientation and Gender Diversity, APA Division 56: Trauma Psychology, and a former Member-at-Large for APA Division 36: Society for the Psychology of Religion and Spirituality. Andy has served as a member of the Olmstead Specialty Committee on Violence Against Persons with Disabilities for the State of Minnesota. He earned his MA and PhD in counseling psychology from the University of Notre Dame.

April Vinding, MFA, grew up deeply embedded in a midwestern American evangelical culture that fused political power, patriarchy and divinity, and prized certainty, suspected beauty, and avoided conflict. Naturally, she got an MFA, a divorce, and loves to dance. AV, as her students call her, teaches writing at all levels, facilitates faculty development, and develops curriculum. Her creative work includes an incisive spiritual memoir, Triptych, and various essays, poems, and multimedia work. She is wildly interested in embodied education and the intersections of creative and spiritual practice.
ProfessionalsProfessional Books (2)Standard (0)EBOP41168Behavioral Science and Psychology009783031317125Social JusticeSocial Work EducationCross-Cultural PsychologySociologyCounselingIntercultural Communication168000
45
Behavioral Science and Psychology978-3-030-84712-8KrysikJudy Krysik; Nancy RodriguezJudy Krysik, Arizona State University, Phoenix, AZ, USA; Nancy Rodriguez, University of California, Irvine, Irvine, CA, USAChildren of Incarcerated ParentsIntegrating Research into Best Practices and PolicyXXV, 271 p. 10 illus., 4 illus. in color.12022final149.9945.00160.4948.15129.9939.00169.9951.00Hard cover0Children of Incarcerated Parents: From Understanding to ImpactBehavioral Science and PsychologyContributed volumeBook0English271JMCLNMSpringerSpringer International Publishing0Available2022-04-122022-04-122022-04-292022-04-291Part I. Micro System.- Chapter 1: Women and Infants Affected by Incarceration: The Potential Value of Home Visiting Program Engagement.- Chapter 2: Adolescents with Incarcerated Parents: Towards Developmentally-Informed Research and Practice.- Chapter 3: Family- and School-Based Sources of Resilience among Children of Incarcerated Parents.- Part II: The Mesosystem.- Chapter 4: The Forgotten: The Impact of Parental and Familial Incarceration on Fragile Communities.- Chapter 5: Racial Differences in Female Imprisonment and Foster Care.- Chapter 6: Language as a Protective Factor: Making Conscious Word Choices to Support Children with Incarcerated Parents.- Part III: Exo System.- Chapter 7. Development and Implementation of an Attachment-Based Intervention to Enhance Visits between Children and Their Incarcerated Parents.- Chapter 8: A Review of Reentry Programs and Their Inclusion of Families.- Chapter 9: Gender Differences and Implications for Programming Duringthe Reentry of Incarcerated Fathers and Mothers Back into Their Communities.- Part IV. Macrosystem.- Chapter 10: We are not collateral consequences: Arrest to re-entry policy solutions for children of incarcerated parents.- Chapter 11: Toward a Critical Race Analysis of Positive Youth Development for Adolescents of Color Experiencing Parental Incarceration.- Chapter 12: Programmatic and Policy Responses to Mothers who are Incarcerated.- Chapter 13: Incarcerated Parents and their Children: Perspectives from the Smart Decarceration Social Work Grand Challenge.- Epilogue.This book presents multidimensional knowledge on children of incarcerated parents using Bronfenbrenner’s ecological theory as an organizing framework. It examines the extent to which different levels of the environment are supportive (i.e., leading to resilience) and stress-producing (i.e., contributing to risk). The volume explores four levels of the environment – microsystem, mesosystem, exosystem, and macrosystem – with specific theories and paradigms woven into the inquiry at each. At the level of child and family, it discusses the factors that influence resilience and risk in children from gestation through young adulthood; at the community level, it addresses risk and resilience in the interactions between children and families and the various systems with which they interact (e.g., child welfare).



Key areas of coverage include:



· A description of the factors that influence the quality of programming for children and their families.

· A critical analysis of state and national policies that affect which individuals receive, or fail to receive, specific services.

· An overview and evaluation of the state of knowledge and implications for research and practice to improve outcomes for children of incarcerated parents.

· An organizing framework to help researchers identify gaps in the existing knowledge base and distills and organizes evidence-based information for practitioners.



Children of Incarcerated Parents is an essential resource for researchers, professors, and graduate students as well as practitioners, therapists, and other professionals in child and school psychology, family studies, public health, and all interrelated disciplines, including developmental psychology, criminal justice, social work, educational policy and politics.		This book presents multidimensional knowledge on children of incarcerated parents using Bronfenbrenner’s ecological theory as an organizing framework. It examines the extent to which different levels of the environment are supportive (i.e., leading to resilience) and stress-producing (i.e., contributing to risk). The volume explores four levels of the environment – microsystem, mesosystem, exosystem, and macrosystem – with specific theories and paradigms woven into the inquiry at each. At the level of child and family, it discusses the factors that influence resilience and risk in children from gestation through young adulthood; at the community level, it addresses risk and resilience in the interactions between children and families and the various systems with which they interact (e.g., child welfare).



Key areas of coverage include:



· A description of the factors that influence the quality of programming for children and their families.

· A critical analysis of state and national policies that affect which individuals receive, or fail to receive, specific services.

· An overview and evaluation of the state of knowledge and implications for research and practice to improve outcomes for children of incarcerated parents.

· An organizing framework to help researchers identify gaps in the existing knowledge base and distills and organizes evidence-based information for practitioners.



Children of Incarcerated Parents is an essential resource for researchers, professors, and graduate students as well as practitioners, therapists, and other professionals in child and school psychology, family studies, public health, and all interrelated disciplines, including developmental psychology, criminal justice, social work, educational policy and politics.		Explores the lives of children with incarcerated parents using Bronfenbrenner’s ecological theory as an organizing frameworkExamines multiple environmental factors that influence resilience and risk in children, from gestation to emerging adulthoodAddresses interactions between children and families and various systems (e.g., child welfare)Describes factors that affect program quality for children and their familiesJudy Krysik, Ph.D., is an Associate Professor in the School of Social Work at Arizona State University and Director of the ASU Center for Child Well-Being, host of the National Children of Incarcerated Parent Conference. Her research interests include the prevention of child maltreatment among infants and toddlers, the efficacy of specialized court programs directed at young children removed for reasons of neglect and child maltreatment, and the promotion of evidence-based practices and programs for parents. She has developed child safety prevention programming that is utilized in schools and preschools across the nation.

Nancy Rodriguez, Ph.D., is a Professor in the Department of Criminology, Law and Society at the University of California, Irvine. In 2014, Dr. Rodriguez was appointed by President Barack Obama as Director of the National Institute of Justice, which is the scientific research arm of the U.S. Department of Justice. Previously, Dr. Rodriquezwas a professor in Arizona State University's School of Criminology and Criminal Justice. Her research interests include inequality and the collateral consequences of mass incarceration, and she has collaborated with law enforcement, courts, and correctional agencies to better understand and improve conditions for those incarcerated and their families.

Judy Krysik and Nancy Rodriguez are co-hosts of the National Children of Incarcerated Parent Conference held annually in Phoenix, AZ		ScienceProfessional Books (2)Science (SC)EBOP41168Behavioral Science and Psychology009783030847128School PsychologyFamily LawPublic Health617100
46
Behavioral Science and Psychology978-3-030-84715-9KrysikJudy Krysik; Nancy RodriguezJudy Krysik, Arizona State University, Phoenix, AZ, USA; Nancy Rodriguez, University of California, Irvine, Irvine, CA, USAChildren of Incarcerated ParentsIntegrating Research into Best Practices and PolicyXXV, 271 p. 10 illus., 4 illus. in color.12022final149.9945.00160.4948.15129.9939.00169.9951.00Soft cover1Children of Incarcerated Parents: From Understanding to ImpactBehavioral Science and PsychologyContributed volumeBook0English271JMCLNMSpringerSpringer International Publishing0Available2023-04-132022-04-122023-04-122023-04-121Part I. Micro System.- Chapter 1: Women and Infants Affected by Incarceration: The Potential Value of Home Visiting Program Engagement.- Chapter 2: Adolescents with Incarcerated Parents: Towards Developmentally-Informed Research and Practice.- Chapter 3: Family- and School-Based Sources of Resilience among Children of Incarcerated Parents.- Part II: The Mesosystem.- Chapter 4: The Forgotten: The Impact of Parental and Familial Incarceration on Fragile Communities.- Chapter 5: Racial Differences in Female Imprisonment and Foster Care.- Chapter 6: Language as a Protective Factor: Making Conscious Word Choices to Support Children with Incarcerated Parents.- Part III: Exo System.- Chapter 7. Development and Implementation of an Attachment-Based Intervention to Enhance Visits between Children and Their Incarcerated Parents.- Chapter 8: A Review of Reentry Programs and Their Inclusion of Families.- Chapter 9: Gender Differences and Implications for Programming Duringthe Reentry of Incarcerated Fathers and Mothers Back into Their Communities.- Part IV. Macrosystem.- Chapter 10: We are not collateral consequences: Arrest to re-entry policy solutions for children of incarcerated parents.- Chapter 11: Toward a Critical Race Analysis of Positive Youth Development for Adolescents of Color Experiencing Parental Incarceration.- Chapter 12: Programmatic and Policy Responses to Mothers who are Incarcerated.- Chapter 13: Incarcerated Parents and their Children: Perspectives from the Smart Decarceration Social Work Grand Challenge.- Epilogue.This book presents multidimensional knowledge on children of incarcerated parents using Bronfenbrenner’s ecological theory as an organizing framework. It examines the extent to which different levels of the environment are supportive (i.e., leading to resilience) and stress-producing (i.e., contributing to risk). The volume explores four levels of the environment – microsystem, mesosystem, exosystem, and macrosystem – with specific theories and paradigms woven into the inquiry at each. At the level of child and family, it discusses the factors that influence resilience and risk in children from gestation through young adulthood; at the community level, it addresses risk and resilience in the interactions between children and families and the various systems with which they interact (e.g., child welfare).



Key areas of coverage include:



· A description of the factors that influence the quality of programming for children and their families.

· A critical analysis of state and national policies that affect which individuals receive, or fail to receive, specific services.

· An overview and evaluation of the state of knowledge and implications for research and practice to improve outcomes for children of incarcerated parents.

· An organizing framework to help researchers identify gaps in the existing knowledge base and distills and organizes evidence-based information for practitioners.



Children of Incarcerated Parents is an essential resource for researchers, professors, and graduate students as well as practitioners, therapists, and other professionals in child and school psychology, family studies, public health, and all interrelated disciplines, including developmental psychology, criminal justice, social work, educational policy and politics.		This book presents multidimensional knowledge on children of incarcerated parents using Bronfenbrenner’s ecological theory as an organizing framework. It examines the extent to which different levels of the environment are supportive (i.e., leading to resilience) and stress-producing (i.e., contributing to risk). The volume explores four levels of the environment – microsystem, mesosystem, exosystem, and macrosystem – with specific theories and paradigms woven into the inquiry at each. At the level of child and family, it discusses the factors that influence resilience and risk in children from gestation through young adulthood; at the community level, it addresses risk and resilience in the interactions between children and families and the various systems with which they interact (e.g., child welfare).



Key areas of coverage include:



· A description of the factors that influence the quality of programming for children and their families.

· A critical analysis of state and national policies that affect which individuals receive, or fail to receive, specific services.

· An overview and evaluation of the state of knowledge and implications for research and practice to improve outcomes for children of incarcerated parents.

· An organizing framework to help researchers identify gaps in the existing knowledge base and distills and organizes evidence-based information for practitioners.



Children of Incarcerated Parents is an essential resource for researchers, professors, and graduate students as well as practitioners, therapists, and other professionals in child and school psychology, family studies, public health, and all interrelated disciplines, including developmental psychology, criminal justice, social work, educational policy and politics.		Explores the lives of children with incarcerated parents using Bronfenbrenner’s ecological theory as an organizing frameworkExamines multiple environmental factors that influence resilience and risk in children, from gestation to emerging adulthoodAddresses interactions between children and families and various systems (e.g., child welfare)Describes factors that affect program quality for children and their familiesJudy Krysik, Ph.D., is an Associate Professor in the School of Social Work at Arizona State University and Director of the ASU Center for Child Well-Being, host of the National Children of Incarcerated Parent Conference. Her research interests include the prevention of child maltreatment among infants and toddlers, the efficacy of specialized court programs directed at young children removed for reasons of neglect and child maltreatment, and the promotion of evidence-based practices and programs for parents. She has developed child safety prevention programming that is utilized in schools and preschools across the nation.

Nancy Rodriguez, Ph.D., is a Professor in the Department of Criminology, Law and Society at the University of California, Irvine. In 2014, Dr. Rodriguez was appointed by President Barack Obama as Director of the National Institute of Justice, which is the scientific research arm of the U.S. Department of Justice. Previously, Dr. Rodriquezwas a professor in Arizona State University's School of Criminology and Criminal Justice. Her research interests include inequality and the collateral consequences of mass incarceration, and she has collaborated with law enforcement, courts, and correctional agencies to better understand and improve conditions for those incarcerated and their families.

Judy Krysik and Nancy Rodriguez are co-hosts of the National Children of Incarcerated Parent Conference held annually in Phoenix, AZ		ScienceProfessional Books (2)Science (SC)EBOP41168Behavioral Science and Psychology009783030847159School PsychologyFamily LawPublic Health462100
47
Behavioral Science and Psychology978-3-031-22287-0LeontopoulouSophie Leontopoulou; Antonella Delle FaveSophie Leontopoulou, University of Ioannina, Ioannina, Greece; Antonella Delle Fave, University of Milano, Milano, ItalyEmerging Adulthood in the COVID-19 Pandemic and Other Crises: Individual and Relational ResourcesXIII, 339 p. 1 illus.12022final149.9945.00160.4948.15129.9939.00169.9951.00Hard cover0Cross-Cultural Advancements in Positive PsychologyVolumeBehavioral Science and PsychologyContributed volumeBook0English339JMANKJMV2SpringerSpringer International Publishing0Available2023-02-012023-01-312023-02-182023-02-181- 1. Introduction. - Part I On Crises, Emerging Adults, and Well-being. - 2. Discovering and Pursuing Purpose in Trying Times. - 3. The Meaning Making of the Greek Crisis Through Collective Experiences of Emerging Adults. - 4. Mental Health and Interpersonal Relationships in Emerging Adults During the COVID-19 Pandemic: An International Overview. - Part II Challenges and Resources in Coping with Crisis: The Experience of Emerging Adults Across Nations. - 5. Mental Health and Daily Experience of Italian College Students During the COVID-19 Pandemic. - 6. Well-Being of Greek University Students During the COVID-19 Pandemic. - 7. Exploring Meaning-Making Among University Students in South Africa During the COVID-19 Lockdown. - 8. The Interplay of Growth Mindset and Self-Compassion with Psychological Resilience Among Chinese Emerging Adults During the COVID-19 Pandemic. - 9. Stress, Self-Efficacy, Resilience, and Happiness Among Mexican Emerging Adults During the Confinement Due to COVID-19. - 10. Perceived Parental Rearing Behaviors, Resilience, Loneliness,<div>and Life Satisfaction Among Greek Emerging Adults During the COVID-19 Pandemic. - 11. A Struggle for Love: Emerging Adults’ Romantic Relationships During the COVID-19 Pandemic. - 12. Hope in the Face of the Greek Crisis: Intergenerational Echoes of Income and Parental Involvement in Emerging Adulthood. - Part III Well-being, Resources and Interventions in the Academic Context. - 13. Academic Well-Being Among Emerging Adults During the COVID-19 Pandemic: An International Overview. - 14. Flow, Deep Learning, and Preparing Emerging Adults for Times of Crisis: An Empirically-Based Example of Game-Based Learning. - 15. The Role of Music in Undergraduate Students’ Wellbeing During the COVID-19 Lockdown: An Investigation Based on Musical Training. - 16. Empowering Emerging Adults to Face the Post-COVID-19 Challenges. - 17. Combining Stress Mindset Training with Acceptance and Commitment Therapy (ACT): An Internet-Delivered Intervention for Emerging Adults During the Pandemic. - 18. A Crisis-Adaptive Approach to Resilience-Building in Pre-service Teaching and Librarianship Education: Learning About and Learning to Be. - 19. Conclusions.</div>This volume addresses important questions related to the well-being and quality of life of emerging adults during crisis periods. It discusses the particular challenges that emerging adults face during a global or local crisis, the psychosocial resources they mobilize to overcome them and to flourish, the well-being indicators pertinent to youth development across various life domains, and the strategies to promote positive youth development and well-being under conditions of crisis. The volume examines these questions from an international and interdisciplinary point of view, collecting contributions mainly from psychology, but also education, economics, and sociology. It includes novel quantitative and qualitative research, intervention studies, critical reviews, and conceptual chapters. This makes it an essential read for scholars of positive development in emerging adulthood under crisis, as well as a relevant and accessible source of information for discerning lay readers.<div>
</div><div>The specific focus of the majority of contributions on the Covid-19 pandemic makes this volume highly topical. Its focus on both well-being dimensions and problems related to crises offers a deeper understanding of the cultural similarities and differences in individual and collective challenges and resources across world regions. The volume investigates various facets of well-being, including daily experiences, relationships, purpose and growth, learning activities, and achievements. Evidence derived from the contributions to this volume can prove valuable for handling future crises through targeted interventions and programmes in different contexts and life domains.</div>		This volume addresses important questions related to the well-being and quality of life of emerging adults during crisis periods. It discusses the particular challenges that emerging adults face during a global or local crisis, the psychosocial resources they mobilize to overcome them and to flourish, the well-being indicators pertinent to youth development across various life domains, and the strategies to promote positive youth development and well-being under conditions of crisis. The volume examines these questions from an international and interdisciplinary point of view, collecting contributions mainly from psychology, but also education, economics, and sociology. It includes novel quantitative and qualitative research, intervention studies, critical reviews, and conceptual chapters. This makes it an essential read for scholars of positive development in emerging adulthood under crisis, as well as a relevant and accessible source of information for discerning lay readers.<div>
</div><div>The specific focus of the majority of contributions on the Covid-19 pandemic makes this volume highly topical. Its focus on both well-being dimensions and problems related to crises offers a deeper understanding of the cultural similarities and differences in individual and collective challenges and resources across world regions. The volume investigates various facets of well-being, including daily experiences, relationships, purpose and growth, learning activities, and achievements. Evidence derived from the contributions to this volume can prove valuable for handling future crises through targeted interventions and programmes in different contexts and life domains.</div>		Addresses the quality of life of emerging adults during the pandemic and other crisesProvides cross-cultural perspectives on well-being across life domains related to youth developmentDiscusses pathways to positive youth development and well-being under conditions of crisisSophie Leontopoulou is Associate Professor in Psychology at the Department of Primary Education, University of Ioannina, Greece. She served as coordinator of the Division of Developmental Psychology of the Hellenic Psychological Society, and is founder member of the Positive Psychology Branch of this society, as well as of the Hellenic Association of Positive Psychology. Her theoretical and research interests focus on the area of Positive Developmental Psychology. She has published and presented her work internationally on positive psychosocial development in childhood, adolescence and emerging adulthood, resilience, well-being, flourishing, character strengths, positive emotions and positive psychology interventions.

Antonella Delle Fave, MD with specialty in clinical psychology, is Professor of Psychology at the Medical School, University of Milano, Italy. Her research work is centred on the study of flow experience, mental health indicators and daily experience fluctuation across cultures and among individuals experiencing conditions of diversity and adversity. She is involved in research and intervention projects aimed at promoting well-being and mental health among persons with chronic diseases and their family caregivers. Her scientific production includes papers in international peer-reviewed journals, as well as authored and edited academic volumes. She served as President of the International Positive Psychology Association, the European Network of Positive Psychology, and the Società Italiana di Psicologia Positiva. Since 2010 she has been Editor-in-Chief of the Journal of Happiness Studies (Springer).		ScienceProfessional Books (2)Science (SC)EBOP41168Behavioral Science and Psychology009783031222870Positive PsychologyWell-BeingQuality of Life ResearchSociology of Family, Youth and AgingEducational ResearchChildren, Youth and Family Policy699000
48
Behavioral Science and Psychology978-3-031-22290-0LeontopoulouSophie Leontopoulou; Antonella Delle FaveSophie Leontopoulou, University of Ioannina, Ioannina, Greece; Antonella Delle Fave, University of Milano, Milano, ItalyEmerging Adulthood in the COVID-19 Pandemic and Other Crises: Individual and Relational ResourcesXIII, 339 p. 1 illus.12022final149.9945.00160.4948.15129.9939.00169.9951.00Soft cover1Cross-Cultural Advancements in Positive PsychologyVolumeBehavioral Science and PsychologyContributed volumeBook0English339JMANKJMV2SpringerSpringer International Publishing0Available2024-02-022023-01-312024-02-012024-02-011- 1. Introduction. - Part I On Crises, Emerging Adults, and Well-being. - 2. Discovering and Pursuing Purpose in Trying Times. - 3. The Meaning Making of the Greek Crisis Through Collective Experiences of Emerging Adults. - 4. Mental Health and Interpersonal Relationships in Emerging Adults During the COVID-19 Pandemic: An International Overview. - Part II Challenges and Resources in Coping with Crisis: The Experience of Emerging Adults Across Nations. - 5. Mental Health and Daily Experience of Italian College Students During the COVID-19 Pandemic. - 6. Well-Being of Greek University Students During the COVID-19 Pandemic. - 7. Exploring Meaning-Making Among University Students in South Africa During the COVID-19 Lockdown. - 8. The Interplay of Growth Mindset and Self-Compassion with Psychological Resilience Among Chinese Emerging Adults During the COVID-19 Pandemic. - 9. Stress, Self-Efficacy, Resilience, and Happiness Among Mexican Emerging Adults During the Confinement Due to COVID-19. - 10. Perceived Parental Rearing Behaviors, Resilience, Loneliness,<div>and Life Satisfaction Among Greek Emerging Adults During the COVID-19 Pandemic. - 11. A Struggle for Love: Emerging Adults’ Romantic Relationships During the COVID-19 Pandemic. - 12. Hope in the Face of the Greek Crisis: Intergenerational Echoes of Income and Parental Involvement in Emerging Adulthood. - Part III Well-being, Resources and Interventions in the Academic Context. - 13. Academic Well-Being Among Emerging Adults During the COVID-19 Pandemic: An International Overview. - 14. Flow, Deep Learning, and Preparing Emerging Adults for Times of Crisis: An Empirically-Based Example of Game-Based Learning. - 15. The Role of Music in Undergraduate Students’ Wellbeing During the COVID-19 Lockdown: An Investigation Based on Musical Training. - 16. Empowering Emerging Adults to Face the Post-COVID-19 Challenges. - 17. Combining Stress Mindset Training with Acceptance and Commitment Therapy (ACT): An Internet-Delivered Intervention for Emerging Adults During the Pandemic. - 18. A Crisis-Adaptive Approach to Resilience-Building in Pre-service Teaching and Librarianship Education: Learning About and Learning to Be. - 19. Conclusions.</div>This volume addresses important questions related to the well-being and quality of life of emerging adults during crisis periods. It discusses the particular challenges that emerging adults face during a global or local crisis, the psychosocial resources they mobilize to overcome them and to flourish, the well-being indicators pertinent to youth development across various life domains, and the strategies to promote positive youth development and well-being under conditions of crisis. The volume examines these questions from an international and interdisciplinary point of view, collecting contributions mainly from psychology, but also education, economics, and sociology. It includes novel quantitative and qualitative research, intervention studies, critical reviews, and conceptual chapters. This makes it an essential read for scholars of positive development in emerging adulthood under crisis, as well as a relevant and accessible source of information for discerning lay readers.<div>
</div><div>The specific focus of the majority of contributions on the Covid-19 pandemic makes this volume highly topical. Its focus on both well-being dimensions and problems related to crises offers a deeper understanding of the cultural similarities and differences in individual and collective challenges and resources across world regions. The volume investigates various facets of well-being, including daily experiences, relationships, purpose and growth, learning activities, and achievements. Evidence derived from the contributions to this volume can prove valuable for handling future crises through targeted interventions and programmes in different contexts and life domains.</div>		This volume addresses important questions related to the well-being and quality of life of emerging adults during crisis periods. It discusses the particular challenges that emerging adults face during a global or local crisis, the psychosocial resources they mobilize to overcome them and to flourish, the well-being indicators pertinent to youth development across various life domains, and the strategies to promote positive youth development and well-being under conditions of crisis. The volume examines these questions from an international and interdisciplinary point of view, collecting contributions mainly from psychology, but also education, economics, and sociology. It includes novel quantitative and qualitative research, intervention studies, critical reviews, and conceptual chapters. This makes it an essential read for scholars of positive development in emerging adulthood under crisis, as well as a relevant and accessible source of information for discerning lay readers.<div>
</div><div>The specific focus of the majority of contributions on the Covid-19 pandemic makes this volume highly topical. Its focus on both well-being dimensions and problems related to crises offers a deeper understanding of the cultural similarities and differences in individual and collective challenges and resources across world regions. The volume investigates various facets of well-being, including daily experiences, relationships, purpose and growth, learning activities, and achievements. Evidence derived from the contributions to this volume can prove valuable for handling future crises through targeted interventions and programmes in different contexts and life domains.</div>		Addresses the quality of life of emerging adults during the pandemic and other crisesProvides cross-cultural perspectives on well-being across life domains related to youth developmentDiscusses pathways to positive youth development and well-being under conditions of crisisSophie Leontopoulou is Associate Professor in Psychology at the Department of Primary Education, University of Ioannina, Greece. She served as coordinator of the Division of Developmental Psychology of the Hellenic Psychological Society, and is founder member of the Positive Psychology Branch of this society, as well as of the Hellenic Association of Positive Psychology. Her theoretical and research interests focus on the area of Positive Developmental Psychology. She has published and presented her work internationally on positive psychosocial development in childhood, adolescence and emerging adulthood, resilience, well-being, flourishing, character strengths, positive emotions and positive psychology interventions.

Antonella Delle Fave, MD with specialty in clinical psychology, is Professor of Psychology at the Medical School, University of Milano, Italy. Her research work is centred on the study of flow experience, mental health indicators and daily experience fluctuation across cultures and among individuals experiencing conditions of diversity and adversity. She is involved in research and intervention projects aimed at promoting well-being and mental health among persons with chronic diseases and their family caregivers. Her scientific production includes papers in international peer-reviewed journals, as well as authored and edited academic volumes. She served as President of the International Positive Psychology Association, the European Network of Positive Psychology, and the Società Italiana di Psicologia Positiva. Since 2010 she has been Editor-in-Chief of the Journal of Happiness Studies (Springer).		ScienceProfessional Books (2)Science (SC)EBOP41168Behavioral Science and Psychology009783031222900Positive PsychologyWell-BeingQuality of Life ResearchSociology of Family, Youth and AgingEducational ResearchChildren, Youth and Family Policy545000
49
Behavioral Science and Psychology978-3-030-68548-5LuiselliJames K. LuiselliJames K. Luiselli, Melmark New England, Andover, MA, USAApplied Behavior Analysis Treatment of Violence and Aggression in Persons with Neurodevelopmental DisabilitiesVIII, 209 p. 16 illus., 4 illus. in color.12021final159.9948.00171.1951.36139.9942.00179.9954.00Hard cover0Advances in Preventing and Treating Violence and AggressionBehavioral Science and PsychologyContributed volumeBook0English209JMKLNFBSpringerSpringer International Publishing0Available2021-03-302021-03-302021-04-162021-04-161Section I: Measurement and Assessment.- Chapter 1. Measurement and Data Recording of Violence-Aggression.- Chapter 2. Functional Behavioral Assessment of Violence-Aggression.- Chapter 3. Functional Analysis of Violence-Aggression.- Chapter 4. Behavioral Risk Assessment of Violence-Aggression.- Chapter 5. Social Validity Assessment.- Section II. Intervention, Training, and Supervision.- Chapter 6. Communication-Focused Treatment of Violence-Aggression.- Chapter 7. Behavior Treatment of Sexual Offending.- Chapter 8. Inpatient and Residential Treatment of Violence-Aggression.- Chapter 9. Training and Performance Management of Care Providers.- Chapter 10. Mindfulness Caregiving and Support.This book focuses on applied behavior analysis (ABA) treatment of violence and aggression in persons with neurodevelopmental disabilities. It details ABA theory and concepts leading to empirical treatment procedures that can be implemented successfully across diverse treatment settings. Further, the book examines contemporary approaches to functional behavioral assessment (FBA) and functional analysis (FA) in determining the environmental conditions responsible for violence and aggression. In addition, the volume describes several evidence-supported treatment procedures that encompass antecedent-control, contingency management, cognitive-behavior therapy, and physical intervention components. It addresses effective strategies for training and supervising care providers, including behavioral skills training (BST), posttraining performance management, and mindfulness. Finally, the book presents recommendations that guide effective and socially valid research-to-practice translation.

Applied Behavior Analysis Treatment of Violence and Aggression in Persons with Neurodevelopmental Disabilities is an essential resource for researchers, clinicians/therapists, and upper-level undergraduate and graduate students in forensic psychology, public health, criminology/criminal justice, and behavioral therapy and rehabilitation.		This book focuses on applied behavior analysis (ABA) treatment of violence and aggression in persons with neurodevelopmental disabilities. It details ABA theory and concepts leading to empirical treatment procedures that can be implemented successfully across diverse treatment settings. Further, the book examines contemporary approaches to functional behavioral assessment (FBA) and functional analysis (FA) in determining the environmental conditions responsible for violence and aggression. In addition, the volume describes several evidence-supported treatment procedures that encompass antecedent-control, contingency management, cognitive-behavior therapy, and physical intervention components. It addresses effective strategies for training and supervising care providers, including behavioral skills training (BST), posttraining performance management, and mindfulness. Finally, the book presents recommendations that guide effective and socially valid research-to-practice translation.

Applied Behavior Analysis Treatment of Violence and Aggression in Persons with Neurodevelopmental Disabilities is an essential resource for researchers, clinicians/therapists, and upper-level undergraduate and graduate students in forensic psychology, public health, criminology/criminal justice, and behavioral therapy and rehabilitation.		Examines applied behavior analysis (ABA) treatment of violence and aggression in persons with neurodevelopmental disabilities across diverse settingsReviews use of functional behavioral assessment (FBA) and functional analysis (FA)Discusses treatment protocols (e.g., contingency management, CBT, and physical interventions)Explores behavioral skills training (BST), posttraining performance management, and mindfulnessJames K. Luiselli, Ed.D., ABPP, BCBA-D, is a licensed psychologist, diplomat in cognitive and behavioral psychology, and board certified behavior analyst. He currently serves as Director of Clinical Development and Research at Melmark New England and Adjunct Faculty within the School Psychology Program at William James College. Dr. Luiselli has published 16 books, 50 book chapters, and more than 260 journal articles in the areas of applied behavior analysis, organizational behavior management, performance improvement, professional training, and clinical practice. He is an Associate Editor for the Journal of Child and Family Studies and serves on the Board of Editors for several other journals, including Education and Treatment of Children, Journal of Developmental and Physical Disabilities, Advances in Neurodevelopmental Disorders, and Mindfulness.ScienceProfessional Books (2)Science (SC)EBOP41168Behavioral Science and Psychology009783030685485Forensic PsychologySocio-Legal StudiesPublic Health500100
50
Behavioral Science and Psychology978-3-030-68551-5LuiselliJames K. LuiselliJames K. Luiselli, Melmark New England, Andover, MA, USAApplied Behavior Analysis Treatment of Violence and Aggression in Persons with Neurodevelopmental DisabilitiesVIII, 209 p. 16 illus., 4 illus. in color.12021final159.9948.00171.1951.36139.9942.00179.9954.00Soft cover1Advances in Preventing and Treating Violence and AggressionBehavioral Science and PsychologyContributed volumeBook0English209JMKLNFBSpringerSpringer International Publishing0Available2022-03-312021-03-302022-03-302022-03-301Section I: Measurement and Assessment.- Chapter 1. Measurement and Data Recording of Violence-Aggression.- Chapter 2. Functional Behavioral Assessment of Violence-Aggression.- Chapter 3. Functional Analysis of Violence-Aggression.- Chapter 4. Behavioral Risk Assessment of Violence-Aggression.- Chapter 5. Social Validity Assessment.- Section II. Intervention, Training, and Supervision.- Chapter 6. Communication-Focused Treatment of Violence-Aggression.- Chapter 7. Behavior Treatment of Sexual Offending.- Chapter 8. Inpatient and Residential Treatment of Violence-Aggression.- Chapter 9. Training and Performance Management of Care Providers.- Chapter 10. Mindfulness Caregiving and Support.This book focuses on applied behavior analysis (ABA) treatment of violence and aggression in persons with neurodevelopmental disabilities. It details ABA theory and concepts leading to empirical treatment procedures that can be implemented successfully across diverse treatment settings. Further, the book examines contemporary approaches to functional behavioral assessment (FBA) and functional analysis (FA) in determining the environmental conditions responsible for violence and aggression. In addition, the volume describes several evidence-supported treatment procedures that encompass antecedent-control, contingency management, cognitive-behavior therapy, and physical intervention components. It addresses effective strategies for training and supervising care providers, including behavioral skills training (BST), posttraining performance management, and mindfulness. Finally, the book presents recommendations that guide effective and socially valid research-to-practice translation.

Applied Behavior Analysis Treatment of Violence and Aggression in Persons with Neurodevelopmental Disabilities is an essential resource for researchers, clinicians/therapists, and upper-level undergraduate and graduate students in forensic psychology, public health, criminology/criminal justice, and behavioral therapy and rehabilitation.		This book focuses on applied behavior analysis (ABA) treatment of violence and aggression in persons with neurodevelopmental disabilities. It details ABA theory and concepts leading to empirical treatment procedures that can be implemented successfully across diverse treatment settings. Further, the book examines contemporary approaches to functional behavioral assessment (FBA) and functional analysis (FA) in determining the environmental conditions responsible for violence and aggression. In addition, the volume describes several evidence-supported treatment procedures that encompass antecedent-control, contingency management, cognitive-behavior therapy, and physical intervention components. It addresses effective strategies for training and supervising care providers, including behavioral skills training (BST), posttraining performance management, and mindfulness. Finally, the book presents recommendations that guide effective and socially valid research-to-practice translation.

Applied Behavior Analysis Treatment of Violence and Aggression in Persons with Neurodevelopmental Disabilities is an essential resource for researchers, clinicians/therapists, and upper-level undergraduate and graduate students in forensic psychology, public health, criminology/criminal justice, and behavioral therapy and rehabilitation.		Examines applied behavior analysis (ABA) treatment of violence and aggression in persons with neurodevelopmental disabilities across diverse settingsReviews use of functional behavioral assessment (FBA) and functional analysis (FA)Discusses treatment protocols (e.g., contingency management, CBT, and physical interventions)Explores behavioral skills training (BST), posttraining performance management, and mindfulnessJames K. Luiselli, Ed.D., ABPP, BCBA-D, is a licensed psychologist, diplomat in cognitive and behavioral psychology, and board certified behavior analyst. He currently serves as Director of Clinical Development and Research at Melmark New England and Adjunct Faculty within the School Psychology Program at William James College. Dr. Luiselli has published 16 books, 50 book chapters, and more than 260 journal articles in the areas of applied behavior analysis, organizational behavior management, performance improvement, professional training, and clinical practice. He is an Associate Editor for the Journal of Child and Family Studies and serves on the Board of Editors for several other journals, including Education and Treatment of Children, Journal of Developmental and Physical Disabilities, Advances in Neurodevelopmental Disorders, and Mindfulness.ScienceProfessional Books (2)Science (SC)EBOP41168Behavioral Science and Psychology009783030685515Forensic PsychologySocio-Legal StudiesPublic Health343100
51
Behavioral Science and Psychology978-3-030-60997-9MontgomeryAnthony Montgomery; Margot van der Doef; Efharis Panagopoulou; Michael P. LeiterAnthony Montgomery, University of Macedonia, Thessaloniki, Greece; Margot van der Doef, Leiden University, Leiden, The Netherlands; Efharis Panagopoulou, Aristotle University of Thessaloniki, Thessaloniki; Michael P. Leiter, Deakin University, Burwood, AustraliaConnecting Healthcare Worker Well-Being, Patient Safety and Organisational ChangeThe Triple ChallengeVII, 350 p. 29 illus.12020final139.9942.00149.7944.94119.9936.00159.9948.00Hard cover0Aligning Perspectives on Health, Safety and Well-BeingBehavioral Science and PsychologyContributed volumeBook0English350JMJKJMV2SpringerSpringer International Publishing0Available2021-01-262021-01-262021-02-122021-02-1211. Connecting Health Care Worker Well-being, Patient Safety and Organizational Change: The Triple Challenge (Anthony J. Montgomery, Margot Van der Doef, Efharis Panagopoulou, Michael P. Leiter).- Section I. Linking Organisational Factors, Health Care Worker Well-being, and Patient Outcomes.- 2. Job Strain, Burnout, Wellbeing and Patient Safety in Healthcare Professionals (Daryl B. O’Connor, Louise H. Hall & Judith Johnson).- 3. Missed Nursing Care: the Impact on Patients, Nurses and Organisations (Marcia Kirwan and Anne Matthews).- 4. Linking Organisational Factors and Patient Care: Does Healthcare Workers’ Well-being Matter? (Kevin Teoh and Juliet Hassard).- 5. Burnout in Primary Care Workforce (Anli Yue Zhou, Maria Panagioti, Henry Galleta-Williams, Aneez Esmail).- Section II. Zooming in on the health Care Context.- 6. Between Balance and Burnout: Contrasting the Working-time Conditions of Irish-trained Hospital Doctors in Ireland and Australia (John-Paul Byrne, Edel Conway, Aoife M.McDermott, Richard W. Costello, Lucia Prihodova, Anne Matthews, and Niamh Humphries).- 7. Doctors Well-Being, Quality of Patient Care and Organizational Change –Norwegian Experiences (Karin Isaksson Rø, Judith Rosta, Reidar Tyssen & Fredrik Bååthe).- 8. The Relationship Between Employee Engagement and Organisational Outcomes in the English National Health Service: An Analysis of Employee and Employer Data in 28 Healthcare Organisations (Christian van Stolk and Marco Hafner).- 9. Governing Health Care Provision – Clinicians' Experiences (Berit Bringedal, Inger-LiseTeig IL, and Kristine Bærøe).- 10. Speaking up About Bullying and Harassment in Healthcare: Reflections Following the Introduction of an Innovative “Speak up” Role in NHSEngland (Jones A, Blake J, Banks C, Adams M, Kelly D, Mannion R and Maben J).- Section III. Developing Cultures that Enable Organisational Change.- 11. Between Taking Care of Others and Yourself: The Role of Work Recovery in Health Professionals (Claudia L. Rus, Cristina C. Vâjâean, Cătălina Oţoiu, Adriana Băban).- 12. Creating Optimal Clinical Workplaces by Transforming Leadership and Empowering Clinicians (Paul DeChant, Paul DeChant & Diane Shannon).- 13. Compassionate and Collective Leadership for Cultures of High-quality Care (Michael A. West & Senior Visiting Fellow).- 14. Workforce and Excellence in Nursing Care: Challenges for Leaders and Professionals (Van Bogaert P, Timmermans O, Slootmans S, Goossens E, Franck E).- 15. Mindful Practice: Organizational Change and Health Professional Flourishing Through Cultivating Presence and Courageous Conversations (Michael S Krasner & Ronald Epstein).- Section IV. Towards Individual- and Organisation-Focused Interventions and their Effectiveness.- 16. Training as a Facilitator of Organizational Change in Health Care: The Input-Mediator/Moderator-Outcome-Input Model (Megan E. Gregory, Clayton D. Rothwell &Ann Scheck McAlearney).- 17. Schwartz Center Rounds: an Intervention to Enhance Staff Well-being and Promote Organisational Change (Professor Jill Maben and Dr Cath Taylor).- 18. How Healthcare Worker Well-being Intersects with Safety Culture, Workforce Engagement, and Operational Outcomes (Kathryn C. Adair, Kyle Rehder, J. Bryan Sexton).- 19. Mindfulness as a Way to Improve Well-being in Healthcare Professionals: Separating the Wheat from the Chaff (Anthony Montgomery, Katerina Georganta, Ashvirni Gilbeth, Yugan Subramaniam, Karen Morgan).- 20. Using Transformative Learning to Develop Skills for Managing Conflict: Lessons Learnt over Ten Years (Eva Doherty).- 21. Well-Being, Patient Safety and Organizational Change: Quo Vadis? (Anthony J. Montgomery).
This volume delineates the ways in which key areas of healthcare, well-being, patient safety and organisational change overlap with and contribute to unhealthy workplaces for healthcare professionals. There is a growing realisation within healthcare that healthcare worker well-being, patient outcomes and organisational change are symbiotically linked. Burnout and stress in healthcare workers and toxic organisational cultures can lead to a cycle of patient neglect, medical errors, sub-optimal care and further stress. This topical volume therefore outlines the ways in which worker well-being, patient outcomes and organisational change can be aligned to contribute to a healthy workplace and therefore better medical care. The volume includes an array of authors from different disciplines including primary care, clinical medicine, psychology, sociology, management, clinical governance, health policy and health services research. It succeeds in integrating different voices and reaches meaningful conclusions to address the challenges facing the healthcare workforce.This volume delineates the ways in which key areas of healthcare, well-being, patient safety and organisational change overlap with and contribute to unhealthy workplaces for healthcare professionals. There is a growing realisation within healthcare that healthcare worker well-being, patient outcomes and organisational change are symbiotically linked. Burnout and stress in healthcare workers and toxic organisational cultures can lead to a cycle of patient neglect, medical errors, sub-optimal care and further stress. This topical volume therefore outlines the ways in which worker well-being, patient outcomes and organisational change can be aligned to contribute to a healthy workplace and therefore better medical care. The volume includes an array of authors from different disciplines including primary care, clinical medicine, psychology, sociology, management, clinical governance, health policy and health services research. It succeeds in integrating different voices and reaches meaningful conclusions to address the challenges facing the healthcare workforce.Is the first volume to integrate research on health care worker well-being, patient safety and organisational changesIncludes a truly multidisciplinary team of authors from primary care, clinical medicine, psychology, sociology, management, health policy and health services researchProvides recommendations on how we can change healthcare delivery and what topics future researchers need to focus onAnthony Montgomery, PhD, is a full professor of work and organizational psychology at the University of Macedonia, Thessaloniki, Greece. His expertise covers burnout, human factors and patient safety within healthcare. He has been involved (either as a Principal Investigator or collaborator) in attracting research funding to the value of 2,912,900 Euros. His research has contributed to: the benchmarking of burnout among healthcare professionals, developing a new measure to assess the patient perspective of quality of care, and action research interventions aimed at organizational change. Furthermore, he is examining the issue of employee in silence in healthcare, and developing mentoring solutions that address both performance and wellbeing.Efharis Panagopoulou, PhD, is an associate professor of health psychology at the Medical School of Aristotle University in Greece. After completing her doctoral thesis in Leiden University, The Netherlands, she joined the Medical School in 2002 with a European fellowship aimed at attracting research leaders from abroad. To date, she has coordinated several projects in the field of stress, diagnostic mistakes, and clinical decision making. Dr. Panagopoulou is the Principal Investigator of the ORCAB project:“Organisational culture, professional burnout and quality of health care” (7th Research Framework, European Union.) The project involved 10 partners from 9 European countries and the funding budget was 2.1 million Euros. Dr. Panagopoulou was the Head of the Scientific Committee for the EHPS conference in Crete (2011). From April-May 2012 she received a Fulbright scholarship to study the impact of information concealment on couples coping with cancer. She is currently the coordinator of the communication skills training program for medical doctors, and of the Personal and Professional Development program for members of the medical school. Her current research is focused on the role of emotions on clinicaldecision making and medical errors.Margot van der Doef, PhD, is an assistant professor (Occupational) Health Psychology at Leiden University, the Netherlands. Ever since her PhD, her focus in research and teaching has been on employee health and wellbeing. Her research includes studies on the impact of psychosocial job conditions on employee health and well-being, with a strong emphasis on health care and educational contexts, and more recently on chronically ill employees. Furthermore, she has carried out and is currently conducting projects involving the development, implementation, and evaluation of individual- and organisational focused interventions to reduce psychosocial risks and enhance employee wellbeing. At the Institute of Psychology of Leiden University, she is coordinator and teacher of the master specialisation Occupational Health Psychology.Michael P. Leiter, PhD, is an organizational psychologist interested in the relationships of people with their work. He has held the Canada Research Chair in Occupational Health and served as Professor of Organizational Psychology at Acadia University in Nova Scotia, Canada and at Deakin University in Geelong, Australia. His research is focused on civility, respect and work engagement. Prof. Leiter has designed workplace interventions in the area of civility and respect that have been shown to have a lasting impact, bringing about improvements in job satisfaction, organizational commitment, trust and burnout. Together with co-author Dr. Christina Maslach, he has coined the term 'work engagement' as the antithesis to burnout. He consults on research and workplace interventions from Nova Scotia.ScienceProfessional Books (2)Science (SC)EBOP41168Behavioral Science and Psychology009783030609979Work and Organizational PsychologyEmployee Health and WellbeingHealth Policy705000
52
Behavioral Science and Psychology978-3-030-61000-5MontgomeryAnthony Montgomery; Margot van der Doef; Efharis Panagopoulou; Michael P. LeiterAnthony Montgomery, University of Macedonia, Thessaloniki, Greece; Margot van der Doef, Leiden University, Leiden, The Netherlands; Efharis Panagopoulou, Aristotle University of Thessaloniki, Thessaloniki; Michael P. Leiter, Deakin University, Burwood, AustraliaConnecting Healthcare Worker Well-Being, Patient Safety and Organisational ChangeThe Triple ChallengeVII, 350 p. 29 illus.12020final119.9936.00128.3938.52109.9933.00129.9939.00Soft cover1Aligning Perspectives on Health, Safety and Well-BeingBehavioral Science and PsychologyContributed volumeBook0English350JMJKJMV2SpringerSpringer International Publishing0Available2022-01-272021-01-262022-01-262022-01-2611. Connecting Health Care Worker Well-being, Patient Safety and Organizational Change: The Triple Challenge (Anthony J. Montgomery, Margot Van der Doef, Efharis Panagopoulou, Michael P. Leiter).- Section I. Linking Organisational Factors, Health Care Worker Well-being, and Patient Outcomes.- 2. Job Strain, Burnout, Wellbeing and Patient Safety in Healthcare Professionals (Daryl B. O’Connor, Louise H. Hall & Judith Johnson).- 3. Missed Nursing Care: the Impact on Patients, Nurses and Organisations (Marcia Kirwan and Anne Matthews).- 4. Linking Organisational Factors and Patient Care: Does Healthcare Workers’ Well-being Matter? (Kevin Teoh and Juliet Hassard).- 5. Burnout in Primary Care Workforce (Anli Yue Zhou, Maria Panagioti, Henry Galleta-Williams, Aneez Esmail).- Section II. Zooming in on the health Care Context.- 6. Between Balance and Burnout: Contrasting the Working-time Conditions of Irish-trained Hospital Doctors in Ireland and Australia (John-Paul Byrne, Edel Conway, Aoife M.McDermott, Richard W. Costello, Lucia Prihodova, Anne Matthews, and Niamh Humphries).- 7. Doctors Well-Being, Quality of Patient Care and Organizational Change –Norwegian Experiences (Karin Isaksson Rø, Judith Rosta, Reidar Tyssen & Fredrik Bååthe).- 8. The Relationship Between Employee Engagement and Organisational Outcomes in the English National Health Service: An Analysis of Employee and Employer Data in 28 Healthcare Organisations (Christian van Stolk and Marco Hafner).- 9. Governing Health Care Provision – Clinicians' Experiences (Berit Bringedal, Inger-LiseTeig IL, and Kristine Bærøe).- 10. Speaking up About Bullying and Harassment in Healthcare: Reflections Following the Introduction of an Innovative “Speak up” Role in NHSEngland (Jones A, Blake J, Banks C, Adams M, Kelly D, Mannion R and Maben J).- Section III. Developing Cultures that Enable Organisational Change.- 11. Between Taking Care of Others and Yourself: The Role of Work Recovery in Health Professionals (Claudia L. Rus, Cristina C. Vâjâean, Cătălina Oţoiu, Adriana Băban).- 12. Creating Optimal Clinical Workplaces by Transforming Leadership and Empowering Clinicians (Paul DeChant, Paul DeChant & Diane Shannon).- 13. Compassionate and Collective Leadership for Cultures of High-quality Care (Michael A. West & Senior Visiting Fellow).- 14. Workforce and Excellence in Nursing Care: Challenges for Leaders and Professionals (Van Bogaert P, Timmermans O, Slootmans S, Goossens E, Franck E).- 15. Mindful Practice: Organizational Change and Health Professional Flourishing Through Cultivating Presence and Courageous Conversations (Michael S Krasner & Ronald Epstein).- Section IV. Towards Individual- and Organisation-Focused Interventions and their Effectiveness.- 16. Training as a Facilitator of Organizational Change in Health Care: The Input-Mediator/Moderator-Outcome-Input Model (Megan E. Gregory, Clayton D. Rothwell &Ann Scheck McAlearney).- 17. Schwartz Center Rounds: an Intervention to Enhance Staff Well-being and Promote Organisational Change (Professor Jill Maben and Dr Cath Taylor).- 18. How Healthcare Worker Well-being Intersects with Safety Culture, Workforce Engagement, and Operational Outcomes (Kathryn C. Adair, Kyle Rehder, J. Bryan Sexton).- 19. Mindfulness as a Way to Improve Well-being in Healthcare Professionals: Separating the Wheat from the Chaff (Anthony Montgomery, Katerina Georganta, Ashvirni Gilbeth, Yugan Subramaniam, Karen Morgan).- 20. Using Transformative Learning to Develop Skills for Managing Conflict: Lessons Learnt over Ten Years (Eva Doherty).- 21. Well-Being, Patient Safety and Organizational Change: Quo Vadis? (Anthony J. Montgomery).
This volume delineates the ways in which key areas of healthcare, well-being, patient safety and organisational change overlap with and contribute to unhealthy workplaces for healthcare professionals. There is a growing realisation within healthcare that healthcare worker well-being, patient outcomes and organisational change are symbiotically linked. Burnout and stress in healthcare workers and toxic organisational cultures can lead to a cycle of patient neglect, medical errors, sub-optimal care and further stress. This topical volume therefore outlines the ways in which worker well-being, patient outcomes and organisational change can be aligned to contribute to a healthy workplace and therefore better medical care. The volume includes an array of authors from different disciplines including primary care, clinical medicine, psychology, sociology, management, clinical governance, health policy and health services research. It succeeds in integrating different voices and reaches meaningful conclusions to address the challenges facing the healthcare workforce.This volume delineates the ways in which key areas of healthcare, well-being, patient safety and organisational change overlap with and contribute to unhealthy workplaces for healthcare professionals. There is a growing realisation within healthcare that healthcare worker well-being, patient outcomes and organisational change are symbiotically linked. Burnout and stress in healthcare workers and toxic organisational cultures can lead to a cycle of patient neglect, medical errors, sub-optimal care and further stress. This topical volume therefore outlines the ways in which worker well-being, patient outcomes and organisational change can be aligned to contribute to a healthy workplace and therefore better medical care. The volume includes an array of authors from different disciplines including primary care, clinical medicine, psychology, sociology, management, clinical governance, health policy and health services research. It succeeds in integrating different voices and reaches meaningful conclusions to address the challenges facing the healthcare workforce.Is the first volume to integrate research on health care worker well-being, patient safety and organisational changesIncludes a truly multidisciplinary team of authors from primary care, clinical medicine, psychology, sociology, management, health policy and health services researchProvides recommendations on how we can change healthcare delivery and what topics future researchers need to focus onAnthony Montgomery, PhD, is a full professor of work and organizational psychology at the University of Macedonia, Thessaloniki, Greece. His expertise covers burnout, human factors and patient safety within healthcare. He has been involved (either as a Principal Investigator or collaborator) in attracting research funding to the value of 2,912,900 Euros. His research has contributed to: the benchmarking of burnout among healthcare professionals, developing a new measure to assess the patient perspective of quality of care, and action research interventions aimed at organizational change. Furthermore, he is examining the issue of employee in silence in healthcare, and developing mentoring solutions that address both performance and wellbeing.Efharis Panagopoulou, PhD, is an associate professor of health psychology at the Medical School of Aristotle University in Greece. After completing her doctoral thesis in Leiden University, The Netherlands, she joined the Medical School in 2002 with a European fellowship aimed at attracting research leaders from abroad. To date, she has coordinated several projects in the field of stress, diagnostic mistakes, and clinical decision making. Dr. Panagopoulou is the Principal Investigator of the ORCAB project:“Organisational culture, professional burnout and quality of health care” (7th Research Framework, European Union.) The project involved 10 partners from 9 European countries and the funding budget was 2.1 million Euros. Dr. Panagopoulou was the Head of the Scientific Committee for the EHPS conference in Crete (2011). From April-May 2012 she received a Fulbright scholarship to study the impact of information concealment on couples coping with cancer. She is currently the coordinator of the communication skills training program for medical doctors, and of the Personal and Professional Development program for members of the medical school. Her current research is focused on the role of emotions on clinicaldecision making and medical errors.Margot van der Doef, PhD, is an assistant professor (Occupational) Health Psychology at Leiden University, the Netherlands. Ever since her PhD, her focus in research and teaching has been on employee health and wellbeing. Her research includes studies on the impact of psychosocial job conditions on employee health and well-being, with a strong emphasis on health care and educational contexts, and more recently on chronically ill employees. Furthermore, she has carried out and is currently conducting projects involving the development, implementation, and evaluation of individual- and organisational focused interventions to reduce psychosocial risks and enhance employee wellbeing. At the Institute of Psychology of Leiden University, she is coordinator and teacher of the master specialisation Occupational Health Psychology.Michael P. Leiter, PhD, is an organizational psychologist interested in the relationships of people with their work. He has held the Canada Research Chair in Occupational Health and served as Professor of Organizational Psychology at Acadia University in Nova Scotia, Canada and at Deakin University in Geelong, Australia. His research is focused on civility, respect and work engagement. Prof. Leiter has designed workplace interventions in the area of civility and respect that have been shown to have a lasting impact, bringing about improvements in job satisfaction, organizational commitment, trust and burnout. Together with co-author Dr. Christina Maslach, he has coined the term 'work engagement' as the antithesis to burnout. He consults on research and workplace interventions from Nova Scotia.ScienceProfessional Books (2)Science (SC)EBOP41168Behavioral Science and Psychology009783030610005Work and Organizational PsychologyEmployee Health and WellbeingHealth Policy551000
53
Behavioral Science and Psychology978-3-030-81727-5NaborsLaura NaborsLaura Nabors, University of Cincinnati, Cincinnati, OH, USAResilient ChildrenNurturing Positivity and Well-Being Across DevelopmentXVII, 218 p. 23 illus.12021final149.9945.00160.4948.15129.9939.00169.9951.00Hard cover0Springer Series on Child and Family StudiesBehavioral Science and PsychologyContributed volumeBook0English218JMCJMCSpringerSpringer International Publishing0Available2022-01-092022-01-092022-05-222022-05-221Chapter 1. Introduction to Resilience in Children.- Chapter 2. Resilience in Children and Families.- Chapter 3. Resilience for Children Recovering from Trauma.- Chapter 4. Grit and Resilience in Children.- Chapter 5. Discovering Resilience and Well-being in School Communities.- Chapter 6. Enhancing Coping for Children Facing Toxic Stress.- Chapter 7. Association Between Family Relationships and Childhood Resilience.- Chapter 8. Promotion of Resilience for Children in Low-Income Countries.- Chapter 9. Interventions to Promote Resilience in Children with Chronic Illnesses.- Chapter 10. Promoting Resilience in Early Childhood.- Chapter 11. Improving Executive Functioning Contributes to Cognitive Performance and Results in Resilience for Children.This book examines resilience in childhood, focusing on positive functioning and development, often in the face of everyday difficulties and adversities. It highlights critical areas in which children and their families can demonstrate resilience and attain positive social, emotional, academic, and behavioral life trajectories. The book describes key factors related to enhancing resilience for children, such as positive relationships with adults, positive school environments, and meaningful connections with others. It provides practical guidelines for promoting resilience in youth and reviews the critical nature of resilience across various situations, critical issues, and different developmental periods. It offers guidance on strategies for fostering resilience in children.

Key topics featured include:

Raising children to have grit and tenacity.Fostering resilience in children at school and within their families.Nurturing resilience in children with chronic illnesses and posttrauma.





Resilient Children is an essential resource for researchers, professors, and graduate students as well as clinicians, therapists, and other professionals in developmental, clinical, and school psychology, family studies, public health, and social work as well as all related disciplines, including educational psychology, child and adolescent psychiatry, and pediatrics.

This book examines resilience in childhood, focusing on positive functioning and development, often in the face of everyday difficulties and adversities. It highlights critical areas in which children and their families can demonstrate resilience and attain positive social, emotional, academic, and behavioral life trajectories. The book describes key factors related to enhancing resilience for children, such as positive relationships with adults, positive school environments, and meaningful connections with others. It provides practical guidelines for promoting resilience in youth and reviews the critical nature of resilience across various situations, critical issues, and different developmental periods. It offers guidance on strategies for fostering resilience in children.Key topics featured include:Raising children to have grit and tenacity.Fostering resilience in children at school and within their families.Nurturing resilience in children with chronic illnesses and posttrauma.Resilient Children is an essential resource for researchers, professors, and graduate students as well as clinicians, therapists, and other professionals in developmental, clinical, and school psychology, family studies, public health, and social work as well as all related disciplines, including educational psychology, child and adolescent psychiatry, and pediatrics.Examines resilience and well-being in children, whether in the face of everyday difficulties or exceptional adversitiesFocuses on childhood well-being throughout different developmental periodsExplores the effects of positive relationships established between children and parents and siblings, teachers and peers, and others outside of family and schoolOffers strategies for raising children to have grit and tenacityLaura Nabors Ph.D., ABPP, is a Professor in the School of Human Services at the University of Cincinnati. Dr. Nabors’s research interests center on improving the health and mental health of children through evidence-based interventions. Moreover, she has focused on research in community settings and applied contexts that showcases child and parent perceptions of ideas to improve child functioning. Her research has resulted in more than 100 peer-reviewed journal articles. Dr. Nabors is an award-winning educator and professor, winning the 2015 Dolly Cohen Award for excellence in teaching at the University of Cincinnati, who values building positive skills in those she serves.ScienceProfessional Books (2)Science (SC)EBOP41168Behavioral Science and Psychology009783030817275Developmental PsychologySchool PsychologyEmotional DevelopmentSociology of Family, Youth and AgingPublic HealthClinical Social Work524000
54
Behavioral Science and Psychology978-3-030-81730-5NaborsLaura NaborsLaura Nabors, University of Cincinnati, Cincinnati, OH, USAResilient ChildrenNurturing Positivity and Well-Being Across DevelopmentXVII, 218 p. 23 illus.12021final149.9945.00160.4948.15129.9939.00169.9951.00Soft cover1Springer Series on Child and Family StudiesBehavioral Science and PsychologyContributed volumeBook0English218JMCJMCSpringerSpringer International Publishing0Available2023-01-102022-01-092023-01-092023-01-091Chapter 1. Introduction to Resilience in Children.- Chapter 2. Resilience in Children and Families.- Chapter 3. Resilience for Children Recovering from Trauma.- Chapter 4. Grit and Resilience in Children.- Chapter 5. Discovering Resilience and Well-being in School Communities.- Chapter 6. Enhancing Coping for Children Facing Toxic Stress.- Chapter 7. Association Between Family Relationships and Childhood Resilience.- Chapter 8. Promotion of Resilience for Children in Low-Income Countries.- Chapter 9. Interventions to Promote Resilience in Children with Chronic Illnesses.- Chapter 10. Promoting Resilience in Early Childhood.- Chapter 11. Improving Executive Functioning Contributes to Cognitive Performance and Results in Resilience for Children.This book examines resilience in childhood, focusing on positive functioning and development, often in the face of everyday difficulties and adversities. It highlights critical areas in which children and their families can demonstrate resilience and attain positive social, emotional, academic, and behavioral life trajectories. The book describes key factors related to enhancing resilience for children, such as positive relationships with adults, positive school environments, and meaningful connections with others. It provides practical guidelines for promoting resilience in youth and reviews the critical nature of resilience across various situations, critical issues, and different developmental periods. It offers guidance on strategies for fostering resilience in children.

Key topics featured include:

Raising children to have grit and tenacity.Fostering resilience in children at school and within their families.Nurturing resilience in children with chronic illnesses and posttrauma.





Resilient Children is an essential resource for researchers, professors, and graduate students as well as clinicians, therapists, and other professionals in developmental, clinical, and school psychology, family studies, public health, and social work as well as all related disciplines, including educational psychology, child and adolescent psychiatry, and pediatrics.

This book examines resilience in childhood, focusing on positive functioning and development, often in the face of everyday difficulties and adversities. It highlights critical areas in which children and their families can demonstrate resilience and attain positive social, emotional, academic, and behavioral life trajectories. The book describes key factors related to enhancing resilience for children, such as positive relationships with adults, positive school environments, and meaningful connections with others. It provides practical guidelines for promoting resilience in youth and reviews the critical nature of resilience across various situations, critical issues, and different developmental periods. It offers guidance on strategies for fostering resilience in children.Key topics featured include:Raising children to have grit and tenacity.Fostering resilience in children at school and within their families.Nurturing resilience in children with chronic illnesses and posttrauma.Resilient Children is an essential resource for researchers, professors, and graduate students as well as clinicians, therapists, and other professionals in developmental, clinical, and school psychology, family studies, public health, and social work as well as all related disciplines, including educational psychology, child and adolescent psychiatry, and pediatrics.Examines resilience and well-being in children, whether in the face of everyday difficulties or exceptional adversitiesFocuses on childhood well-being throughout different developmental periodsExplores the effects of positive relationships established between children and parents and siblings, teachers and peers, and others outside of family and schoolOffers strategies for raising children to have grit and tenacityLaura Nabors Ph.D., ABPP, is a Professor in the School of Human Services at the University of Cincinnati. Dr. Nabors’s research interests center on improving the health and mental health of children through evidence-based interventions. Moreover, she has focused on research in community settings and applied contexts that showcases child and parent perceptions of ideas to improve child functioning. Her research has resulted in more than 100 peer-reviewed journal articles. Dr. Nabors is an award-winning educator and professor, winning the 2015 Dolly Cohen Award for excellence in teaching at the University of Cincinnati, who values building positive skills in those she serves.ScienceProfessional Books (2)Science (SC)EBOP41168Behavioral Science and Psychology009783030817305Developmental PsychologySchool PsychologyEmotional DevelopmentSociology of Family, Youth and AgingPublic HealthClinical Social Work367000
55
Behavioral Science and Psychology978-3-030-66035-2polancomarcela polanco; Navid Zamani; Christina Da Hee Kimmarcela polanco, San Diego State University, San Diego, CA, USA; Navid Zamani, San Diego State University, San Diego, CA, USA; Christina Da Hee Kim, License to Freedom, El Cajon, CA, USABilingualism, Culture, and Social Justice in Family TherapyXV, 96 p. 2 illus.12021final64.9919.5069.5420.8654.9916.5069.9921.00Soft cover0AFTA SpringerBriefs in Family TherapyBehavioral Science and PsychologyBrief/PivotBook0English96JHBKMMJSpringerSpringer International Publishing0Available2021-04-132021-04-132021-04-302021-04-301Chapter 1. Therapeutic Latinx Chismorreo.- Chapter 2. Doing Justice with Street Farsi.- Chapter 3. Intersections of Asian Languages, Culture, and Professional Education: Where the Personal and Professional Intimately Collide.- Chapter 4. First Language Recognition and Identities: An Italian perspective.- Chapter 5. Black Speak in Therapy.- Chapter 6. Working as a Team: Doing Therapy with Interpreters.- Chapter 7. Traversing Languages for Agency in the Practice of Trauma Work.- Chapter 8. Legitimizing Comadre Terapia: Postmodern Practices in the Linguistic and Cultural Borderlands.- Chapter 9. Linguistic identities of bilingual MFTs: Practicing across the borders of Spanish and English.- Chapter 10. The Road to Bilingual Supervision.- Chapter 11. Tejiendo Nuevos Horizontes Linguisticos/Weaving New Linguistic Horizons.This volume advocates for justice in language rights through its explorations of bilingualism in family therapy, from the perspectives of eighteen languages identified by the authors: Black Talk/Ebonics/Slang, Farsi, Fenglish, Arabic, Italian, Cantonese Chinese, South Korean, Mandarin Chinese, Vietnamese, Spanish, Chilean Spanish, Mexican Spanish, Colombian Spanglish, Madrileño Spanish, Spanglish, Pocho Spanish, Colloquial Spanish, and English. It identifies standard English as the current language most often used across family therapy programs and services in the United States. The book discusses efforts to respond to the rapidly changing linguistic landscape and the increasingly high demand for appropriate therapy services that respond effectively to diverse families in America. It discusses recruitment and training of linguistically diverse family therapists and strategies to promote linguistic equality to support the rights of family therapists, their practices, and the communitiesthey serve. Chapters explore ways to integrate languages in professional and personal lives, including the improvisational, self-taught translanguaging skills and practices that go beyond the lexical and grammatical rules of a language. The book describes the creative use of native or heritage languages to ensure that the juxtaposition of English therapeutic and daily-life landscapes is integrated into family therapy settings. It discusses contextual, relational, therapeutic, and training potential offered by bilingualism as well as the necessary transmutations in theory and practice.

This volume is an essential resource for clinicians, therapists, and practitioners as well as researchers, professors, and graduate students in family studies, clinical psychology, and public health as well as all interrelated disciplines.		This volume advocates for justice in language rights through its explorations of bilingualism in family therapy, from the perspectives of eighteen languages identified by the authors: Black Talk/Ebonics/Slang, Farsi, Fenglish, Arabic, Italian, Cantonese Chinese, South Korean, Mandarin Chinese, Vietnamese, Spanish, Chilean Spanish, Mexican Spanish, Colombian Spanglish, Madrileño Spanish, Spanglish, Pocho Spanish, Colloquial Spanish, and English. It identifies standard English as the current language most often used across family therapy programs and services in the United States. The book discusses efforts to respond to the rapidly changing linguistic landscape and the increasingly high demand for appropriate therapy services that respond effectively to diverse families in America. It discusses recruitment and training of linguistically diverse family therapists and strategies to promote linguistic equality to support the rights of family therapists, their practices, and the communitiesthey serve. Chapters explore ways to integrate languages in professional and personal lives, including the improvisational, self-taught translanguaging skills and practices that go beyond the lexical and grammatical rules of a language. The book describes the creative use of native or heritage languages to ensure that the juxtaposition of English therapeutic and daily-life landscapes is integrated into family therapy settings. It discusses contextual, relational, therapeutic, and training potential offered by bilingualism as well as the necessary transmutations in theory and practice.

This volume is an essential resource for clinicians, therapists, and practitioners as well as researchers, professors, and graduate students in family studies, clinical psychology, and public health as well as all interrelated disciplines.
Advocates for social justice through explorations of bilingualism across family therapy settingsAddresses the rapidly changing linguistic landscape and increasingly high demand for appropriate family therapy servicesDetails strategies for responding to diverse families in therapyDiscusses recruiting and training linguistically diverse family therapists and strategies to promote linguistic equality in family therapymarcela polanco, es de Bogotá, Colombia e inmigrante en United States. Su ancestry es African, Muisca, and European Colombian. She speaks Español Colombiano and Immigrant Spanglish. As a family terapista, she is part of the faculty team del Master’s en Family Therapy y del Spanglish/Ingleñol Family Therapy training Certificado at San Diego State University located in unceded Kumeyaay land.



Navid Zamani is a Persian-American (Farsi & English-speaking) licensed Marriage and Family therapist practicing in San Diego. His work is structured around supporting families experiencing domestic violence, and conceptualizes these experiences from a poststructural, decolonial feminism situated in Narrative practices. His interests in counseling, philosophy, and music are blended together with an interest in relational ethics, the politics of revolutionary love, and leaning into complexity. He currently teaches at San Diego State University and is the Head of Clinical Services at License to Freedom, a non-profit that supports refugees and immigrants from the Middle East who are experiencing domestic violence issues.



Christina DaHee Kim is a Korean immigrant who grew up in Los Angeles. She traverses between the worlds of English, Korean, and the mix of two languages, Konglish. Her interest in all forms of communication, including various languages and the non-verbal communication, stem from her exposure to Spanish-, Japanese-, and sign language-speaking worlds. As a recent graduate from the Marriage and Family Therapy program at San Diego State University, she hopes to collaborate and explore relational ethics in diverse relationship dynamics from a postmodern lens.		ProfessionalsProfessional Books (2)Standard (0)EBOP41168Behavioral Science and Psychology009783030660352Sociology of Family, Youth and AgingClinical PsychologyPublic Health454000
56
Behavioral Science and Psychology978-3-031-14578-0RatnerCarl RatnerCarl Ratner, Institute for Cultural Research and Education, Trinidad, CA, USACultural Psychology, Racism, and Social JusticeXII, 240 p. 23 illus., 22 illus. in color.12022final139.9942.00149.7944.94119.9936.00159.9948.00Hard cover0International and Cultural PsychologyBehavioral Science and PsychologyMonographBook0English240JMHJMSSpringerSpringer International Publishing0Available2022-10-302022-10-302022-11-162022-11-161Chapter 1. How Can Scientific Psychology Contribute to Social and Psychological Emancipation?.- Chapter 2. Introduction: The Science-Emancipation Dialectic or Mobius Strip.- Part I. Macro Cultural Psychological Theory.- Chapter 3. The Scientific Theory of Macro Cultural Psychology.- Chapter 4. The Emancipatory Character of Macro Cultural Psychology and The Conservative Character of Alternative Approaches to Cultural Psychology.- Part II. The Macro Cultural Psychology of Racism/Racist Psychology.- Chapter 5. Racist Psychology and Racism As Macro-Cultural Phenomena.- Chapter 6. Racist psychology, Slavery and Capitalism .- Part III. Social Justice Movements Against Racism: Intellectual and Political Conumdrums.- Chapter 7. Fetishizing Racism, Racist Psychology, Race, Inequality, Equality, and Democracy.- Chapter 8. Political Errors in Racial Social Justice Movements.
This book utilizes cultural psychology as a cultural theory and psychological theory capable of explaining and improving social issues. In particular Vygotsky’s cultural-historical psychology, and Ratner’s macro-cultural psychology are invoked to explain racism and mitigate it. This explanation of, and solution to, racism are utilized as a framework for analyzing and refining contemporary movements for racial justice.

Among the topics discussed:

Macro cultural psychology and Vygotsky’s Marxist cultural-historical psychologyDifferentiating psychological racism from economic racismHistorical examples of racism during American slavery which reveal their cultural and psychological featuresCultural-psychological analysis and refinement of Black Lives Matter, racial capitalism, intersectionism, and Ta-Nehishi Coates’ work







Cultural Psychology, Racism, and Social Justice will be of interestto the fields of social policy, social transformation, psychological theory, cultural theory, and history.
This book utilizes cultural psychology as a cultural theory and psychological theory capable of explaining and improving social issues. In particular Vygotsky’s cultural-historical psychology, and Ratner’s macro-cultural psychology are invoked to explain racism and mitigate it. This explanation of, and solution to, racism are utilized as a framework for analyzing and refining contemporary movements for racial justice. Among the topics discussed:Macro cultural psychology and Vygotsky’s Marxist cultural-historical psychologyDifferentiating psychological racism from economic racismHistorical examples of racism during American slavery which reveal their cultural and psychological featuresCultural-psychological analysis and refinement of Black Lives Matter, racial capitalism, intersectionism, and Ta-Nehishi Coates’ work Cultural Psychology, Racism, and Social Justice will be of interest to the fields of social policy, social transformation, psychological theory, cultural theory, and history.Introduces the concept of macro-cultural psychologyProvides a systematic theory of racismUses a critical approach toward an expansion of social justiceCarl Ratner is an international figure in cultural psychology. He has written extensively on the theory and methodology of cultural psychology. His work focuses upon concrete features of culture, especially their political-economic interests and structure. He emphasizes the political nature of psychology that embodies and reproduces culture. He has explained these issues in analyses of varied psychological phenomena including emotions, child development, cognition, perception, sexuality, gender, memory, mental illness and literacy. Ratner has applied cultural psychology to social-political issues of our time. These include multiculturalism, postmodernism, social constructionism, neoliberalism. His work utilizes analyses of culture and psychology to identify more fulfilling cultural organization and psychological activity. In this regard he has written about cooperatives and cooperation as an alternative culture and psychology. Ratner has worked academically for extended periods in China, Saudi Arabia, England, and India.ScienceProfessional Books (2)Science (SC)EBOP41168Behavioral Science and Psychology009783031145780Cross-Cultural PsychologySocial Psychology547000
57
Behavioral Science and Psychology978-3-031-14581-0RatnerCarl RatnerCarl Ratner, Institute for Cultural Research and Education, Trinidad, CA, USACultural Psychology, Racism, and Social JusticeXII, 240 p. 23 illus., 22 illus. in color.12022final139.9942.00149.7944.94119.9936.00159.9948.00Soft cover1International and Cultural PsychologyBehavioral Science and PsychologyMonographBook0English240JMHJMSSpringerSpringer International Publishing0Available2023-10-312022-10-302023-10-302023-10-301Chapter 1. How Can Scientific Psychology Contribute to Social and Psychological Emancipation?.- Chapter 2. Introduction: The Science-Emancipation Dialectic or Mobius Strip.- Part I. Macro Cultural Psychological Theory.- Chapter 3. The Scientific Theory of Macro Cultural Psychology.- Chapter 4. The Emancipatory Character of Macro Cultural Psychology and The Conservative Character of Alternative Approaches to Cultural Psychology.- Part II. The Macro Cultural Psychology of Racism/Racist Psychology.- Chapter 5. Racist Psychology and Racism As Macro-Cultural Phenomena.- Chapter 6. Racist psychology, Slavery and Capitalism .- Part III. Social Justice Movements Against Racism: Intellectual and Political Conumdrums.- Chapter 7. Fetishizing Racism, Racist Psychology, Race, Inequality, Equality, and Democracy.- Chapter 8. Political Errors in Racial Social Justice Movements.
This book utilizes cultural psychology as a cultural theory and psychological theory capable of explaining and improving social issues. In particular Vygotsky’s cultural-historical psychology, and Ratner’s macro-cultural psychology are invoked to explain racism and mitigate it. This explanation of, and solution to, racism are utilized as a framework for analyzing and refining contemporary movements for racial justice.

Among the topics discussed:

Macro cultural psychology and Vygotsky’s Marxist cultural-historical psychologyDifferentiating psychological racism from economic racismHistorical examples of racism during American slavery which reveal their cultural and psychological featuresCultural-psychological analysis and refinement of Black Lives Matter, racial capitalism, intersectionism, and Ta-Nehishi Coates’ work







Cultural Psychology, Racism, and Social Justice will be of interestto the fields of social policy, social transformation, psychological theory, cultural theory, and history.
This book utilizes cultural psychology as a cultural theory and psychological theory capable of explaining and improving social issues. In particular Vygotsky’s cultural-historical psychology, and Ratner’s macro-cultural psychology are invoked to explain racism and mitigate it. This explanation of, and solution to, racism are utilized as a framework for analyzing and refining contemporary movements for racial justice. Among the topics discussed:Macro cultural psychology and Vygotsky’s Marxist cultural-historical psychologyDifferentiating psychological racism from economic racismHistorical examples of racism during American slavery which reveal their cultural and psychological featuresCultural-psychological analysis and refinement of Black Lives Matter, racial capitalism, intersectionism, and Ta-Nehishi Coates’ work Cultural Psychology, Racism, and Social Justice will be of interest to the fields of social policy, social transformation, psychological theory, cultural theory, and history.Introduces the concept of macro-cultural psychologyProvides a systematic theory of racismUses a critical approach toward an expansion of social justiceCarl Ratner is an international figure in cultural psychology. He has written extensively on the theory and methodology of cultural psychology. His work focuses upon concrete features of culture, especially their political-economic interests and structure. He emphasizes the political nature of psychology that embodies and reproduces culture. He has explained these issues in analyses of varied psychological phenomena including emotions, child development, cognition, perception, sexuality, gender, memory, mental illness and literacy. Ratner has applied cultural psychology to social-political issues of our time. These include multiculturalism, postmodernism, social constructionism, neoliberalism. His work utilizes analyses of culture and psychology to identify more fulfilling cultural organization and psychological activity. In this regard he has written about cooperatives and cooperation as an alternative culture and psychology. Ratner has worked academically for extended periods in China, Saudi Arabia, England, and India.ScienceProfessional Books (2)Science (SC)EBOP41168Behavioral Science and Psychology009783031145810Cross-Cultural PsychologySocial Psychology391000
58
Behavioral Science and Psychology978-3-031-15958-9RezaeiNima RezaeiNima Rezaei, Universal Scientific Education and Research Network (USERN), Stockholm, SwedenBrain, Decision Making and Mental HealthXI, 734 p. 172 illus., 117 illus. in color.12023final219.9966.00235.3970.62199.9960.00249.9975.00Hard cover0Integrated ScienceVolumeBehavioral Science and PsychologyContributed volumeBook0English734PSANHPMSpringerSpringer International Publishing1Available2023-01-032023-01-022023-01-192023-01-191<div>1. Introduction on Brain, Decision-Making, and Mental Health.- 2. Relational Thinking and The Cultural Conditionality of Human Understanding.- 3. Science and The Spectrum of Critical Thinking.- 4. Rhetoric and the Stases: A Universal Critical Thinking Problem-Solving Framework for the Sciences and Arts.- 5. Conceptual Development and Change: The Role of Echoing and Contrast as Cognitive Operations.- 6. Critical Thinking Across the Sciences.- 7. Models of Medical Reasoning.- 8. The “Irrational” within Rational Thinking: Proofs from Medical Sciences and the Arts.- 9. Shaping Clinical Reasoning.- 10. Critical Thinking in Nursing.- 11. Fostering Critical Thinking Among Pre-Service Teachers Through A Multiple Representation-Based Collaborative Pedagogical Approach.- 12. COVID-19: A Context to Promote Critical Thinking and Argumentation in Secondary and University Students.- 13. Thinking, Feeling, And Moving: Competition for Brain Resources in Health and Disease.- 14. Hypothesized Mechanisms of Cognitive Impairment During High-Intensity Acute Exercise.- 15. The Role of Cortisol in Cognitive Emotion Regulation Failure.- 16. Incorporating Mindfulness Practice for Better Performance in Work and Daily Life.- 17. Increasing Well-Being and Mental Health through Cutting-Edge Technology and Artificial Intelligence.- 18. Thought Content and Thinking Processes in Psychotherapy: Cognitive Versus Metacognitive Approaches.- 19. Can the Phylogeny of Compassion Focused Therapy and The Ontogeny of Transactional Analysis Go Beyond Dual-Process Theories and Propose Multiple Modes of Thinking?.- 20. Decision-Making in Integrated Contexts: Epistemological, Methodological and Cognitive Choices–Towards New Requirements in Psychological Research?.- 21. Modelling Social Action: From Biological to Social (Re)Constructions Enabling, Constraining, and Motivating Social Decision-Making.- 22. Decision-Making Styles and Decision Outcomes.- 23. Thinking about Decisions: How Human Variability Influences Decision-Making.- 24. Searching for Criteria for A Thinking Machine.- 25. The Irreducible Immateriality of Meaning and Its Crucial Role For Artificial, Human, and (Maybe) Non-Human Intelligence.- 26. Computational Model of The Mind: How to Think About Complex Systems in Nature.- 27. The Brain as A Vision and Program: From “Embodiment” to “Embedment”.- 28. Image, Imagination, Magic, Imaginary: Contemporary Experience and Cognition.- 29. Neurodesign: The Biology, Psychology, and Engineering of Creative Thinking and Innovation.- 30. Intellectual Mechanisms of Solving of Problematic Situations with a High Degree of Uncertainty.- 31. Art in The Twilight of Consciousness.- 32. Brain, Decision-Making, and Mental Health 2050.</div><div>
</div>		Brain, Decision Making, and Mental Health acknowledges that thinking is not a constant phenomenon but varies considerably across cultures. Critical thinking is particularly important in bridging thinking divisions and its applicability across sciences, particularly medical sciences. We see critical thinking as educable and the arts as means to achieve this purpose. We address the multidimensional relationship between thinking and health and related mechanisms. Thinking mainly affects emotion regulation and executive function; in other words, both mental and physical health are related as a function of thoughts. Considering the thinking‐feeling‐emotion regulation/executive function pathway, it would be reasonable to propose thinking capacities‐based interventions to impact emotion regulation and executive function, such as mindfulness and psychotherapy. We review decision-making taking place in integrated and social contexts and discuss the decision-making styles-decision outcomes relation. Finally, artificial thinking and intelligence prepare us for decision-making outside the human mind.
Brain, Decision Making, and Mental Health acknowledges that thinking is not a constant phenomenon but varies considerably across cultures. Critical thinking is particularly important in bridging thinking divisions and its applicability across sciences, particularly medical sciences. We see critical thinking as educable and the arts as means to achieve this purpose. We address the multidimensional relationship between thinking and health and related mechanisms. Thinking mainly affects emotion regulation and executive function; in other words, both mental and physical health are related as a function of thoughts. Considering the thinking‐feeling‐emotion regulation/executive function pathway, it would be reasonable to propose thinking capacities‐based interventions to impact emotion regulation and executive function, such as mindfulness and psychotherapy. We review decision-making taking place in integrated and social contexts and discuss the decision-making styles-decision outcomes relation. Finally, artificial thinking and intelligence prepare us for decision-making outside the human mind.
Applies critical thinking to bridge divisions in thinking across sciencesAddresses the association between thinking, brain function, and healthTraces decision-making styles and outcomes in integrated and social contextsScienceProfessional Books (2)Science (SC)EBOP41168Behavioral Science and Psychology009783031159589NeurosciencePhilosophy of MindMental HealthCognitive NeuroscienceCognitive Science1280000
59
Behavioral Science and Psychology978-3-031-15961-9RezaeiNima RezaeiNima Rezaei, Universal Scientific Education and Research Network (USERN), Stockholm, SwedenBrain, Decision Making and Mental HealthXI, 734 p. 172 illus., 117 illus. in color.12023final219.9966.00235.3970.62199.9960.00249.9975.00Soft cover1Integrated ScienceVolumeBehavioral Science and PsychologyContributed volumeBook0English734PSANHPMSpringerSpringer International Publishing1Available2024-01-042023-01-022024-01-032024-01-031<div>1. Introduction on Brain, Decision-Making, and Mental Health.- 2. Relational Thinking and The Cultural Conditionality of Human Understanding.- 3. Science and The Spectrum of Critical Thinking.- 4. Rhetoric and the Stases: A Universal Critical Thinking Problem-Solving Framework for the Sciences and Arts.- 5. Conceptual Development and Change: The Role of Echoing and Contrast as Cognitive Operations.- 6. Critical Thinking Across the Sciences.- 7. Models of Medical Reasoning.- 8. The “Irrational” within Rational Thinking: Proofs from Medical Sciences and the Arts.- 9. Shaping Clinical Reasoning.- 10. Critical Thinking in Nursing.- 11. Fostering Critical Thinking Among Pre-Service Teachers Through A Multiple Representation-Based Collaborative Pedagogical Approach.- 12. COVID-19: A Context to Promote Critical Thinking and Argumentation in Secondary and University Students.- 13. Thinking, Feeling, And Moving: Competition for Brain Resources in Health and Disease.- 14. Hypothesized Mechanisms of Cognitive Impairment During High-Intensity Acute Exercise.- 15. The Role of Cortisol in Cognitive Emotion Regulation Failure.- 16. Incorporating Mindfulness Practice for Better Performance in Work and Daily Life.- 17. Increasing Well-Being and Mental Health through Cutting-Edge Technology and Artificial Intelligence.- 18. Thought Content and Thinking Processes in Psychotherapy: Cognitive Versus Metacognitive Approaches.- 19. Can the Phylogeny of Compassion Focused Therapy and The Ontogeny of Transactional Analysis Go Beyond Dual-Process Theories and Propose Multiple Modes of Thinking?.- 20. Decision-Making in Integrated Contexts: Epistemological, Methodological and Cognitive Choices–Towards New Requirements in Psychological Research?.- 21. Modelling Social Action: From Biological to Social (Re)Constructions Enabling, Constraining, and Motivating Social Decision-Making.- 22. Decision-Making Styles and Decision Outcomes.- 23. Thinking about Decisions: How Human Variability Influences Decision-Making.- 24. Searching for Criteria for A Thinking Machine.- 25. The Irreducible Immateriality of Meaning and Its Crucial Role For Artificial, Human, and (Maybe) Non-Human Intelligence.- 26. Computational Model of The Mind: How to Think About Complex Systems in Nature.- 27. The Brain as A Vision and Program: From “Embodiment” to “Embedment”.- 28. Image, Imagination, Magic, Imaginary: Contemporary Experience and Cognition.- 29. Neurodesign: The Biology, Psychology, and Engineering of Creative Thinking and Innovation.- 30. Intellectual Mechanisms of Solving of Problematic Situations with a High Degree of Uncertainty.- 31. Art in The Twilight of Consciousness.- 32. Brain, Decision-Making, and Mental Health 2050.</div><div>
</div>		Brain, Decision Making, and Mental Health acknowledges that thinking is not a constant phenomenon but varies considerably across cultures. Critical thinking is particularly important in bridging thinking divisions and its applicability across sciences, particularly medical sciences. We see critical thinking as educable and the arts as means to achieve this purpose. We address the multidimensional relationship between thinking and health and related mechanisms. Thinking mainly affects emotion regulation and executive function; in other words, both mental and physical health are related as a function of thoughts. Considering the thinking‐feeling‐emotion regulation/executive function pathway, it would be reasonable to propose thinking capacities‐based interventions to impact emotion regulation and executive function, such as mindfulness and psychotherapy. We review decision-making taking place in integrated and social contexts and discuss the decision-making styles-decision outcomes relation. Finally, artificial thinking and intelligence prepare us for decision-making outside the human mind.
Brain, Decision Making, and Mental Health acknowledges that thinking is not a constant phenomenon but varies considerably across cultures. Critical thinking is particularly important in bridging thinking divisions and its applicability across sciences, particularly medical sciences. We see critical thinking as educable and the arts as means to achieve this purpose. We address the multidimensional relationship between thinking and health and related mechanisms. Thinking mainly affects emotion regulation and executive function; in other words, both mental and physical health are related as a function of thoughts. Considering the thinking‐feeling‐emotion regulation/executive function pathway, it would be reasonable to propose thinking capacities‐based interventions to impact emotion regulation and executive function, such as mindfulness and psychotherapy. We review decision-making taking place in integrated and social contexts and discuss the decision-making styles-decision outcomes relation. Finally, artificial thinking and intelligence prepare us for decision-making outside the human mind.
Applies critical thinking to bridge divisions in thinking across sciencesAddresses the association between thinking, brain function, and healthTraces decision-making styles and outcomes in integrated and social contextsScienceProfessional Books (2)Science (SC)EBOP41168Behavioral Science and Psychology009783031159619NeurosciencePhilosophy of MindMental HealthCognitive NeuroscienceCognitive Science1128000
60
Behavioral Science and Psychology978-3-030-14230-8RiggsDamien W. RiggsDamien W. Riggs, Flinders University, Adelaide, SA, , AustraliaWorking with Transgender Young People and their FamiliesA Critical Developmental ApproachXV, 149 p.12019final34.9910.5037.4411.2329.999.0037.9911.40Soft cover0Critical and Applied Approaches in Sexuality, Gender and IdentityBehavioral Science and PsychologyGeneral interestBook0English149JMJFSJPalgrave MacmillanSpringer International Publishing0WorldwideAvailable2019-03-222019-03-152019-05-142019-05-141Preface.- Chapter 1: Introduction.- Chapter 2: Children and Gender Development.- Chapter 3: Challenges and Joys in Adolescence.- Chapter 4: Parent Journeys through Cisgenderism.- Chapter 5: Siblings, Grandparents, and Animal Companions.- Chapter 6: Conclusion.<div>
</div>		“Riggs makes a novel contribution to affirming interventions for transgender youth. The book clearly positions young people as experts in their own gender and proposes a modern and timely intervention model that will certainly be helpful to practitioners who wish to engage in anti-oppressive, evidence-based and respectful work with young people and their families.”<div>- Annie Pullen Sansfaçon, Professor of Social Work at the University of Montreal, Canada</div><div>
</div><div>'This book is essential reading for anyone working with transgender people and their families. Riggs provides brilliant insights into clinical practice, including illustrative case studies. I believe this book to be a vital addition to the field, and I hope it will be used widely both in University classrooms and by clinical practitioners.' </div><div>- Alex Iantaffi, co-author of How to Understand Your Gender and podcast host of ‘Gender Stories’</div><div>
</div><div>
</div><div>Working with Transgender Young People and their Families advocates a critical developmental approach aimed at countering the cisgenderism that can be perceived in previous developmental literature on gender. It clears a path to understanding gender development for transgender young people by providing a detailed account that spans early childhood through to late adolescence. In doing so, it demonstrates how clinicians can work more effectively with parents and other family members in order to affirm transgender young people. By outlining a GENDER mnemonic created by the author, the book provides worked through examples of case materials that highlight the benefits of a critical developmental approach. Offering unique insights and practical guidance, it provides a cutting-edge resource for clinicians and researchers, as well as for families and other professionals seeking to understand and work affirmingly with transgender young people.</div><div>
</div><div>Damien W. Riggs is Associate Professor in psychology at Flinders University, Australia and a psychotherapist in private practice who specialises in working with transgender young people and their families. </div><div>
</div>		Working with Transgender Young People and their Families advocates a critical developmental approach aimed at countering the cisgenderism that can be perceived in previous developmental literature on gender. It clears a path to understanding gender development for transgender young people by providing a detailed account that spans early childhood through to late adolescence. In doing so, it demonstrates how clinicians can work more effectively with parents and other family members in order to affirm transgender young people. By outlining a GENDER mnemonic created by the author, the book provides worked through examples of case materials that highlight the benefits of a critical developmental approach. Offering unique insights and practical guidance, it provides a cutting-edge resource for clinicians and researchers, as well as for families and other professionals seeking to understand and work affirmingly with transgender young people.


Offers a unique focus on key issues clinicians are likely to see in practiceInvestigates the often neglected role of siblings and extended family members of transgender young peopleUnpacks the norms and assumptions inherent to research in gender studies<div>Damien W. Riggs is Associate Professor in psychology at Flinders University, Australia and a psychotherapist in private practice who specialises in working with transgender young people and their families.
</div><div>
</div>		TradePalgrave Trade US (P1)Palgrave Trade (P1)EBOP41168Behavioral Science and Psychology009783030142308Behavioral Sciences and PsychologyGender StudiesPhilosophy of the SelfSchool PsychologyChild and Adolescence Psychology454000
61
Behavioral Science and Psychology978-3-030-32049-2RobinsonPatricia J. RobinsonPatricia J. Robinson, Mountainview Consulting Group, Inc., Portland, OR, USABasics of Behavior Change in Primary CareXXV, 159 p. 8 illus., 1 illus. in color.12019final64.9919.5069.5420.8654.9916.5069.9921.00Soft cover0SpringerBriefs in PsychologyBehavioral Science and PsychologyBrief/PivotBook0English159MBNH9SpringerSpringer International Publishing0Available2020-06-022020-06-022020-06-172020-06-171An Overview of Primary Care: The Mission, the Strategies, the Results.- Population-based Care: A Philosophy and A Methodology.- Strategies for Team-based Care.- Clinical Services: Guidelines and Examples.- Pathway Services for Delivery of Behavioral Health Services (Use of Quality Improvement to Evolve Delivery).- Workforce Development: A Community and Global Effort.Emerging policy changes are encouraging adoption of a team-based approach to healthcare, yet most healthcare professionals receive little training in how to practice integrated care. Basics of Behavioral Health in Primary Care is a playbook for mental health and medical professionals to share in addressing behavioral health concerns in primary care. Concise and practical, this clinically-focused book addresses the needs of a diverse group of healthcare providers, as well as students preparing for careers in the rapidly changing landscape of healthcare.Emerging policy changes are encouraging adoption of a team-based approach to healthcare, yet most healthcare professionals receive little training in how to practice integrated care. Basics of Behavioral Health in Primary Care is a playbook for mental health and medical professionals to share in addressing behavioral health concerns in primary care. Concise and practical, this clinically-focused book addresses the needs of a diverse group of healthcare providers, as well as students preparing for careers in the rapidly changing landscape of healthcare.Concise, readable and practicalResearch-based integrated approachHighlights common problems in the integrated care settingDemonstrates the basics of effective team workPatti Robinson is a pioneer in integrated behavioral health. In her work as a researcher, clinician, and teacher, she has helped to transform healthcare in community health centers, military clinics, commercial systems, and public health departments. She has published numerous articles and book chapters. This is her third book on primary care behavioral health services, written to assure that the movement toward advanced primary care surges forward—with the fuel of behavioral science.ProfessionalsProfessional Books (2)Standard (0)EBOP41168Behavioral Science and Psychology009783030320492Health Psychology454100
62
Behavioral Science and Psychology978-3-030-45850-8SarteschiChristine M. SarteschiChristine M. Sarteschi, Chatham University, Pittsburgh, PA, USASovereign CitizensA Psychological and Criminological AnalysisXV, 90 p. 1 illus.12020final64.9919.5069.5420.8654.9916.5069.9921.00Soft cover0SpringerBriefs in Behavioral CriminologyBehavioral Science and PsychologyBrief/PivotBook0English90JMSpringerSpringer International Publishing0Available2020-07-242020-07-252021-01-052021-01-051Chapter 1: The Origins of the Sovereign Citizen Movement.- Chapter 2: Behavior and Underlying Ideology.- Chapter 3: Violence and Sovereign Citizens.- Chapter 4: Paper Terrorism and other Tactics.- Chapter 5: Moors.- Chapter 6: Sovereign Citizens in Court.- Chapter 7: Countering the Sovereign Citizen Movement.





This brief serves to educate readers about the sovereign citizen movement, presenting relevant case studies and offering suggestions for measures to address problems caused by this movement. Sovereign citizens are considered by the Federal Bureau of Investigation (FBI) to be a prominent domestic terrorist threat in the United States, and are broadly defined as a loosely-afflicted anti-government group who believes that the United States government and its laws are invalid and fraudulent. Because they consider themselves to be immune to the consequences of American law, members identifying with this group often engage in criminal activities such as tax fraud, “paper terrorism”, and in more extreme cases, attempted murder or other acts of violence. Sovereign Citizens is one of the first scholarly works to explicitly focus on the sovereign citizen movement by explaining the movement’s origin, interactions with the criminal justice system, and ideology.This brief serves to educate readers about the sovereign citizen movement, presenting relevant case studies and offering suggestions for measures to address problems caused by this movement. Sovereign citizens are considered by the Federal Bureau of Investigation (FBI) to be a prominent domestic terrorist threat in the United States, and are broadly defined as a loosely-afflicted anti-government group who believes that the United States government and its laws are invalid and fraudulent. Because they consider themselves to be immune to the consequences of American law, members identifying with this group often engage in criminal activities such as tax fraud, “paper terrorism”, and in more extreme cases, attempted murder or other acts of violence. Sovereign Citizens is one of the first scholarly works to explicitly focus on the sovereign citizen movement by explaining the movement’s origin, interactions with the criminal justice system, and ideology.
Describes the origins, development, ideology, and behaviors of the sovereign citizens movementExplores the complex belief systems of adherents to the movementOne of the first scholarly works to focus exclusively on this under-recognized movementDr. Christine M. Sarteschi, LCSW is an Associate Professor of Social Work and Criminology. She teaches courses in behavioral science that cover a wide range of topics including: human behavior, juvenile justice, mental illness and crime, cold case research, problem solving courts, mass murder, and extreme violent crime. Her research has appeared in The British Journal of Social Work, Aggression and Violent Behavior, The Journal of Criminal Justice, among others. She has served as a peer reviewer for the National Science Foundation as well as other scholarly journals. Dr. Sarteschi's most recent Springer brief includes “Mass and Serial Murder in America.”
ProfessionalsProfessional Books (2)Standard (0)EBOP41168Behavioral Science and Psychology009783030458508Behavioral Sciences and Psychology454100
63
Behavioral Science and Psychology978-3-030-85923-7SchutteLusilda Schutte; Tharina Guse; Marié P. WissingLusilda Schutte, North-West University, Potchefstroom, South Africa; Tharina Guse, University of Pretoria, Pretoria, South Africa; Marié P. Wissing, North-West University, Potchefstroom, South AfricaEmbracing Well-Being in Diverse African Contexts: Research PerspectivesXIX, 423 p. 13 illus., 4 illus. in color.12022final109.9933.00117.6935.3199.9930.00119.9936.00Hard cover0Cross-Cultural Advancements in Positive PsychologyVolumeBehavioral Science and PsychologyContributed volumeBook0English423JMANJFFSpringerSpringer International Publishing0Available2022-05-202022-05-202022-06-062022-06-061Preface.- Part I Theoretical perspectives on well-being in Africa.- Chapter 1 Embracing Well-Being in Diverse Contexts: The Third Wave of Positive Psychology and African Imprint.- Chapter 2 Well-Being in Africa: Towards an Africa(n) Centred Positive Psychology.- Chapter 3 Socially Influenced Health Norms: Their Construction and Enactment in African Culture Settings.- Part II Measuring well-being in Africa.- Chapter 4 Factorial Validity of the Twi Version of the Mental Health Continuum-Short Form and Prevalence of Mental Health in a Rural Ghanaian Sample.- Chapter 5 Conceptualising and Measuring Hospitality in Relation to Wellbeing in Kenya: Is Hospitality a Character Strength?.- Chapter 6 The factor structure of the Peer and Community Relational Health Indices in two South African samples: A bifactor exploratory structural equation modelling approach.- Part III Manifestations and dynamics of well-being in Africa.- Chapter 7 Resilience in the Context of Chronic, Complex Stressors: An Emerging Adult’s Account.- Chapter 8 Psychological Well-being among Yung People Living with HIV: Role of Social Support, Self-esteem and Socio-demographic Variables.- Chapter 9 Exploring Protective Resources that Facilitate Positive Outcomes Among Married Girls in the Northern Region of Ghana.- Chapter 10 Factors Contributing to Student Wellbeing: Student Perspectives.- Chapter 11 Nature and Role of Student Hope and Meaning in Goal Setting: Implications for Higher Education in South Africa.- Chapter 12 Virtues and Character strengths, Subjective Well-being and Academic Achievement: An Exploratory Study with Angolan University Students.- Chapter 13 Adult Attachment and Well-Being in the Medical Education Context: Attachment Security is Associated with Psychological Well-being through Self-Efficacy.- Chapter 14 Exploration of Harmony as a Quality of Happiness: Findings from South Africa and Ghana.- Chapter 15 Concordance of Goals and Meaning with Reference to theInterpersonal Relationships Domain: Associations with Sociodemographic Variables and Well-being in a Multicultural South African Group.- Part IV Well-being promotion in Africa.- Chapter 16 Positive Psychological Interventions in African Contexts: A Scoping Review.- Chapter 17 Community-based Interventions to Improve Well-being of Youth in a High-risk Community in South Africa: Researcher’s Experiences and Implementation Outcomes.This is the first volume providing a research platform to showcase research in the field of positive psychology and well-being science in African contexts. Next to enhancing context-sensitive theory and practice on the African continent, it also contributes to the global discourse in positive psychology and facilitates the development of a science that reflects and is relevant to complexity and diversity in a globalising society. This volume brings together work from African scholars, featuring research on theoretical perspectives on well-being in Africa, measurement of well-being in Africa, manifestations and dynamics of well-being in Africa, and well-being promotion in Africa. It stimulates further research in positive psychology and well-being science in the African context and globally, and emphasises the interconnectedness and situatedness of human functioning and well-being, contributing to a more balanced perspective on well-being in an international perspective.

Thevolume benefits researchers, students and practitioners in Africa and other international contexts who study or apply the science of positive psychology and well-being in diverse contexts.Chapter 1 is available open access under a Creative Commons Attribution 4.0 International License via link.springer.com.<p>< p='' style='color: rgb(0, 0, 0); font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; font-size: 14px;'></p>^		This is the first volume providing a research platform to showcase research in the field of positive psychology and well-being science in African contexts. Next to enhancing context-sensitive theory and practice on the African continent, it also contributes to the global discourse in positive psychology and facilitates the development of a science that reflects and is relevant to complexity and diversity in a globalising society. This volume brings together work from African scholars, featuring research on theoretical perspectives on well-being in Africa, measurement of well-being in Africa, manifestations and dynamics of well-being in Africa, and well-being promotion in Africa. It stimulates further research in positive psychology and well-being science in the African context and globally, and emphasises the interconnectedness and situatedness of human functioning and well-being, contributing to a more balanced perspective on well-being in an international perspective. The volume benefits researchers, students and practitioners in Africa and other international contexts who study or apply the science of positive psychology and well-being in diverse contexts.Chapter 1 is available open access under a Creative Commons Attribution 4.0 International License via link.springer.com.Brings together perspectives from scholars in different domains of positive psychology and well-being promotionIllustrates the universal and culture-specific manifestations and applications of positive psychologyContributes to the global discourse in positive psychology and facilitates the development of a science<div><div>Lusilda Schutte, holding a PhD degree in psychology and a Masters degree in statistics, is an associate professor in the Africa Unit for Transdisciplinary Health Research at the North-West University in South Africa, as well as a registered and practicing clinical psychologist. She is the principal investigator of a funded research project (2020-2022) that examines the conceptualisation, measurement, dynamics, and correlates of well-being in diverse contexts. She has been invited to present at the 6th World Congress of Positive Psychology in 2018, to convene a symposium at the International Congress of Psychology in 2021, and to present guest lectures in the USA and Croatia. She is an Associate Editor of Springer’s Journal of Well-being Assessment, a Review Editor of Quantitative Psychology and Measurement, part of the journals Frontiers in Applied Mathematics and Statistics and Frontiers in Psychology, an Editorial Board member of the Journal of Happiness Studies,and she chaired the first Africa Positive Psychology Conference in 2018. She previously lectured statistics and worked as a statistical consultant at the North-West University and as a clinical psychologist at a government-funded psychiatric hospital in South Africa.
</div>Tharina Guse is a counselling psychologist, professor, and Head of the Department of Psychology at the University of Pretoria. Her broad research area concerns the field of positive psychology. In particular, she is interested in examining factors related to youth well-being, including interventions to maintain and promote their psychological well-being. Tharina further investigates the nature, dynamics and mechanisms of psychological strengths, specifically hope and gratitude. She also examines the application of hypnosis for mental health promotion. Tharina has been invited as visiting professor to the University of Bologna, Italy, on several occasions received an Erasmus scholarship to the University of Porto, Portugal in 2016. She has been elected as founding President of the South African Positive Psychology Association. </div><div>
<div>Marié P. Wissing (Drs. Clinical Psychology; DPhil Psychology), had been a Scientific Collaborator at the Free University of Amsterdam in the Netherlands, the Director of the School for Psychosocial Behavioural Sciences at the North-West University in South Africa, and is presently Extraordinary Professor in the Africa Unit for Transdisciplinary Health Research (AUTHeR). She developed a research programme in Psychofortology (i. e. the science of psychological strengths; FORT) which included several funded team projects, and linked to multidisciplinary research projects. Her research focussed on the understanding, measurement and promotion of (bio)psychosocial well-being and strengths in diverse contexts, emphasizing theories and underlying philosophical assumptions. She is a steering member of the international Eudaimonic-Hedonic Happiness Investigation (EHHI) project, serves as Co-Editor of the Journal of Happiness Studies, and is a member of the editorial board of several other disciplinary journals. She edited the book Well-being Research in South Africa, guest-edited a special journal section on Meaning and Relational Well-being, and published many articles, chapters in scientific books, and commissioned research reports. She was an invited lecturer at various universities and a keynote speaker at conferences, initiated the First Positive Psychology Conference in South Africa in 2006 and the first masters degree in Positive Psychology in Africa. One hundred and twenty-six masters and doctoral degree students completed their studies under her (co-)supervision. She is on the Council of Advisors for the International Positive Psychology Association (IPPA).
</div></div>		ScienceProfessional Books (2)Science (SC)EBOP41168Behavioral Science and Psychology009783030859237Positive PsychologyQuality of Life ResearchCross-Cultural Psychology909000
64
Behavioral Science and Psychology978-3-030-85926-8SchutteLusilda Schutte; Tharina Guse; Marié P. WissingLusilda Schutte, North-West University, Potchefstroom, South Africa; Tharina Guse, University of Pretoria, Pretoria, South Africa; Marié P. Wissing, North-West University, Potchefstroom, South AfricaEmbracing Well-Being in Diverse African Contexts: Research PerspectivesXIX, 423 p. 13 illus., 4 illus. in color.12022final109.9933.00117.6935.3199.9930.00119.9936.00Soft cover1Cross-Cultural Advancements in Positive PsychologyVolumeBehavioral Science and PsychologyContributed volumeBook0English423JMANJFFSpringerSpringer International Publishing0Available2023-05-202022-05-232023-05-202023-05-201Preface.- Part I Theoretical perspectives on well-being in Africa.- Chapter 1 Embracing Well-Being in Diverse Contexts: The Third Wave of Positive Psychology and African Imprint.- Chapter 2 Well-Being in Africa: Towards an Africa(n) Centred Positive Psychology.- Chapter 3 Socially Influenced Health Norms: Their Construction and Enactment in African Culture Settings.- Part II Measuring well-being in Africa.- Chapter 4 Factorial Validity of the Twi Version of the Mental Health Continuum-Short Form and Prevalence of Mental Health in a Rural Ghanaian Sample.- Chapter 5 Conceptualising and Measuring Hospitality in Relation to Wellbeing in Kenya: Is Hospitality a Character Strength?.- Chapter 6 The factor structure of the Peer and Community Relational Health Indices in two South African samples: A bifactor exploratory structural equation modelling approach.- Part III Manifestations and dynamics of well-being in Africa.- Chapter 7 Resilience in the Context of Chronic, Complex Stressors: An Emerging Adult’s Account.- Chapter 8 Psychological Well-being among Yung People Living with HIV: Role of Social Support, Self-esteem and Socio-demographic Variables.- Chapter 9 Exploring Protective Resources that Facilitate Positive Outcomes Among Married Girls in the Northern Region of Ghana.- Chapter 10 Factors Contributing to Student Wellbeing: Student Perspectives.- Chapter 11 Nature and Role of Student Hope and Meaning in Goal Setting: Implications for Higher Education in South Africa.- Chapter 12 Virtues and Character strengths, Subjective Well-being and Academic Achievement: An Exploratory Study with Angolan University Students.- Chapter 13 Adult Attachment and Well-Being in the Medical Education Context: Attachment Security is Associated with Psychological Well-being through Self-Efficacy.- Chapter 14 Exploration of Harmony as a Quality of Happiness: Findings from South Africa and Ghana.- Chapter 15 Concordance of Goals and Meaning with Reference to theInterpersonal Relationships Domain: Associations with Sociodemographic Variables and Well-being in a Multicultural South African Group.- Part IV Well-being promotion in Africa.- Chapter 16 Positive Psychological Interventions in African Contexts: A Scoping Review.- Chapter 17 Community-based Interventions to Improve Well-being of Youth in a High-risk Community in South Africa: Researcher’s Experiences and Implementation Outcomes.This is the first volume providing a research platform to showcase research in the field of positive psychology and well-being science in African contexts. Next to enhancing context-sensitive theory and practice on the African continent, it also contributes to the global discourse in positive psychology and facilitates the development of a science that reflects and is relevant to complexity and diversity in a globalising society. This volume brings together work from African scholars, featuring research on theoretical perspectives on well-being in Africa, measurement of well-being in Africa, manifestations and dynamics of well-being in Africa, and well-being promotion in Africa. It stimulates further research in positive psychology and well-being science in the African context and globally, and emphasises the interconnectedness and situatedness of human functioning and well-being, contributing to a more balanced perspective on well-being in an international perspective.

Thevolume benefits researchers, students and practitioners in Africa and other international contexts who study or apply the science of positive psychology and well-being in diverse contexts.Chapter 1 is available open access under a Creative Commons Attribution 4.0 International License via link.springer.com.<p>< p='' style='color: rgb(0, 0, 0); font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; font-size: 14px;'></p>^		This is the first volume providing a research platform to showcase research in the field of positive psychology and well-being science in African contexts. Next to enhancing context-sensitive theory and practice on the African continent, it also contributes to the global discourse in positive psychology and facilitates the development of a science that reflects and is relevant to complexity and diversity in a globalising society. This volume brings together work from African scholars, featuring research on theoretical perspectives on well-being in Africa, measurement of well-being in Africa, manifestations and dynamics of well-being in Africa, and well-being promotion in Africa. It stimulates further research in positive psychology and well-being science in the African context and globally, and emphasises the interconnectedness and situatedness of human functioning and well-being, contributing to a more balanced perspective on well-being in an international perspective. The volume benefits researchers, students and practitioners in Africa and other international contexts who study or apply the science of positive psychology and well-being in diverse contexts.Chapter 1 is available open access under a Creative Commons Attribution 4.0 International License via link.springer.com.Brings together perspectives from scholars in different domains of positive psychology and well-being promotionIllustrates the universal and culture-specific manifestations and applications of positive psychologyContributes to the global discourse in positive psychology and facilitates the development of a science<div><div>Lusilda Schutte, holding a PhD degree in psychology and a Masters degree in statistics, is an associate professor in the Africa Unit for Transdisciplinary Health Research at the North-West University in South Africa, as well as a registered and practicing clinical psychologist. She is the principal investigator of a funded research project (2020-2022) that examines the conceptualisation, measurement, dynamics, and correlates of well-being in diverse contexts. She has been invited to present at the 6th World Congress of Positive Psychology in 2018, to convene a symposium at the International Congress of Psychology in 2021, and to present guest lectures in the USA and Croatia. She is an Associate Editor of Springer’s Journal of Well-being Assessment, a Review Editor of Quantitative Psychology and Measurement, part of the journals Frontiers in Applied Mathematics and Statistics and Frontiers in Psychology, an Editorial Board member of the Journal of Happiness Studies,and she chaired the first Africa Positive Psychology Conference in 2018. She previously lectured statistics and worked as a statistical consultant at the North-West University and as a clinical psychologist at a government-funded psychiatric hospital in South Africa.
</div>Tharina Guse is a counselling psychologist, professor, and Head of the Department of Psychology at the University of Pretoria. Her broad research area concerns the field of positive psychology. In particular, she is interested in examining factors related to youth well-being, including interventions to maintain and promote their psychological well-being. Tharina further investigates the nature, dynamics and mechanisms of psychological strengths, specifically hope and gratitude. She also examines the application of hypnosis for mental health promotion. Tharina has been invited as visiting professor to the University of Bologna, Italy, on several occasions received an Erasmus scholarship to the University of Porto, Portugal in 2016. She has been elected as founding President of the South African Positive Psychology Association. </div><div>
<div>Marié P. Wissing (Drs. Clinical Psychology; DPhil Psychology), had been a Scientific Collaborator at the Free University of Amsterdam in the Netherlands, the Director of the School for Psychosocial Behavioural Sciences at the North-West University in South Africa, and is presently Extraordinary Professor in the Africa Unit for Transdisciplinary Health Research (AUTHeR). She developed a research programme in Psychofortology (i. e. the science of psychological strengths; FORT) which included several funded team projects, and linked to multidisciplinary research projects. Her research focussed on the understanding, measurement and promotion of (bio)psychosocial well-being and strengths in diverse contexts, emphasizing theories and underlying philosophical assumptions. She is a steering member of the international Eudaimonic-Hedonic Happiness Investigation (EHHI) project, serves as Co-Editor of the Journal of Happiness Studies, and is a member of the editorial board of several other disciplinary journals. She edited the book Well-being Research in South Africa, guest-edited a special journal section on Meaning and Relational Well-being, and published many articles, chapters in scientific books, and commissioned research reports. She was an invited lecturer at various universities and a keynote speaker at conferences, initiated the First Positive Psychology Conference in South Africa in 2006 and the first masters degree in Positive Psychology in Africa. One hundred and twenty-six masters and doctoral degree students completed their studies under her (co-)supervision. She is on the Council of Advisors for the International Positive Psychology Association (IPPA).
</div></div>		ScienceProfessional Books (2)Science (SC)EBOP41168Behavioral Science and Psychology009783030859268Positive PsychologyQuality of Life ResearchCross-Cultural Psychology796000
65
Behavioral Science and Psychology978-3-030-72219-7StevensGarth Stevens; Christopher C. SonnGarth Stevens, University of Witwatersrand, Johannesburg, South Africa; Christopher C. Sonn, Victoria University, Melbourne, VIC, AustraliaDecoloniality and Epistemic Justice in Contemporary Community PsychologyXXV, 237 p. 3 illus., 1 illus. in color.12021final159.9948.00171.1951.36139.9942.00179.9954.00Hard cover0Community PsychologyBehavioral Science and PsychologyContributed volumeBook0English237JMHJPVHSpringerSpringer International Publishing0Available2021-09-212021-09-212021-10-082021-10-081Foreword.- Recovering and re-centring decolonial thought in community psychology.- Defining the key co-ordinates of a decolonial praxis.- Community conscientisation, political activism and social change in Brazil.- Decoloniality and participatory action research in Puerto Rico.- Community psychology, depth psychology and decoloniality.- Liberation psychology and psychosocial accompaniment.- Widening our methodological imaginations for social change and justice.- Maintaining the criticality of the decolonial project within settler colonial nation states.- The legacy of Ignacio Martín-Baró and its application to world psychologies.- Rethinking belonging in diasporic/migrant communities in Australia from a community psychological perspective.- Towards a decolonized Maori psychology.- The anthropocene, environmental degradation, climate change and environmental justice.- Towards a decolonised, Afro-centric South African psychology.- Epistemic reconstruction and justice through decolonisingpsychological curricula in higher education in South Africa.- Archives, memory and peace in Chile.- Fanon’s decolonial psychology in the contemporary world.- Psychology, resilience and social change in the colonial context of the Arab world.- Liberation theology, decoloniality and Islamophobia.- Social peace and decoloniality in the Philippines.- Innovative approaches to peace pedagogy and praxis in contexts of violence.This book examines the ways in which decolonial theory has gained traction and influenced knowledge production, praxis and epistemic justice in various contemporary iterations of community psychology across the globe. With a notable Southern focus (although not exclusively so), the volume critically interrogates the biases in Western modernist thought in relation to community psychology, and to illuminate and consolidate current epistemic alternatives that contribute to the possibilities of emancipatory futures within community psychology. To this end, the volume includes contributions from community psychology theory and praxis across the globe that speak to standpoint approaches (e.g. critical race studies, queer theory, indigenous epistemologies) in which the experiences of the majority of the global population are more accurately reflected, address key social issues such as the on-going racialization of the globe, gender, class, poverty, xenophobia, sexuality, violence, diasporas,migrancy, environmental degradation, and transnationalism/globalisation, and embrace forms of knowledge production that involve the co-construction of new knowledges across the traditional binary of knowledge producers and consumers. This book is an engaging resource for scholars, researchers, practitioners, activists and advanced postgraduate students who are currently working within community psychology and cognate sub-disciplines within psychology more broadly. A secondary readership is those working in development studies, political science, community development and broader cognate disciplines within the social sciences, arts, and humanities.This book examines the ways in which decolonial theory has gained traction and influenced knowledge production, praxis and epistemic justice in various contemporary iterations of community psychology across the globe. With a notable Southern focus (although not exclusively so), the volume critically interrogates the biases in Western modernist thought in relation to community psychology, and to illuminate and consolidate current epistemic alternatives that contribute to the possibilities of emancipatory futures within community psychology. To this end, the volume includes contributions from community psychology theory and praxis across the globe that speak to standpoint approaches (e.g. critical race studies, queer theory, indigenous epistemologies) in which the experiences of the majority of the global population are more accurately reflected, address key social issues such as the on-going racialization of the globe, gender, class, poverty, xenophobia, sexuality, violence, diasporas,migrancy, environmental degradation, and transnationalism/globalisation, and embrace forms of knowledge production that involve the co-construction of new knowledges across the traditional binary of knowledge producers and consumers. This book is an engaging resource for scholars, researchers, practitioners, activists and advanced postgraduate students who are currently working within community psychology and cognate sub-disciplines within psychology more broadly. A secondary readership is those working in development studies, political science, community development and broader cognate disciplines within the social sciences, arts, and humanities.Examines the ways in which decolonial theory influences knowledge production, praxis and epistemic justice in global contemporary iterations of community psychologyOffers a foundation reference for methods for applying decolonial theories to community psychology to embrace processes of epistemic reconstruction and emancipatory justiceFocuses critically on the Global South to interrogate the biases in Western modernist thought in relation to community psychologyTargets a wide readership of scholars, researchers, and practitioners from psychology, community development, political science, social science, and humanities disciplinesGarth Stevens is a Professor and Clinical Psychologist at the University of the Witwatersrand in South Africa. His research interests include foci on race, racism and related social asymmetries; critical violence studies; and historical/collective trauma and memory. He has published widely in these areas, both nationally and internationally, including co-editorships of A ‘race’ against time: Psychology and challenges to deracialisation in South Africa (UNISA Press, 2006) and Race, memory and the apartheid archive: Towards a transformative psychosocial praxis (Palgrave Macmillan, 2013). He is a member of the Academy of Science of South Africa (ASSAf), presently serves as the Dean of the Faculty of Humanities at the University of the Witwatersrand, and is the current President of the Psychological Society of South Africa (PsySSA).
Christopher C. Sonn, PhD, is Professor at Victoria University, Melbourne, Australia. He is a fellow of the Institute of Health and Sport and teaches into the Applied Psychology Program in the College of Health and Biomedicine. His research is concerned with understanding and changing dynamics of oppression and resistance, examining structural violence such as racism, and its effects on social identities, intergroup relations and belonging. He holds a Visiting Professorship at the University of the Witwatersrand, South Africa. He is co-editor of Creating Inclusive Knowledges and co-author of Social Psychology and Everyday Life, and Associate Editor of the American Journal of Community Psychology and Community Psychology in Global Perspective.		ScienceProfessional Books (2)Science (SC)EBOP41168Behavioral Science and Psychology009783030722197Community PsychologyHuman RightsBiotechnologyDevelopment Studies565100
66
Behavioral Science and Psychology978-3-030-72222-7StevensGarth Stevens; Christopher C. SonnGarth Stevens, University of Witwatersrand, Johannesburg, South Africa; Christopher C. Sonn, Victoria University, Melbourne, VIC, AustraliaDecoloniality and Epistemic Justice in Contemporary Community PsychologyXXV, 237 p. 3 illus., 1 illus. in color.12021final159.9948.00171.1951.36139.9942.00179.9954.00Soft cover1Community PsychologyBehavioral Science and PsychologyContributed volumeBook0English237JMHJPVHSpringerSpringer International Publishing0Available2022-09-222021-09-252022-09-212022-09-211Foreword.- Recovering and re-centring decolonial thought in community psychology.- Defining the key co-ordinates of a decolonial praxis.- Community conscientisation, political activism and social change in Brazil.- Decoloniality and participatory action research in Puerto Rico.- Community psychology, depth psychology and decoloniality.- Liberation psychology and psychosocial accompaniment.- Widening our methodological imaginations for social change and justice.- Maintaining the criticality of the decolonial project within settler colonial nation states.- The legacy of Ignacio Martín-Baró and its application to world psychologies.- Rethinking belonging in diasporic/migrant communities in Australia from a community psychological perspective.- Towards a decolonized Maori psychology.- The anthropocene, environmental degradation, climate change and environmental justice.- Towards a decolonised, Afro-centric South African psychology.- Epistemic reconstruction and justice through decolonisingpsychological curricula in higher education in South Africa.- Archives, memory and peace in Chile.- Fanon’s decolonial psychology in the contemporary world.- Psychology, resilience and social change in the colonial context of the Arab world.- Liberation theology, decoloniality and Islamophobia.- Social peace and decoloniality in the Philippines.- Innovative approaches to peace pedagogy and praxis in contexts of violence.This book examines the ways in which decolonial theory has gained traction and influenced knowledge production, praxis and epistemic justice in various contemporary iterations of community psychology across the globe. With a notable Southern focus (although not exclusively so), the volume critically interrogates the biases in Western modernist thought in relation to community psychology, and to illuminate and consolidate current epistemic alternatives that contribute to the possibilities of emancipatory futures within community psychology. To this end, the volume includes contributions from community psychology theory and praxis across the globe that speak to standpoint approaches (e.g. critical race studies, queer theory, indigenous epistemologies) in which the experiences of the majority of the global population are more accurately reflected, address key social issues such as the on-going racialization of the globe, gender, class, poverty, xenophobia, sexuality, violence, diasporas,migrancy, environmental degradation, and transnationalism/globalisation, and embrace forms of knowledge production that involve the co-construction of new knowledges across the traditional binary of knowledge producers and consumers. This book is an engaging resource for scholars, researchers, practitioners, activists and advanced postgraduate students who are currently working within community psychology and cognate sub-disciplines within psychology more broadly. A secondary readership is those working in development studies, political science, community development and broader cognate disciplines within the social sciences, arts, and humanities.This book examines the ways in which decolonial theory has gained traction and influenced knowledge production, praxis and epistemic justice in various contemporary iterations of community psychology across the globe. With a notable Southern focus (although not exclusively so), the volume critically interrogates the biases in Western modernist thought in relation to community psychology, and to illuminate and consolidate current epistemic alternatives that contribute to the possibilities of emancipatory futures within community psychology. To this end, the volume includes contributions from community psychology theory and praxis across the globe that speak to standpoint approaches (e.g. critical race studies, queer theory, indigenous epistemologies) in which the experiences of the majority of the global population are more accurately reflected, address key social issues such as the on-going racialization of the globe, gender, class, poverty, xenophobia, sexuality, violence, diasporas,migrancy, environmental degradation, and transnationalism/globalisation, and embrace forms of knowledge production that involve the co-construction of new knowledges across the traditional binary of knowledge producers and consumers. This book is an engaging resource for scholars, researchers, practitioners, activists and advanced postgraduate students who are currently working within community psychology and cognate sub-disciplines within psychology more broadly. A secondary readership is those working in development studies, political science, community development and broader cognate disciplines within the social sciences, arts, and humanities.Examines the ways in which decolonial theory influences knowledge production, praxis and epistemic justice in global contemporary iterations of community psychologyOffers a foundation reference for methods for applying decolonial theories to community psychology to embrace processes of epistemic reconstruction and emancipatory justiceFocuses critically on the Global South to interrogate the biases in Western modernist thought in relation to community psychologyTargets a wide readership of scholars, researchers, and practitioners from psychology, community development, political science, social science, and humanities disciplinesGarth Stevens is a Professor and Clinical Psychologist at the University of the Witwatersrand in South Africa. His research interests include foci on race, racism and related social asymmetries; critical violence studies; and historical/collective trauma and memory. He has published widely in these areas, both nationally and internationally, including co-editorships of A ‘race’ against time: Psychology and challenges to deracialisation in South Africa (UNISA Press, 2006) and Race, memory and the apartheid archive: Towards a transformative psychosocial praxis (Palgrave Macmillan, 2013). He is a member of the Academy of Science of South Africa (ASSAf), presently serves as the Dean of the Faculty of Humanities at the University of the Witwatersrand, and is the current President of the Psychological Society of South Africa (PsySSA).
Christopher C. Sonn, PhD, is Professor at Victoria University, Melbourne, Australia. He is a fellow of the Institute of Health and Sport and teaches into the Applied Psychology Program in the College of Health and Biomedicine. His research is concerned with understanding and changing dynamics of oppression and resistance, examining structural violence such as racism, and its effects on social identities, intergroup relations and belonging. He holds a Visiting Professorship at the University of the Witwatersrand, South Africa. He is co-editor of Creating Inclusive Knowledges and co-author of Social Psychology and Everyday Life, and Associate Editor of the American Journal of Community Psychology and Community Psychology in Global Perspective.		ScienceProfessional Books (2)Science (SC)EBOP41168Behavioral Science and Psychology009783030722227Community PsychologyHuman RightsBiotechnologyDevelopment Studies409100
67
Behavioral Science and Psychology978-3-030-13596-6ThompsonChalmer E. F. ThompsonChalmer E. F. Thompson, Indiana University – Purdue University Indianapolis, Indianapolis, IN, USAA Psychology of Liberation and PeaceFor the Greater GoodXXV, 166 p. 2 illus.12019final89.9927.0096.2928.8979.9924.0099.9930.00Hard cover0Pan-African PsychologiesBehavioral Science and PsychologyMonographBook0English166JMHHPMPalgrave MacmillanSpringer International Publishing0Available2019-04-042019-03-272020-04-292020-04-291Preface.- Chapter 1. Introduction.- Chapter 2. Violence and Racialized Lives.- Chapter 3. How Racial Identity Theory is Relevant to Liberation and Peace Psychology.- Chapter 4. Waging Liberation and Peace.- Chapter 5. The World Stage: Engaging Transnationally in Liberation and Peace Work.- Acknowledgements.This book addresses the need to radically transform societies plagued by racism. It places prominence on persistent racialized violence in the lives of Black Americans as influential in how Black people in the U.S. and abroad perceive themselves as Black in juxtaposition to their perceptions of White people and other People of Color. An absence of understanding of the often-masked role of violence in the lives of Black people increases the likelihood of reproducing it. The author offers a reformulation of racial identity theory to examine the construction of Manichaeism in people and societies, and how meaningful engagement that confronts the violence is vital to psychological development, though this engagement also is not without dire risks.<div>This book addresses the need to radically transform societies plagued by racism. It places prominence on persistent racialized violence in the lives of Black Americans as influential in how Black people in the U.S. and abroad perceive themselves as Black in juxtaposition to their perceptions of White people and other People of Color. An absence of understanding of the often-masked role of violence in the lives of Black people increases the likelihood of reproducing it. The author offers a reformulation of racial identity theory to examine the construction of Manichaeism in people and societies, and how meaningful engagement that confronts the violence is vital to psychological development, though this engagement also is not without dire risks.
</div>		Presents a re-formulated theory of racial identity, building on the work of historians, writers, and theoristsMakes space for activists and other individuals outside of academia within the author's comprehensive theoryExpands on American racial politics to address racial identity on a global scaleChalmer E. F. Thompson, PhD, is Associate Professor at the Indiana University School of Education in Indianapolis. Dr. Thompson is affiliated with Kyambogo University in Kampala, Uganda and considers herself a scholar-activist.SciencePalgrave Standard US (P5)Palgrave Monograph (P6)EBOP41168Behavioral Science and Psychology009783030135966Cross-Cultural PsychologyPhilosophy of the SelfHuman RightsAfrican Culture454000
68
Behavioral Science and Psychology978-3-030-13599-7ThompsonChalmer E. F. ThompsonChalmer E. F. Thompson, Indiana University – Purdue University Indianapolis, Indianapolis, IN, USAA Psychology of Liberation and PeaceFor the Greater GoodXXV, 166 p. 2 illus.12019final89.9927.0096.2928.8979.9924.0099.9930.00Soft cover1Pan-African PsychologiesBehavioral Science and PsychologyMonographBook0English166JMHHPMPalgrave MacmillanSpringer International Publishing0Available2020-08-142019-03-272020-04-042020-04-041Preface.- Chapter 1. Introduction.- Chapter 2. Violence and Racialized Lives.- Chapter 3. How Racial Identity Theory is Relevant to Liberation and Peace Psychology.- Chapter 4. Waging Liberation and Peace.- Chapter 5. The World Stage: Engaging Transnationally in Liberation and Peace Work.- Acknowledgements.This book addresses the need to radically transform societies plagued by racism. It places prominence on persistent racialized violence in the lives of Black Americans as influential in how Black people in the U.S. and abroad perceive themselves as Black in juxtaposition to their perceptions of White people and other People of Color. An absence of understanding of the often-masked role of violence in the lives of Black people increases the likelihood of reproducing it. The author offers a reformulation of racial identity theory to examine the construction of Manichaeism in people and societies, and how meaningful engagement that confronts the violence is vital to psychological development, though this engagement also is not without dire risks.<div>This book addresses the need to radically transform societies plagued by racism. It places prominence on persistent racialized violence in the lives of Black Americans as influential in how Black people in the U.S. and abroad perceive themselves as Black in juxtaposition to their perceptions of White people and other People of Color. An absence of understanding of the often-masked role of violence in the lives of Black people increases the likelihood of reproducing it. The author offers a reformulation of racial identity theory to examine the construction of Manichaeism in people and societies, and how meaningful engagement that confronts the violence is vital to psychological development, though this engagement also is not without dire risks.
</div>		Presents a re-formulated theory of racial identity, building on the work of historians, writers, and theoristsMakes space for activists and other individuals outside of academia within the author's comprehensive theoryExpands on American racial politics to address racial identity on a global scaleChalmer E. F. Thompson, PhD, is Associate Professor at the Indiana University School of Education in Indianapolis. Dr. Thompson is affiliated with Kyambogo University in Kampala, Uganda and considers herself a scholar-activist.SciencePalgrave Standard US (P5)Palgrave Monograph (P6)EBOP41168Behavioral Science and Psychology009783030135997Cross-Cultural PsychologyPhilosophy of the SelfHuman RightsAfrican Culture454000
69
Behavioral Science and Psychology978-3-031-13100-4VelezGabriel Velez; Theo GavrielidesGabriel Velez, Marquette University, Milwaukee, WI, USA; Theo Gavrielides, Restorative Justice for All International Institute, London, UKRestorative Justice: Promoting Peace and WellbeingXXXI, 224 p. 10 illus., 9 illus. in color.12022final99.9930.00106.9932.1089.9927.00109.9933.00Hard cover0Peace Psychology Book SeriesBehavioral Science and PsychologyContributed volumeBook0English224JMJMSSpringerSpringer International Publishing0Available2022-09-272022-09-272022-10-142022-10-141Section 1: Intrapersonal Peace.- Chapter 1: Developing Peaceful Self-Identities Through Restorative Practices.- Chapter 2: Restorative Practices as Peace Pedagogy.- Chapter 3: Promoting Coping and Resilience Through Reparation.- Section 2: Interpersonal, Intergroup, and Intercommunity Peace.- Chapter 4: Bridging the Unbridgeable Divides.- Chapter 5: Preventing and Healing Community Violence.- Chapter 6: Addressing Systemic Injustice and Oppression.- Chapter 7: Peace and Harmony in Post-Conflict Societies.- Chapter 8: Restoring from Non-Western Lenses.- Chapter 9: Bridging Racial/Ethnic Divides.- Section 3: Institutional, International and Non-state Actors.- Chapter 9: Changing School Cultures.- Chapter 10: Reshaping Discipline: Ending Inequities of Retributive Measures in Schools.- Chapter 11: Forgiving and Repairing: Restorative Justice and the Criminal Justice System.- Chapter 12: Former Combatants and Reintegration.- Chapter 13: Reparations and Addressing State Atrocities.This timely collection of chapters written by international experts bridges the gap between peace psychology and restorative justice. The Editors combined their respective fields of expertise to start a much-needed debate on the potential but also risks that are associated when implementing restorative justice in the peace psychology field. The volume highlights how psychological theory and research can inform and evaluate the potential of restorative practices in formal and informal educational settings as well as the criminal justice space. The chapters cover both negative and positive peace across levels while introducing the reader to various case studies from across the world. All in all, the book explores how restorative justice can promote positive peace through its connection fostering dialogue, empathy, forgiveness, and other key psychological elements of peace.This timely collection of chapters written by international experts bridges the gap between peace psychology and restorative justice. The Editors combined their respective fields of expertise to start a much-needed debate on the potential but also risks that are associated when implementing restorative justice in the peace psychology field. The volume highlights how psychological theory and research can inform and evaluate the potential of restorative practices in formal and informal educational settings as well as the criminal justice space. The chapters cover both negative and positive peace across levels while introducing the reader to various case studies from across the world. All in all, the book explores how restorative justice can promote positive peace through its connection fostering dialogue, empathy, forgiveness, and other key psychological elements of peace.Illuminates the connection between peace psychology and restorative justicesDemonstrates the importance of psychological theory in restorative practicesEmphasizes the elements of dialogue and the role of restorative justice values for achieving peaceGabriel Mateo Velez, PhD, Educational Policy and Leadership, College of Education, Marquette University

Professor Theo Gavrielides, PhD, is a legal philosopher and a world-known restorative justice expert. He is the Founder and Director of the Restorative Justice for All (RJ4All) International Institute, and holds various visiting positions as a professor, fellow and scholar in many universities across the world.
ScienceProfessional Books (2)Science (SC)EBOP41168Behavioral Science and Psychology009783031131004Peace PsychologySocial Psychology553000
70
Behavioral Science and Psychology978-3-031-13103-5VelezGabriel Velez; Theo GavrielidesGabriel Velez, Marquette University, Milwaukee, WI, USA; Theo Gavrielides, Restorative Justice for All International Institute, London, UKRestorative Justice: Promoting Peace and WellbeingXXXI, 224 p. 10 illus., 9 illus. in color.12022final99.9930.00106.9932.1089.9927.00109.9933.00Soft cover1Peace Psychology Book SeriesBehavioral Science and PsychologyContributed volumeBook0English224JMJMSSpringerSpringer International Publishing0Available2023-09-282022-09-272023-09-272023-09-271Section 1: Intrapersonal Peace.- Chapter 1: Developing Peaceful Self-Identities Through Restorative Practices.- Chapter 2: Restorative Practices as Peace Pedagogy.- Chapter 3: Promoting Coping and Resilience Through Reparation.- Section 2: Interpersonal, Intergroup, and Intercommunity Peace.- Chapter 4: Bridging the Unbridgeable Divides.- Chapter 5: Preventing and Healing Community Violence.- Chapter 6: Addressing Systemic Injustice and Oppression.- Chapter 7: Peace and Harmony in Post-Conflict Societies.- Chapter 8: Restoring from Non-Western Lenses.- Chapter 9: Bridging Racial/Ethnic Divides.- Section 3: Institutional, International and Non-state Actors.- Chapter 9: Changing School Cultures.- Chapter 10: Reshaping Discipline: Ending Inequities of Retributive Measures in Schools.- Chapter 11: Forgiving and Repairing: Restorative Justice and the Criminal Justice System.- Chapter 12: Former Combatants and Reintegration.- Chapter 13: Reparations and Addressing State Atrocities.This timely collection of chapters written by international experts bridges the gap between peace psychology and restorative justice. The Editors combined their respective fields of expertise to start a much-needed debate on the potential but also risks that are associated when implementing restorative justice in the peace psychology field. The volume highlights how psychological theory and research can inform and evaluate the potential of restorative practices in formal and informal educational settings as well as the criminal justice space. The chapters cover both negative and positive peace across levels while introducing the reader to various case studies from across the world. All in all, the book explores how restorative justice can promote positive peace through its connection fostering dialogue, empathy, forgiveness, and other key psychological elements of peace.This timely collection of chapters written by international experts bridges the gap between peace psychology and restorative justice. The Editors combined their respective fields of expertise to start a much-needed debate on the potential but also risks that are associated when implementing restorative justice in the peace psychology field. The volume highlights how psychological theory and research can inform and evaluate the potential of restorative practices in formal and informal educational settings as well as the criminal justice space. The chapters cover both negative and positive peace across levels while introducing the reader to various case studies from across the world. All in all, the book explores how restorative justice can promote positive peace through its connection fostering dialogue, empathy, forgiveness, and other key psychological elements of peace.Illuminates the connection between peace psychology and restorative justicesDemonstrates the importance of psychological theory in restorative practicesEmphasizes the elements of dialogue and the role of restorative justice values for achieving peaceGabriel Mateo Velez, PhD, Educational Policy and Leadership, College of Education, Marquette University

Professor Theo Gavrielides, PhD, is a legal philosopher and a world-known restorative justice expert. He is the Founder and Director of the Restorative Justice for All (RJ4All) International Institute, and holds various visiting positions as a professor, fellow and scholar in many universities across the world.
ScienceProfessional Books (2)Science (SC)EBOP41168Behavioral Science and Psychology009783031131035Peace PsychologySocial Psychology397000
71
Behavioral Science and Psychology978-3-030-41159-6VivantiGiacomo Vivanti; Kristen Bottema-Beutel; Lauren Turner-BrownGiacomo Vivanti, Drexel University, Philadelphia, PA, USA; Kristen Bottema-Beutel, Boston College, Chestnut Hill, MA, USA; Lauren Turner-Brown, The University of North Carolina School of Medicine, Chapel Hill, NC, USAClinical Guide to Early Interventions for Children with AutismXIII, 179 p. 7 illus., 6 illus. in color.12020final149.9945.00160.4948.15129.9939.00169.9951.00Hard cover0Best Practices in Child and Adolescent Behavioral Health CareBehavioral Science and PsychologyContributed volumeBook0English179JMCMJWSpringerSpringer International Publishing0Available2020-08-192020-08-182021-01-102021-01-101Chapter 1. Autism and Autism Treatment: Evolution of Concepts and Practices from Kanner to Contemporary Approaches.- Chapter 2. Criteria to Evaluate Evidence in Interventions for Children with Autism.- Chapter 3. Understanding and Addressing Social Communication Difficulties in Children with Autism.- Chapter 4. Understanding and Addressing Restricted and Repetitive Behaviors in Children with Autism.- Chapter 5. Applied Behavior Analytic Approaches to Early Intervention for Children with Autism.- Chapter 6. Naturalistic Developmental Behavioral Interventions for Children with Autism.- Chapter 7. The TEACCH Approach and other Visually Based Approaches for Children with Autism.- Chapter 8. Choosing the “Right” Program for Each Child in Autism Early Intervention.- Chapter 9. Beyond Monolithic Packages: Important Strategies Across Early Interventions for Children with Autism.- Chapter 10. Understanding Legislation, Health Insurance, and Disparities in Service Provision in Autism Early Intervention.This book examines early interventions for children with autism spectrum disorder (ASD) with the goal to enable primary care physicians as well as other clinicians, therapists, and practitioners to assist parents in making informed decisions based on current research. It provides a map for successfully navigating the maze of early interventions for ASD, focusing on evidence. Chapters review the similarities and differences between current evidence-based treatments, how these treatments work, the factors that facilitate their effectiveness, and the pros and cons of their use for different children and different needs. In addition, chapters discuss the services, laws, policies, and societal issues related to early intervention in ASD.Featured topics include:Criteria to evaluate evidence in ASD interventions.Effective approaches for Social communication difficulties in ASD.Effective approaches for Restricted and repetitive behaviors (RRBs) in ASD.Naturalistic, developmental approaches to early intervention for children with ASDThe TEACCH approach and other visually based approaches for children with ASD.Applied Behavior Analysis (ABA) approaches to early intervention for children with ASD.What works for whom in ASD early interventionClinical Guide to Early Interventions for Children with Autism is an essential resource for clinicians, primary care providers, and other practitioners as well as researchers, professors, and graduate students in the fields of child, school, and developmental psychology, pediatrics, social work, child and adolescent psychiatry, primary care medicine, and related disciplines.This book examines early interventions for children with autism spectrum disorder (ASD) with the goal to enable primary care physicians as well as other clinicians, therapists, and practitioners to assist parents in making informed decisions based on current research. It provides a map for successfully navigating the maze of early interventions for ASD, focusing on evidence. Chapters review the similarities and differences between current evidence-based treatments, how these treatments work, the factors that facilitate their effectiveness, and the pros and cons of their use for different children and different needs. In addition, chapters discuss the services, laws, policies, and societal issues related to early intervention in ASD.

Featured topics include:Criteria to evaluate evidence in ASD interventions.Effective approaches for Social communication difficulties in ASD.Effective approaches for Restricted and repetitive behaviors (RRBs)in ASD.Naturalistic, developmental approaches to early intervention for children with ASDThe TEACCH approach and other visually based approaches for children with ASD.Applied Behavior Analysis (ABA) approaches to early intervention for children with ASD.What works for whom in ASD early intervention

Clinical Guide to Early Interventions for Children with Autism is an essential resource for clinicians, primary care providers, and other practitioners as well as researchers, professors, and graduate students in the fields of child, school, and developmental psychology, pediatrics, social work, child and adolescent psychiatry, primary care medicine, and related disciplines.
Examines best practices for treating young children with autism spectrum disorder (ASD)Provides a roadmap to navigate the maze of ASD treatmentsAddresses challenging behaviors frequently observed in children with ASD (e.g., aggression, self-injurious behaviors)Discusses how various treatments work, pros and cons of their use, and costs involvedReviews services, laws, and policies related to early intervention in ASDGiacomo Vivanti, Ph.D., is an Associate Professor at the A.J. Drexel Autism Institute, Drexel University, Philadelphia, USA, and an Honorary Research Fellow at the Olga Tennison Autism Research Centre at La Trobe University, Melbourne, Australia. His research and clinical work focus on early learning and intervention for children with Autism. Dr. Vivanti is an Associate Editor of the Journal of Autism and Developmental Disorders and a member of the Editorial Board of the Journal of Early Intervention. He is the author of over 50 peer-reviewed scientific articles on autism.



Kristen Bottema-Beutel, Ph.D., is an Associate Professor in the Lynch School of Education and Human Development (LSEHD) at Boston College, Chestnut Hill, Massachusetts, USA. Her research focuses on social and language development, and social interaction dynamics in autistic people across the lifespan. Dr. Bottema-Beutel is the director of the specializationin autism spectrum disorder at LSEHD, a program that prepares future special educators to support autistic students. She has written or co-written more than 30 peer-reviewed articles relevant to autism and other special education topics.



Lauren Turner Brown, Ph.D., served as the Assistant Director of the UNC TEACCH Autism Program for 5 years and Assistant Professor in the Department of Psychiatry at the University of North Carolina at Chapel Hill. She conducted research on early identification and intervention for children with autism spectrum disorder and published over 30 peer reviewed articles on the topic of ASD. Dr. Turner-Brown is currently in private practice in Chapel Hill, NC and an Adjunct Assistant Professor at UNC.		ProfessionalsProfessional Books (2)Standard (0)EBOP41168Behavioral Science and Psychology009783030411596School PsychologyPediatricsSocial WorkDevelopmental PsychologyChild and Adolescence Psychology465100
72
Behavioral Science and Psychology978-3-030-41162-6VivantiGiacomo Vivanti; Kristen Bottema-Beutel; Lauren Turner-BrownGiacomo Vivanti, Drexel University, Philadelphia, PA, USA; Kristen Bottema-Beutel, Boston College, Chestnut Hill, MA, USA; Lauren Turner-Brown, The University of North Carolina School of Medicine, Chapel Hill, NC, USAClinical Guide to Early Interventions for Children with AutismXIII, 179 p. 7 illus., 6 illus. in color.12020final109.9933.00117.6935.3196.5028.95119.0035.70Soft cover1Best Practices in Child and Adolescent Behavioral Health CareBehavioral Science and PsychologyContributed volumeBook0English179JMCMJWSpringerSpringer International Publishing0Available2021-08-192020-08-182021-08-192021-08-191Chapter 1. Autism and Autism Treatment: Evolution of Concepts and Practices from Kanner to Contemporary Approaches.- Chapter 2. Criteria to Evaluate Evidence in Interventions for Children with Autism.- Chapter 3. Understanding and Addressing Social Communication Difficulties in Children with Autism.- Chapter 4. Understanding and Addressing Restricted and Repetitive Behaviors in Children with Autism.- Chapter 5. Applied Behavior Analytic Approaches to Early Intervention for Children with Autism.- Chapter 6. Naturalistic Developmental Behavioral Interventions for Children with Autism.- Chapter 7. The TEACCH Approach and other Visually Based Approaches for Children with Autism.- Chapter 8. Choosing the “Right” Program for Each Child in Autism Early Intervention.- Chapter 9. Beyond Monolithic Packages: Important Strategies Across Early Interventions for Children with Autism.- Chapter 10. Understanding Legislation, Health Insurance, and Disparities in Service Provision in Autism Early Intervention.This book examines early interventions for children with autism spectrum disorder (ASD) with the goal to enable primary care physicians as well as other clinicians, therapists, and practitioners to assist parents in making informed decisions based on current research. It provides a map for successfully navigating the maze of early interventions for ASD, focusing on evidence. Chapters review the similarities and differences between current evidence-based treatments, how these treatments work, the factors that facilitate their effectiveness, and the pros and cons of their use for different children and different needs. In addition, chapters discuss the services, laws, policies, and societal issues related to early intervention in ASD.Featured topics include:Criteria to evaluate evidence in ASD interventions.Effective approaches for Social communication difficulties in ASD.Effective approaches for Restricted and repetitive behaviors (RRBs) in ASD.Naturalistic, developmental approaches to early intervention for children with ASDThe TEACCH approach and other visually based approaches for children with ASD.Applied Behavior Analysis (ABA) approaches to early intervention for children with ASD.What works for whom in ASD early interventionClinical Guide to Early Interventions for Children with Autism is an essential resource for clinicians, primary care providers, and other practitioners as well as researchers, professors, and graduate students in the fields of child, school, and developmental psychology, pediatrics, social work, child and adolescent psychiatry, primary care medicine, and related disciplines.This book examines early interventions for children with autism spectrum disorder (ASD) with the goal to enable primary care physicians as well as other clinicians, therapists, and practitioners to assist parents in making informed decisions based on current research. It provides a map for successfully navigating the maze of early interventions for ASD, focusing on evidence. Chapters review the similarities and differences between current evidence-based treatments, how these treatments work, the factors that facilitate their effectiveness, and the pros and cons of their use for different children and different needs. In addition, chapters discuss the services, laws, policies, and societal issues related to early intervention in ASD.

Featured topics include:Criteria to evaluate evidence in ASD interventions.Effective approaches for Social communication difficulties in ASD.Effective approaches for Restricted and repetitive behaviors (RRBs)in ASD.Naturalistic, developmental approaches to early intervention for children with ASDThe TEACCH approach and other visually based approaches for children with ASD.Applied Behavior Analysis (ABA) approaches to early intervention for children with ASD.What works for whom in ASD early intervention

Clinical Guide to Early Interventions for Children with Autism is an essential resource for clinicians, primary care providers, and other practitioners as well as researchers, professors, and graduate students in the fields of child, school, and developmental psychology, pediatrics, social work, child and adolescent psychiatry, primary care medicine, and related disciplines.
Examines best practices for treating young children with autism spectrum disorder (ASD)Provides a roadmap to navigate the maze of ASD treatmentsAddresses challenging behaviors frequently observed in children with ASD (e.g., aggression, self-injurious behaviors)Discusses how various treatments work, pros and cons of their use, and costs involvedReviews services, laws, and policies related to early intervention in ASDGiacomo Vivanti, Ph.D., is an Associate Professor at the A.J. Drexel Autism Institute, Drexel University, Philadelphia, USA, and an Honorary Research Fellow at the Olga Tennison Autism Research Centre at La Trobe University, Melbourne, Australia. His research and clinical work focus on early learning and intervention for children with Autism. Dr. Vivanti is an Associate Editor of the Journal of Autism and Developmental Disorders and a member of the Editorial Board of the Journal of Early Intervention. He is the author of over 50 peer-reviewed scientific articles on autism.



Kristen Bottema-Beutel, Ph.D., is an Associate Professor in the Lynch School of Education and Human Development (LSEHD) at Boston College, Chestnut Hill, Massachusetts, USA. Her research focuses on social and language development, and social interaction dynamics in autistic people across the lifespan. Dr. Bottema-Beutel is the director of the specializationin autism spectrum disorder at LSEHD, a program that prepares future special educators to support autistic students. She has written or co-written more than 30 peer-reviewed articles relevant to autism and other special education topics.



Lauren Turner Brown, Ph.D., served as the Assistant Director of the UNC TEACCH Autism Program for 5 years and Assistant Professor in the Department of Psychiatry at the University of North Carolina at Chapel Hill. She conducted research on early identification and intervention for children with autism spectrum disorder and published over 30 peer reviewed articles on the topic of ASD. Dr. Turner-Brown is currently in private practice in Chapel Hill, NC and an Adjunct Assistant Professor at UNC.		ProfessionalsProfessional Books (2)Standard (0)EBOP41168Behavioral Science and Psychology009783030411626School PsychologyPediatricsSocial WorkDevelopmental PsychologyChild and Adolescence Psychology308100
73
Behavioral Science and Psychology978-3-030-26097-2WangChenyang WangChenyang Wang, Birkbeck College, University of London, London, UKSubjectivity In-Between TimesExploring the Notion of Time in Lacan’s WorkX, 260 p. 8 illus.12019final129.9939.00139.0941.73109.9933.00139.9942.00Hard cover0The Palgrave Lacan SeriesBehavioral Science and PsychologyMonographBook0English260JMSHPCPalgrave MacmillanSpringer International Publishing0Available2019-10-022019-09-202019-11-082019-11-081Chapter 1 – Introduction.- Chapter 2 – Logical Time.- Chapter 3 – Real time.- Chapter 4 – Symbolic time.- Chapter 5 – Symptomatic Time.- Chapter 6 – Sexed Time.- Chapter 7 – Conclusion.<div>“This new book on Lacan and time is an incisive and novel intervention in psychoanalytic studies. It offers a thorough and remarkably clear account of Lacan’s work from the perspective of temporalities. In so doing, it asks us to rethink much of Lacanian theory, especially the central idea of the Imaginary, Symbolic and Real, in ways that have important theoretical, clinical and political implications.”</div><div>—Stephen Frosh, Professor of Psychology, Department of Psychosocial Studies, Birkbeck College, University of London, UK.</div><div>
</div><div>“Chenyang Wang's masterpiece reminds us that time is for Lacan a logical category, not a category of our experience of reality. Time structures the processes of unconscious reasoning and identification: WHEN something is said or done determines the truth of what is said or is done. In these crazy times this lesson is crucial even for our political activity. So don't be too late, act now and read Wang's book!”</div><div>—Slavoj Žižek, Professor of Philosophy at the European Graduate School</div><div>
</div><div>This book is the first to systematically investigate how the notion of time is conceptualised in Jacques Lacan’s work. Through a careful examination of Lacan’s various presentations of time, Chenyang Wang argues that this notion is key to a comprehension of Lacan’s psychoanalytic thinking, and in particular to the way in which he theorises subjectivity. This book demonstrates that time is approached by Lacan not only as consciously experienced, but also as pre-reflectively embodied and symbolically generated. In an analysis that begins with Lacan’s “Logical Time” essay, Chenyang Wang articulates three temporal registers that correspond to Lacan's Real-Symbolic-Imaginary triad and also demonstrates how Lacan’s elaboration of other major themes including consciousness, body, language, desire and sexuality is informed by his original perspectives on time. Filling a significant gap in contemporary Lacanian studies, this book will provide essential reading for students and scholars of psychoanalytic theory, continental philosophy and critical theory.</div><div>
</div><div>Chenyang Wang is a researcher in the field of psychosocial studies. He completed his PhD thesis on Lacan and time at Birkbeck College, University of London, UK. His work focuses on the intersections between Lacanian psychoanalysis and social research.</div><div>
</div>		<div>This book is the first to systematically investigate how the notion of time is conceptualised in Jacques Lacan’s work. Through a careful examination of Lacan’s various presentations of time, Chenyang Wang argues that this notion is key to a comprehension of Lacan’s psychoanalytic thinking, and in particular to the way in which he theorises subjectivity. This book demonstrates that time is approached by Lacan not only as consciously experienced, but also as pre-reflectively embodied and symbolically generated. In an analysis that begins with Lacan’s “Logical Time” essay, Chenyang Wang articulates three temporal registers that correspond to Lacan's Real-Symbolic-Imaginary triad and also demonstrates how Lacan’s elaboration of other major themes including consciousness, body, language, desire and sexuality is informed by his original perspectives on time. Filling a significant gap in contemporary Lacanian studies, this book will provide essential reading for students and scholars ofpsychoanalytic theory, continental philosophy and critical theory.</div>Provides a comprehensive elaboration of the notion of time in Jacques Lacan’s workArticulates three temporal registers that correspond to Lacan's Real-Symbolic-Imaginary triadDemonstrates how the multiplicity of temporal registers supports Lacan’s overall theoretical position and contributes to our understanding of subjectivityChenyang Wang is a researcher in the field of psychosocial studies. He completed his PhD thesis on Lacan and time at Birkbeck College, University of London, UK. His work focuses on the intersections between Lacanian psychoanalysis and social research. SciencePalgrave Standard US (P5)Palgrave Monograph (P6)EBOP41168Behavioral Science and Psychology009783030260972Social PsychologyContinental PhilosophyPsychoanalysisCritical TheoryCultural Theory483000
74
Behavioral Science and Psychology978-3-030-26100-9WangChenyang WangChenyang Wang, Birkbeck College, University of London, London, UKSubjectivity In-Between TimesExploring the Notion of Time in Lacan’s WorkX, 260 p. 8 illus.12019final129.9939.00139.0941.73109.9933.00139.9942.00Soft cover1The Palgrave Lacan SeriesBehavioral Science and PsychologyMonographBook0English260JMSHPCPalgrave MacmillanSpringer International Publishing0Available2020-10-022019-09-202020-10-022020-10-021Chapter 1 – Introduction.- Chapter 2 – Logical Time.- Chapter 3 – Real time.- Chapter 4 – Symbolic time.- Chapter 5 – Symptomatic Time.- Chapter 6 – Sexed Time.- Chapter 7 – Conclusion.<div>“This new book on Lacan and time is an incisive and novel intervention in psychoanalytic studies. It offers a thorough and remarkably clear account of Lacan’s work from the perspective of temporalities. In so doing, it asks us to rethink much of Lacanian theory, especially the central idea of the Imaginary, Symbolic and Real, in ways that have important theoretical, clinical and political implications.”</div><div>—Stephen Frosh, Professor of Psychology, Department of Psychosocial Studies, Birkbeck College, University of London, UK.</div><div>
</div><div>“Chenyang Wang's masterpiece reminds us that time is for Lacan a logical category, not a category of our experience of reality. Time structures the processes of unconscious reasoning and identification: WHEN something is said or done determines the truth of what is said or is done. In these crazy times this lesson is crucial even for our political activity. So don't be too late, act now and read Wang's book!”</div><div>—Slavoj Žižek, Professor of Philosophy at the European Graduate School</div><div>
</div><div>This book is the first to systematically investigate how the notion of time is conceptualised in Jacques Lacan’s work. Through a careful examination of Lacan’s various presentations of time, Chenyang Wang argues that this notion is key to a comprehension of Lacan’s psychoanalytic thinking, and in particular to the way in which he theorises subjectivity. This book demonstrates that time is approached by Lacan not only as consciously experienced, but also as pre-reflectively embodied and symbolically generated. In an analysis that begins with Lacan’s “Logical Time” essay, Chenyang Wang articulates three temporal registers that correspond to Lacan's Real-Symbolic-Imaginary triad and also demonstrates how Lacan’s elaboration of other major themes including consciousness, body, language, desire and sexuality is informed by his original perspectives on time. Filling a significant gap in contemporary Lacanian studies, this book will provide essential reading for students and scholars of psychoanalytic theory, continental philosophy and critical theory.</div><div>
</div><div>Chenyang Wang is a researcher in the field of psychosocial studies. He completed his PhD thesis on Lacan and time at Birkbeck College, University of London, UK. His work focuses on the intersections between Lacanian psychoanalysis and social research.</div><div>
</div>		<div>This book is the first to systematically investigate how the notion of time is conceptualised in Jacques Lacan’s work. Through a careful examination of Lacan’s various presentations of time, Chenyang Wang argues that this notion is key to a comprehension of Lacan’s psychoanalytic thinking, and in particular to the way in which he theorises subjectivity. This book demonstrates that time is approached by Lacan not only as consciously experienced, but also as pre-reflectively embodied and symbolically generated. In an analysis that begins with Lacan’s “Logical Time” essay, Chenyang Wang articulates three temporal registers that correspond to Lacan's Real-Symbolic-Imaginary triad and also demonstrates how Lacan’s elaboration of other major themes including consciousness, body, language, desire and sexuality is informed by his original perspectives on time. Filling a significant gap in contemporary Lacanian studies, this book will provide essential reading for students and scholars ofpsychoanalytic theory, continental philosophy and critical theory.</div>Provides a comprehensive elaboration of the notion of time in Jacques Lacan’s workArticulates three temporal registers that correspond to Lacan's Real-Symbolic-Imaginary triadDemonstrates how the multiplicity of temporal registers supports Lacan’s overall theoretical position and contributes to our understanding of subjectivityChenyang Wang is a researcher in the field of psychosocial studies. He completed his PhD thesis on Lacan and time at Birkbeck College, University of London, UK. His work focuses on the intersections between Lacanian psychoanalysis and social research. SciencePalgrave Standard US (P5)Palgrave Monograph (P6)EBOP41168Behavioral Science and Psychology009783030261009Social PsychologyContinental PhilosophyPsychoanalysisCritical TheoryCultural Theory361000
75
Behavioral Science and Psychology978-3-030-26920-3WassermanTheodore Wasserman; Lori Drucker WassermanTheodore Wasserman, Wasserman & Drucker PA, Boca Raton, FL; Lori Drucker Wasserman, Wasserman & Drucker PA, Boca Raton, FLTherapy and the Neural Network ModelXII, 200 p. 11 illus., 10 illus. in color.12019final49.9915.0053.4916.0544.9913.5054.9916.50Hard cover0Neural Network Model: Applications and ImplicationsBehavioral Science and PsychologyProfessional bookBook0English200JMMMMJTSpringerSpringer International Publishing0Available2019-10-282019-10-172019-11-292019-11-291Chapter 1: Introduction to Therapy and Neural Networks.- Chapter 2: Therapy in the Past and Present.- Chapter 3: Understanding Functional Neural Networks.- Chapter 4: Neural Plasticity and Its Implications for Therapy.- Chapter 5: Network Modeling and Therapeutic Techniques.- Chapter 6: Neural Networks and Emotion Regulation.- Chapter 7: Mindfulness-Based Approaches and Attention Regulation.- Chapter 8: The Role of the Reward Recognition Network in Therapy.- Chapter 9: Memory Reconsolidation in Various Therapeutic Approaches.- Chapter 10: Anxiety and Depression.- Chapter 11: Latent Variables in the Diagnosis of Anxiety.- Chapter 12: Mechanisms of Therapeutic Change.- Chapter 13: Future Directions for Mental Health Treatment.
This innovative work explores integrating emerging research into how the brain processes information in applied therapeutic interventions. Typically, clinicians select therapeutic interventions based on their own training, personal experience or preference. This book aims to provide a new model, based upon the neural networks, to both understand the development of mental health issues and their persistence, and how and why to apply therapeutic interventions to impact the systems which are maintaining them.This work begins with a short and accessible overview of the neural network model, and the general aims of therapy. It elucidates components of the neural network model of learning such as reward recognition, automaticity, and memory reconsolidation, and how they apply to both general learning and new learning through the process in therapy. Next, the authors explore how the neural network model can be integrated across existing systems of therapy, including Cognitive Behavior therapy (CBT), Dialectical Behavior Therapy (DBT), third wave therapies and analytic therapies.Therapy and the Neural Network Model is an exciting resource for researchers and practitioners interested in understanding more about the applications of a neural network model for therapy and the how and why of building new mentally healthy cognitions, behaviors and emotions.Therapy and the Neural Network Model is also an essential theoretical foundation for both researchers and practitioners who wish to base their therapeutic practice on neuroscience and integrate their work with related fields such as behavioral medicine, health psychology, social work and public health.This innovative work explores integrating emerging research into how the brain processes information in applied therapeutic interventions. Typically, clinicians select therapeutic interventions based on their own training, personal experience or preference. This book aims to provide a new model, based upon the neural networks, to both understand the development of mental health issues and their persistence, and how and why to apply therapeutic interventions to impact the systems which are maintaining them.This work begins with a short and accessible overview of the neural network model, and the general aims of therapy. It elucidates components of the neural network model of learning such as reward recognition, automaticity, and memory reconsolidation, and how they apply to both general learning and new learning through the process in therapy. Next, the authors explore how the neural network model can be integrated across existing systems of therapy, including Cognitive Behavior therapy (CBT), Dialectical Behavior Therapy (DBT), third wave therapies and analytic therapies. Therapy and the Neural Network Model is an exciting resource for researchers and practitioners interested in understanding more about the applications of a neural network model for therapy and the how and why of building new mentally healthy cognitions, behaviors and emotions. Therapy and the Neural Network Model is also an essential theoretical foundation for both researchers and practitioners who wish to base their therapeutic practice on neuroscience and integrate their work with related fields such as behavioral medicine, health psychology, social work and public health.Provides a primer on the Vertical Brain Neural Network Model and its implications for the treatment of issues impacting mental healthDemonstrates how to integrate traditional therapeutic interventions into a neural network modelPresents a fully-integrated model of treatment for mental healthDr. Ted Wasserman is board certified in clinical psychology by the American Board of Professional Psychology and board certified in pediatric neuropsychology by the American Board of Pediatric Neuropsychology. He is a member of the American Academy of Clinical Psychology and the American Academy of Pediatric Neuropsychology as a result of these board certifications. Dr. Wasserman, a Licensed Psychologist in the State of Florida, completed his doctorate at Hofstra University in 1974. He completed a one-year internship in pediatric neuropsychology at North Shore University Medical Center. Postdoctoral training was completed in Cognitive Behavior Therapy at the Institute for Advanced Study of Rational Psychotherapy under the supervision of Albert Ellis PHD. Dr. Wasserman holds memberships in the National Academy of Neuropsychology and the International Neuropsychological Society and is a founding member and past president of American Board of Pediatric Neuropsychology.

Dr. Wasserman is the co-author of two books, Depathologizing Psychopathology and Neurocognitive Learning Therapy: Theory and practice, published by Springer in 2017 and 2018 respectively. Dr. Wasserman has contributed chapters to various books on clinical issues related to family law, autism, and attention deficit disorder and learning disorders. Topics of published papers include children’s development, attention, language and executive function, behavior management and cognitive behavior therapy. He has given invited lectures and provided consultation regarding pediatric neuropsychology throughout the United States and internationally.

Lori Drucker Wasserman has been in clinical practice since 1982. Dr. Wasserman received her Bachelor of Arts degree from New York University and both her Masters and her Ph.D. in Clinical Psychology at Hofstra University. Dr. Wasserman is a licensed psychologist and is Board Certified in Pediatric Neuropsychology by the American Board of Pediatric Neuropsychology. She is also a certified School Psychologist. Dr. Wasserman is certified as a trained examiner for the Brazelton Neonatal Behavioral Assessment Scale.

Dr. Wasserman has worked at the Astor Day Treatment Center in the Bronx with children between the ages of 5 – 18 and the Early Intervention Program in Palm Beach County evaluating children between the ages of birth and three years. She has extensive experience in the assessment, diagnosis and planning for children with special needs, emotional and educational concerns. Dr. Wasserman has also had extensive treatment experience in working with individuals across the life spectrum applying the practices of Neurocognitive Learning Therapy.

Dr. Wasserman has co-authored two books on neuroscience and mental health, and has published multiple articles on the neuroscience of attention and executive function.
ProfessionalsProfessional Books (2)Standard (0)EBOP41168Behavioral Science and Psychology009783030269203NeuropsychologyTherapeutics489100
76
Behavioral Science and Psychology978-3-030-26923-4WassermanTheodore Wasserman; Lori Drucker WassermanTheodore Wasserman, Wasserman & Drucker PA, Boca Raton, FL; Lori Drucker Wasserman, Wasserman & Drucker PA, Boca Raton, FLTherapy and the Neural Network ModelXII, 200 p. 11 illus., 10 illus. in color.12019final49.9915.0053.4916.0544.9913.5054.9916.50Soft cover1Neural Network Model: Applications and ImplicationsBehavioral Science and PsychologyProfessional bookBook0English200JMMMMJTSpringerSpringer International Publishing0Available2020-10-282019-10-172020-10-282020-10-281Chapter 1: Introduction to Therapy and Neural Networks.- Chapter 2: Therapy in the Past and Present.- Chapter 3: Understanding Functional Neural Networks.- Chapter 4: Neural Plasticity and Its Implications for Therapy.- Chapter 5: Network Modeling and Therapeutic Techniques.- Chapter 6: Neural Networks and Emotion Regulation.- Chapter 7: Mindfulness-Based Approaches and Attention Regulation.- Chapter 8: The Role of the Reward Recognition Network in Therapy.- Chapter 9: Memory Reconsolidation in Various Therapeutic Approaches.- Chapter 10: Anxiety and Depression.- Chapter 11: Latent Variables in the Diagnosis of Anxiety.- Chapter 12: Mechanisms of Therapeutic Change.- Chapter 13: Future Directions for Mental Health Treatment.
This innovative work explores integrating emerging research into how the brain processes information in applied therapeutic interventions. Typically, clinicians select therapeutic interventions based on their own training, personal experience or preference. This book aims to provide a new model, based upon the neural networks, to both understand the development of mental health issues and their persistence, and how and why to apply therapeutic interventions to impact the systems which are maintaining them.This work begins with a short and accessible overview of the neural network model, and the general aims of therapy. It elucidates components of the neural network model of learning such as reward recognition, automaticity, and memory reconsolidation, and how they apply to both general learning and new learning through the process in therapy. Next, the authors explore how the neural network model can be integrated across existing systems of therapy, including Cognitive Behavior therapy (CBT), Dialectical Behavior Therapy (DBT), third wave therapies and analytic therapies.Therapy and the Neural Network Model is an exciting resource for researchers and practitioners interested in understanding more about the applications of a neural network model for therapy and the how and why of building new mentally healthy cognitions, behaviors and emotions.Therapy and the Neural Network Model is also an essential theoretical foundation for both researchers and practitioners who wish to base their therapeutic practice on neuroscience and integrate their work with related fields such as behavioral medicine, health psychology, social work and public health.This innovative work explores integrating emerging research into how the brain processes information in applied therapeutic interventions. Typically, clinicians select therapeutic interventions based on their own training, personal experience or preference. This book aims to provide a new model, based upon the neural networks, to both understand the development of mental health issues and their persistence, and how and why to apply therapeutic interventions to impact the systems which are maintaining them.This work begins with a short and accessible overview of the neural network model, and the general aims of therapy. It elucidates components of the neural network model of learning such as reward recognition, automaticity, and memory reconsolidation, and how they apply to both general learning and new learning through the process in therapy. Next, the authors explore how the neural network model can be integrated across existing systems of therapy, including Cognitive Behavior therapy (CBT), Dialectical Behavior Therapy (DBT), third wave therapies and analytic therapies. Therapy and the Neural Network Model is an exciting resource for researchers and practitioners interested in understanding more about the applications of a neural network model for therapy and the how and why of building new mentally healthy cognitions, behaviors and emotions. Therapy and the Neural Network Model is also an essential theoretical foundation for both researchers and practitioners who wish to base their therapeutic practice on neuroscience and integrate their work with related fields such as behavioral medicine, health psychology, social work and public health.Provides a primer on the Vertical Brain Neural Network Model and its implications for the treatment of issues impacting mental healthDemonstrates how to integrate traditional therapeutic interventions into a neural network modelPresents a fully-integrated model of treatment for mental healthDr. Ted Wasserman is board certified in clinical psychology by the American Board of Professional Psychology and board certified in pediatric neuropsychology by the American Board of Pediatric Neuropsychology. He is a member of the American Academy of Clinical Psychology and the American Academy of Pediatric Neuropsychology as a result of these board certifications. Dr. Wasserman, a Licensed Psychologist in the State of Florida, completed his doctorate at Hofstra University in 1974. He completed a one-year internship in pediatric neuropsychology at North Shore University Medical Center. Postdoctoral training was completed in Cognitive Behavior Therapy at the Institute for Advanced Study of Rational Psychotherapy under the supervision of Albert Ellis PHD. Dr. Wasserman holds memberships in the National Academy of Neuropsychology and the International Neuropsychological Society and is a founding member and past president of American Board of Pediatric Neuropsychology.

Dr. Wasserman is the co-author of two books, Depathologizing Psychopathology and Neurocognitive Learning Therapy: Theory and practice, published by Springer in 2017 and 2018 respectively. Dr. Wasserman has contributed chapters to various books on clinical issues related to family law, autism, and attention deficit disorder and learning disorders. Topics of published papers include children’s development, attention, language and executive function, behavior management and cognitive behavior therapy. He has given invited lectures and provided consultation regarding pediatric neuropsychology throughout the United States and internationally.

Lori Drucker Wasserman has been in clinical practice since 1982. Dr. Wasserman received her Bachelor of Arts degree from New York University and both her Masters and her Ph.D. in Clinical Psychology at Hofstra University. Dr. Wasserman is a licensed psychologist and is Board Certified in Pediatric Neuropsychology by the American Board of Pediatric Neuropsychology. She is also a certified School Psychologist. Dr. Wasserman is certified as a trained examiner for the Brazelton Neonatal Behavioral Assessment Scale.

Dr. Wasserman has worked at the Astor Day Treatment Center in the Bronx with children between the ages of 5 – 18 and the Early Intervention Program in Palm Beach County evaluating children between the ages of birth and three years. She has extensive experience in the assessment, diagnosis and planning for children with special needs, emotional and educational concerns. Dr. Wasserman has also had extensive treatment experience in working with individuals across the life spectrum applying the practices of Neurocognitive Learning Therapy.

Dr. Wasserman has co-authored two books on neuroscience and mental health, and has published multiple articles on the neuroscience of attention and executive function.
ProfessionalsProfessional Books (2)Standard (0)EBOP41168Behavioral Science and Psychology009783030269234NeuropsychologyTherapeutics332100
77
Biomedical and Life Sciencesx978-3-031-20965-9BauerRaymond T. BauerRaymond T. Bauer, University of Louisiana, Lafayette, LA, USAShrimpsTheir Diversity, Intriguing Adaptations and Varied LifestylesXIX, 720 p. 239 illus., 40 illus. in color.12023final149.9945.00160.4948.15129.9939.00169.9951.00Hard cover0Fish & Fisheries SeriesVolumeBiomedical and Life SciencesMonographBook0English720PSAFRNCBSpringerSpringer International Publishing0Available2023-04-092023-04-082023-04-262023-04-261Chapter 1. The Shrimps: An Overview.- Chapter 2. Structure and Function.- Chapter 3. The Families of Decapod Shrimps.- Chapter 4. Shrimp Hygiene: Antifouling Adaptations.- Chapter 5. Coloration, Color Change and Camouflage.- Chapter 6. Reproduction.- Chapter 7. Sexual Systems.- Chapter 8. Mating Systems.- Chapter 9. Life Histories.- Chapter 10. Symbioses.- Chapter 11. Fisheries and Aquaculture.- Chapter 12. Evolutionary History and Relationships of Shrimps.This book explores the biology of decapod shrimps, a group of animals known to most people as a nutritious and tasty food item. Shrimps are amazingly diverse in size, shape, coloration, behavior and natural history. Shrimp fisheries and aquaculture are a vital part of the USA and world economies. These crustaceans are key ecological and food-web components of marine and freshwater habitats. The book synthesizes information on the taxonomic and ecological diversity of shrimps, the structure and function of shrimp anatomy, antifouling adaptations, coloration and camouflage, reproductive biology, sexual systems, mating systems and behavior, life history strategies, symbioses between shrimps and other organisms, shrimp fisheries and aquaculture, as well as the evolution and phylogeny of shrimps. All chapters are written within an adaptational and evolutionary perspective. Important questions about shrimp biology are asked, and hypotheses for testing in future research are proposed. Thebook is spiced up with personal anecdotes and observations from the author’s research experiences.

This book is intended as a comprehensive reference, a “go to” book about the biology of shrimps. The text is scientifically rigorous but written in a style intended for a varied readership. Thus, the book is a valuable resource for budding or working research scientists such as zoologists, aquatic biologists, fisheries and aquaculture professionals, as well as amateur naturalists, aquarium hobbyists and interested laypersons. As the saying goes, “a picture is worth a thousand words,” so that the book is amply illustrated with figures and diagrams.The numerous color plates, composed of photos contributed by expert colleagues, make the world of shrimps come alive.		This book explores the biology of decapod shrimps, a group of animals known to most people as a nutritious and tasty food item. Shrimps are amazingly diverse in size, shape, coloration, behavior and natural history. Shrimp fisheries and aquaculture are a vital part of the USA and world economies. These crustaceans are key ecological and food-web components of marine and freshwater habitats. The book synthesizes information on the taxonomic and ecological diversity of shrimps, the structure and function of shrimp anatomy, antifouling adaptations, coloration and camouflage, reproductive biology, sexual systems, mating systems and behavior, life history strategies, symbioses between shrimps and other organisms, shrimp fisheries and aquaculture, as well as the evolution and phylogeny of shrimps. All chapters are written within an adaptational and evolutionary perspective. Important questions about shrimp biology are asked, and hypotheses for testing in future research are proposed. Thebook is spiced up with personal anecdotes and observations from the author’s research experiences.

This book is intended as a comprehensive reference, a “go to” book about the biology of shrimps. The text is scientifically rigorous but written in a style intended for a varied readership. Thus, the book is a valuable resource for budding or working research scientists such as zoologists, aquatic biologists, fisheries and aquaculture professionals, as well as amateur naturalists, aquarium hobbyists and interested laypersons. As the saying goes, “a picture is worth a thousand words,” so that the book is amply illustrated with figures and diagrams.The numerous color plates, composed of photos contributed by expert colleagues, make the world of shrimps come alive.		Presents the natural history of shrimpsIncludes shrimp fisheries, aquacultureExplores shrimp systematics, evolutionGrowing up in the Midwest, Dr. Bauer was always interested in the natural history of plants and animals. His science courses at the University of Missouri, Kansas City, where he received a Bachelor of Science degree, convinced him of a career in biology. He was greatly influenced by the 1960's television specials on marine biology produced by the pioneering oceanographer and co-inventor of SCUBA, Jacques Cousteau. These led him to apply for and be accepted into the graduate program at the Scripps Institution of Oceanography (University of California, San Diego), where he received a doctorate in Marine Biology in 1976. After teaching marine and invertebrate zoology courses at Cal Poly State University (San Luis Obispo), he was awarded a Postdoctoral Fellowship at the National Museum of Natural History (Smithsonian Institution). As working in tropical seas was always a dream, when he was offered a tenure-track position at the University of Puerto Rico, Río Piedras, he eagerly accepted. There he taught courses in marine science and invertebrate zoology (in Spanish) for five years (Assistant, then Associate Professor). While there, he conducted research in marine ecology and crustacean biology. He was offered and accepted a position at the University of Louisiana, Lafayette (ULL) in 1986, rising to Full Professor in 1994. He has received various awards, e.g., Fellow of the American Association for the Advancement of Science, ULL Distinguished Professor and The Crustacean Society Excellence in Research Award. He retired from ULL in 2011 with Emeritus Professor status. Since “retirement,” Dr. Bauer has continued with research, publication and teaching short courses in shrimp biology. <div>
</div>		ScienceProfessional Books (2)Science (SC)EBOP11642Biomedical and Life Sciences009783031209659Freshwater and Marine EcologyBiodiversityInvertebrate ZoologyBiooceanography1485000
78
Biomedical and Life Sciencesx978-3-031-20968-0BauerRaymond T. BauerRaymond T. Bauer, University of Louisiana, Lafayette, LA, USAShrimpsTheir Diversity, Intriguing Adaptations and Varied LifestylesXIX, 720 p. 239 illus., 40 illus. in color.12023final149.9945.00160.4948.15129.9939.00169.9951.00Soft cover1Fish & Fisheries SeriesVolumeBiomedical and Life SciencesMonographBook0English720PSAFRNCBSpringerSpringer International Publishing0Available2024-04-102023-04-082024-04-092024-04-091Chapter 1. The Shrimps: An Overview.- Chapter 2. Structure and Function.- Chapter 3. The Families of Decapod Shrimps.- Chapter 4. Shrimp Hygiene: Antifouling Adaptations.- Chapter 5. Coloration, Color Change and Camouflage.- Chapter 6. Reproduction.- Chapter 7. Sexual Systems.- Chapter 8. Mating Systems.- Chapter 9. Life Histories.- Chapter 10. Symbioses.- Chapter 11. Fisheries and Aquaculture.- Chapter 12. Evolutionary History and Relationships of Shrimps.This book explores the biology of decapod shrimps, a group of animals known to most people as a nutritious and tasty food item. Shrimps are amazingly diverse in size, shape, coloration, behavior and natural history. Shrimp fisheries and aquaculture are a vital part of the USA and world economies. These crustaceans are key ecological and food-web components of marine and freshwater habitats. The book synthesizes information on the taxonomic and ecological diversity of shrimps, the structure and function of shrimp anatomy, antifouling adaptations, coloration and camouflage, reproductive biology, sexual systems, mating systems and behavior, life history strategies, symbioses between shrimps and other organisms, shrimp fisheries and aquaculture, as well as the evolution and phylogeny of shrimps. All chapters are written within an adaptational and evolutionary perspective. Important questions about shrimp biology are asked, and hypotheses for testing in future research are proposed. Thebook is spiced up with personal anecdotes and observations from the author’s research experiences.

This book is intended as a comprehensive reference, a “go to” book about the biology of shrimps. The text is scientifically rigorous but written in a style intended for a varied readership. Thus, the book is a valuable resource for budding or working research scientists such as zoologists, aquatic biologists, fisheries and aquaculture professionals, as well as amateur naturalists, aquarium hobbyists and interested laypersons. As the saying goes, “a picture is worth a thousand words,” so that the book is amply illustrated with figures and diagrams.The numerous color plates, composed of photos contributed by expert colleagues, make the world of shrimps come alive.		This book explores the biology of decapod shrimps, a group of animals known to most people as a nutritious and tasty food item. Shrimps are amazingly diverse in size, shape, coloration, behavior and natural history. Shrimp fisheries and aquaculture are a vital part of the USA and world economies. These crustaceans are key ecological and food-web components of marine and freshwater habitats. The book synthesizes information on the taxonomic and ecological diversity of shrimps, the structure and function of shrimp anatomy, antifouling adaptations, coloration and camouflage, reproductive biology, sexual systems, mating systems and behavior, life history strategies, symbioses between shrimps and other organisms, shrimp fisheries and aquaculture, as well as the evolution and phylogeny of shrimps. All chapters are written within an adaptational and evolutionary perspective. Important questions about shrimp biology are asked, and hypotheses for testing in future research are proposed. Thebook is spiced up with personal anecdotes and observations from the author’s research experiences.

This book is intended as a comprehensive reference, a “go to” book about the biology of shrimps. The text is scientifically rigorous but written in a style intended for a varied readership. Thus, the book is a valuable resource for budding or working research scientists such as zoologists, aquatic biologists, fisheries and aquaculture professionals, as well as amateur naturalists, aquarium hobbyists and interested laypersons. As the saying goes, “a picture is worth a thousand words,” so that the book is amply illustrated with figures and diagrams.The numerous color plates, composed of photos contributed by expert colleagues, make the world of shrimps come alive.		Presents the natural history of shrimpsIncludes shrimp fisheries, aquacultureExplores shrimp systematics, evolutionGrowing up in the Midwest, Dr. Bauer was always interested in the natural history of plants and animals. His science courses at the University of Missouri, Kansas City, where he received a Bachelor of Science degree, convinced him of a career in biology. He was greatly influenced by the 1960's television specials on marine biology produced by the pioneering oceanographer and co-inventor of SCUBA, Jacques Cousteau. These led him to apply for and be accepted into the graduate program at the Scripps Institution of Oceanography (University of California, San Diego), where he received a doctorate in Marine Biology in 1976. After teaching marine and invertebrate zoology courses at Cal Poly State University (San Luis Obispo), he was awarded a Postdoctoral Fellowship at the National Museum of Natural History (Smithsonian Institution). As working in tropical seas was always a dream, when he was offered a tenure-track position at the University of Puerto Rico, Río Piedras, he eagerly accepted. There he taught courses in marine science and invertebrate zoology (in Spanish) for five years (Assistant, then Associate Professor). While there, he conducted research in marine ecology and crustacean biology. He was offered and accepted a position at the University of Louisiana, Lafayette (ULL) in 1986, rising to Full Professor in 1994. He has received various awards, e.g., Fellow of the American Association for the Advancement of Science, ULL Distinguished Professor and The Crustacean Society Excellence in Research Award. He retired from ULL in 2011 with Emeritus Professor status. Since “retirement,” Dr. Bauer has continued with research, publication and teaching short courses in shrimp biology. <div>
</div>		ScienceProfessional Books (2)Science (SC)EBOP11642Biomedical and Life Sciences009783031209680Freshwater and Marine EcologyBiodiversityInvertebrate ZoologyBiooceanography0000
79
Biomedical and Life Sciencesx978-3-030-71329-4CanadellJosep G. Canadell; Robert B. JacksonJosep G. Canadell, CSIRO Oceans and Atmosphere, Canberra, Australia; Robert B. Jackson, Stanford University, Stanford, CA, USAEcosystem Collapse and Climate ChangeVIII, 366 p. 93 illus., 86 illus. in color.12021final179.9954.00192.5957.78159.9948.00199.9960.00Hard cover0Ecological StudiesVolumeBiomedical and Life SciencesContributed volumeBook0English366PSAFPSAFSpringerSpringer International Publishing0WorldwideAvailable2021-06-212021-06-212022-03-112022-03-111Ecosystem Collapse and Climate Change: An Introduction.- PART I. Polar and Boreal Ecosystems.- Ecosystem Collapse on a Sub-Antarctic Island.- Permafrost Thaw in Northern Peatlands: Rapid Changes in Ecosystem and Landscape Functions.- Post-fire Recruitment Failure as a Driver of Forest to Non-forest Ecosystem Shifts in Boreal Regions.- A Paleo-perspective on Ecosystem Collapse in Boreal North America.- PART II. Temperate and Semi-arid Ecosystems.- The 2016 Tasmanian Wilderness Fires: Fire Regime Shifts and Climate Change in a Gondwanan Biogeographic Refugium.- Climate-Induced Global Forest Shifts due to Heatwave-Drought.- Extreme Events Trigger Terrestrial and Marine Ecosystem Collapses in the Southwestern USA and Southwestern Australia.- PART III. Tropical and Temperate Coastal Ecosystems.- Processes and Factors Driving Change in Mangrove Forests: An Evaluation Based on the Mass Dieback Event in Australia’s Gulf of Carpentaria.- Recurrent Mass-Bleaching and the Potential for Ecosystem Collapse on Australia’s Great Barrier Reef.- Sliding Toward the Collapse of Mediterranean Coastal Marine Rocky Ecosystems.- Marine Heatwave Drives Collapse of Kelp Forests in Western Australia.- Impact of Marine Heatwaves on Seagrass Ecosystems.<div>Human-driven greenhouse emissions are increasing the velocity of climate change and the frequency and intensity of climate extremes far above historical levels. These changes, along with other human-perturbations, are setting the conditions for more rapid and abrupt ecosystem dynamics and collapse.This book presents new evidence on the rapid emergence of ecosystem collapse in response to the progression of anthropogenic climate change dynamics that are expected to intensify as the climate continues to warm. Discussing implications for biodiversity conservation, the chapters provide examples of such dynamics globally covering polar and boreal ecosystems, temperate and semi-arid ecosystems, as well as tropical and temperate coastal ecosystems.Given its scope, the volume appeals to scientists in the fields of general ecology, terrestrial and coastal ecology, climate change impacts, and biodiversity conservation.</div>Human-driven greenhouse emissions are increasing the velocity of climate change and the frequency and intensity of climate extremes far above historical levels. These changes, along with other human-perturbations, are setting the conditions for more rapid and abrupt ecosystem dynamics and collapse.This book presents new evidence on the rapid emergence of ecosystem collapse in response to the progression of anthropogenic climate change dynamics that are expected to intensify as the climate continues to warm. Discussing implications for biodiversity conservation, the chapters provide examples of such dynamics globally covering polar and boreal ecosystems, temperate and semi-arid ecosystems, as well as tropical and temperate coastal ecosystems.Given its scope, the volume appeals to scientists in the fields of general ecology, terrestrial and coastal ecology, climate change impacts, and biodiversity conservation.
Documents cases of ecosystem collapse around the worldRaises awareness of the transitions that are already occurring through climate change todayWill help scientists and managers to restore degraded ecosystems and their species and ecosystem functioningJosep G. Canadell is a chief research scientist at the Climate Science Centre of the Australian Commonwealth Scientific and Industrial Research Organization, and the executive director of the Global Carbon Project, a global network of scientists that studies and integrates knowledge of greenhouses gases for human activities and the Earth System.Rob Jackson is the Douglas Provostial Professor in Stanford’s Department of Earth System Science and Chair of the Global Carbon Project. Both scientists have spent decades documenting greenhouse gas emissions and how ecosystems are changing in response to climate and an altered atmosphere and environment.ScienceProfessional Books (2)Science (SC)EBOP11642Biomedical and Life Sciences009783030713294EcosystemsEcologyConservation BiologyEnvironmental ManagementEarth System SciencesSustainability820000
80
Biomedical and Life Sciencesx978-3-030-71332-4CanadellJosep G. Canadell; Robert B. JacksonJosep G. Canadell, CSIRO Oceans and Atmosphere, Canberra, Australia; Robert B. Jackson, Stanford University, Stanford, CA, USAEcosystem Collapse and Climate ChangeVIII, 366 p. 93 illus., 86 illus. in color.12021final159.9948.00171.1951.36139.9942.00179.9954.00Soft cover1Ecological StudiesVolumeBiomedical and Life SciencesContributed volumeBook0English366PSAFPSAFSpringerSpringer International Publishing0WorldwideAvailable2022-06-222021-06-212022-06-212022-06-211Ecosystem Collapse and Climate Change: An Introduction.- PART I. Polar and Boreal Ecosystems.- Ecosystem Collapse on a Sub-Antarctic Island.- Permafrost Thaw in Northern Peatlands: Rapid Changes in Ecosystem and Landscape Functions.- Post-fire Recruitment Failure as a Driver of Forest to Non-forest Ecosystem Shifts in Boreal Regions.- A Paleo-perspective on Ecosystem Collapse in Boreal North America.- PART II. Temperate and Semi-arid Ecosystems.- The 2016 Tasmanian Wilderness Fires: Fire Regime Shifts and Climate Change in a Gondwanan Biogeographic Refugium.- Climate-Induced Global Forest Shifts due to Heatwave-Drought.- Extreme Events Trigger Terrestrial and Marine Ecosystem Collapses in the Southwestern USA and Southwestern Australia.- PART III. Tropical and Temperate Coastal Ecosystems.- Processes and Factors Driving Change in Mangrove Forests: An Evaluation Based on the Mass Dieback Event in Australia’s Gulf of Carpentaria.- Recurrent Mass-Bleaching and the Potential for Ecosystem Collapse on Australia’s Great Barrier Reef.- Sliding Toward the Collapse of Mediterranean Coastal Marine Rocky Ecosystems.- Marine Heatwave Drives Collapse of Kelp Forests in Western Australia.- Impact of Marine Heatwaves on Seagrass Ecosystems.<div>Human-driven greenhouse emissions are increasing the velocity of climate change and the frequency and intensity of climate extremes far above historical levels. These changes, along with other human-perturbations, are setting the conditions for more rapid and abrupt ecosystem dynamics and collapse.This book presents new evidence on the rapid emergence of ecosystem collapse in response to the progression of anthropogenic climate change dynamics that are expected to intensify as the climate continues to warm. Discussing implications for biodiversity conservation, the chapters provide examples of such dynamics globally covering polar and boreal ecosystems, temperate and semi-arid ecosystems, as well as tropical and temperate coastal ecosystems.Given its scope, the volume appeals to scientists in the fields of general ecology, terrestrial and coastal ecology, climate change impacts, and biodiversity conservation.</div>Human-driven greenhouse emissions are increasing the velocity of climate change and the frequency and intensity of climate extremes far above historical levels. These changes, along with other human-perturbations, are setting the conditions for more rapid and abrupt ecosystem dynamics and collapse.This book presents new evidence on the rapid emergence of ecosystem collapse in response to the progression of anthropogenic climate change dynamics that are expected to intensify as the climate continues to warm. Discussing implications for biodiversity conservation, the chapters provide examples of such dynamics globally covering polar and boreal ecosystems, temperate and semi-arid ecosystems, as well as tropical and temperate coastal ecosystems.Given its scope, the volume appeals to scientists in the fields of general ecology, terrestrial and coastal ecology, climate change impacts, and biodiversity conservation.
Documents cases of ecosystem collapse around the worldRaises awareness of the transitions that are already occurring through climate change todayWill help scientists and managers to restore degraded ecosystems and their species and ecosystem functioningJosep G. Canadell is a chief research scientist at the Climate Science Centre of the Australian Commonwealth Scientific and Industrial Research Organization, and the executive director of the Global Carbon Project, a global network of scientists that studies and integrates knowledge of greenhouses gases for human activities and the Earth System.Rob Jackson is the Douglas Provostial Professor in Stanford’s Department of Earth System Science and Chair of the Global Carbon Project. Both scientists have spent decades documenting greenhouse gas emissions and how ecosystems are changing in response to climate and an altered atmosphere and environment.ScienceProfessional Books (2)Science (SC)EBOP11642Biomedical and Life Sciences009783030713324EcosystemsEcologyConservation BiologyEnvironmental ManagementEarth System SciencesSustainability575000
81
Biomedical and Life Sciencesx978-3-031-06565-1Dominguez-VillarMargarita Dominguez-VillarMargarita Dominguez-Villar, Imperial College London, London, UKPI3K and AKT Isoforms in ImmunityMechanisms and Therapeutic OpportunitiesVII, 466 p. 42 illus., 37 illus. in color.12022final149.9945.00160.4948.15129.9939.00169.9951.00Hard cover0Current Topics in Microbiology and ImmunologyVolumeBiomedical and Life SciencesContributed volumeBook0English466MJCMPSFSpringerSpringer International Publishing0Available2022-10-162022-10-162022-11-022022-11-021Class I PI3K biology.- Class II PI3K biology.- Class III PI3K biology.- PTEN in immunity.- PHLPP Signaling in Immune Cells.- PHLPP Signaling in Immune Cells.- PI3K isoforms in cell signalling and innate immune cell responses.- AKT isoforms in macrophage activation, polarization and survival.- Control of CD4+ T cell Differentiation and Function by PI3K isoforms..- PI3K isoforms in CD8+ T cell development and function.- PI3K isoforms in B cells.- PI3K isoform signalling in platelets.- PI3K isoforms in vascular biology, a focus on the vascular system-immune response connection.- PI3K and AKT at the Interface of Signaling and Metabolism.- The Role of PI3K Isoforms in Autoimmune Disease.- AKT Isoforms in the Immune Response in Cancer.- PI3K isoform immunotherapy for solid tumours.- PI3K targeting in non-solid cancer.- AKT isoforms as a target in cancer and immunotherapy.- Developing PI3K Inhibitors for Respiratory Diseases.This book provides an essential overview of the role of phosphoinositide-3-phosphate kinase (PI3K) isoforms in modulating the function of immune system cells and their involvement in disease.PI3K is a family of kinases involved in basic cellular processes such as proliferation, migration and cell death. Recent work has highlighted the multiple roles of PI3K classes and subunits and their involvement in the immune response to the body’s own and foreign antigens and diseases such as cancer and autoimmunity. This book offers a detailed introduction to the biology of the three PI3K classes, followed by an extensive discussion of the diverse roles of AKT and PI3K isoforms in immune cells. Based on this knowledge, it subsequently explains in more detail how specific isoforms are connected to immune-mediated diseases. The book concludes by highlighting the latest advances in the production of isoform-specific inhibitors and their use in various human diseases.This book is intended as a reference guide for students and researchers interested in the multifaceted aspects of PI3K biology.
This book provides an essential overview of the role of phosphoinositide-3-phosphate kinase (PI3K) isoforms in modulating the function of immune system cells and their involvement in disease.PI3K is a family of kinases involved in basic cellular processes such as proliferation, migration and cell death. Recent work has highlighted the multiple roles of PI3K classes and subunits and their involvement in the immune response to the body’s own and foreign antigens and diseases such as cancer and autoimmunity. This book offers a detailed introduction to the biology of the three PI3K classes, followed by an extensive discussion of the diverse roles of AKT and PI3K isoforms in immune cells. Based on this knowledge, it subsequently explains in more detail how specific isoforms are connected to immune-mediated diseases. The book concludes by highlighting the latest advances in the production of isoform-specific inhibitors and their use in various human diseases.This book is intended as a reference guide for students and researchers interested in the multifaceted aspects of PI3K biology.
Gives a detailed introduction into the biology of the three PI3K classesDiscusses the role of AKT and PI3K isoforms in immune cells and immune-mediated diseasesHighlight the latest advances in the development of isoform-specific inhibitorsMargarita Dominguez-Villar is a Senior Lecturer in Immunology at Imperial College London. Her research interests focus on the understanding of the mechanisms that regulate T cell responses and regulatory T cell function in health and disease, with a particular focus on autoimmunity and infectious diseases and the role of the PI3K/AKT pathway in controlling these processes.ScienceProfessional Books (2)Science (SC)EBOP11642Biomedical and Life Sciences009783031065651ImmunologyImmune Cell SignallingCell BiologyAutoimmunityAdaptive Immunity875000
82
Biomedical and Life Sciencesx978-3-031-06568-2Dominguez-VillarMargarita Dominguez-VillarMargarita Dominguez-Villar, Imperial College London, London, UKPI3K and AKT Isoforms in ImmunityMechanisms and Therapeutic OpportunitiesVII, 466 p. 42 illus., 37 illus. in color.12022final149.9945.00160.4948.15129.9939.00169.9951.00Soft cover1Current Topics in Microbiology and ImmunologyVolumeBiomedical and Life SciencesContributed volumeBook0English466MJCMPSFSpringerSpringer International Publishing0Available2023-10-172022-10-162023-10-162023-10-161Class I PI3K biology.- Class II PI3K biology.- Class III PI3K biology.- PTEN in immunity.- PHLPP Signaling in Immune Cells.- PHLPP Signaling in Immune Cells.- PI3K isoforms in cell signalling and innate immune cell responses.- AKT isoforms in macrophage activation, polarization and survival.- Control of CD4+ T cell Differentiation and Function by PI3K isoforms..- PI3K isoforms in CD8+ T cell development and function.- PI3K isoforms in B cells.- PI3K isoform signalling in platelets.- PI3K isoforms in vascular biology, a focus on the vascular system-immune response connection.- PI3K and AKT at the Interface of Signaling and Metabolism.- The Role of PI3K Isoforms in Autoimmune Disease.- AKT Isoforms in the Immune Response in Cancer.- PI3K isoform immunotherapy for solid tumours.- PI3K targeting in non-solid cancer.- AKT isoforms as a target in cancer and immunotherapy.- Developing PI3K Inhibitors for Respiratory Diseases.This book provides an essential overview of the role of phosphoinositide-3-phosphate kinase (PI3K) isoforms in modulating the function of immune system cells and their involvement in disease.PI3K is a family of kinases involved in basic cellular processes such as proliferation, migration and cell death. Recent work has highlighted the multiple roles of PI3K classes and subunits and their involvement in the immune response to the body’s own and foreign antigens and diseases such as cancer and autoimmunity. This book offers a detailed introduction to the biology of the three PI3K classes, followed by an extensive discussion of the diverse roles of AKT and PI3K isoforms in immune cells. Based on this knowledge, it subsequently explains in more detail how specific isoforms are connected to immune-mediated diseases. The book concludes by highlighting the latest advances in the production of isoform-specific inhibitors and their use in various human diseases.This book is intended as a reference guide for students and researchers interested in the multifaceted aspects of PI3K biology.
This book provides an essential overview of the role of phosphoinositide-3-phosphate kinase (PI3K) isoforms in modulating the function of immune system cells and their involvement in disease.PI3K is a family of kinases involved in basic cellular processes such as proliferation, migration and cell death. Recent work has highlighted the multiple roles of PI3K classes and subunits and their involvement in the immune response to the body’s own and foreign antigens and diseases such as cancer and autoimmunity. This book offers a detailed introduction to the biology of the three PI3K classes, followed by an extensive discussion of the diverse roles of AKT and PI3K isoforms in immune cells. Based on this knowledge, it subsequently explains in more detail how specific isoforms are connected to immune-mediated diseases. The book concludes by highlighting the latest advances in the production of isoform-specific inhibitors and their use in various human diseases.This book is intended as a reference guide for students and researchers interested in the multifaceted aspects of PI3K biology.
Gives a detailed introduction into the biology of the three PI3K classesDiscusses the role of AKT and PI3K isoforms in immune cells and immune-mediated diseasesHighlight the latest advances in the development of isoform-specific inhibitorsMargarita Dominguez-Villar is a Senior Lecturer in Immunology at Imperial College London. Her research interests focus on the understanding of the mechanisms that regulate T cell responses and regulatory T cell function in health and disease, with a particular focus on autoimmunity and infectious diseases and the role of the PI3K/AKT pathway in controlling these processes.ScienceProfessional Books (2)Science (SC)EBOP11642Biomedical and Life Sciences009783031065682ImmunologyImmune Cell SignallingCell BiologyAutoimmunityAdaptive Immunity724000
83
Biomedical and Life Sciencesx978-981-19-7267-6FunahashiShintaro FunahashiShintaro Funahashi, Kyoto University, Kyoto, JapanDorsolateral Prefrontal CortexWorking Memory and Executive FunctionsXVIII, 543 p. 148 illus., 70 illus. in color.12022final139.9942.00149.7944.94119.9936.00159.9948.00Hard cover0Brain ScienceBiomedical and Life SciencesMonographBook0English543PSANMFGSpringerSpringer Nature Singapore0Available2022-12-142022-12-132022-12-312022-12-311Chapter 1. Dorsolateral prefrontal cortex.- Chapter 2. Historical perspective of prefrontal research.- Chapter 3. Working memory and prefrontal functions.- Chapter 4. Executive control.- Chapter 5. Sensory and Motor Processing.- Chapter 6. Cognitive control.- Chapter 7. Decision-making.- Chapter 8. Metacognition.- Chapter 9. Top-down control.- Chapter 10. Prefrontal cortex and working memory.
The prefrontal cortex is known to play important roles for performing a variety of higher cognitive functions. Among regions of the prefrontal cortex, the dorsolateral prefrontal cortex plays the most important roles for these functions. This book focuses on functions of the dorsolateral prefrontal cortex, summarizes research results obtained mainly by non-human primate studies, and describes neural mechanisms of executive functions that the dorsolateral prefrontal cortex participates. First, to understand the feature of the dorsolateral prefrontal cortex and how its function has been understood, anatomical and functional features of the dorsolateral prefrontal cortex and historical overview of prefrontal functions are described. To understand functions of the prefrontal cortex and neural mechanisms of executive functions, working memory is an important concept and sustained activation during the memory period of working memory tasks is known as a neural mechanism of working memory. Therefore, this book describes features of sustained memory-related activity based on neurophysiological results obtained in the prefrontal cortex and how memory-related activity contributes to executive functions including control of attention, inhibitory control, task management, and planning. And further, this book describes how the dorsolateral prefrontal cortex contributes to neural mechanisms for sensory and motor processing, memory control in multi-task performance, decision-making, metacognition, and top-down control. Thus, this book provides important information regarding neural mechanisms of dorsolateral prefrontal functions to neuroscientists and helps to plan further investigation to understand prefrontal functions in primates and human subjects.The prefrontal cortex is known to play important roles for performing a variety of higher cognitive functions. Among regions of the prefrontal cortex, the dorsolateral prefrontal cortex plays the most important roles for these functions. This book focuses on functions of the dorsolateral prefrontal cortex, summarizes research results obtained mainly by non-human primate studies, and describes neural mechanisms of executive functions that the dorsolateral prefrontal cortex participates. First, to understand the feature of the dorsolateral prefrontal cortex and how its function has been understood, anatomical and functional features of the dorsolateral prefrontal cortex and historical overview of prefrontal functions are described. To understand functions of the prefrontal cortex and neural mechanisms of executive functions, working memory is an important concept and sustained activation during the memory period of working memory tasks is known as a neural mechanism of working memory.Therefore, this book describes features of sustained memory-related activity based on neurophysiological results obtained in the prefrontal cortex and how memory-related activity contributes to executive functions including control of attention, inhibitory control, task management, and planning. And further, this book describes how the dorsolateral prefrontal cortex contributes to neural mechanisms for sensory and motor processing, memory control in multi-task performance, decision-making, metacognition, and top-down control. Thus, this book provides important information regarding neural mechanisms of dorsolateral prefrontal functions to neuroscientists and helps to plan further investigation to understand prefrontal functions in primates and human subjects.
Provides detailed description of dorsolateral prefrontal cortex functionsProvides research history of structures and functions of the area of interestProvides research results on nonhuman primates with human comparisonsShintaro Funahashi, Ph.D.

Professor EmeritusKokoro Research Center, Kyoto University, Kyoto, Japan

ScienceProfessional Books (2)Science (SC)EBOP11642Biomedical and Life Sciences009789811972676NeuroscienceHuman PhysiologyZoologyNeuropsychology1004000
84
Biomedical and Life Sciencesx978-981-19-7270-6FunahashiShintaro FunahashiShintaro Funahashi, Kyoto University, Kyoto, JapanDorsolateral Prefrontal CortexWorking Memory and Executive FunctionsXVIII, 543 p. 148 illus., 70 illus. in color.12022final139.9942.00149.7944.94119.9936.00159.9948.00Soft cover1Brain ScienceBiomedical and Life SciencesMonographBook0English543PSANMFGSpringerSpringer Nature Singapore0Available2023-12-152022-12-132023-12-142023-12-141Chapter 1. Dorsolateral prefrontal cortex.- Chapter 2. Historical perspective of prefrontal research.- Chapter 3. Working memory and prefrontal functions.- Chapter 4. Executive control.- Chapter 5. Sensory and Motor Processing.- Chapter 6. Cognitive control.- Chapter 7. Decision-making.- Chapter 8. Metacognition.- Chapter 9. Top-down control.- Chapter 10. Prefrontal cortex and working memory.
The prefrontal cortex is known to play important roles for performing a variety of higher cognitive functions. Among regions of the prefrontal cortex, the dorsolateral prefrontal cortex plays the most important roles for these functions. This book focuses on functions of the dorsolateral prefrontal cortex, summarizes research results obtained mainly by non-human primate studies, and describes neural mechanisms of executive functions that the dorsolateral prefrontal cortex participates. First, to understand the feature of the dorsolateral prefrontal cortex and how its function has been understood, anatomical and functional features of the dorsolateral prefrontal cortex and historical overview of prefrontal functions are described. To understand functions of the prefrontal cortex and neural mechanisms of executive functions, working memory is an important concept and sustained activation during the memory period of working memory tasks is known as a neural mechanism of working memory. Therefore, this book describes features of sustained memory-related activity based on neurophysiological results obtained in the prefrontal cortex and how memory-related activity contributes to executive functions including control of attention, inhibitory control, task management, and planning. And further, this book describes how the dorsolateral prefrontal cortex contributes to neural mechanisms for sensory and motor processing, memory control in multi-task performance, decision-making, metacognition, and top-down control. Thus, this book provides important information regarding neural mechanisms of dorsolateral prefrontal functions to neuroscientists and helps to plan further investigation to understand prefrontal functions in primates and human subjects.The prefrontal cortex is known to play important roles for performing a variety of higher cognitive functions. Among regions of the prefrontal cortex, the dorsolateral prefrontal cortex plays the most important roles for these functions. This book focuses on functions of the dorsolateral prefrontal cortex, summarizes research results obtained mainly by non-human primate studies, and describes neural mechanisms of executive functions that the dorsolateral prefrontal cortex participates. First, to understand the feature of the dorsolateral prefrontal cortex and how its function has been understood, anatomical and functional features of the dorsolateral prefrontal cortex and historical overview of prefrontal functions are described. To understand functions of the prefrontal cortex and neural mechanisms of executive functions, working memory is an important concept and sustained activation during the memory period of working memory tasks is known as a neural mechanism of working memory.Therefore, this book describes features of sustained memory-related activity based on neurophysiological results obtained in the prefrontal cortex and how memory-related activity contributes to executive functions including control of attention, inhibitory control, task management, and planning. And further, this book describes how the dorsolateral prefrontal cortex contributes to neural mechanisms for sensory and motor processing, memory control in multi-task performance, decision-making, metacognition, and top-down control. Thus, this book provides important information regarding neural mechanisms of dorsolateral prefrontal functions to neuroscientists and helps to plan further investigation to understand prefrontal functions in primates and human subjects.
Provides detailed description of dorsolateral prefrontal cortex functionsProvides research history of structures and functions of the area of interestProvides research results on nonhuman primates with human comparisonsShintaro Funahashi, Ph.D.

Professor EmeritusKokoro Research Center, Kyoto University, Kyoto, Japan

ScienceProfessional Books (2)Science (SC)EBOP11642Biomedical and Life Sciences009789811972706NeuroscienceHuman PhysiologyZoologyNeuropsychology854000
85
Biomedical and Life Sciencesx978-3-031-17565-7FuseiniAwal FuseiniAwal Fuseini, Huddersfield Business School, Huddersfield, UKHalal Slaughter of Livestock: Animal Welfare Science, History and Politics of Religious SlaughterXXV, 180 p. 1 illus.12023final119.9936.00128.3938.52109.9933.00129.9939.00Hard cover0Animal WelfareVolumeBiomedical and Life SciencesMonographBook0English180MZPSVDSpringerSpringer International Publishing0Available2022-11-032022-11-032022-11-202022-11-201Chapter 1: Introduction.- Chapter 2: The science of conscious perception and death.- Chapter 3: Pre-slaughter handling and possible impact on animal welfare and meat quality.- Chapter 4: Religious slaughter.- Chapter 5: Socio-political aspects of religious slaughter.This unique volume gives insight into the science of slaughter with in-depth discussion of neural communication and the welfare aspects of pre-slaughter handling and slaughter of livestock. The concepts of conscious perception, unconsciousness, stunning, slaughter and death are discussed to provide readers with an understanding of the different events that lead to the conversion of animals into carcasses and subsequently into meat. This accessible work is an excellent resource for learning about welfare issues of different techniques, as it includes historical aspects of religious and conventional slaughter with a focus on the developments around technologies. It comprises the advent of mechanical slaughter in the form of poleaxes to present day use of sophisticated stunning equipment.<div>Moreover, the author covers key aspects of halal meat production and discusses the politics of religious slaughter with an emphasis on the increasing number of anti-halal movements across Europe,America and others. The slaughter of animals for consumption by people of faith is economically significant and has led to a race for market share by multinational retail enterprises. However, there are also ethical and political aspects of religious slaughter which have always divided opinion.The topic of this book provides an important link to the disciplines of animal welfare research, the meat industry and the food business. Scientists, students, as well as government agencies, veterinarians and professionals in food processing and slaughter technology manufacturing will find this an important account. Simplified summaries and practical notes make this reference highly readable.
</div><div>
</div>		<div>This unique volume gives insight into the science of slaughter with in-depth discussion of neural communication and the welfare aspects of pre-slaughter handling and slaughter of livestock. The concepts of conscious perception, unconsciousness, stunning, slaughter and death are discussed to provide readers with an understanding of the different events that lead to the conversion of animals into carcasses and subsequently into meat. This accessible work is an excellent resource for learning about welfare issues of different techniques, as it includes historical aspects of religious and conventional slaughter with a focus on the developments around technologies. It comprises the advent of mechanical slaughter in the form of poleaxes to present day use of sophisticated stunning equipment.Moreover, the author covers key aspects of halal meat production and discusses the politics of religious slaughter with an emphasis on the increasing number of anti-halal movements across Europe, America and others. The slaughter of animals for consumption by people of faith is economically significant and has led to a race for market share by multinational retail enterprises. However, there are also ethical and political aspects of religious slaughter which have always divided opinion.The topic of this book provides an important link to the disciplines of animal welfare research, the meat industry and the food business. Scientists, students, as well as government agencies, veterinarians and professionals in food processing and slaughter technology manufacturing will find this an important account. Simplified summaries and practical notes make this reference highly readable.
</div><div>
</div>		Covers the science of slaughterExamines animal welfare during pre-slaughter handling and neck cuttingProvides guidance for improving the halal slaughter process<div>Dr Awal Fuseini holds a BSc (Agriculture) degree from Cape Coast University in Ghana, MSc (Meat Science and Technology) from Bristol University in the UK and a PhD (Animal Welfare), also from Bristol University. Awal has extensive experience of working in the meat industry where he worked in a variety of roles, including auditing and managing certification activities for one of the largest Halal certification bodies in the UK. He also briefly worked as a consultant, during which he provided services to food businesses and certifiers on issues around Halal meat production.
</div><div><div>Awal has published numerous scientific papers in several high impact peer reviewed journals, including the Journals of Animals, Meat Science, Animal Welfare, Veterinary Record, Food Ethics, CAB Reviews and others. His work has been cited widely and attracted the attention of policy makers, politicians and the mainstream media.</div><div>He is currently the Halal Sector Manager at the UK’s Agriculture and Horticulture Development Board (AHDB). His role at AHDB involves collaborating with key Halal stakeholders in the UK to create a better understanding of the Halal market with a view to adding value. As part of his role at AHDB, Awal also advises meat exporters on the requirements of different export markets and has been part of UK export missions to the Middle East and Africa. Awal contributes to a number of meat industry working groups and currently co-chairs the Food Standards Agency’s Partnership Working Group-Work Stream 2 on the direct sale of Qurbani meat to Muslim consumers.</div></div><div>
</div>		ScienceMedical (6)Science (SC)EBOP11642Biomedical and Life Sciences009783031175657Veterinary ScienceAnimal EthicsAnimal PhysiologySociology of Food and Nutrition483000
86
Biomedical and Life Sciencesx978-3-031-17568-8FuseiniAwal FuseiniAwal Fuseini, Huddersfield Business School, Huddersfield, UKHalal Slaughter of Livestock: Animal Welfare Science, History and Politics of Religious SlaughterXXV, 180 p. 1 illus.12023final119.9936.00128.3938.52109.9933.00129.9939.00Soft cover1Animal WelfareVolumeBiomedical and Life SciencesMonographBook0English180MZPSVDSpringerSpringer International Publishing0Available2023-11-042022-11-032023-11-032023-11-031Chapter 1: Introduction.- Chapter 2: The science of conscious perception and death.- Chapter 3: Pre-slaughter handling and possible impact on animal welfare and meat quality.- Chapter 4: Religious slaughter.- Chapter 5: Socio-political aspects of religious slaughter.This unique volume gives insight into the science of slaughter with in-depth discussion of neural communication and the welfare aspects of pre-slaughter handling and slaughter of livestock. The concepts of conscious perception, unconsciousness, stunning, slaughter and death are discussed to provide readers with an understanding of the different events that lead to the conversion of animals into carcasses and subsequently into meat. This accessible work is an excellent resource for learning about welfare issues of different techniques, as it includes historical aspects of religious and conventional slaughter with a focus on the developments around technologies. It comprises the advent of mechanical slaughter in the form of poleaxes to present day use of sophisticated stunning equipment.<div>Moreover, the author covers key aspects of halal meat production and discusses the politics of religious slaughter with an emphasis on the increasing number of anti-halal movements across Europe,America and others. The slaughter of animals for consumption by people of faith is economically significant and has led to a race for market share by multinational retail enterprises. However, there are also ethical and political aspects of religious slaughter which have always divided opinion.The topic of this book provides an important link to the disciplines of animal welfare research, the meat industry and the food business. Scientists, students, as well as government agencies, veterinarians and professionals in food processing and slaughter technology manufacturing will find this an important account. Simplified summaries and practical notes make this reference highly readable.
</div><div>
</div>		<div>This unique volume gives insight into the science of slaughter with in-depth discussion of neural communication and the welfare aspects of pre-slaughter handling and slaughter of livestock. The concepts of conscious perception, unconsciousness, stunning, slaughter and death are discussed to provide readers with an understanding of the different events that lead to the conversion of animals into carcasses and subsequently into meat. This accessible work is an excellent resource for learning about welfare issues of different techniques, as it includes historical aspects of religious and conventional slaughter with a focus on the developments around technologies. It comprises the advent of mechanical slaughter in the form of poleaxes to present day use of sophisticated stunning equipment.Moreover, the author covers key aspects of halal meat production and discusses the politics of religious slaughter with an emphasis on the increasing number of anti-halal movements across Europe, America and others. The slaughter of animals for consumption by people of faith is economically significant and has led to a race for market share by multinational retail enterprises. However, there are also ethical and political aspects of religious slaughter which have always divided opinion.The topic of this book provides an important link to the disciplines of animal welfare research, the meat industry and the food business. Scientists, students, as well as government agencies, veterinarians and professionals in food processing and slaughter technology manufacturing will find this an important account. Simplified summaries and practical notes make this reference highly readable.
</div><div>
</div>		Covers the science of slaughterExamines animal welfare during pre-slaughter handling and neck cuttingProvides guidance for improving the halal slaughter process<div>Dr Awal Fuseini holds a BSc (Agriculture) degree from Cape Coast University in Ghana, MSc (Meat Science and Technology) from Bristol University in the UK and a PhD (Animal Welfare), also from Bristol University. Awal has extensive experience of working in the meat industry where he worked in a variety of roles, including auditing and managing certification activities for one of the largest Halal certification bodies in the UK. He also briefly worked as a consultant, during which he provided services to food businesses and certifiers on issues around Halal meat production.
</div><div><div>Awal has published numerous scientific papers in several high impact peer reviewed journals, including the Journals of Animals, Meat Science, Animal Welfare, Veterinary Record, Food Ethics, CAB Reviews and others. His work has been cited widely and attracted the attention of policy makers, politicians and the mainstream media.</div><div>He is currently the Halal Sector Manager at the UK’s Agriculture and Horticulture Development Board (AHDB). His role at AHDB involves collaborating with key Halal stakeholders in the UK to create a better understanding of the Halal market with a view to adding value. As part of his role at AHDB, Awal also advises meat exporters on the requirements of different export markets and has been part of UK export missions to the Middle East and Africa. Awal contributes to a number of meat industry working groups and currently co-chairs the Food Standards Agency’s Partnership Working Group-Work Stream 2 on the direct sale of Qurbani meat to Muslim consumers.</div></div><div>
</div>		ScienceMedical (6)Science (SC)EBOP11642Biomedical and Life Sciences009783031175688Veterinary ScienceAnimal EthicsAnimal PhysiologySociology of Food and Nutrition326000
87
Biomedical and Life Sciencesx978-3-031-12538-6MossakowskiDietrich Mossakowski; Ulrich IrmlerDietrich Mossakowski, University of Bremen, Groß Schwansee, Germany; Ulrich Irmler, University of Kiel, Kiel, GermanyTerrestrial Coastal Ecosystems in Germany and Climate ChangeXIV, 480 p. 155 illus., 85 illus. in color.12023final179.9954.00192.5957.78159.9948.00199.9960.00Hard cover0Ecological StudiesVolumeBiomedical and Life SciencesContributed volumeBook0English480PSAFPSAFSpringerSpringer International Publishing1Available2023-03-042023-03-032023-03-202023-03-201Part I. Introduction and Description of Study Area.- Chapter 1. Introduction.- Chapter 2. Climate Changes Along the German Coast.- Chapter 3. Coastal Landscapes of the North Sea and the Baltic Sea.- Chapter 4. Geography and Study Sites.- Chapter 5. Climate and Weather Conditions Along the German Shores.- Chapter 6.- Inundation Regimes of the German Coasts and the Impact of the Rising Sea Level.- Chapter 7. The Surface Salinity of the North Sea and Baltic Sea Area.- Chapter 8. Soils.- Part II. Historical and Future Changes of the Dune and Salt Marsh Fauna.- Chapter 9. General Aspects of Coastal Vegetation at the North Sea and the Baltic Sea.- Chapter 10. Predicting Plant Distribution Shifts.- Chapter 11. General Aspects of Coastal Carabid Beetle and Spider Fauna at the North Sea and the Baltic Sea.- Chapter 12. Changes of the Fauna of Digger Wasps and Bees (Hymenoptera, Aculeata) of the North Frisian Island of Sylt – Effects of Climate Change?.- Chapter 13. Historical Changes in the Carabid Beetle Fauna of Mecklenburg-Western Pomerania.- Chapter 14. Distribution of Spiders and Carabid Beetles Along a Geographical Gradient.- Chapter 15. Predicting Carabid Beetle Distribution Shifts.- Part III. Experimental Assessments of the Effects of Climate Change on Habitats and Their Organisms.- Chapter 16. Field Experiment: Effects of Increased Temperature on a Tidalic Fluvisol.- Chapter 17. Field Experiment: Effects of Microclimate Modification on Soil Organisms and Aggregate Formation in Dune Sand.- Chapter 18. Expected Vegetation Dynamics in Salt Marshes at the North Sea Coast Under Changed Inundation Conditions as an Effect of Climate Change.- Chapter 19. Effects of Sedimentation and Erosion on the Development of Vegetation.- Chapter 20. Tide Simulation Experiment.- Chapter 21. Storm Surges as Natural Experiments.- Part IV. De-Embankments and Its Effects on the Vegetation and Fauna.- Chapter 22. De-embankments at the North Sea and the Baltic Sea Coasts.- Chapter 23. Salt Marsh Restoration in a Summer Polder at the Wursten Coast.- Chapter 24. Estimated Future Effects of the Sea Level Rise Exemplified by the Wursten Coast.- Chapter 25. Restoration of Salt Meadows at the Baltic Sea Coast: The De-Embankment Experiment at Karrendorf Meadows.- Part V. Synthesis and Conclusions.- Chapter 26. Expert System: Plants.- Chapter 27. Expert System: Spiders and Carabid Beetles. Chapter 28. Consequences of Climate Change for Biota of the Coastal Salt Marshes and Dunes: Synthesis, Final Conclusions, and Ideas of Compensation.<div><div>Climate change is one of the most severe dangers for mankind worldwide. Beside the temperature increase, the sea level will rise and flood wide coastal areas, which is already remarkable today. The effects will be dramatic, in particular, at coasts with low elevation gradients such as at the German coasts of the North and Baltic Sea. The impact will be not only severe for coastal people, but still more for the unique coastal ecosystems, which harbors many plant and animal species that are already endangered today.</div><div>
</div><div>This book focuses on the coastal terrestrial ecosystems of the German North and Baltic Sea. It describes the reactions of plants and animals (i.e. spiders, carabid beetles, bees and nematodes) on the future temperature and sea level increase. The combination of field and experimental studies is unique for Europe and for many parts of the world. It not only studies the actual elevation gradients and the climatic and saline gradients from Westto East, but also the historical changes to document processes at coastal ecosystems that were already passed. In contrast to many books that studied the marine processes with similar backgrounds, this book concerns the terrestrial coastal ecosystems that were overall rarely studied and, in particular, never studied under this specific viewpoint.</div></div><div>
</div><div>
</div>		<div>Climate change is one of the most severe dangers for mankind worldwide. Beside the temperature increase, the sea level will rise and flood wide coastal areas, which is already remarkable today. The effects will be dramatic, in particular, at coasts with low elevation gradients such as at the German coasts of the North and Baltic Sea. The impact will be not only severe for coastal people, but still more for the unique coastal ecosystems, which harbors many plant and animal species that are already endangered today.
</div><div><div>
</div><div>This book focuses on the coastal terrestrial ecosystems of the German North and Baltic Sea. It describes the reactions of plants and animals (i.e. spiders, carabid beetles, bees and nematodes) on the future temperature and sea level increase. The combination of field and experimental studies is unique for Europe and for many parts of the world. It not only studies the actual elevation gradients and the climatic and saline gradients fromWest to East, but also the historical changes to document processes at coastal ecosystems that were already passed. In contrast to many books that studied the marine processes with similar backgrounds, this book concerns the terrestrial coastal ecosystems that were overall rarely studied and, in particular, never studied under this specific viewpoint.
</div></div><div>
</div>		Focuses on coastal terrestrial ecosystems of the German North and Baltic SeaDescribes the responses and adaptations of plants and animals on the future temperature and sea level increaseProvides background and measures for coastal planning<div>Prof. Dietrich Mossakowski is retired Professor for Evolutionary Biology at the former Institute for Ecology and Evolutionary Biology of the University of Bremen, Germany. His scientific research focused on the morphology, phylogeny, and phylogeography of carabid beetles, and the ecology of raised bogs and salt marshes.</div><div>
</div><div>Prof. Ulrich Irmler is retired Professor of the Institute of Ecosystem Research at the University of Kiel, Germany. His research focused on soil biology, entomology, and nature conservation. He was involved in several research projects on the salt marshes of Lower Saxony and Schleswig-Holstein and the beaches of Schleswig-Holstein. Furthermore, his research interests included tropical ecology (Brazil), as well as forest, grassland, and organic farming ecology. </div>		ScienceProfessional Books (2)Science (SC)EBOP11642Biomedical and Life Sciences009783031125386Climate Change EcologyEcosystemsCommunity and Population EcologyEnvironmental ManagementInvertebrate ZoologyConservation Biology904000
88
Biomedical and Life Sciencesx978-3-031-12541-6MossakowskiDietrich Mossakowski; Ulrich IrmlerDietrich Mossakowski, University of Bremen, Groß Schwansee, Germany; Ulrich Irmler, University of Kiel, Kiel, GermanyTerrestrial Coastal Ecosystems in Germany and Climate ChangeXIV, 480 p. 155 illus., 85 illus. in color.12023final179.9954.00192.5957.78159.9948.00199.9960.00Soft cover1Ecological StudiesVolumeBiomedical and Life SciencesContributed volumeBook0English480PSAFPSAFSpringerSpringer International Publishing1Available2024-03-042023-03-032023-03-202023-03-201Part I. Introduction and Description of Study Area.- Chapter 1. Introduction.- Chapter 2. Climate Changes Along the German Coast.- Chapter 3. Coastal Landscapes of the North Sea and the Baltic Sea.- Chapter 4. Geography and Study Sites.- Chapter 5. Climate and Weather Conditions Along the German Shores.- Chapter 6.- Inundation Regimes of the German Coasts and the Impact of the Rising Sea Level.- Chapter 7. The Surface Salinity of the North Sea and Baltic Sea Area.- Chapter 8. Soils.- Part II. Historical and Future Changes of the Dune and Salt Marsh Fauna.- Chapter 9. General Aspects of Coastal Vegetation at the North Sea and the Baltic Sea.- Chapter 10. Predicting Plant Distribution Shifts.- Chapter 11. General Aspects of Coastal Carabid Beetle and Spider Fauna at the North Sea and the Baltic Sea.- Chapter 12. Changes of the Fauna of Digger Wasps and Bees (Hymenoptera, Aculeata) of the North Frisian Island of Sylt – Effects of Climate Change?.- Chapter 13. Historical Changes in the Carabid Beetle Fauna of Mecklenburg-Western Pomerania.- Chapter 14. Distribution of Spiders and Carabid Beetles Along a Geographical Gradient.- Chapter 15. Predicting Carabid Beetle Distribution Shifts.- Part III. Experimental Assessments of the Effects of Climate Change on Habitats and Their Organisms.- Chapter 16. Field Experiment: Effects of Increased Temperature on a Tidalic Fluvisol.- Chapter 17. Field Experiment: Effects of Microclimate Modification on Soil Organisms and Aggregate Formation in Dune Sand.- Chapter 18. Expected Vegetation Dynamics in Salt Marshes at the North Sea Coast Under Changed Inundation Conditions as an Effect of Climate Change.- Chapter 19. Effects of Sedimentation and Erosion on the Development of Vegetation.- Chapter 20. Tide Simulation Experiment.- Chapter 21. Storm Surges as Natural Experiments.- Part IV. De-Embankments and Its Effects on the Vegetation and Fauna.- Chapter 22. De-embankments at the North Sea and the Baltic Sea Coasts.- Chapter 23. Salt Marsh Restoration in a Summer Polder at the Wursten Coast.- Chapter 24. Estimated Future Effects of the Sea Level Rise Exemplified by the Wursten Coast.- Chapter 25. Restoration of Salt Meadows at the Baltic Sea Coast: The De-Embankment Experiment at Karrendorf Meadows.- Part V. Synthesis and Conclusions.- Chapter 26. Expert System: Plants.- Chapter 27. Expert System: Spiders and Carabid Beetles. Chapter 28. Consequences of Climate Change for Biota of the Coastal Salt Marshes and Dunes: Synthesis, Final Conclusions, and Ideas of Compensation.<div><div>Climate change is one of the most severe dangers for mankind worldwide. Beside the temperature increase, the sea level will rise and flood wide coastal areas, which is already remarkable today. The effects will be dramatic, in particular, at coasts with low elevation gradients such as at the German coasts of the North and Baltic Sea. The impact will be not only severe for coastal people, but still more for the unique coastal ecosystems, which harbors many plant and animal species that are already endangered today.</div><div>
</div><div>This book focuses on the coastal terrestrial ecosystems of the German North and Baltic Sea. It describes the reactions of plants and animals (i.e. spiders, carabid beetles, bees and nematodes) on the future temperature and sea level increase. The combination of field and experimental studies is unique for Europe and for many parts of the world. It not only studies the actual elevation gradients and the climatic and saline gradients from Westto East, but also the historical changes to document processes at coastal ecosystems that were already passed. In contrast to many books that studied the marine processes with similar backgrounds, this book concerns the terrestrial coastal ecosystems that were overall rarely studied and, in particular, never studied under this specific viewpoint.</div></div><div>
</div><div>
</div>		<div>Climate change is one of the most severe dangers for mankind worldwide. Beside the temperature increase, the sea level will rise and flood wide coastal areas, which is already remarkable today. The effects will be dramatic, in particular, at coasts with low elevation gradients such as at the German coasts of the North and Baltic Sea. The impact will be not only severe for coastal people, but still more for the unique coastal ecosystems, which harbors many plant and animal species that are already endangered today.
</div><div><div>
</div><div>This book focuses on the coastal terrestrial ecosystems of the German North and Baltic Sea. It describes the reactions of plants and animals (i.e. spiders, carabid beetles, bees and nematodes) on the future temperature and sea level increase. The combination of field and experimental studies is unique for Europe and for many parts of the world. It not only studies the actual elevation gradients and the climatic and saline gradients fromWest to East, but also the historical changes to document processes at coastal ecosystems that were already passed. In contrast to many books that studied the marine processes with similar backgrounds, this book concerns the terrestrial coastal ecosystems that were overall rarely studied and, in particular, never studied under this specific viewpoint.
</div></div><div>
</div>		Focuses on coastal terrestrial ecosystems of the German North and Baltic SeaDescribes the responses and adaptations of plants and animals on the future temperature and sea level increaseProvides background and measures for coastal planning<div>Prof. Dietrich Mossakowski is retired Professor for Evolutionary Biology at the former Institute for Ecology and Evolutionary Biology of the University of Bremen, Germany. His scientific research focused on the morphology, phylogeny, and phylogeography of carabid beetles, and the ecology of raised bogs and salt marshes.</div><div>
</div><div>Prof. Ulrich Irmler is retired Professor of the Institute of Ecosystem Research at the University of Kiel, Germany. His research focused on soil biology, entomology, and nature conservation. He was involved in several research projects on the salt marshes of Lower Saxony and Schleswig-Holstein and the beaches of Schleswig-Holstein. Furthermore, his research interests included tropical ecology (Brazil), as well as forest, grassland, and organic farming ecology. </div>		ScienceProfessional Books (2)Science (SC)EBOP11642Biomedical and Life Sciences009783031125416Climate Change EcologyEcosystemsCommunity and Population EcologyEnvironmental ManagementInvertebrate ZoologyConservation Biology0000
89
Biomedical and Life Sciencesx978-3-031-12973-5TanabeShihori TanabeShihori Tanabe, National Institute of Health Sciences, Kanagawa, JapanCancer Stem Cell Markers and Related Network PathwaysXIV, 156 p. 23 illus., 21 illus. in color.12022final129.9939.00139.0941.73109.9933.00139.9942.00Hard cover0Advances in Experimental Medicine and BiologyVolumeBiomedical and Life SciencesContributed volumeBook0English156MBGRMFNSpringerSpringer International Publishing0Available2023-01-032023-01-022024-04-012024-04-0111. Epithelial-mesenchymal transition and cancer stem cells.- 2. The transcription factors Zeb1 and Snail induce cell malignancy and can-cer stem cell phenotype in prostate cells, increasing androgen synthesis ca-pacity and therapy resistance.- 3. ERBB signaling pathway in cancer stem cells.- 4. Functional and molecular characters of cancer stem cells through devel-opment to establishment.- 5. Microenvironment in cancer stem cells.- 6. Cancer stem cells contribute to drug resistance in multiple different ways.- 7. Abnormal glycosylation in cancer cells and cancer stem cells as a thera-peutic target.<div>
</div>		<div>This book entitled “Cancer Stem Cell Markers and Related Network Path-ways” is about cancer stem cell (CSC) markers and the molecular network pathways. CSCs play an important role in the cancer drug resistance, metastasis and recurrence. Epithelial-mesenchymal transition (EMT) is closely related to CSC phenotype.</div><div>
</div><div>This book covers various aspects of the molecular networks related to CSCs including the important phenotypic change such as EMT. Readers will discover the importance of the identification of CSC markers and EMT-related molecules in CSC network pathways.</div><div>
</div><div>The CSC signaling pathways and EMT molecular network pathways attract researchers in the field to define the cancer therapeutic targets. Cancer environment is important in the acquisition of CSC phenotype in cells. The revealing of this CSC mystery is across 7 chapters. </div><div>
</div><div>The topic of this book is particularly relevant to research in thefield of cancer and stem cells, as well as the network pathways. We hope that this book helps the readers to be interested in understanding why the CSC concept is important and attractive.</div>		<div>This book entitled “Cancer Stem Cell Markers and Related Network Path-ways” is about cancer stem cell (CSC) markers and the molecular network pathways. CSCs play an important role in the cancer drug resistance, metastasis and recurrence. Epithelial-mesenchymal transition (EMT) is closely related to CSC phenotype.</div><div>
</div><div>This book covers various aspects of the molecular networks related to CSCs including the important phenotypic change such as EMT. Readers will discover the importance of the identification of CSC markers and EMT-related molecules in CSC network pathways.</div><div>
</div><div>The CSC signaling pathways and EMT molecular network pathways attract researchers in the field to define the cancer therapeutic targets. Cancer environment is important in the acquisition of CSC phenotype in cells. The revealing of this CSC mystery is across 7 chapters. </div><div>
</div><div>The topic of this book is particularly relevant to research in thefield of cancer and stem cells, as well as the network pathways. We hope that this book helps the readers to be interested in understanding why the CSC concept is important and attractive.</div>		Written by global experts in the fieldContains interesting targets for anti-cancer therapyReveals new mechanisms of Cancer Stem CellsShihori Tanabe, Ph.D. has been working as a Senior Researcher at the Division of Risk Assessment, Center for Biological Safety and Research, National Institute of Health Sciences from April 2016. From Apr 2005 until Jan 2006 she held a position of a Post Doctoral Fellow at the Laboratory of Cell Signaling, Graduate School of Pharmaceutical Sciences, The University of Tokyo. From Feb 2006 until Mar 2010 she worked as a Researcher at the Division of Cellular and Gene Therapy Products, National Institute of Health Sciences, Tokyo Japan. She also had a position of a Senior Researcher at the Division of Safety Information on Drug, Food and Chemicals, National Institute of Health Sciences (Apr 2010 - Mar 2016, Tokyo Japan)ScienceProfessional Books (2)Science (SC)EBOP11642Biomedical and Life Sciences009783031129735Biomedical ResearchBiomedical ResearchMedical GeneticsMedical Microbiology572000
90
Biomedical and Life Sciencesx978-3-031-12976-6TanabeShihori TanabeShihori Tanabe, National Institute of Health Sciences, Kanagawa, JapanCancer Stem Cell Markers and Related Network PathwaysXIV, 156 p. 23 illus., 21 illus. in color.12022final129.9939.00139.0941.73109.9933.00139.9942.00Soft cover1Advances in Experimental Medicine and BiologyVolumeBiomedical and Life SciencesContributed volumeBook0English156MBGRMFNSpringerSpringer International Publishing0Available2024-01-042023-01-022024-04-012024-04-0111. Epithelial-mesenchymal transition and cancer stem cells.- 2. The transcription factors Zeb1 and Snail induce cell malignancy and can-cer stem cell phenotype in prostate cells, increasing androgen synthesis ca-pacity and therapy resistance.- 3. ERBB signaling pathway in cancer stem cells.- 4. Functional and molecular characters of cancer stem cells through devel-opment to establishment.- 5. Microenvironment in cancer stem cells.- 6. Cancer stem cells contribute to drug resistance in multiple different ways.- 7. Abnormal glycosylation in cancer cells and cancer stem cells as a thera-peutic target.<div>
</div>		<div>This book entitled “Cancer Stem Cell Markers and Related Network Path-ways” is about cancer stem cell (CSC) markers and the molecular network pathways. CSCs play an important role in the cancer drug resistance, metastasis and recurrence. Epithelial-mesenchymal transition (EMT) is closely related to CSC phenotype.</div><div>
</div><div>This book covers various aspects of the molecular networks related to CSCs including the important phenotypic change such as EMT. Readers will discover the importance of the identification of CSC markers and EMT-related molecules in CSC network pathways.</div><div>
</div><div>The CSC signaling pathways and EMT molecular network pathways attract researchers in the field to define the cancer therapeutic targets. Cancer environment is important in the acquisition of CSC phenotype in cells. The revealing of this CSC mystery is across 7 chapters. </div><div>
</div><div>The topic of this book is particularly relevant to research in thefield of cancer and stem cells, as well as the network pathways. We hope that this book helps the readers to be interested in understanding why the CSC concept is important and attractive.</div>		<div>This book entitled “Cancer Stem Cell Markers and Related Network Path-ways” is about cancer stem cell (CSC) markers and the molecular network pathways. CSCs play an important role in the cancer drug resistance, metastasis and recurrence. Epithelial-mesenchymal transition (EMT) is closely related to CSC phenotype.</div><div>
</div><div>This book covers various aspects of the molecular networks related to CSCs including the important phenotypic change such as EMT. Readers will discover the importance of the identification of CSC markers and EMT-related molecules in CSC network pathways.</div><div>
</div><div>The CSC signaling pathways and EMT molecular network pathways attract researchers in the field to define the cancer therapeutic targets. Cancer environment is important in the acquisition of CSC phenotype in cells. The revealing of this CSC mystery is across 7 chapters. </div><div>
</div><div>The topic of this book is particularly relevant to research in thefield of cancer and stem cells, as well as the network pathways. We hope that this book helps the readers to be interested in understanding why the CSC concept is important and attractive.</div>		Written by global experts in the fieldContains interesting targets for anti-cancer therapyReveals new mechanisms of Cancer Stem CellsShihori Tanabe, Ph.D. has been working as a Senior Researcher at the Division of Risk Assessment, Center for Biological Safety and Research, National Institute of Health Sciences from April 2016. From Apr 2005 until Jan 2006 she held a position of a Post Doctoral Fellow at the Laboratory of Cell Signaling, Graduate School of Pharmaceutical Sciences, The University of Tokyo. From Feb 2006 until Mar 2010 she worked as a Researcher at the Division of Cellular and Gene Therapy Products, National Institute of Health Sciences, Tokyo Japan. She also had a position of a Senior Researcher at the Division of Safety Information on Drug, Food and Chemicals, National Institute of Health Sciences (Apr 2010 - Mar 2016, Tokyo Japan)ScienceProfessional Books (2)Science (SC)EBOP11642Biomedical and Life Sciences009783031129766Biomedical ResearchBiomedical ResearchMedical GeneticsMedical Microbiology338000
91
Biomedical and Life Sciences978-3-030-72662-1AndreoniGiuseppe Andreoni; Cinzia MambrettiGiuseppe Andreoni, Polytechnic University of Milan, Milan, Italy; Cinzia Mambretti, Polytechnic University of Milan, Milan, ItalyDigital Health Technology for Better AgingA multidisciplinary approachXI, 365 p. 100 illus., 93 illus. in color.12021final149.9945.00160.4948.15129.9939.00169.9951.00Hard cover0Research for DevelopmentBiomedical and Life SciencesContributed volumeBook0English365MBJHBDSpringerSpringer International Publishing0Available2021-07-012021-07-012021-07-182021-07-181Preface.- Chapter 1. Older persons in Europe 2020: needs and challenges for an interdisciplinary polytechnic approach.- Section 1: Designing mHealth solutions for better ageing: clinical and methodological perspective.- Chapter 2. The multi-domain coaching approach to counteract ageing decline.- Chapter 3. Found in translation: innovative methods of co-design in the development of digital systems for promoting healthy aging.- Section 2: Technology applied to solutions for Healthy ageing.- Chapter 4. Monitoring in the physical domain to support active ageing.- Chapter 5. Nutrition monitoring as a Key Performance Indicators (KPI) in prevention services for older adults.- Chapter 6. Social behavior and cognitive monitoring in healthy ageing.- Chapter 7. Perspective and experiences of Decision Support System (DSS) and AI in prevention and care for older adults.- Chapter 8. System interoperability for next gen services at home. A challenge/opportunity for integration.- Section 3: Lifestyleimprovement and virtual coaching and ICT services in the human domains through friendly technology.- Chapter 9. Physical Activity promotion and coaching to support healthy ageing.- Chapter 10. Coaching older adults towards a healthier lifestyle: psychological and technological methods.- Chapter 11. Understanding older adults’ affect states in daily life for promoting self-reflection about mental well-being.- Chapter 12. Building trust and companionship in e-coaching through embodiment.- Chapter 13. Challenges, limitations and methodologies to be applied in the development of an ICT-based intervention for older people .- Section 4: Innovation impact measured in subjective (usability and experience), social (community level) and business (companies and institutions) opportunities.- Chapter 14. Practicing the test of new system-services for elderly care: how to introduce and measure user experience and related outcomes.- Chapter 15. SROI methods for impact assessment in Economy of Wellbeing.- Chapter 16. Building a network around wellbeing services that empower older adults.- Chapter 17. Exploitation, Dissemination and Communication: an integrated framework in EU research.- Section 5: Aspects of Ethics and Data Management in healthy ageing digital services.- Chapter 18. Data treatment in complex studies in light of the GDPR rules. A critical analysis.- Chapter 19. Ethical, legal and societal issues of research and innovation in NESTORE.- Section 6: From research to action: what’s next?.- Chapter 20. Other advanced research initiatives in elderly care and fragility prevention.- Conclusion. Translating Active Ageing research into effective policies.This book describes the multidisciplinary approach needed to tackle better aging. Aging populations are one of the 21st century’s biggest challenges. National health systems are forced to adapt in order to provide adequate and affordable care. Innovation, driven by digital technology, is a key to improving quality of life and encouraging healthy living. Well-designed technology keeps people empowered, independent, and mobile; however, despite widespread adoption of ICT in day-to-day life, digital health technologies have yet to catch on. To this end, technology needs to be effective, usable, cheap, and designed to ensure the security of the managed data. In the era of mHealth, mobile technology, and social design, this book describes, in six sections, the collaboration of polytechnic know-how and social science and health sectors in the creation of a system for encouraging people to engage in healthy behavior and achieve a better quality of life.This book describes the multidisciplinary approach needed to tackle better aging. Aging populations are one of the 21st century’s biggest challenges. National health systems are forced to adapt in order to provide adequate and affordable care. Innovation, driven by digital technology, is a key to improving quality of life and encouraging healthy living. Well-designed technology keeps people empowered, independent, and mobile; however, despite widespread adoption of ICT in day-to-day life, digital health technologies have yet to catch on. To this end, technology needs to be effective, usable, cheap, and designed to ensure the security of the managed data. In the era of mHealth, mobile technology, and social design, this book describes, in six sections, the collaboration of polytechnic know-how and social science and health sectors in the creation of a system for encouraging people to engage in healthy behavior and achieve a better quality of life.Knowledge and technology for the benefit of a healthy agingOne of the most successful cases of co-designAn integrated smart approach to virtual coaching for better agingDr. Giuseppe Andreoni (M) earned the laurea degree in electronic engineering in 1993 and a Ph.D. in bio-engeneering in 1998. He is currently a full professor at the design Dept. of Politecnico di Milano. He also serves that department as the scientific coordinator of the TeDH—Technology and Design for Healthcare and Wellbeing Laboratory, which includes the Sensibilab (Biomedical Sensors and Systems Lab.) and of the LyPhE (Laboratory of Physical Ergonomics). He has a wealth of experience in the design and development of innovative products, systems, and services in the healthcare and ergonomics sectors, with specific know-how about integrating technologies and participatory design methodologies. His main research interests are: ergonomics, wearable sensors, design, rehabilitation and assistive technology. He is coauthor of 10 national/international patents and more than 250 publications (books, chapters, papers, and proceedings in international conferences). Giuseppe was the scientific coordinator of “PEGASO – Fit for Future”, a European project within the frame of the 7th Framework program, and he is currently the scientific coordinator of the “NESTORE” project within the frame of the H2020 Framework program.Ing. Cinzia Mabretti (F) has more than 20 years of experience in R&D project management. Having graduated with a degree in computer science engineering from Politecnico di Milano, she gained experience during her school years by participating in several artificial intelligence and robotics project, including Robocup 1998, Paris, for which she served as a member of the ART team, the Italian national team that developed a moderately-sized homemade robot football player. From 2003 to 2011, she was the senior project manager at Socrates Medical, leading the R&D team, and also participating in the projects FP-6 WEIRD (WiMax Extension to Isolated Research Data Networks) and FP-7 ISISEMD (Intelligent System for independent living and SElfcare of seniors withcognitive problems or Mild Dementia ). Since 2013, she has been a project manager at Fondazione Politecnico di Milano, where she manages several e-Health/IT funded projects. She is currently project manager of H2020 – PM15 project 769643 NESTORE (Novel Empowering Solutions and Technologies for Older people to Retain Everyday life activities). She is an independent expert involved in evaluation of the H2020, Eureka, and Lombardy Region projects.ProfessionalsProfessional Books (2)Standard (0)EBOP11642Biomedical and Life Sciences009783030726621Health SciencesAging PopulationInnovation and Technology ManagementHealth InformaticsHealth Promotion and Disease PreventionInteraction Design804000
92
Biomedical and Life Sciences978-3-030-72665-2AndreoniGiuseppe Andreoni; Cinzia MambrettiGiuseppe Andreoni, Polytechnic University of Milan, Milan, Italy; Cinzia Mambretti, Polytechnic University of Milan, Milan, ItalyDigital Health Technology for Better AgingA multidisciplinary approachXI, 365 p. 100 illus., 93 illus. in color.12021final109.9933.00117.6935.3199.9930.00119.9936.00Soft cover1Research for DevelopmentBiomedical and Life SciencesContributed volumeBook0English365MBJHBDSpringerSpringer International Publishing0Available2022-07-022021-07-012022-07-012022-07-011Preface.- Chapter 1. Older persons in Europe 2020: needs and challenges for an interdisciplinary polytechnic approach.- Section 1: Designing mHealth solutions for better ageing: clinical and methodological perspective.- Chapter 2. The multi-domain coaching approach to counteract ageing decline.- Chapter 3. Found in translation: innovative methods of co-design in the development of digital systems for promoting healthy aging.- Section 2: Technology applied to solutions for Healthy ageing.- Chapter 4. Monitoring in the physical domain to support active ageing.- Chapter 5. Nutrition monitoring as a Key Performance Indicators (KPI) in prevention services for older adults.- Chapter 6. Social behavior and cognitive monitoring in healthy ageing.- Chapter 7. Perspective and experiences of Decision Support System (DSS) and AI in prevention and care for older adults.- Chapter 8. System interoperability for next gen services at home. A challenge/opportunity for integration.- Section 3: Lifestyleimprovement and virtual coaching and ICT services in the human domains through friendly technology.- Chapter 9. Physical Activity promotion and coaching to support healthy ageing.- Chapter 10. Coaching older adults towards a healthier lifestyle: psychological and technological methods.- Chapter 11. Understanding older adults’ affect states in daily life for promoting self-reflection about mental well-being.- Chapter 12. Building trust and companionship in e-coaching through embodiment.- Chapter 13. Challenges, limitations and methodologies to be applied in the development of an ICT-based intervention for older people .- Section 4: Innovation impact measured in subjective (usability and experience), social (community level) and business (companies and institutions) opportunities.- Chapter 14. Practicing the test of new system-services for elderly care: how to introduce and measure user experience and related outcomes.- Chapter 15. SROI methods for impact assessment in Economy of Wellbeing.- Chapter 16. Building a network around wellbeing services that empower older adults.- Chapter 17. Exploitation, Dissemination and Communication: an integrated framework in EU research.- Section 5: Aspects of Ethics and Data Management in healthy ageing digital services.- Chapter 18. Data treatment in complex studies in light of the GDPR rules. A critical analysis.- Chapter 19. Ethical, legal and societal issues of research and innovation in NESTORE.- Section 6: From research to action: what’s next?.- Chapter 20. Other advanced research initiatives in elderly care and fragility prevention.- Conclusion. Translating Active Ageing research into effective policies.This book describes the multidisciplinary approach needed to tackle better aging. Aging populations are one of the 21st century’s biggest challenges. National health systems are forced to adapt in order to provide adequate and affordable care. Innovation, driven by digital technology, is a key to improving quality of life and encouraging healthy living. Well-designed technology keeps people empowered, independent, and mobile; however, despite widespread adoption of ICT in day-to-day life, digital health technologies have yet to catch on. To this end, technology needs to be effective, usable, cheap, and designed to ensure the security of the managed data. In the era of mHealth, mobile technology, and social design, this book describes, in six sections, the collaboration of polytechnic know-how and social science and health sectors in the creation of a system for encouraging people to engage in healthy behavior and achieve a better quality of life.This book describes the multidisciplinary approach needed to tackle better aging. Aging populations are one of the 21st century’s biggest challenges. National health systems are forced to adapt in order to provide adequate and affordable care. Innovation, driven by digital technology, is a key to improving quality of life and encouraging healthy living. Well-designed technology keeps people empowered, independent, and mobile; however, despite widespread adoption of ICT in day-to-day life, digital health technologies have yet to catch on. To this end, technology needs to be effective, usable, cheap, and designed to ensure the security of the managed data. In the era of mHealth, mobile technology, and social design, this book describes, in six sections, the collaboration of polytechnic know-how and social science and health sectors in the creation of a system for encouraging people to engage in healthy behavior and achieve a better quality of life.Knowledge and technology for the benefit of a healthy agingOne of the most successful cases of co-designAn integrated smart approach to virtual coaching for better agingDr. Giuseppe Andreoni (M) earned the laurea degree in electronic engineering in 1993 and a Ph.D. in bio-engeneering in 1998. He is currently a full professor at the design Dept. of Politecnico di Milano. He also serves that department as the scientific coordinator of the TeDH—Technology and Design for Healthcare and Wellbeing Laboratory, which includes the Sensibilab (Biomedical Sensors and Systems Lab.) and of the LyPhE (Laboratory of Physical Ergonomics). He has a wealth of experience in the design and development of innovative products, systems, and services in the healthcare and ergonomics sectors, with specific know-how about integrating technologies and participatory design methodologies. His main research interests are: ergonomics, wearable sensors, design, rehabilitation and assistive technology. He is coauthor of 10 national/international patents and more than 250 publications (books, chapters, papers, and proceedings in international conferences). Giuseppe was the scientific coordinator of “PEGASO – Fit for Future”, a European project within the frame of the 7th Framework program, and he is currently the scientific coordinator of the “NESTORE” project within the frame of the H2020 Framework program.Ing. Cinzia Mabretti (F) has more than 20 years of experience in R&D project management. Having graduated with a degree in computer science engineering from Politecnico di Milano, she gained experience during her school years by participating in several artificial intelligence and robotics project, including Robocup 1998, Paris, for which she served as a member of the ART team, the Italian national team that developed a moderately-sized homemade robot football player. From 2003 to 2011, she was the senior project manager at Socrates Medical, leading the R&D team, and also participating in the projects FP-6 WEIRD (WiMax Extension to Isolated Research Data Networks) and FP-7 ISISEMD (Intelligent System for independent living and SElfcare of seniors withcognitive problems or Mild Dementia ). Since 2013, she has been a project manager at Fondazione Politecnico di Milano, where she manages several e-Health/IT funded projects. She is currently project manager of H2020 – PM15 project 769643 NESTORE (Novel Empowering Solutions and Technologies for Older people to Retain Everyday life activities). She is an independent expert involved in evaluation of the H2020, Eureka, and Lombardy Region projects.ProfessionalsProfessional Books (2)Standard (0)EBOP11642Biomedical and Life Sciences009783030726652Health SciencesAging PopulationInnovation and Technology ManagementHealth InformaticsHealth Promotion and Disease PreventionInteraction Design581000
93
Biomedical and Life Sciences978-3-031-26440-5BarchDeanna M. Barch; Jared W. YoungDeanna M. Barch, Washington University, Saint Louis, MO, USA; Jared W. Young, University of California San Diego, La Jolla, CA, USACognitive Functioning in Schizophrenia: Leveraging the RDoC FrameworkXII, 497 p. 70 illus.12023final149.9945.00160.4948.15129.9939.00169.9951.00Hard cover0Current Topics in Behavioral NeurosciencesVolumeBiomedical and Life SciencesContributed volumeBook0English497MBGRMMGSpringerSpringer International Publishing0Available2023-02-182023-02-182023-03-072023-03-071MATRICS – an update.- Cognitive [Computational] Neuroscience Test Reliability and Clinical Applications for Serious mental illness (CNTRaCS) Consortium: Progress and Future Directions.- Attention in Schizophrenia.- Perceptual Functioning.- Episodic Memory and Schizophrenia: From Characterization of Relational Memory Impairments to Neuroimaging Biomarkers.- Working Memory in People with Schizophrenia.- 'Targeting Frontal Gamma Activity with Neurofeedback to Improve Working Memory in Schizophrenia'.- Cognitive Dysfunction as a Risk Factor for Psychosis.- Environmental Risk Factors and Cognitive Outcomes in Psychosis: Pre-, Perinatal, and Early Life Adversity.- Developmental manipulation-induced changes in cognitive functioning.- Genetic underpinnings of cognitive dysfunction in schizophrenia.- Primate models of cognitive deficit re schizophrenia.- Olfactory cognitive deficits.- Medication/Anticholinergic burden impacting cognition in schizophrenia An Update on Treatment of Cognitive Impairment Associated with Schizophrenia.- Cannabis & cognition.- Sex/gender differences.- Neuroinflammation linked to cognition.This book highlights recent research investigating psychological and neural mechanisms contributing to dysfunctional cognition in people with schizophrenia. The work on cognition in schizophrenia from the past 20 years is highlighted, and emphasis throughout the book is placed on utilizing the Research Domain Criterion framework. Thus, the book also covers animals work relevant to schizophrenia that assesses behaviors utilizing the same framework, enabling mechanistic studies and highlighting potential biomarkers of function. The book also includes important areas of research in the field of cognitive function in schizophrenia that have received less attention, such as cognitive side-effects of current treatments and olfactory-based cognition. Altogether, the book provides a translational perspective of the most-up-to-date research on cognition in schizophrenia to-date, but with identification of novel directions for research initiatives.<div>
</div>		This book highlights recent research investigating psychological and neural mechanisms contributing to dysfunctional cognition in people with schizophrenia. The work on cognition in schizophrenia from the past 20 years is highlighted, and emphasis throughout the book is placed on utilizing the Research Domain Criterion framework. Thus, the book also covers animals work relevant to schizophrenia that assesses behaviors utilizing the same framework, enabling mechanistic studies and highlighting potential biomarkers of function. The book also includes important areas of research in the field of cognitive function in schizophrenia that have received less attention, such as cognitive side-effects of current treatments and olfactory-based cognition. Altogether, the book provides a translational perspective of the most-up-to-date research on cognition in schizophrenia to-date, but with identification of novel directions for research initiatives..Equips readers to handle the complexity of cognitive dysfunction in schizophreniaReviews key recent research revealing mechanisms and potential biomarkersOffers a translational perspective revealing approaches toward treatment developmentScienceProfessional Books (2)Science (SC)EBOP11642Biomedical and Life Sciences009783031264405Translational ResearchPreclinical ResearchPharmacologyGenetics ResearchClinical ResearchBiomarkers928000
94
Biomedical and Life Sciences978-3-031-26443-6BarchDeanna M. Barch; Jared W. YoungDeanna M. Barch, Washington University, Saint Louis, MO, USA; Jared W. Young, University of California San Diego, La Jolla, CA, USACognitive Functioning in Schizophrenia: Leveraging the RDoC FrameworkXII, 497 p. 70 illus.12023final149.9945.00160.4948.15129.9939.00169.9951.00Soft cover1Current Topics in Behavioral NeurosciencesVolumeBiomedical and Life SciencesContributed volumeBook0English497MBGRMMGSpringerSpringer International Publishing0Available2024-02-182023-02-252024-02-182024-02-181MATRICS – an update.- Cognitive [Computational] Neuroscience Test Reliability and Clinical Applications for Serious mental illness (CNTRaCS) Consortium: Progress and Future Directions.- Attention in Schizophrenia.- Perceptual Functioning.- Episodic Memory and Schizophrenia: From Characterization of Relational Memory Impairments to Neuroimaging Biomarkers.- Working Memory in People with Schizophrenia.- 'Targeting Frontal Gamma Activity with Neurofeedback to Improve Working Memory in Schizophrenia'.- Cognitive Dysfunction as a Risk Factor for Psychosis.- Environmental Risk Factors and Cognitive Outcomes in Psychosis: Pre-, Perinatal, and Early Life Adversity.- Developmental manipulation-induced changes in cognitive functioning.- Genetic underpinnings of cognitive dysfunction in schizophrenia.- Primate models of cognitive deficit re schizophrenia.- Olfactory cognitive deficits.- Medication/Anticholinergic burden impacting cognition in schizophrenia An Update on Treatment of Cognitive Impairment Associated with Schizophrenia.- Cannabis & cognition.- Sex/gender differences.- Neuroinflammation linked to cognition.This book highlights recent research investigating psychological and neural mechanisms contributing to dysfunctional cognition in people with schizophrenia. The work on cognition in schizophrenia from the past 20 years is highlighted, and emphasis throughout the book is placed on utilizing the Research Domain Criterion framework. Thus, the book also covers animals work relevant to schizophrenia that assesses behaviors utilizing the same framework, enabling mechanistic studies and highlighting potential biomarkers of function. The book also includes important areas of research in the field of cognitive function in schizophrenia that have received less attention, such as cognitive side-effects of current treatments and olfactory-based cognition. Altogether, the book provides a translational perspective of the most-up-to-date research on cognition in schizophrenia to-date, but with identification of novel directions for research initiatives.<div>
</div>		This book highlights recent research investigating psychological and neural mechanisms contributing to dysfunctional cognition in people with schizophrenia. The work on cognition in schizophrenia from the past 20 years is highlighted, and emphasis throughout the book is placed on utilizing the Research Domain Criterion framework. Thus, the book also covers animals work relevant to schizophrenia that assesses behaviors utilizing the same framework, enabling mechanistic studies and highlighting potential biomarkers of function. The book also includes important areas of research in the field of cognitive function in schizophrenia that have received less attention, such as cognitive side-effects of current treatments and olfactory-based cognition. Altogether, the book provides a translational perspective of the most-up-to-date research on cognition in schizophrenia to-date, but with identification of novel directions for research initiatives..Equips readers to handle the complexity of cognitive dysfunction in schizophreniaReviews key recent research revealing mechanisms and potential biomarkersOffers a translational perspective revealing approaches toward treatment developmentScienceProfessional Books (2)Science (SC)EBOP11642Biomedical and Life Sciences009783031264436Translational ResearchPreclinical ResearchPharmacologyGenetics ResearchClinical ResearchBiomarkers777000
95
Biomedical and Life Sciences978-3-030-64925-8BecklinKatie M. Becklin; Joy K. Ward; Danielle A. WayKatie M. Becklin, Syracuse University, Syracuse, NY, USA; Joy K. Ward, Case Western Reserve University, Cleveland, OH, USA; Danielle A. Way, University of Western Ontario, London, ON, CanadaPhotosynthesis, Respiration, and Climate ChangeXXXIII, 389 p. 63 illus., 46 illus. in color.12021final169.9951.00181.8954.57149.9945.00199.9960.00Hard cover0Advances in Photosynthesis and RespirationVolumeBiomedical and Life SciencesContributed volumeBook0English389PSTDRNSpringerSpringer International Publishing0Available2021-06-012021-06-012021-06-182021-06-181Part 1. Introduction.- 1. Leaf Carbon Flux Responses to Climate Change: Challenges and Opportunities (Danielle A. Way, Katie M. Becklin and Joy K. Ward).- Part 2. Leaf-level Responses to Climate Change.- 2. Stomatal Responses to Climate Change (Jim Stevens, Michele Faralli, Shellie Wall, John D. Stamford and Tracy Lawson).- 3. Mesophyll Conductance to CO2 Diffusion in a Climate Change Scenario: Effects of Elevated CO2 , Temperature, and Water Stress (Miquel Nadal, Marc Carriquí, and Jaume Flexas).- 4. Photosynthetic Acclimation to Temperature and CO2: The Role of Leaf Nitrogen (André G. Duarte, Mirindi E. Dusenge, Sarah McDonald, Kristyn Bennett, Karen Lemon, Julianne Radford and Danielle A. Way).- 5. Trichome Responses to Elevated Atmospheric CO2 of the Future (James M. Fischer and Joy K. Ward).- Part 3. Population- and Community-Level Responses of Photosynthesis and Respiration to Climate Change.- 6. Intraspecific Variation in Plant Responses to Atmospheric CO2, Temperature, and Water Availability (Michael J. Aspinwall, Thomas E. Juenger, Paul D. Rymer, and Dave T. Tissue).- 7. Tree Physiology and Intraspecific Responses to Extreme Events: Insights from the Most Extreme Heat Year in U.S. History (Jacob M. Carter, Timothy E. Burnette, and Joy K. Ward).- Part 4. Responses of Plants with Carbon-Concentrating Mechanisms to Climate Change.- 8. Terrestrial CO2 Concentrating Mechanisms in a High CO2 World (Rowan F. Sage and Matt Stata).- 9. The Outlook for C4 Crops in Future Climate Scenarios (Alex Watson-Laxowski and Oula Ghannoum).- 10. Climate Change Responses and Adaptations in Crassulacean Acid Metabolism (CAM) Plants (Paula N. Pereira, Nick A. Niechayev, Brittany B. Blair, and John C. Cushman).- Part 5. Engineering Photosynthesis for Climate Change.- 11. Engineering Photosynthetic CO2 Assimilation to Develop new Crop Varieties to Cope with Future Climate (Robert E. Sharwood and Benedict M. Long).- 12. With a Little Help from my Friends: The Central Role ofPhotorespiration and Related Metabolic Processes in the Acclimation and Adaptation of Plants to Oxygen and Low-CO2 Stress (Hermann Bauwe and Alisdair R. Fernie).
Changes in atmospheric carbon dioxide concentrations and global climate conditions have altered photosynthesis and plant respiration across both geologic and contemporary time scales. Understanding climate change effects on plant carbon dynamics is critical for predicting plant responses to future growing conditions. Furthermore, demand for biofuel, fibre and food production is rapidly increasing with the ever-expanding global human population, and our ability to meet these demands is exacerbated by climate change.This volume integrates physiological, ecological, and evolutionary perspectives on photosynthesis and respiration responses to climate change. We explore this topic in the context of modeling plant responses to climate, including physiological mechanisms that constrain carbon assimilation and the potential for plants to acclimate to rising carbon dioxide concentration, warming temperatures and drought. Additional chapters contrast climate change responses in naturaland agricultural ecosystems, where differences in climate sensitivity between different photosynthetic pathways can influence community and ecosystem processes. Evolutionary studies over past and current time scales provide further insight into evolutionary changes in photosynthetic traits, the emergence of novel plant strategies, and the potential for rapid evolutionary responses to future climate conditions. Finally, we discuss novel approaches to engineering photosynthesis and photorespiration to improve plant productivity for the future.The overall goals for this volume are to highlight recent advances in photosynthesis and respiration research, and to identify key challenges to understanding and scaling plant physiological responses to climate change. The integrated perspectives and broad scope of research make this volume an excellent resource for both students and researchers in many areas of plant science, including plant physiology, ecology, evolution, climate change,and biotechnology. For this volume, 37 experts contributed chapters that span modeling, empirical, and applied research on photosynthesis and respiration responses to climate change. Authors represent the following seven countries: Australia (6); Canada (9), England (5), Germany (2), Spain (3), and the United States (12).Changes in atmospheric carbon dioxide concentrations and global climate conditions have altered photosynthesis and plant respiration across both geologic and contemporary time scales. Understanding climate change effects on plant carbon dynamics is critical for predicting plant responses to future growing conditions. Furthermore, demand for biofuel, fibre and food production is rapidly increasing with the ever-expanding global human population, and our ability to meet these demands is exacerbated by climate change.This volume integrates physiological, ecological, and evolutionary perspectives on photosynthesis and respiration responses to climate change. We explore this topic in the context of modeling plant responses to climate, including physiological mechanisms that constrain carbon assimilation and the potential for plants to acclimate to rising carbon dioxide concentration, warming temperatures and drought. Additional chapters contrast climate change responses in naturaland agricultural ecosystems, where differences in climate sensitivity between different photosynthetic pathways can influence community and ecosystem processes. Evolutionary studies over past and current time scales provide further insight into evolutionary changes in photosynthetic traits, the emergence of novel plant strategies, and the potential for rapid evolutionary responses to future climate conditions. Finally, we discuss novel approaches to engineering photosynthesis and photorespiration to improve plant productivity for the future.The overall goals for this volume are to highlight recent advances in photosynthesis and respiration research, and to identify key challenges to understanding and scaling plant physiological responses to climate change. The integrated perspectives and broad scope of research make this volume an excellent resource for both students and researchers in many areas of plant science, including plant physiology, ecology, evolution, climate change,and biotechnology. For this volume, 37 experts contributed chapters that span modeling, empirical, and applied research on photosynthesis and respiration responses to climate change. Authors represent the following seven countries: Australia (6); Canada (9), England (5), Germany (2), Spain (3), and the United States (12).
Integrates physiological, ecological, and evolutionary perspectives on plant physiologyFocuses on plant responses to multiple global change drivers across paleoecological and current time scalesIncorporates chapters on bioengineering photosynthesis for the futureHighlights complementary scientific approaches from theoretical modelling to empirical studiesKatie M. Becklin: Katie M. Becklin obtained her Ph.D. from the University of Missouri in 2010, exploring the dynamics of plant-fungal symbioses across environmental gradients. Katie then joined Joy Ward’s lab at the University of Kansas for her postdoctoral research, focusing on plant physiological responses across a broad CO2 gradient, ranging from low levels experienced during the last glacial maximum to predicted future concentrations. During this time Katie was awarded an NIH IRACDA postdoctoral fellowship to further test the role of mycorrhizal fungi in mediating plant responses to CO2. In 2017, Katie joined the Biology Department at Syracuse University as an Assistant Professor. She has published multiple papers in prominent plant physiology and ecology journals, is a Review Editor for Global Change Biology and Frontiers in Forests and Global Change, and chaired the 2019 Gordon Research Seminar on CO2 Assimilation in Plants. Joy K. Ward: Joy K. Ward receivedher BS degree in biology from Penn State University, earned her masters and doctorate degrees at Duke University under Professor Boyd Strain, and held a post-doctoral position with Distinguished Professor James Ehleringer at the University of Utah. She was a long-term professor at the University of Kansas for 17 years prior to becoming dean at Case Western Reserve. She was the recipient of a Presidential Early Career Award for Scientists and Engineers (PECASE) from the White House in 2009, a CAREER award from the National Science Foundation, and the Kavli Foundation and National Academy of Sciences also named her a Kavli Fellow. She has served as U.S. chair and planning member for the National Academy’s Frontiers of Science in Saudi Arabia, Japan, Oman, Kuwait and has been a scientific delegate to Uzbekistan through the State Department. Joy is internationally recognized for her studies on how plants respond to changing atmospheric CO2 over geologic and contemporary time, and has provided novel insights into how plants respond to long-term environmental change since the last glacial period, as well as understanding how plants will respond to environments of the future.

Danielle A. Way: Danielle (Dani) Way obtained her BSc from the University of Toronto in 2002, her PhD at the same institution in Rowan Sage’s lab in 2008, and did her post-doctoral work at Duke University with Rob Jackson, focusing on how elevated CO2 altered photosynthesis and plant performance. In 2012, she joined the Department of Biology at the University of Western Ontario, where she was granted tenure in 2018; Dani has also been an Adjunct Assistant Professor at Duke University since 2012, and joined the Terrestrial Ecosystem Science & Technology research group at Brookhaven National Laboratory as a Joint Appointee in 2019. Dani has published nearly 70 papers focusing on how warming and rising atmospheric CO2 concentrations alter photosynthesis, respiration, growth and survival in plants, with a focus on high latitude tree species. She was elected to the College of the Royal Society of Canada in 2018 and was awarded the C.D. Nelson Award by the Canadian Society of Plant Biologists in 2019 for outstanding research in plant biology within 10 years of an independent position. She is the Reviews Editor for Global Change Biology, a Topic Editor for Plant, Cell & Environment, and worked from 2012-2020 as an Editor and Associate Editor-in-Chief for Tree Physiology.		ScienceProfessional Books (2)Science (SC)EBOP11642Biomedical and Life Sciences009783030649258Plant PhysiologyEnvironmental SciencesPlant EcologyEvolutionary BiologyComplex Systems982000
96
Biomedical and Life Sciences978-3-030-64928-9BecklinKatie M. Becklin; Joy K. Ward; Danielle A. WayKatie M. Becklin, Syracuse University, Syracuse, NY, USA; Joy K. Ward, Case Western Reserve University, Cleveland, OH, USA; Danielle A. Way, University of Western Ontario, London, ON, CanadaPhotosynthesis, Respiration, and Climate ChangeXXXIII, 389 p. 63 illus., 46 illus. in color.12021final169.9951.00181.8954.57149.9945.00199.9960.00Soft cover1Advances in Photosynthesis and RespirationVolumeBiomedical and Life SciencesContributed volumeBook0English389PSTDRNSpringerSpringer International Publishing0Available2022-06-022021-06-012022-06-012022-06-011Part 1. Introduction.- 1. Leaf Carbon Flux Responses to Climate Change: Challenges and Opportunities (Danielle A. Way, Katie M. Becklin and Joy K. Ward).- Part 2. Leaf-level Responses to Climate Change.- 2. Stomatal Responses to Climate Change (Jim Stevens, Michele Faralli, Shellie Wall, John D. Stamford and Tracy Lawson).- 3. Mesophyll Conductance to CO2 Diffusion in a Climate Change Scenario: Effects of Elevated CO2 , Temperature, and Water Stress (Miquel Nadal, Marc Carriquí, and Jaume Flexas).- 4. Photosynthetic Acclimation to Temperature and CO2: The Role of Leaf Nitrogen (André G. Duarte, Mirindi E. Dusenge, Sarah McDonald, Kristyn Bennett, Karen Lemon, Julianne Radford and Danielle A. Way).- 5. Trichome Responses to Elevated Atmospheric CO2 of the Future (James M. Fischer and Joy K. Ward).- Part 3. Population- and Community-Level Responses of Photosynthesis and Respiration to Climate Change.- 6. Intraspecific Variation in Plant Responses to Atmospheric CO2, Temperature, and Water Availability (Michael J. Aspinwall, Thomas E. Juenger, Paul D. Rymer, and Dave T. Tissue).- 7. Tree Physiology and Intraspecific Responses to Extreme Events: Insights from the Most Extreme Heat Year in U.S. History (Jacob M. Carter, Timothy E. Burnette, and Joy K. Ward).- Part 4. Responses of Plants with Carbon-Concentrating Mechanisms to Climate Change.- 8. Terrestrial CO2 Concentrating Mechanisms in a High CO2 World (Rowan F. Sage and Matt Stata).- 9. The Outlook for C4 Crops in Future Climate Scenarios (Alex Watson-Laxowski and Oula Ghannoum).- 10. Climate Change Responses and Adaptations in Crassulacean Acid Metabolism (CAM) Plants (Paula N. Pereira, Nick A. Niechayev, Brittany B. Blair, and John C. Cushman).- Part 5. Engineering Photosynthesis for Climate Change.- 11. Engineering Photosynthetic CO2 Assimilation to Develop new Crop Varieties to Cope with Future Climate (Robert E. Sharwood and Benedict M. Long).- 12. With a Little Help from my Friends: The Central Role ofPhotorespiration and Related Metabolic Processes in the Acclimation and Adaptation of Plants to Oxygen and Low-CO2 Stress (Hermann Bauwe and Alisdair R. Fernie).
Changes in atmospheric carbon dioxide concentrations and global climate conditions have altered photosynthesis and plant respiration across both geologic and contemporary time scales. Understanding climate change effects on plant carbon dynamics is critical for predicting plant responses to future growing conditions. Furthermore, demand for biofuel, fibre and food production is rapidly increasing with the ever-expanding global human population, and our ability to meet these demands is exacerbated by climate change.This volume integrates physiological, ecological, and evolutionary perspectives on photosynthesis and respiration responses to climate change. We explore this topic in the context of modeling plant responses to climate, including physiological mechanisms that constrain carbon assimilation and the potential for plants to acclimate to rising carbon dioxide concentration, warming temperatures and drought. Additional chapters contrast climate change responses in naturaland agricultural ecosystems, where differences in climate sensitivity between different photosynthetic pathways can influence community and ecosystem processes. Evolutionary studies over past and current time scales provide further insight into evolutionary changes in photosynthetic traits, the emergence of novel plant strategies, and the potential for rapid evolutionary responses to future climate conditions. Finally, we discuss novel approaches to engineering photosynthesis and photorespiration to improve plant productivity for the future.The overall goals for this volume are to highlight recent advances in photosynthesis and respiration research, and to identify key challenges to understanding and scaling plant physiological responses to climate change. The integrated perspectives and broad scope of research make this volume an excellent resource for both students and researchers in many areas of plant science, including plant physiology, ecology, evolution, climate change,and biotechnology. For this volume, 37 experts contributed chapters that span modeling, empirical, and applied research on photosynthesis and respiration responses to climate change. Authors represent the following seven countries: Australia (6); Canada (9), England (5), Germany (2), Spain (3), and the United States (12).Changes in atmospheric carbon dioxide concentrations and global climate conditions have altered photosynthesis and plant respiration across both geologic and contemporary time scales. Understanding climate change effects on plant carbon dynamics is critical for predicting plant responses to future growing conditions. Furthermore, demand for biofuel, fibre and food production is rapidly increasing with the ever-expanding global human population, and our ability to meet these demands is exacerbated by climate change.This volume integrates physiological, ecological, and evolutionary perspectives on photosynthesis and respiration responses to climate change. We explore this topic in the context of modeling plant responses to climate, including physiological mechanisms that constrain carbon assimilation and the potential for plants to acclimate to rising carbon dioxide concentration, warming temperatures and drought. Additional chapters contrast climate change responses in naturaland agricultural ecosystems, where differences in climate sensitivity between different photosynthetic pathways can influence community and ecosystem processes. Evolutionary studies over past and current time scales provide further insight into evolutionary changes in photosynthetic traits, the emergence of novel plant strategies, and the potential for rapid evolutionary responses to future climate conditions. Finally, we discuss novel approaches to engineering photosynthesis and photorespiration to improve plant productivity for the future.The overall goals for this volume are to highlight recent advances in photosynthesis and respiration research, and to identify key challenges to understanding and scaling plant physiological responses to climate change. The integrated perspectives and broad scope of research make this volume an excellent resource for both students and researchers in many areas of plant science, including plant physiology, ecology, evolution, climate change,and biotechnology. For this volume, 37 experts contributed chapters that span modeling, empirical, and applied research on photosynthesis and respiration responses to climate change. Authors represent the following seven countries: Australia (6); Canada (9), England (5), Germany (2), Spain (3), and the United States (12).
Integrates physiological, ecological, and evolutionary perspectives on plant physiologyFocuses on plant responses to multiple global change drivers across paleoecological and current time scalesIncorporates chapters on bioengineering photosynthesis for the futureHighlights complementary scientific approaches from theoretical modelling to empirical studiesKatie M. Becklin: Katie M. Becklin obtained her Ph.D. from the University of Missouri in 2010, exploring the dynamics of plant-fungal symbioses across environmental gradients. Katie then joined Joy Ward’s lab at the University of Kansas for her postdoctoral research, focusing on plant physiological responses across a broad CO2 gradient, ranging from low levels experienced during the last glacial maximum to predicted future concentrations. During this time Katie was awarded an NIH IRACDA postdoctoral fellowship to further test the role of mycorrhizal fungi in mediating plant responses to CO2. In 2017, Katie joined the Biology Department at Syracuse University as an Assistant Professor. She has published multiple papers in prominent plant physiology and ecology journals, is a Review Editor for Global Change Biology and Frontiers in Forests and Global Change, and chaired the 2019 Gordon Research Seminar on CO2 Assimilation in Plants. Joy K. Ward: Joy K. Ward receivedher BS degree in biology from Penn State University, earned her masters and doctorate degrees at Duke University under Professor Boyd Strain, and held a post-doctoral position with Distinguished Professor James Ehleringer at the University of Utah. She was a long-term professor at the University of Kansas for 17 years prior to becoming dean at Case Western Reserve. She was the recipient of a Presidential Early Career Award for Scientists and Engineers (PECASE) from the White House in 2009, a CAREER award from the National Science Foundation, and the Kavli Foundation and National Academy of Sciences also named her a Kavli Fellow. She has served as U.S. chair and planning member for the National Academy’s Frontiers of Science in Saudi Arabia, Japan, Oman, Kuwait and has been a scientific delegate to Uzbekistan through the State Department. Joy is internationally recognized for her studies on how plants respond to changing atmospheric CO2 over geologic and contemporary time, and has provided novel insights into how plants respond to long-term environmental change since the last glacial period, as well as understanding how plants will respond to environments of the future.

Danielle A. Way: Danielle (Dani) Way obtained her BSc from the University of Toronto in 2002, her PhD at the same institution in Rowan Sage’s lab in 2008, and did her post-doctoral work at Duke University with Rob Jackson, focusing on how elevated CO2 altered photosynthesis and plant performance. In 2012, she joined the Department of Biology at the University of Western Ontario, where she was granted tenure in 2018; Dani has also been an Adjunct Assistant Professor at Duke University since 2012, and joined the Terrestrial Ecosystem Science & Technology research group at Brookhaven National Laboratory as a Joint Appointee in 2019. Dani has published nearly 70 papers focusing on how warming and rising atmospheric CO2 concentrations alter photosynthesis, respiration, growth and survival in plants, with a focus on high latitude tree species. She was elected to the College of the Royal Society of Canada in 2018 and was awarded the C.D. Nelson Award by the Canadian Society of Plant Biologists in 2019 for outstanding research in plant biology within 10 years of an independent position. She is the Reviews Editor for Global Change Biology, a Topic Editor for Plant, Cell & Environment, and worked from 2012-2020 as an Editor and Associate Editor-in-Chief for Tree Physiology.		ScienceProfessional Books (2)Science (SC)EBOP11642Biomedical and Life Sciences009783030649289Plant PhysiologyEnvironmental SciencesPlant EcologyEvolutionary BiologyComplex Systems802000
97
Biomedical and Life Sciences978-3-031-11957-6BickelDavid R. BickelDavid R. Bickel, University of North Carolina at Greensboro, Greensboro, NC, USAPhylogenetic Trees and Molecular EvolutionA Hands-on Introduction with Uncertainty Quantification CorrectedXIII, 106 p. 21 illus., 14 illus. in color.12022final49.9915.0053.4916.0544.9913.5054.9916.50Soft cover0SpringerBriefs in Systems BiologyBiomedical and Life SciencesBrief/PivotBook0English106PSAJPSSpringerSpringer International Publishing0WorldwideAvailable2022-09-302022-09-302022-10-172022-10-171Introduction to phylogenetic trees.- A divergence time story: the rise and fall of the molecular clock.- Estimating phylogenetic trees.- Estimating divergence times.- Estimating common ancestors.- Testing theories of molecular evolution.- Recommendations for further reading.- Appendix A: Intermittent point processes.- Appendix B: Poisson processes with Lévy-stable substitution rates.This book serves as a brief introduction to phylogenetic trees and molecular evolution for biologists and biology students. It does so by presenting the main concepts in a variety of ways: first visually, then in a history, next in a dice game, and finally in simple equations.

The content is primarily designed to introduce upper-level undergraduate and graduate students of biology to phylogenetic tree reconstruction and the underlying models of molecular evolution. A unique feature also of interest to experienced researchers is the emphasis on simple ways to quantify the uncertainty in the results more fully than is possible with standard methods.		This book serves as a brief introduction to phylogenetic trees and molecular evolution for biologists and biology students. It does so by presenting the main concepts in a variety of ways: first visually, then in a history, next in a dice game, and finally in simple equations. The content is primarily designed to introduce upper-level undergraduate and graduate students of biology to phylogenetic tree reconstruction and the underlying models of molecular evolution. A unique feature also of interest to experienced researchers is the emphasis on simple ways to quantify the uncertainty in the results more fully than is possible with standard methods.
Jump-starts readers with a visual introduction to the main ideas of molecular phylogeneticsProvides competitive dice games to equip players with an intuitive grasp of evolutionary modelsFeatures hands-on exercises to foster and assess mastery of the material and to stimulate critical thinkingMethods and models of David R. Bickel have been published in Molecular Biology and Evolution and other journals specialized in molecular evolution and phylogenetics. He teaches an interactive course on the topic as an Associate Professor at the University of North Carolina at Greensboro.
StudentsProfessional Books (2)Standard (0)EBOP11642Biomedical and Life Sciences009783031119576PhylogeneticsGene Expression AnalysisBioinformatics197100
98
Biomedical and Life Sciences978-3-031-09942-7ChaudharyKamal Kishore Chaudhary; Mukesh Kumar MeghvansiKamal Kishore Chaudhary, Jaipur National University, Jaipur, India; Mukesh Kumar Meghvansi, Defence R&D Establishment, Gwalior, IndiaSustainable Management of Nematodes in Agriculture, Vol.1: Organic ManagementXI, 440 p. 51 illus.12022final149.9945.00160.4948.15129.9939.00169.9951.00Hard cover0Sustainability in Plant and Crop ProtectionVolumeBiomedical and Life SciencesContributed volumeBook0English440PSTPSTPSpringerSpringer International Publishing0Available2022-09-132022-09-132022-09-302022-09-301Part 1. Organic Management of Nematodes: Paradigms and Mechanisms.- 1. Biochemical Biopesticides for Phytonematode Sustainable Management: Status and Future Prospects (Thales Lima Rocha; Vera Lucia Perussi Polez; Lívia Cristina de Souza Viol; Reinaldo Rodrigues Pimentel, Danielle Biscaia; Jadir Borges Pinheiro).- 2. Organic Nematicides: A Green Technique and its Overview for the Nematode Disease Management (Faryad Khan, Mohammad Shariq, Mohd Asif, Taruba Ansari, Saba Fatima, Arshad Khan, Mohd Ikram, Mansoor Ahmad Siddiqui).- 3. Nematode Management Through Compost (Fisayo Yemisi Daramola, Samuel B. Orisajo and Omorefosa Osarenkhoe Osemwegie).- 4. Biochemical/Molecular Mechanisms Associated with Nematode Management Through Organic Amendments: A critical Review (John Fosu-Nyarko, Rhys G. R. Copeland, Sadia Iqbal, Michael G. K. Jones).- 5. Organic By-Products in the Suppression of Plant-Parasitic Nematodes (Alixelhe Pacheco Damascena, Marylia Gabriella Silva Costa, Júlio César Antunes Ferreira, Silvia Renata Siciliano Wilcken).- 6. Nematode Management by Humic Acid (Seenivasan Nagachandrabosea, Sankaranarayanan Chellappab, and Devrajan Kandasamya).- 7. Conventional and Organic Management as Divergent Drivers for Plant Parasitic Nematodes (PPNs) control (Kanika Khanna, Vandana Gautam, Dhriti Kapoor, Nandni Sharma, Pooja Sharma, Tamanna Bhardwaj, Puja Ohri, Renu Bhardwaj).- Part 2. Organic Management of Nematodes: Global Case studies and Success Stories.- 8. Plant Extracts and Their Effect on Plant-parasitic nematodes: Case Studies from Africa (Ebrahim Shokoohi).- 9. Organic Management of the Citrus, Pine and Related Nematodes (Reza Ghaderi, Manouchehr Hosseinvand).- 10. Organic Management of Rice Root-Knot Nematode Meloidogyne graminicola (Ziaul Haque and Mujeebur Rahman Khan).- 11. Strategies for the Organic Management of the Root-Knot Nematode (Meloidogyne spp.) in Grapevine Under Desert Conditions in the North Coast of Peru (César Augusto Murguía Reyes).- 12. OrganicFumigant Alternatives for Nematode Management in High-Value Crops in Florida (Johan Desaeger, Kaydene Williams, and Erin Rosskopf).- 13. The False Root-Knot Nematode Nacobbus aberrans and its Ecological Management (Edgar Villar-Luna, Olga Gómez-Rodríguez, Hernán Villar-Luna, Liliana Aguilar-Marcelino, Laith Khalil Tawfeeq Al-Ani, and Ernesto Fernández-Herrera).- 14. Plant Extracts, Sorghum and Crucifers Amendments and Pochonia chlamydosporia for the Management of Meloidodyne spp. and Nacobbus aberrans in Tomato and Chile Crops: the Mexican Experience (Ignacio Cid del Prado-Vera, Marco Antonio Magallanes-Tapia, Raúl Velasco-Azorsa, Arely Pérez-Espíndola).- 15. Non-Conventional Management of Plant-Parasitic Nematodes in Musaceas Crops (Donald Riascos–Ortiz, Ana Teresa Mosquera–Espinosa, Francia Varón De Agudelo, Claudio Marcelo Gonçalves De Oliveira, Jaime Eduardo Muñoz–Florez).- 16. Neem Cake Amendment Changes Soil Nematode Spatio-temporal Dynamics Across a Guava Orchard in the Brazilian Semiarid Region (Diego Arruda Huggins de Sá Leitão, Ana Karina dos Santos Oliveira, Douglas Barbosa Castro, Elvira Maria Régis Pedrosa).The present work covers many aspects of plant nematode management using organic strategies. These range from applications of latest understandings of fundamental concepts/mechanisms of nematode control, to modern tools and techniques used in efficacy evaluation. The Volume also includes some case studies/applied aspects of organic nematode pest management.

Chemical and physical control measures used for nematode management have their own implications. Against this backdrop, organic management of plant nematodes appears as a more rational and sustainable approach. However, concise information on the current topic is scarce. This book is a sincere effort to bridge this void as we aim to provide the most updated, critical and in-depth knowledge synthesized by many experts working in the field of plant nematology, worldwide.		The present work covers many aspects of plant nematode management using organic strategies. These range from applications of latest understandings of fundamental concepts/mechanisms of nematode control, to modern tools and techniques used in efficacy evaluation. The Volume also includes some case studies/applied aspects of organic nematode pest management.

Chemical and physical control measures used for nematode management have their own implications. Against this backdrop, organic management of plant nematodes appears as a more rational and sustainable approach. However, concise information on the current topic is scarce. This book is a sincere effort to bridge this void as we aim to provide the most updated, critical and in-depth knowledge synthesized by many experts working in the field of plant nematology, worldwide.		The book covers all aspects of organic management of plant nematodesChapters will be supplemented with ample illustrations and figuresLatest, critical and in-depth knowledge on the subject synthesized by global expertsDr. Kamal Kishore Chaudhary obtained his PhD while working on bacterial antagonist, Pasteuria penetrans against root-knot nematode Meloidogyne species at India’s premier research institute ICAR-CAZRI, Jodhpur. He served as Assistant Professor at Samara University, Samara (Ethiopia), and Hamelmalo Agricultural College, Keren (Eritrea). He also served as Associate Professor-Biotechnology at Mangalatayan University, India. He has more than 15 years of teaching and research experience. He is the member of Organization of Nematologists of Tropical America (ONTA), America. He is editor/reviewer for several international journals. He has several publications (research articles, review papers and book chapters) to his credit.<div>Dr Mukesh K Meghvansi earned his PhD in 2007 from MDS University, Ajmer (India) while working on biofertilizers under a multinational research project sponsored by the European Commission. For a stint, he served as lecturer at Bundelkhand University Jhansi (Uttar Pradesh) and then joined DRDO in July 2008 as a scientist 'C'. Since his joining, he was engaged in R & D on organic waste management and has contributed to popularizing the vermicomposting among armed forces and civil populace in border and forward areas of Northeast India. He has to his credit more than fifty research publications in various international and national journals. He has filed two patents, one design and one trademark in India. He is life member of Indian Botanical Society and annual member of several national/international professional bodies/societies. He is reviewer of many national international journals. He has authored/edited three more books including two with Springer International Publishing, Switzerland. He also holds an MBA degree with specialization in project management. Currently, he is working as Scientist 'E' at Bioprocess Technology Division, Defence R&D Establishment, Gwalior (Madhya Pradesh), India.</div>ScienceProfessional Books (2)Science (SC)EBOP11642Biomedical and Life Sciences009783031099427Plant SciencePlant PathologyAgriculture840000
99
Biomedical and Life Sciences978-3-031-09945-8ChaudharyKamal Kishore Chaudhary; Mukesh Kumar MeghvansiKamal Kishore Chaudhary, Jaipur National University, Jaipur, India; Mukesh Kumar Meghvansi, Defence R&D Establishment, Gwalior, IndiaSustainable Management of Nematodes in Agriculture, Vol.1: Organic ManagementXI, 440 p. 51 illus.12022final149.9945.00160.4948.15129.9939.00169.9951.00Soft cover1Sustainability in Plant and Crop ProtectionVolumeBiomedical and Life SciencesContributed volumeBook0English440PSTPSTPSpringerSpringer International Publishing0Available2023-09-142022-09-132023-09-132023-09-131Part 1. Organic Management of Nematodes: Paradigms and Mechanisms.- 1. Biochemical Biopesticides for Phytonematode Sustainable Management: Status and Future Prospects (Thales Lima Rocha; Vera Lucia Perussi Polez; Lívia Cristina de Souza Viol; Reinaldo Rodrigues Pimentel, Danielle Biscaia; Jadir Borges Pinheiro).- 2. Organic Nematicides: A Green Technique and its Overview for the Nematode Disease Management (Faryad Khan, Mohammad Shariq, Mohd Asif, Taruba Ansari, Saba Fatima, Arshad Khan, Mohd Ikram, Mansoor Ahmad Siddiqui).- 3. Nematode Management Through Compost (Fisayo Yemisi Daramola, Samuel B. Orisajo and Omorefosa Osarenkhoe Osemwegie).- 4. Biochemical/Molecular Mechanisms Associated with Nematode Management Through Organic Amendments: A critical Review (John Fosu-Nyarko, Rhys G. R. Copeland, Sadia Iqbal, Michael G. K. Jones).- 5. Organic By-Products in the Suppression of Plant-Parasitic Nematodes (Alixelhe Pacheco Damascena, Marylia Gabriella Silva Costa, Júlio César Antunes Ferreira, Silvia Renata Siciliano Wilcken).- 6. Nematode Management by Humic Acid (Seenivasan Nagachandrabosea, Sankaranarayanan Chellappab, and Devrajan Kandasamya).- 7. Conventional and Organic Management as Divergent Drivers for Plant Parasitic Nematodes (PPNs) control (Kanika Khanna, Vandana Gautam, Dhriti Kapoor, Nandni Sharma, Pooja Sharma, Tamanna Bhardwaj, Puja Ohri, Renu Bhardwaj).- Part 2. Organic Management of Nematodes: Global Case studies and Success Stories.- 8. Plant Extracts and Their Effect on Plant-parasitic nematodes: Case Studies from Africa (Ebrahim Shokoohi).- 9. Organic Management of the Citrus, Pine and Related Nematodes (Reza Ghaderi, Manouchehr Hosseinvand).- 10. Organic Management of Rice Root-Knot Nematode Meloidogyne graminicola (Ziaul Haque and Mujeebur Rahman Khan).- 11. Strategies for the Organic Management of the Root-Knot Nematode (Meloidogyne spp.) in Grapevine Under Desert Conditions in the North Coast of Peru (César Augusto Murguía Reyes).- 12. OrganicFumigant Alternatives for Nematode Management in High-Value Crops in Florida (Johan Desaeger, Kaydene Williams, and Erin Rosskopf).- 13. The False Root-Knot Nematode Nacobbus aberrans and its Ecological Management (Edgar Villar-Luna, Olga Gómez-Rodríguez, Hernán Villar-Luna, Liliana Aguilar-Marcelino, Laith Khalil Tawfeeq Al-Ani, and Ernesto Fernández-Herrera).- 14. Plant Extracts, Sorghum and Crucifers Amendments and Pochonia chlamydosporia for the Management of Meloidodyne spp. and Nacobbus aberrans in Tomato and Chile Crops: the Mexican Experience (Ignacio Cid del Prado-Vera, Marco Antonio Magallanes-Tapia, Raúl Velasco-Azorsa, Arely Pérez-Espíndola).- 15. Non-Conventional Management of Plant-Parasitic Nematodes in Musaceas Crops (Donald Riascos–Ortiz, Ana Teresa Mosquera–Espinosa, Francia Varón De Agudelo, Claudio Marcelo Gonçalves De Oliveira, Jaime Eduardo Muñoz–Florez).- 16. Neem Cake Amendment Changes Soil Nematode Spatio-temporal Dynamics Across a Guava Orchard in the Brazilian Semiarid Region (Diego Arruda Huggins de Sá Leitão, Ana Karina dos Santos Oliveira, Douglas Barbosa Castro, Elvira Maria Régis Pedrosa).The present work covers many aspects of plant nematode management using organic strategies. These range from applications of latest understandings of fundamental concepts/mechanisms of nematode control, to modern tools and techniques used in efficacy evaluation. The Volume also includes some case studies/applied aspects of organic nematode pest management.

Chemical and physical control measures used for nematode management have their own implications. Against this backdrop, organic management of plant nematodes appears as a more rational and sustainable approach. However, concise information on the current topic is scarce. This book is a sincere effort to bridge this void as we aim to provide the most updated, critical and in-depth knowledge synthesized by many experts working in the field of plant nematology, worldwide.		The present work covers many aspects of plant nematode management using organic strategies. These range from applications of latest understandings of fundamental concepts/mechanisms of nematode control, to modern tools and techniques used in efficacy evaluation. The Volume also includes some case studies/applied aspects of organic nematode pest management.

Chemical and physical control measures used for nematode management have their own implications. Against this backdrop, organic management of plant nematodes appears as a more rational and sustainable approach. However, concise information on the current topic is scarce. This book is a sincere effort to bridge this void as we aim to provide the most updated, critical and in-depth knowledge synthesized by many experts working in the field of plant nematology, worldwide.		The book covers all aspects of organic management of plant nematodesChapters will be supplemented with ample illustrations and figuresLatest, critical and in-depth knowledge on the subject synthesized by global expertsDr. Kamal Kishore Chaudhary obtained his PhD while working on bacterial antagonist, Pasteuria penetrans against root-knot nematode Meloidogyne species at India’s premier research institute ICAR-CAZRI, Jodhpur. He served as Assistant Professor at Samara University, Samara (Ethiopia), and Hamelmalo Agricultural College, Keren (Eritrea). He also served as Associate Professor-Biotechnology at Mangalatayan University, India. He has more than 15 years of teaching and research experience. He is the member of Organization of Nematologists of Tropical America (ONTA), America. He is editor/reviewer for several international journals. He has several publications (research articles, review papers and book chapters) to his credit.<div>Dr Mukesh K Meghvansi earned his PhD in 2007 from MDS University, Ajmer (India) while working on biofertilizers under a multinational research project sponsored by the European Commission. For a stint, he served as lecturer at Bundelkhand University Jhansi (Uttar Pradesh) and then joined DRDO in July 2008 as a scientist 'C'. Since his joining, he was engaged in R & D on organic waste management and has contributed to popularizing the vermicomposting among armed forces and civil populace in border and forward areas of Northeast India. He has to his credit more than fifty research publications in various international and national journals. He has filed two patents, one design and one trademark in India. He is life member of Indian Botanical Society and annual member of several national/international professional bodies/societies. He is reviewer of many national international journals. He has authored/edited three more books including two with Springer International Publishing, Switzerland. He also holds an MBA degree with specialization in project management. Currently, he is working as Scientist 'E' at Bioprocess Technology Division, Defence R&D Establishment, Gwalior (Madhya Pradesh), India.</div>ScienceProfessional Books (2)Science (SC)EBOP11642Biomedical and Life Sciences009783031099458Plant SciencePlant PathologyAgriculture688000
100
Biomedical and Life Sciences978-981-19-3325-7Chibueze IzahSylvester Chibueze IzahSylvester Chibueze Izah, Bayelsa Medical University, Yenagoa, Bayelsa State, NigeriaBiodiversity in Africa: Potentials, Threats and ConservationXIV, 626 p. 1 illus.12022final249.9975.00267.4980.25219.9966.00279.9984.00Hard cover0Sustainable Development and BiodiversityVolumeBiomedical and Life SciencesContributed volumeBook0English626RNCBPSAFSpringerSpringer Nature Singapore1Available2022-08-282022-08-272022-09-142022-09-1411. An Overview of the potentials, threats, and conservation of biodiversity in Africa.- 2. Industrial Applications of Biodiversity Potentials in Africa.- 3. Botanical Gardens: A Reliable Tool for Documenting Sustainability Patterns in Vegetative Species.- 4. Food security: a pathway towards improved nutrition and biodiversity conservation.- 5. Benefits and threats of biodiversity conservation in Stubbs Creek Forest Reserve, Nigeria.- 6. Therapeutic Potentials of Wildlife Resources and Options for Conservation.- 7. Threats to African Arthropods and their Biodiversity Potentials on Food Security, Environmental Health, Criminal Investigation.- 8. Leaving no one behind: Impact of Soil Pollution on Biodiversity in the Global South - A Global Call For Action.- 9. Impacts of Chemicals Used in Agricultural Practices on Soil Microorganisms and Vegetation.- 10. Advantages and potential threats of agrochemicals on biodiversity conservation.- 11. Fish production and biodiversity conservation; an interplay for life sustenance.- 12. Impact of pharmaceutical compounds on the microbial ecology of surface water resources.- 13. Effects of Water Pollution on Biodiversity along the Coastal Regions.- 14. Impacts of Climate Change on Aquatic Biodiversity In Africa.- 15. Anthropogenic Restructuring of Fiddler Crabs (Ulca tangeri) Communities: A Solid Wastes Perspective.- 16. Aquatic biodiversity loss: Impacts of pollution and anthropogenic activities and strategies for conservation.- 17. Traditional Methods of Plant Conservation for Sustainable Utilization and Development.- 18. The Challenges and Conservation Strategies of Biodiversity: The role of Government and Non-Governmental Organization for Action and Results on the Ground.- 19. “Let Them Eat Their Declarations”: Interrogating Natural Resource-Rich States’ Inertia Toward Biodiversity Conservation Treaties in sub-Saharan Africa.- 20. Sacred Groves in the Global South: A Panacea for Sustainable Biodiversity Conservation.- 21. Forest conservation strategies in Africa: historical perspective, status and sustainable avenues for progress.- 22. Factors militating against biodiversity conservation in the Niger Delta, Nigeria: the way out.- 23. Challenges of biodiversity conservation in Africa: A case study of Sierra Leone.This edited work brings out a comprehensive collection of information on Potentials, Threats and Conservation of Biodiversity in Africa. The main focus of this book is to address the sustainability of Biodiversity of Africa.<div>
</div><div>Biodiversity are organisms that typically have life and possess the characteristics of living things. The biodiversity is being affected by human activities as well as natural effects. This in turn is affecting the uses of biodiversity which are mainly food and medicine. Therefore it will be useful to point possible means of conserving biodiversity of African so as to enhance the sustainability of their uses especially in Africa. </div><div>
</div><div>This book is of interest and useful to biodiversity experts, policy makers, conservationists and industries interested in biodiversity conservation of native flora and fauna in the area. It will also be useful to environmental and agricultural scientists, foresters, horticulturists, ecologists, and valuable source of reference to the relevant researchers and students (undergraduate and Post graduate) in the region. </div>		This edited work brings out a comprehensive collection of information on Potentials, Threats and Conservation of Biodiversity in Africa. The main focus of this book is to address the sustainability of Biodiversity of Africa.<div>
</div><div>Biodiversity are organisms that typically have life and possess the characteristics of living things. The biodiversity is being affected by human activities as well as natural effects. This in turn is affecting the uses of biodiversity which are mainly food and medicine. Therefore it will be useful to point possible means of conserving biodiversity of African so as to enhance the sustainability of their uses especially in Africa. </div><div>
</div><div>This book is of interest and useful to biodiversity experts, policy makers, conservationists and industries interested in biodiversity conservation of native flora and fauna in the area. It will also be useful to environmental and agricultural scientists, foresters, horticulturists, ecologists, and valuable source of reference to the relevant researchers and students (undergraduate and Post graduate) in the region. </div><div>
</div>		Provides an overview of the ecological status of biodiversity in AfricaCovers the latest evidence-based approach on the threats to biodiversity in AfricaProvides strategies to conserve biodiversityDr. Sylvester Izah<div>Department of Microbiology, Bayelsa Medical University </div><div>Imgbi Road, Yenagoa, Bayelsa State, Nigeria</div><div>
</div>		ScienceProfessional Books (2)Science (SC)EBOP11642Biomedical and Life Sciences009789811933257BiodiversityEcologyTerrestial Ecology1118000